Storage and Settling Tanks (SSTR) Revamp: ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD

ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD
STORAGE AND JOB

SPECIFICATION
SETTLING TANKS AND
COORDINATION
(SSTR) REVAMP PROCEDURE
This document is the Job Specification which forms the technical basis for the
proposed contract. It details what work the contractor is requested to perform,
the schedule for that work and how the contractor will communicate and interact
with the Project Team during the life of the contract.
Onshore Program Construction & Installation Contract (OPCIC) Enabling Agreement
Tender Number – 00000144

Table Of Content
Table of Contents
JOB SPECIFICATION.................................................................................................................0
STORAGE AND SETTLING TANKS REVAMP {SSTR} ...........................................................0
SECTION A: INTRODUCTION TO JOB SPECIFICATION......................................................0
SECTION B: DEFINITIONS.........................................................................................................3
SECTION C: PROJECT DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................8
A. OVERVIEW............................................................................................................................9
2. CLIMATIC CONDITIONS.....................................................................................................9
3. DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS AND FACILITIES (CRUDE & CONDENSATE

STORAGE TANKS).......................................................................................................................9
D. WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE................................................................................17
SECTION D: SCOPE OF WORK..........................................................................................................18
SECTION D1: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK CLEANING...........................................................................21
A. INTRODUCTION.......................................................................................................................22
B. REFERENCES............................................................................................................................23
C. QIT/ BRT STORAGE AND SETTLING TANKS SCOPE AND DATA..................................................24
D. JOB PROCESS...........................................................................................................................25
4.1 PROJECT CONTACT DETAILS..............................................................................................25

4.2 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK................................................................................................25
4.3 MOBILIZATION AND SITE SETUP.........................................................................................27
4.4 SAFETY REQUIREMENTS INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE FOLLOWING:.....................27
4.5 PRE-JOB PLANNING CHECKS..............................................................................................28
5 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR...........................................................29
6 SPECIFIC RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR............................................................30
Revision 1 Page 1 of 407 March 2022


Table Of Content
ATTENDANT.....................................................................................................................................32
ENTRANTS........................................................................................................................................32
RESCUER...........................................................................................................................................32
7 COMPANY’S RESPONSIBILITIES:....................................................................................40
8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK.......................................................41
9 PROCEDURES/DRAWINGS TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR.............................42
A COMPENSATION.................................................................................................................43
A.4 ROOF DECK CLEANING......................................................................................................44
A.8 DECONTAMINATION & DEMOBILIZATION OF TOOLS & EQUIPMENT ..............46
SECTION D2: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK REVAMP.............................................................................49
A. SCOPE OF WORK:..............................................................................................................50
A.1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK (FLOATING ROOF TANK)........................................................50

A.2 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK (CONE ROOF TANK)...............................................................50
B. DETAILED WORKSCOPE:...........................................................................................................53
1. PREPARATORY WORKS....................................................................................................53
1.1 MOBILIZATION:..................................................................................................................53
1.2 MOBILIZATION FROM ONE TANK SITE TO ANOTHER WITHIN SAME TERMINAL:.................53
1.3 DEMOBILIZATION:..............................................................................................................53
1.4 INSTALL FENCING:..............................................................................................................53
1.5 INSTALL FIRE SCREEN:.......................................................................................................53
1.6 LEAK TESTING:...................................................................................................................54
1.7 CLEAN AND GAS FREE FLOATING ROOF PONTOONS:..........................................................54
1.8 FLOATING ROOF STABILIZATION:.......................................................................................54
1.9 TANK INSPECTION:.............................................................................................................54
1.10 VACUUM BOX TESTING:....................................................................................................55
2 ROOF WORKS.......................................................................................................................56
2.1 CONE ROOF DEMOLITION AND NEW ROOF INSTALLATION.................................................56

2.2 DEMOLITION OF EXISTING SINGLE DECK FLOATING ROOF AND INSTALLATION OF NEW
DOUBLE DECK ROOF...................................................................................................................56
2.3 DEMOLITION WORK............................................................................................................56
2.3.1 REMOVAL OF ROOF PLATES/RAFTERS AND OTHER STRUCTURAL MEMBERS IN CONE AND
FLOATING ROOF TANKS AS DIRECTED BY COMPANY.......................................................................56


Table Of Content
2.3.2 REMOVAL OF ROOF PENETRATIONS (WHEN ENTIRE ROOF IS NOT BEING DEMOLISHED)
INCLUDING ALL REINFORCING PAD PLATES ETC...................................................................................56
2.4 ROOF PLATE AND ROOF STRUCTURE INSTALLATION..........................................................56
2.4.1 SUPPLY, FABRICATE AND INSTALL NEW ROOF PLATES/STRUCTURAL SECTIONS PER API
650/653................................................................................................................................................56
2.4.2 ROOF APPURTENANCES, ACCESSORIES & STRUCTURES..........................................................57
2.5 BLASTING AND COATING OF ROOF......................................................................................58
2.6 FLOATING ROOF SEAL:.......................................................................................................59
3 SHELL WORKS.....................................................................................................................60
3.1 REMOVE AND REPLACE SHELL PLATES, INSERT PLATES, DOOR SHEETS OR WIND GIRDER
60
3.1.1 REMOVE AND REPLACE SHELL PLATES...................................................................................60
3.1.2 REMOVE AND REPLACE WIND GIRDER...................................................................................60
3.1.3 REMOVE AND REPLACE COMPLETE SHELL COURSE................................................................60
3.1.4 REMOVE SHELL ATTACHMENT:...............................................................................................60
3.2 BLASTING AND COATING OF SHELL (EXTERNAL)................................................................60
3.3 BLASTING AND COATING OF SHELL (INTERNAL) TOP 1 METER BAND.................................61
3.4 MANWAYS AND NOZZLES....................................................................................................61
4 BOTTOM WORKS.................................................................................................................62
4.1 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL WORK:..................................................................................62

4.2 INSTALL TANK BOTTOM PLATES:........................................................................................62
4.3 BLASTING AND COATING OF TANKS’ INTERNAL SURFACES:...............................................62
4.4 SUPPLY AND INSTALL JOINT SEALANT AT CHIME:..............................................................62
4.5 TANK BOTTOM BED LINING INSTALLATION:......................................................................62
5 PIPE WORKS.........................................................................................................................63
5.1 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL WORKS.................................................................................63

5.1.1 REMOVAL OF PIPING:............................................................................................................63
5.1.2 REMOVAL OF VALVES.............................................................................................................63
5.2 PIPING INSTALLATION WORKS:...........................................................................................63
5.2.1 INSTALLATION OF PIPING:.......................................................................................................63
5.2.2 INSTALL PIPE FITTINGS:..........................................................................................................63
5.2.3 INSTALL FLANGED JOINTS:......................................................................................................64
5.2.4 HANDLING AND INSTALLATION OF MPN ISSUE VALVES.........................................................64
5.3 INSTALL INLET SPREADER PIPE IN CONE ROOF TANK:......................................................64
5.4 INSTALL INLET SPREADER PIPE IN FLOATING ROOF TANK:...............................................64
5.5 INSTALL FLOATING SUCTION SYSTEM:...............................................................................64
5.6 INSTALL STAINLESS STEEL PIPING:....................................................................................65
5.7 INSTALL VORTEX BREAKER:...............................................................................................65
5.8 INSTALL PIPE SUPPORTS:....................................................................................................65
5.8.1 STRUCTURAL STEEL SUPPORTS:..............................................................................................65
5.8.2 CONCRETE SLEEPER SUPPORTS:..............................................................................................65
5.9 PIPELINE / EQUIPMENT COATING:......................................................................................65


Table Of Content
6 FOAM SYSTEM UPGRADE:................................................................................................66
7 ANCILLARY WORK.............................................................................................................67
7.1 REMOVE MIXERS................................................................................................................67

7.2 REMOVE AND REPLACE.......................................................................................................67
7.3 INSTALL NEW STEEL PLATFORMS / WALKWAYS:...............................................................67
7.4 INSTALL 30” MANWAY COVERS:........................................................................................67
7.5 REMOVE AND REPLACE RGA IN FLOATING ROOF:.............................................................67
7.6 REMOVE AND REPLACE DISSIPATION ARRAY SYSTEM:.......................................................68
7.7 INSTALL DEWATERING SYSTEM:.........................................................................................68
7.8 INSTALL NEW CONTROL PANEL:........................................................................................68
7.9 INSTALL NEW INTERFACE PANEL:......................................................................................68
7.10 REMOVE AND INSTALL TANK GAUGING SYSTEM:.............................................................68
7.11 SUPPLY AND INSTALL POWER / INSTRUMENT CABLES:.....................................................68
7.12 SUPPLY AND INSTALL FIBRE OPTIC CABLES:....................................................................69
SUPPLY AND INSTALL FIBER OPTIC CABLE, SINGLE MODE, 8 STRANDS MINIMUM,
INCLUDING PATCH PANELS...................................................................................................69
8 WELD REPAIR:.....................................................................................................................69
9 TESTING:...............................................................................................................................70
9.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST:...........................................................................................................70

9.2 FLOATING ROOF TANKS ROOF FLOATATION TEST:............................................................70
10 TANKS RECALIBRATION.................................................................................................71
10.1 TANK CALIBRATION - OPTION I (OPTION SHALL BE DETERMINED BY COMPANY).......71

10.2 TANK CALIBRATION – OPTION II (OPTION TO BE DETERMINED BY COMPANY)..........71
11 DESIGN ENGINEERING AND DOCUMENT & DATA SUBMISSION AND

HANDOVER
REQUIREMENTS……………………………………………………………………………………...
72
12 TANK JACKING
UP………………………………………………………………………...72
13 DESCALING OF INSTALLED
PIPING……………………………………………………...72
14 APPENDICES.......................................................................................................................73
SECTION E: SCHEDULE BASIS...........................................................................................................74


Table Of Content
A. PURPOSE...............................................................................................................................75
B. DEFINITIONS.........................................................................................................................75
C. COMPANY PLAN...................................................................................................................76
D. SCHEDULE MILESTONES.......................................................................................................76
E. CONTRACT CONTROL SCHEDULE..........................................................................................76
F. SCHEDULE CONTROL.............................................................................................................77
APPENDIX 1.................................................................................................................................79
COMPANY PLAN........................................................................................................................79
APPENDIX 1.................................................................................................................................80
APPENDIX 2.................................................................................................................................81
SCHEDULE MILESTONES.........................................................................................................81
APPENDIX 3.................................................................................................................................84
CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL SCHEDULE...............................................................................84
SECTION F: COORDINATION PROCEDURE.......................................................................................86
PREFACE......................................................................................................................................87
1. INTRODUCTION......................................................................................................................88
1.1 COMPANY DUTIES...................................................................................................................88
1.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES............................................................................................................88
1.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS..........................................................................................89
1.4 REPORTS.....................................................................................................................................97
2. ORGANIZATION AND STAFFING.............................................................................................98
2.1 COMPANY DUTIES...................................................................................................................98
2.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES............................................................................................................98
2.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS..........................................................................................99
2.4 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................100
3. ADMINISTRATION................................................................................................................101
3.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................101
3.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES..........................................................................................................101
3.3 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................108
4. INFORMATION MANAGEMENT.............................................................................................112
4.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................112
4.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS........................................................................................116
4.4 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................117
5. INTERFACE MANAGEMENT..................................................................................................118
5.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................118


Table Of Content
5.4 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................120
6. ENGINEERING AND TECHNICAL DOCUMENTATION..............................................................121
6.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................121
6.2 CONTRACTOR’S DUTIES.......................................................................................................121
6.4 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................135
7. PROCUREMENT....................................................................................................................139
7.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................139
7.4 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................158
8. CONSTRUCTION, FABRICATION, AND WORK SITE OPERATIONS.......................................161
8.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................161
8.3 FABRICATION............................................................................................................................163
8.5 ABANDONMENTS, DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION................................................170
8.6 REPORTS...................................................................................................................................170
9. SYSTEMS COMPLETION.......................................................................................................173
9.1 COMPANY DUTIES.................................................................................................................173
9.3. SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS....................................................................................177
9.3.1. SYSTEMS COMPLETION PLAN...............................................................................................177
9.4 REPORTS...........................................................................................................................182
9.4.1 CLOSEOUT REPORT...............................................................................................................182
10. LOGISTICS.......................................................................................................................183
10.1 COMPANY DUTIES........................................................................................................183

10.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES................................................................................................183
10.2.1 LOGISTICS ASSESSMENTS....................................................................................................183
10.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS...............................................................................183
10.3.1 LOGISTICS MANAGEMENT PLAN.........................................................................................183
10.4 REPORTS.........................................................................................................................184
11. COST CONTROL AND ESTIMATING....................................................................................185
11.1 COMPANY DUTIES........................................................................................................185
11.2. CONTRACTOR DUTIES...............................................................................................185
11.2.1 COST CONTROL ESTIMATE..................................................................................................186
11.2.2 COST ANALYSIS..................................................................................................................187
11.3 REPORTS.........................................................................................................................188
11.3.1 MONTHLY COST REPORT....................................................................................................188
11.3.2 FINAL COST REPORT...........................................................................................................188
12. SCHEDULE MANAGEMENT.................................................................................................190
12.1 COMPANY DUTIES........................................................................................................190
12.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES........................................................................................................190
12.2.1 GENERAL................................................................................................................................190
12.2.2 ACCESS...................................................................................................................................190
12.2.3 CONTRACTOR SCHEDULE BASIS MEMORANDUM........................................................................191
12.2.4 CORRECTIVE ACTIONS................................................................................................................191
12.2.5 SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT..........................................................................................................192


Table Of Content
12.2.6 CONTRACT CONTROL SCHEDULE...............................................................................................194

12.2.7 CONTRACTOR'S DETAIL SCHEDULE...........................................................................................194
12.2.8 PROGRESS MEASUREMENT.........................................................................................................196
12.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS.........................................................................................198
12.3.1 SCHEDULE CONTROL SYSTEM......................................................................................................198
12.3.2 SCHEDULE DEVELOPMENT AND CONTROL PLAN.............................................................................198
12.3.3 90-DAY PLAN..........................................................................................................................199
12.4 REPORTS.........................................................................................................................200
12.4.1 MONTHLY REPORTING ACTIVITIES.....................................................................................200
12.4.2 WEEKLY REPORTS.....................................................................................................................202
13. CHANGE MANAGEMENT....................................................................................................203
13.1 COMPANY DUTIES..............................................................................................................204
13.2 CONTRACTOR DUTIES................................................................................................204
13.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS.........................................................................................204
13.3.1 CHANGE MANAGEMENT PLAN....................................................................................................204
13.3.2 CHANGE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM.................................................................................................204
13.2 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................209
14. QUALITY...........................................................................................................................210
14.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................210
14.3 SYSTEMS, PROCEDURES, AND PLANS.....................................................................................214
14.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................217
15. RISK MANAGEMENT AND LOSS PREVENTION....................................................................219
15.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................219
15.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................232
16. SAFETY..............................................................................................................................233
16.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................233
16.4. CELL PHONE USAGE............................................................................................................272
16.5 WORK SITE SAFETY PLAN IMPLEMENTATION STRATEGIES.................................................272
16.6 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................273
17. WORK SITE SECURITY AND EMERGENCY RESPONSE......................................................274
17.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................274
18.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................278
18 MEDICINE AND OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH...........................................................................279
18.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................279
18.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................281
19. ENVIRONMENT, REGULATORY, AND SOCIOECONOMIC......................................................283
19.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................283
19.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................294
20. NIGERIAN CONTENT..........................................................................................................300


Table Of Content
20.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMPANY AND CONTRACTOR......................................................300

20.2 OWNERSHIP STRUCTURE........................................................................................................301
21. COMMUNITY RELATIONS AND DEVELOPMENT..................................................................302
21.1 OVERALL STRATEGY..............................................................................................................302
PRE-MOBILIZATION MEETING AND REVIEW OF PROJECT’S COMMUNITY ACTION PLAN WITH COMPANY PUBLIC
AFFAIRS GROUP.....................................................................................................................................302
COMMUNICATION WITH HOST COMMUNITY, AUTHORITIES / HOMAGE............................................................302
COMMUNITY LIAISON OFFICER/COMMUNITY INTERFACE COORDINATOR...........................................................303
PRO-ACTIVE RESOLUTION OF DISPUTES/MISUNDERSTANDING........................................................................303
COMPENSATION AND WAGES...................................................................................................................304
SUMMARY OF PROJECT SCOPE / DURATION..........................................................................................304
CONTACT OFFICE IN THE COMMUNITY.......................................................................................................305
USE OF LOCAL LABOUR / OTHER EMPLOYMENT MATTERS.............................................................................305
DEFINITION OF NON-SKILLED, SKILLED LABOUR AND PROFESSIONALS:.........................................................305
EMPLOYMENT OF NON SKILLED, SKILLED LABOUR AND PROFESSIONALS............................................................306
USE OF SUBCONTRACTORS.......................................................................................................................306
COMMUNITY ASSISTANCE PROJECTS (CAP).................................................................................................307
GIFT....................................................................................................................................................307
LOCAL TAXES AND LEVIES........................................................................................................................307
MONITORING AND REPORTING.................................................................................................................307
LIABILITY...............................................................................................................................................307
22 FUNDING, BANKING, AND ACCOUNTING.............................................................................309
22.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................309
22.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................314
23 READINESS FOR OPERATIONS.............................................................................................315
23.1 COMPANY DUTIES...............................................................................................................315
23.4 REPORTS.................................................................................................................................317
APPENDICES...................................................................................................................................318
APPENDIX FA (PAGE 1) – SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENTS LIST (SDRL)........................................................319
APPENDIX FB – INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS: INSTRUCTION TO SUPPLIERS (IRIS)...........................................328
APPENDIX FC DOCUMENTS FOR COMPANY - FORMATS AND QUANTITIES..................................................343
APPENDIX FD: INTERFACE MANAGEMENT..........................................................................................345
FD-1: INTERFACE MANAGEMENT PROCESS..............................................................................................345
FD-2: INTERFACE AGREEMENT FORM........................................................................................................346
APPENDIX FE: CHANGE ORDER FORM....................................................................................................347
APPENDIX FF: SPECIFICATION DEVIATION REQUESTS..........................................................................348
APPENDIX FG: RISK REGISTER TEMPLATES..........................................................................................354
G1 - SCENARIO BASED RISK ASSESSMENT ACTION ITEMS TRACKING REGISTER..................................................354
FG2 - HAZOP ACTION ITEM TRACKING TEMPLATE......................................................................................354
FG3 - LOSS PREVENTION AND OTHER REVIEW RECOMMENDATION / ACTION ITEM TRACKING TEMPLATE...............355
FG4 - MONTHLY SUMMARY DATA TEMPLATE.............................................................................................355
APPENDIX FH - ACTION ITEM CLOSEOUT TEMPLATE............................................................................356
APPENDIX FI - SYSTEMS COMPLETION CERTIFICATES...........................................................................357
APPENDIX FJ - TURNOVER AND COMPLETION PACKAGES....................................................................359
APPENDIX FK - NIGERIAN CONTENT.....................................................................................................362
APPENDIX FL: MALARIA CONTROL.......................................................................................................366


Table Of Content
APPENDIX FM: CELL PHONE REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................374

APPENDIX FN: SECURITY BACKGROUND CHECKS.................................................................................375
APPENDIX FO: MEDICAL & HEALTH SERVICES REQUIREMENTS............................................................378
APPENDIX FQ: COMMUNITY RELATIONS..............................................................................................382
APPENDIX FR: HUMAN RIGHTS PROVISION FOR GOVERNMENT SECURITY FORCES............................395
APPENDIX FS: DATA AND ACCESS RIGHTS FOR AUDITS........................................................................397
APPENDIX FT: EXPORT CONTROL.........................................................................................................399
APPENDIX FU: TUBERCULOSIS CONTROL PROGRAM............................................................................400
APPENDIX FV: MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM.............................................................................401
SECTION G....................................................................................................................................404
DESIGN BASIS DOCUMENTS...............................................................................................................405

INTRODUCTION.....................................................................................................................405
SCOPE................................................................................................................................................405
CODES, STANDARDS AND RECOMMENDED PRACTICES..............................................405
APPLICABILITY...................................................................................................................................405
HIERARCHY........................................................................................................................................405
COMPANY ENGINEERING....................................................................................................................405
G. DEFINITIONS..................................................................................................................406
H. STANDARDS.....................................................................................................................407
GLOBAL PRACTICES...........................................................................................................................407
PROJECT STANDARDS.........................................................................................................................407
I. DOCUMENTATION..........................................................................................................407
NUMBERING.......................................................................................................................................407
AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS......................................................................................................................407
HANDOVER DOCUMENTATION...........................................................................................................408
J. CRITICAL EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION..............................................................................409
K. REGULATORY APPROVALS..................................................................................................409
L. ENVIRONMENTAL, SAFETY AND SECURITY CONSIDERATIONS..............................................409
APPENDIX E-1.......................................................................................................................................410
SECTION H - DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTS.......................................................................413
DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTS...................................................................................................414
SECTION I – COMPANY PROVIDED ITEMS.....................................................................................415
COMPANY-PROVIDED ITEMS...........................................................................................................416
SECTION J – QUALIFIED SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS........................................................417
1. GENERAL............................................................................................................................418
2. CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES.................................................................................419
3. QUALIFIED SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS...................................................................419
4. NOMINATING SUPPLIERS OF MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT AND SUBCONTRACTORS...........419
APPENDICES...................................................................................................................................422


Table Of Content
SECTION K – CONTRACTOR’S EXECUTION BASIS...........................................................................441
CONTRACTOR’S EXECUTION BASIS...................................................................................................442

QIT / BRT Storage and Settling Tanks Revamp (SSTR)
Job Specification & Coordination Procedure
[Contract Number – A]
SECTION A: Introduction to Job Specification
Revision 1
September 2022

Introduction to Job Specification
JOB SPECIFICATION Section A
Introduction to JOB SPECIFICATION

This JOB SPECIFICATION, together with the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT and Exhibits, form the
CONTRACT. The JOB SPECIFICATION, which is subordinate to the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT,
provides a detailed description of the FACILITY, including CONTRACTOR’s WORK. No Section
of the JOB SPECIFICATION takes precedence over any other Section of the JOB SPECIFICATION.
Terms that are fully capitalized are defined in the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT (e.g. CONTRACTOR,
COMPANY, and WORK). Definitions of these terms apply throughout the CONTRACT.
Terms defined in the JOB SPECIFICATION may only begin with a capital letter (e.g. Project) and
apply throughout the JOB SPECIFICATION.
The contents of the JOB SPECIFICATION include the following:
1) Section A, Introduction to JOB SPECIFICATION

The Introduction to JOB SPECIFICATION provides a summary description of the contents of the
JOB SPECIFICATION.
2) Section B, Definitions
This Section defines common terms used throughout the JOB SPECIFICATION.
3) Section C, Description of the Project

This Section provides an abbreviated description of the Project.
4) Section D, Scope of WORK

The Scope of WORK provides a description of WORK and deliverables to be provided by
CONTRACTOR as a result of this CONTRACT.
5) Section E, Schedule Basis

The Schedule Basis defines timing and scheduling requirements relevant to performance of the
WORK. The COMPANY Plan specifies the overall schedule for the Project.
6) Section F, Coordination Procedure

The COORDINATION PROCEDURE provides the general procedural requirements for the
execution of the WORK and describes the administrative responsibilities of COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR and how they interface with one another.
7) Section G, Design Basis Documents

The DESIGN BASIS DOCUMENTS, provided by COMPANY to the CONTRACTOR, set the
design basis for the FACILITY and can be relied on as being complete.
8) Section H, Design Development Documents

The DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTS provided by COMPANY to CONTRACTOR,
are documents which cannot be relied on as being complete and require verification and/or further
development by CONTRACTOR.


Introduction to Job Specification
9) Section I, Company-Provided Items

This Section lists the items that will be provided to CONTRACTOR by COMPANY.
10) Section J, Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors

The Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors list defines the suppliers and subcontractors deemed
acceptable for use by COMPANY.
11) Section K, Contractor’s Execution Basis

CONTRACTOR’s Execution Basis shall include excerpts from CONTRACTOR’s Technical
Tender to outline CONTRACTOR’s plans for execution of the CONTRACT.

Definitions
SECTION B: DEFINITIONS
Revision 1
September 2022
JOB SPECIFICATION Terms

Definitions
Table B 0 -1 lists terms and associated definitions for specific words and phrases used in the JOB
SPECIFICATION. These terms are identified by use of initial capitalization (e.g., Project, Plan,
System, Procedure, etc.).
Table B0-1: JOB SPECIFICATION Terms

Term Definition
Certifying Agent or An independent third party who is responsible for reviewing, inspecting and certifying
Verification Agent that the WORK of the CONTRACTOR meets applicable LAW.
Change Inquiry A request by COMPANY for CONTRACTOR to evaluate cost and schedule
implications of a potential CONTRACT Change
Change Notice CONTRACTOR's written notice to COMPANY that CONTRACTOR believes the
criteria for a CHANGE ORDER has been met
Change Proposal CONTRACTOR's response to a Change Inquiry, including cost and schedule impacts
and assessment of risk including health, safety, environmental, regulatory, and
technical implications
Change Request A request by CONTRACTOR for COMPANY to consider a CONTRACTOR-initiated
change.
COMPANY As defined in Attachment 1 of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE
Representative
CONTRACT Change Changes to the JOB SPECIFICATION
CONTRACT Control Is aligned with the CONTRACT SCHEDULE defined in Section E of the JOB
Schedule SPECIFICATION. CONTRACT Control Schedule is the baseline schedule which
remains unchanged throughout the Project and is used to assess progress.
Contractor External Interface that occurs between CONTRACTOR and external organizations, such as
Interface COMPANY's other contractor(s), other contractor(s) affiliates, joint venturers and
subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s).
Contractor Interface COMPANY provided document which outlines requirements for CONTRACTOR's
Management Plan management of interfaces and includes methods, strategies, and tools that
(IMP) CONTRACTOR shall use as the basis for CONTRACTOR's Interface Management
System.
Contractor Internal Interface that occurs entirely between CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR's
Interface corporate entities, affiliates, joint venturers and subcontractor(s) and/or vendor(s), (i.e.,
entirely lying within CONTRACTOR's scope).
CONTRACTOR As defined in Attachment 1 of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE
Representative
CONTRACTOR's Is based on the CONTRACT Control Schedule and includes updates, forecasts,
Detail Schedule increased definition, and work plan detail.
Critical Interface Interface that is significantly overdue and impacting CONTRACTOR's work, has the
potential to impact CONTRACTOR's work if expedient action is not taken, has
outstanding issues that need additional management attention, or is a non-performing
interface that has been elevated to COMPANY for resolution.
Critical Items Criticality I and II equipment and materials identified by the project team in
accordance with GP-20-01-04.
Critical Path In a schedule it is the sequence of Project network terminal elements with the longest
overall duration and therein defining the shortest time to complete the Project.
Current Control The CONTRACT Control Schedule with CHANGE ORDERS.
Schedule
Interface Agreement The primary mechanism for formally documenting an interface between interface
(IA) parties
[Interface] Receiver Organization responsible for expediting, receiving, reviewing, processing, using, etc.
the interface deliverable/activity information generated by another organization
(Interface Supplier).

Definitions
Term Definition
[Interface] Supplier Organization responsible for producing and providing interface deliverable/activity
information to another organization (Interface Receiver).
Key Personnel Personnel as defined in accordance with the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT and
Attachment 1 of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE
Key Positions Positions as defined in accordance with the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT and
Attachment 1 of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE
National /Local National or Local company or registered agent qualified to supply goods or services in
Supplier/Contractor the COUNTRY OF OPERATION.
Loss Prevention The application of engineering principles to the design of oil and gas facilities for the
purpose of preventing injury, loss of life, and property damage by identifying process
and facility hazards, and minimizing the likelihood of the occurrence and/or
consequences of these hazards. This entails risk identification and management
throughout the lifecycle of the project.
National Content As defined in Attachment 1 of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE (e.g.
Stakeholder federal/provincial, territorial, municipal host government, non-government
organizations, local suppliers, local community and other parties impacted by the
Project activities)
National/Local Content An overall value created to support the COMPANY’s operations and to contribute to
the economic development at the host-country and local levels through:
Workforce Development – Recruitment and development of qualified national / local
employees;
Supplier Development – Development and use of qualified local vendors for the supply
of goods and services; and
Strategic Community Investments – Investments in health, education and infrastructure
that assist in the development of local capabilities (capacity building) and improve
the socio-economic environment of host communities.
Nationalization – Total number of host country personnel as a percentage of the total
personnel employed by CONTRACTOR in the country.
National/Local Workforce comprised of qualified National and Local employees, and citizens of the
Workforce COUNTRY OF OPERATION.
Nonconformities Non-fulfillment of a requirement
Off Sites Sites where parts of the WORK are performed and are not defined as a WORK SITE.
COMPANY personnel may or may not be present at such sites.
Procedures A specific methodology or process to accomplish a discrete activity or set of activities
Project As defined in the JOB SPECIFICATION
Project Plans CONTRACTOR's written scheme or approach to manage, organize, coordinate, and
execute the WORK. Plans include documentation of how CONTRACTOR will apply
CONTRACTOR's Systems and Procedures in performing the WORK.
Quality Issues Planning and execution areas with sufficient risk or known impact to Project and
require increased PT Quality and Management attention. Quality issues include known
as well as potential nonconformities.
Quality Management Coordinated quality related activities based on risk using the Criticality Rating process
to direct and control an organization to meet established requirements
Re-Baseline Reestablish new control schedule for remaining work scope to be completed from
current project position.
Revision Any modification to a deliverable after it has been approved
Risk Management The identification of hazards; assessment of uncertainty, likelihood, and consequence
associated with hazards; characterization of inherent risks; and prioritization of tasks to
eliminate, reduce, or control these risks. Risk management is a structured process in
the execution of the WORK.

Definitions
Term Definition
Source Inspection Activities performed on behalf of the purchaser to ensure that purchased product meets
specified purchase requirements.
Source Inspector Qualified individual who performs source inspection.
Specification Deviation Waivers to specific technical requirements of the JOB SPECIFICATION that do not
meet the criteria of a CHANGE ORDER, such as minor wavers for specific pieces of
equipment, material component, or material substitutions.
Stakeholders All parties with vested interests, including interfacing parties
Subcontractor A member of CONTRACTOR GROUP providing services directly to
CONTRACTOR's.
Sub-Critical Path In a schedule it is an additional or parallel path through the network with a total
duration just longer than the Critical Path. A delay of a terminal element of the
Critical Path could raise a Sub-critical Path to the Critical Path of a recovery schedule.
Supplier/Vendor The recipient of a "direct" or "indirect" purchase order for materials and/or equipment.
In this context, a "direct" order is one issued to a Vendor/Supplier by a Contractor or
the Company Representative. An "indirect" order is one issued by a Vendor/Supplier
(recipient of a "direct" order) to another Vendor/Supplier for mill materials, fabricated
components, or subassemblies.
Systems Groups of related procedures.
Systems Completion The systematic process facilitating flawless transition from construction to continuous
operations utilizing an integrated plan. Systems Completion spans the entire life cycle
of a project, from engineering to stable operations. It is a multi-discipline, multi-team,
and multi-organization activity with multiple interfaces requiring careful management.
Turnover The act of transferring care, custody, and control of the FACILITY or parts of the
FACILITY to COMPANY.
2. JOB SPECIFICATION Acronyms and Abbreviations

Table B 0 -2 list acronyms and abbreviations and associated definitions used in the JOB
SPECIFICATION.
Table B0-2: JOB SPECIFICATION Acronyms and Abbreviations

Term Definition


Project Description
SECTION C: PROJECT DESCRIPTION
Revision 1
September 2022


Project Description
A. Overview
The WORKs are located in Qua Iboe Terminal (QIT)and Bonny River Terminal (BRT) in
Nigeria. The primary purpose of these facilities are to receive and export all crude oil and
Pentane Plus production from offshore production platforms. In QIT, the crude oil is
received and processed from offshore through three 24" submarine pipelines. Once received,
the crude goes through a low pressure degassing and dewatering process, and is then routed
to storage. Currently, there are nine 500kbbls (labelled 5001 through 5009) and three
670kbbls (labelled 6704 through 6706) crude storage tanks, while the condensate is routed to
the three 670kbbls of condensate storage tanks, all located within the QIT operating plant.
During upset conditions, additional separation/settling is performed in the storage tanks
before the export grade oil is subsequently transferred to the Berth Operations Platform
(BOP) through a 42" submarine pipeline. Three single point moorings (SPM's) are connected
to the BOP for final loading of the oil onto the export oil tankers. In BRT, ther are two
Pentane Plus storage tanks of floating roof type, each 300KBBL capacity and one Fixed roof
process tank of 20 KBBL capacity.
2. Climatic Conditions
The equatorial climate of the coastal regions of Nigeria is characterized by an annual weather
cycle. The weather cycle comprises a dry season, from December through February,
followed by a wet season for the remainder of the year.
During the dry season, rainfall amounts are low but the humidity remains greater than 85%
for about half of the time. At the beginning and end of the wet season thunderstorms are
frequent. During the remainder of the wet season the weather is dominated by monsoons
characterized by steady winds from the Southwest which bring persistent rain, high humidity
(100%), and somewhat lower temperatures.
3. Description of Process and Facilities (Crude & Condensate Storage Tanks)

QIT TANK Description
The 500,000 bbls series tanks are single-deck floating roof tanks except one which is a double deck
floating roof.
The 670,000 bbls series tanks are double deck floating roof tanks
The storage tank dimensions, geometry and general data are as described beneath.
Storage Tank Data (500,000 series - TYPICAL)
GENERAL:
TANK NUMBER: 5003
OWNER: Mobil Producing Nigeria, Utd.
DESIGN STD: API 650 Appendix G & K
TANK LOCATION: Ibeno, Nigeria
MANUFACTURER: Whessoe, UK
PRODUCT: Crude Oil


Project Description
CATHODIC Yes
PROTECTION:
NAME PLATE PRESENT: No
DIMENSIONS:
DIAMETER: 260.00 ft
HEIGHT: 56.00 ft
NOMINAL CAPACITY: 500,000 bbls
GEOMETRY:
FOUNDATION: Concrete Ringwall
BOTTOM: ---
SHELL: Butt Welded
FLOATING ROOF: Single Deck w/ Annular Pontoons
PRIMARY SEAL: Mechanical Shoe seal
SECONDARY SEAL: Yes
WEATHERSHIELD: Metallic/Fabric
DATES:
YEAR BUILT: 1975
LAST COATED: Data not available
LAST INSPECTION: Data not available
ACCESS:
FLOATING ROOF: Spiral Stairway w/ Rolling Ladder &
Vertical Ladder
COATINGS:
BOTTOM: Yes
SHELL: External - White paint
FLOATING ROOF: External - White paint
Typical Crude Properties:

BS&W =0.5% maximum
API Gravity = 36.0-36.4 0API
Viscosity = Low
Salt Content = from 1.5 to 2.0 /MB crude
Pour Point = typically about 100C/ 500F
Storage Tank Data (670,000 series - TYPICAL)
GENERAL:
TANK NUMBER: 6705
DESIGN STD: API 650
MANUFACTURER: Chicago Bridge & Iron under Daewoo
PRODUCT: Crude Oil/Condensate
CATHODIC Yes
PROTECTION:
NAME PLATE PRESENT: Yes
DIMENSIONS:
DIAMETER: 300.00 ft
HEIGHT: 56.00 ft


Project Description

GEOMETRY:
BOTTOM: Asymmetric cone-down
SHELL: Butt Welded
FLOATING ROOF: Double Deck w/ Seal Welded Pontoons
PRIMARY SEAL: Mechanical Shoe
SECONDARY SEAL: Yes
WEATHERSHIELD: Yes
DATES:
YEAR BUILT: 1999
LAST COATED: 1999
LAST INSPECTION: External: 2000 Internal: 2003
ACCESS:
FLOATING ROOF: Spiral Stairway w/ Rolling Ladder &
Vertical Ladder
COATINGS:
BOTTOM: Epoxy Tank Lining (Carboline)
SHELL: External - Mobil Beige Coating
(International)
FLOATING ROOF: External - White Coating (International)
Typical Crude Properties:

BS&W =0.5% maximum
Viscosity = Low
Pour Point = typically about 500F
Typical Condensate Properties:

BS&W =0.5% maximum
API Gravity = 46-53API
Viscosity = Low
Wax Appearance Temperature = 89 0F
Pour Point = typically about (60F
Settling Tank Data (TYPICAL)
GENERAL:
TANK NUMBER: 673
DESIGN STD: Data Not Available
MANUFACTURER: Koyo Iron Works, Japan
PRODUCT: Crude Oil/Produced Water
CATHODIC Yes
PROTECTION:
NAME PLATE PRESENT: Yes
DIMENSIONS:


Project Description
DIAMETER: 100.00 ft
HEIGHT: 48.00 ft
GEOMETRY:
BOTTOM: Asymmetric cone-down
SHELL: Butt Welded
DATES:
YEAR BUILT: 1971
LAST COATED: Unknown
LAST INSPECTION: 2000 - External, Unknown - Internal
ACCESS:
FIXED ROOF: Spiral Stairway & Vertical Ladder
COATINGS:
BOTTOM: Tank Lining Epoxy (assumed Valspar)
SHELL & FIXED ROOF: 3-coat system, white (assumed Valspar)


Project Description
BRT TANK Description

GENERAL (for Tank 501 and 405):
TANK NUMBER: 405 & 501

DESIGN STD:
TANK LOCATION: BRT, Nigeria
MANUFACTURER: JGC, JAPAN
PRODUCT: PENTANE PLUS
CATHODIC PROTECTION: Yes
NAME PLATE PRESENT: No
DIMENSIONS:
DIAMETER: 200.00 ft
HEIGHT: 54.00 ft
GEOMETRY:
FOUNDATION: Gravel/sand foundation
BOTTOM: ---
SHELL: Butt Welded
FLOATING ROOF: Double Deck
PRIMARY SEAL: Mechanical Shoe seal
SECONDARY SEAL: Yes
WEATHERSHIELD: Metallic/Fabric
DATES:
YEAR BUILT: 2000/2006
LAST COATED: 2000/2006
ACCESS:
FLOATING ROOF: Spiral Stairway w/ Rolling Ladder & Vertical
Ladder
COATINGS:
BOTTOM: Yes
SHELL: External - White paint
FLOATING ROOF: External - White paint
Typical Product Properties: As above
BRT 406 (Fixed Roof tank):


Project Description
GENERAL:
TANK NUMBER: 406
DESIGN STD: API 650
TANK LOCATION: BRT, Nigeria
MANUFACTURER: JGC, Japan
PRODUCT: Pentane Plus
CATHODIC Data not available
PROTECTION:
NAME PLATE PRESENT: Data not available
DIMENSIONS:
DIAMETER: 60 ft
HEIGHT: 42 ft
GEOMETRY:
FOUNDATION: Data not available
BOTTOM: Data not available
SHELL: Butt Welded
DATES:
YEAR BUILT: 2000
LAST COATED: 2000
ACCESS:
FIXED ROOF: Spiral Stairway & Vertical Ladder
COATINGS:
BOTTOM: Unknown
SHELL & FIXED ROOF: Unknown


Project Description
Layout of QIT Tank Farm
Layout of BRT Tank Farm


Project Description
A. Work Breakdown Structure

The purpose of a Work Breakdown Structure (WBS) is to graphically represent the major work
activities, how the work will be contracted and the interfaces between contractors. The WBS also
indicates work done by the Company.
Rows list the work activities required to execute the Project. These activities are ordered
chronologically to the extent possible to represent the interfaces (i.e. handoffs) between work scopes.
The number of activities listed is according to project complexity and the split between contract/Work
packages.
Each different colored box within the WBS generally represents a prime contract with the Company.
Work Breakdown Structure
QIT QIT QIT

BRT BRT
5000 6000 600
S/N Activities Series Series Series
Tank Tank
405 406
Tanks Tanks Tanks
1 Project Management COMPANY (MPN Project Team)
Tank Cleaning & Desludging
2 Tank Cleaning Waste Disposal
Oil Recovery
API Inspection
EPC CONTRACTOR (Tank Cleaning, Waste
Disposal, Oil Recovery, API 653 Inspection, Design
Detailed Engineering
Engineering, Material Procurement, Construction
Management, Fabrication and Construction, NDT &
Material Procurement
Hydro testing / Calibration/ Commissioning)
3 Tank Revamp
Construction Management,
Fabrication & Construction
NDT
Hydrotesting /
Calibration/Commissioning
4 Start-up Operations COMPANY (MPN Project Team & Operations)


Scope Of Work
QIT & BRT Crude/Pentane Plus Storage and Settling

Tanks Revamp
SECTION D: SCOPE OF WORK
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 16 of 407

Scope Of Work
Introduction
The Scope of WORK describes Project specific, obligations, and / or requirements with
respect to the WORK. It should be noted that, as defined in the PRINCIPAL
DOCUMENT, the Scope of WORK is part of the JOB SPECIFICATION. As such, it is not
a standalone document and must be read in conjunction with the PRINCIPAL
DOCUMENT and the other Sections of the JOB SPECIFICATION (e.g. the Section F -
COORDINATION PROCEDURE and Section G - Design Basis Documents etc.) to fully
understand the, obligations, and / or the requirements of the CONTRACT. Therefore,
references are made throughout the Scope of WORK to specific Articles in the PRINCIPAL
DOCUMENT and / or Sections of the JOB SPECIFICATION.
The Scope of WORK also defines the boundaries of the WORK to be performed under the
CONTRACT and describes responsibilities at specific interfaces with COMPANY and
COMPANY's other contractors. In this regard, the Scope of WORK includes the following
Appendix DB - External Interface Responsibility Matrix.
It should be noted that there are two (2) sets of definitions. The first one –
“DEFINITIONS” in upper case is located in the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT and the second
one – “Definitions” in title case is in Section B – Definitions which must be read in
conjunction with the rest of the JOB SPECIFICATION to give a complete understanding of
what the CONTRACTOR is required to do / provide.
Acronyms used throughout the JOB SPECIFICATION are contained in Appendix DA
hereto.
1. CONTRACT Specific WORK Scope Overview
This CONTRACT work scope is captured in two main categories - Tank Cleaning & Tank
Revamp.
This CONTRACT encompasses all WORK necessary to design, engineer, procure,

fabricate, hook-up, tie in, and mechanically complete, pre-commission, support system
integration test and assist COMPANY with the commissioning and Start-up of tanks.
CONTRACTOR shall utilize Field-Proven Technologies to the extent possible. Where new
or step-out technologies are required to meet the JOB SPECIFICATION, CONTRACTOR
shall obtain COMPANY’s written approval prior to incorporating into the WORK.
The CONTRACTOR shall;

 Provide Project Management of the WORK including management of Subcontractors and
Suppliers.
 Cooperate and interface with its Subcontractors and Suppliers, COMPANY,
COMPANY's other contractors and governmental regulatory agencies as required.
 Produce system and component level detailed engineering, required documentation, field
engineering, technical services for Purchase Orders and subcontracts, permitting,
certifications, dimensional and weight control.
 Provide logistics for CONTRACTOR GROUP and COMPANY GROUP (e.g. personnel,
systems, facilities, marshalling sites, security, transportation, telecommunications,
lodging and catering) personnel, and for the export/import of equipment, materials, bulks,
spares to and from WORK SITES including marshalling sites and warehouses.
Page 17 of 407

Scope Of Work
 Provide procurement services including subcontracting, purchasing, expediting,

preserving, packaging, shipping, warehousing, administration, and payment, including the
management of COMPANY Provide Items
 Provide WORK SITE facilities, construction equipment, site preparation, early works,
temporary facilities and aids, support services, consumables and utilities as required
 Provide a Quality Management System inclusive of a document and data management
system to manage quality assurance and control systems including Positive Material
Identification (PMI), shop and field inspection, testing and required documentation
 Provide Safety, Health, Environmental and Security services at the WORK SITES
 Produce required documentation, drawings, technical data, specifications, etc. to
complete, transport, install, Commission, Start-Up, and operate the FACILITY.
 Provide Commissioning/Hook-up/Start-up assistance to COMPANY including Factory
Acceptance Tests, pre-commissioning, Mechanical Completion, post commissioning and
Start-up.
 Provide all of the Plans detailed in Section 2 of Section F - COORDINATION
PROCEDURE plus any additional Plans listed in the following subsections all in
accordance with timing stated in COORDINATION PROCEEDURE.
 Develop and actively maintain an acceptable level of National and / or local (host
country) content.
 Comply with the required National and Local content requirements.
Page 18 of 407
Job Specification
[Contract Number – WS2682825]
SECTION D1: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK

CLEANING
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 19 of 407
A. Introduction
This section D1 specifies all the requirements regarding safety and work process for
executing the Tank De-sludging and cleaning job at Qua Iboe Terminal of COMPANY.
Page 20 of 407
B. References
CONTRACTOR MUST execute ALL the work in line with associated MPN Procedures and
API References (unless otherwise specified herein, use the latest edition), including but not
limited to the following:
 American Petroleum Institute (API) Standard 2015; “Requirements for Safe
Entry and Cleaning of Petroleum Storage Tanks"
 American Petroleum Institute (API) Recommended Practice 2016;
“Guidelines and Procedures for Entering and Cleaning Petroleum Storage
Tanks"
 API Bulletin 2015 & 2016 “Recommended Practice for Cleaning Petroleum
Storage Tanks”
 Upstream Nigeria Safety Manual
 MPN Tank and Storage Cleaning Maintenance Procedure
 MPN Work Management System
 MPN Atmospheric Gas Testing Procedure
 MPN Job Safety Analysis Procedure
 MPN Control of Hazardous Energy Procedure (LOTO – Lock-out/Tag-out)
 MPN Hot Work Procedure
 MPN Temporary Bypass of Safety System Procedure
 MPN Lifting and Cargo Management Guide
Page 21 of 407
C. QIT/ BRT Storage and Settling Tanks Scope and Data
S/N Description BS&W Qty Dia (ft) Cleaning Cleaning Surface

(MT) shell Area (sq.ft)
height(ft)
1 QIT FR tank 500KB 5000 260 8 115000
2 QIT FR tank 670KB 6000 300 8 152000
3 QIT settling tank 67KB 600 100 48 30700
4 BRT FR tank 300KB 600 200 8 69700
5 BRT Fixed roof tank 20KB 40 60 42 13600
CONTRACTOR will weigh (COMPANY to witness) the debris and solids after loading
into skips and this will be the basis of compensation for the CONTRACTOR
Note: Cleaning Height for Crude/Condensate includes the seals; Cleaning area for the
Settling Tanks includes the sloped roof and floor areas
Page 22 of 407
D. Job Process
It is the COMPANY’s desire to have its tanks cleaned of hydrocarbons, sludge and made Gas
Free by using an integrated automated process that will allow for continuous operation until a
given tank is clean.
A Sequence of Operation Plan (SOP) is to be provided by the CONTRACTOR and will

include the following minimum details:
4.1 Project Contact Details

Contractor On-Site Manager (if required)
Contractor On-Site HSE Representative
Contractor On-Site Superintendent
Contractor On-Site Emergency Contact
Contractor On-Site QA/QC Representative (Testing and Results)
MPN On-Site Project/Construction Engineer
MPN On-Site HSE Representative
MPN On-Site Construction Representative
4.2 General Scope of Work
The following statement to be present at the beginning of this section:
Please note that this SOW cannot be altered without permission from MPN
SSTR Project Representative (TBD) and QIT/BRT Operations Representative
(TBD) once approved except in writing. This SOW must be at the site at all
times and must be reviewed with each person onsite. MPN TANK AND
STORAGE CLEANING MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE MUST BE
FOLLOWED AT ALL TIMES. ALL WORK MUST BE CARRIED OUT
WITH REFERENCE TO ALL RELEVANT API/OTHER APPLICABLE
STANDARDS (INCLUDING REVISIONS/UPDATES) PUBLISHED TILL 31 ST
DECEMBER 2015.
Details of the SOW to include:
CLEANING SPECIFICATIONS:
TANK NUMBER: to be indicated
TANK SIZE: to be indicated
SERVICE: to be indicated
ROOF TYPE: to be indicated
MANWAYS / SIZE: to be indicated
TANK CONSTRUCTION: to be indicated
Page 23 of 407
SLUDGE VOLUME: to be estimated
CLEANING CRITERIA: Class I Entry Requirements
The intent is to clean tank and provide a gas free certificate for an API 653 Internal
inspection/Hot Work
 Recovery of residual oil shall be done using the following equipment and
procedure – CONTRACTOR TO INDICATE IN Technical Tender Form
 Removal of sludge/wax and cleaning of tank shall be done using the following
equipment and procedure – CONTRACTOR TO INDICATE IN Technical
Tender Form
 De-oiling and cleaning/gas freeing of Pontoons shall be done using the
following equipment and procedure – CONTRACTOR TO INDICATE IN
Technical Tender Form
 Recovery of Oil from the sludge shall be done using the following equipment
and procedure – CONTRACTOR TO INDICATE IN Technical Tender
Form
 The oil recovery process will separate sludge into oil, water and solid phases.
All recovered oil shall be pump to Emulsion Pit or as directed by COMPANY
 The solids will have a maximum moisture content of wt% CONTRACTOR
TO INDICATE IN Technical Tender Form and placed into skips
 Skips shall be transported by certified road trucks after weighing by
CONTRACTOR (COMPANY to witness) to a DPR approved agency for
waste disposal. COMPANY shall issue Duty of Care documents rendering the
solids loaded truck the sole responsibility of the CONTRACTOR
(CONTRACTOR to provide all equipment, cranes, skips, load cells,
trucks for loading).
 Final water washing of tank internal surface. Wash water to be transported to
designated tank by QIT/BRT operations. Contractor Supervisor to enter the
tank to perform the API 2016 checklist and finds the inside of the tank in safe
condition, CONTRACTOR will enter the tank with a minimum of two tank
cleaners and remove the remaining water/oil mixture by washing material to
per CONTRACTOR residual cleaning procedure. Contractor will continue in
this manner until tank is cleaned. Tank will be continuously monitored while
personnel are inside of tank.
4.3 Mobilization and Site Setup

Contractor must have completed all ExxonMobil safety courses including the Tank
Cleaning Class and Confined Space Entry
 OBTAIN Security Access, Site Access, Area Access and Work Permits,
Review MSDS, and Conduct Site Safety Layout/Overview.
 CONDUCT Job Safety Walk, and SOP Review.
 DOCUMENT Training on tailgate safety meeting forms, and MPN completed
training log.
 SPOT / POSITION equipment in the desired locations in accordance with the
diagram supplied – COMPANY TO PROVIDE DIAGRAM
Page 24 of 407

 NO ignition source equipment will be allowed within 50’ of any open man-
ways.
 ENSURE that NO electric lines are in the area of the unloading and setup of
equipment – Spotters must be used for truck and crane operations.
 SETUP and POSITION spill containments under all equipment, Vis-queen /
decon kit at the hot zone (sample testing location).
 HYDROTEST all pipe, hose, and connections to operating pressure before any
pumping will begin.
 ENSURE all lines, vats, hoses, and connections will be tested, bonded, and
grounded prior to equipment start-up.
 Vapor return lines or Equipment needing vapor recovery will be connected
properly to ensure no leakage or accurate capture. (if required)
 VERIFY all lock-out, tag-out, and blinding requirements before operations
begin.
 Eyewash will be set up on site.
4.4 Safety Requirements including but not limited to the following:

 MPN and contractor safety policies will be strictly followed at all times
 MPN tank cleaning procedures must be followed at all times
 Lost prevention system will be enforced on all jobs.
 Proper housekeeping is a critical component of this project
 All ignition sources must be at least 50' away from open man-ways
 A four gas meter will be used to detect any fugitive emissions
 Proper PPE must be in use at all times (minimum is Class I Entry)
 All hoses, blowers, vacuum trucks, holding tanks, pumps and degassing
equipment, etc. Must be bonded & grounded with continuity verified
 Containment must be placed under all equipment that has a potential to leak or
spill liquids
 Spotters must be used for truck operations, including skip movement
 Crews must develop and review a JSA before the start of each shift
 All incidents / near miss must be reported to contractor supervisor & MPN
project team immediately
 Heat stress is a concern during the day-follow proper protocol to prevent heat
stress from occurring
 Communications: e/m radio and an air horn must be on site at all times
 Ensure gas monitor is available and VERIFY proper operation (bump test)
and recent calibration certificate
 Ensure work permits are obtained prior to beginning each work shift
 Tank entry supervisor must be present at work site during the execution
of all critical steps (i.e., opening manway, tank entry, vapor freeing,
beginning of ventilation, etc.)
4.5 Pre-Job Planning Checks

NOTE: Ensure that all safety requirements are understood and followed by all
personnel
i) Perform Job Safety Analysis (JSA) to fully define the work scope,
assigned responsibilities, and hazards involved
ii) Obtain the (MSDS) for the materials to be encountered.
Page 25 of 407

iii) Identify the locations of emergency / safety equipment (safety eyewash
stations, emergency showers, fire extinguishers, etc as required)
iv) Ensure crew members understand applicable Facility Emergency
Procedures
 Emergency Response plan (contact information)
 Hazard Communication plan
v) Ensure Lockout / Tagout is complete (as required) for the subject Tank
vi) Verify the Availability of the subject Tank with QIT/BRT Operations
vii) Review plans for transferring residual product, (e.g. connection points
on tank, valve for water draw-off, vacuum truck placement, product
receipt point)
Page 26 of 407
5 General Responsibility of Contractor

 Contractor shall engage adequate, skilled and competent personnel for the
effective performance of the above scope
 Contractor personnel shall undergo rigorous training on the SHE (Safety,
Health & Environmental) requirements and operations procedures of
ExxonMobil with reference to entering confined spaces and Tank Cleaning
 Contractor shall be responsible for the provision of all materials, consumables,
equipment including intrinsically safe radios & logistics requirements
(including but not limited to rags for wiping down tanks by hand if required,
transportation of personnel to & from the work site, provision of food and
water for workers on site) for effective, efficient and timely execution of the
job. These materials and equipment shall comply with required safety
standards.
Page 27 of 407
6 Specific Responsibility of Contractor

 Contractor shall communicate to its personnel, the roles and responsibilities of
all parties to be involved in planning and performing the services.
 Contractor shall document Confined Space Entry requirements specific to
storage tank cleaning services and continuous monitoring limits during storage
tank entry (i.e. maximum LEL – Lower Explosive Limit, required PPE –
Personal Protective Equipment germane to the instruction/requirements of the
MSDS, Confined Space labeling, etc.)
 Contractor shall communicate to all persons involved in the entry the hazards
that could exist inside storage tanks used for MPN operations. This
information is usually contained in the: ‘Material Safety and Data Sheets’
(MSDS) accompanying such storage – whose tanks require cleaning.
Some examples are:
 Toxic/Flammable gas or vapor remaining from the process
 Space not cleaned properly
 Gas or vapor from an adjoining plant or work activity
 Toxic, irritant or flammable gas or vapor released when sludge or other
deposits are disturbed
 Pyrophoric action of dusts
 Auto-ignition of iron sulfide allowed to dry in air
 Oxygen deficiency (below 19.5%)
 Oxygen enrichment caused by operations which involve an excess of
oxygen (above 23.5%)
 Entry or presence of other dangerous substances (e.g. NORM –
naturally occurring radioactive materials).
 Storage design or configuration
 Entrapment due to presence of sludge or other residual substances etc.
 Access and egress restraints.
 Contractor shall liaise with the responsible MPN personnel to know the type
of gas detector (s) recommended for sniffing storage tanks
 Contractor shall ensure that the gas detectors are regularly calibrated (as per
manufacturer’s specifications). MPN SHE coordinator shall verify that
instruments have been calibrated according to manufacturer’s specifications,
before Contractor uses such equipment for sniffing.
 Contractor shall provide qualified personnel trained to use these MPN
approved gas detectors.
 Contractor shall ensure that storage tanks environment comply with the
requirements of Table 3-4 below taken from Section 3.4.1 of the UN Work
Management System Manaul (pg 3-36) for allowing personnel entry.
 Contractor shall ensure that all equipment and lighting devices, used within
the work environment that has not been certified gas free (either inside the
storage tanks or within the immediate vicinity), shall be explosion-proof.
 Contractor shall provide all respiratory equipment/breathing apparatus
appropriate to the instructions/requirements of the MSDS (Materials & Safety
Data Sheets) and as approved by MPN for entry into storage tanks.
 Contractor shall ensure that a work specific Job Safety Analysis (JSA) is
conducted, documented and communicated to all persons prior to
Page 28 of 407

commencement of any work. This JSA shall be in alignment with MPN’s JSA
procedures.
 Contractor shall ensure that application for all required work permits are made
at least 12 hours before commencement of scheduled work, unless otherwise
approved by MPN Location Management. NO STORAGE TANK ENTRY
SHALL COMMENCE UNLESS AN APPROVED ENTRY PERMIT
HAS BEEN ISSUED, TOGETHER WITH ANY APPROPRIATE
ADDITIONAL PERMITS/CERTIFICATES.
 Contractor shall ensure that pre-job safety meetings are conducted prior to
commencement of work. Contractor shall document the minutes of these
meetings, as MPN will conduct periodic audits – to ascertain Contractor’s
level of compliance with proper documentation procedures, as well as testing
the quality of meetings held.
 Contractor shall ensure that work specific Facility Emergency
Plans/Procedures are put in place and documented. These emergency
plans/procedures shall include but not be limited to spill control & rescue
systems requirements. MPN shall periodically audit this documentation to
ensure they are in alignment with MPN’s procedures.
 Contractor shall submit an ‘Emergency Rescue Plan/Medical Evacuation
Procedure’ describing procedures to be followed in the event of personnel
asphyxiation, collapse/fall inside the storage tank. This document shall be
reviewed by MPN prior to commencement of work.
 Contractor shall ensure that all personnel associated with the Confined Space
Entry work are medically fit for such operations.
 Contractor shall provide key personnel it designates to various functions,
including but not limited to the following: ATTENDANT, ENTRANT,
RESCUER and so on. These personnel are expected to have minimum
competencies and obligations – during the course of executing this scope – as
outlined hereunder:
ATTENDANT
The attendant must know the hazards, including the signs or symptoms and
consequences of exposure to materials normally contained in entered storages.
-Is aware of the possible behavioral effects of exposure to the hazards by
entrants
-Maintains count of entrants & monitors activities of entrants.
-Remains outside the space and communicates with entrants.
-Continuously monitors conditions inside the storage tanks.
-Activate emergency rescue plan as needed and have no other duties while the
entrants are in the storage tanks.
-During any break, end of shift, completion of the job, comfort break, or any
time the space is not occupied, the attendant will ensure that the point of
entry is closed off and ‘no entry’ signs are posted. All equipment used in the
entry must be left in a safe condition, removed or stowed away properly.
ENTRANTS
The entrants into the storage tanks must know the hazards, including signs or
symptoms and consequences of exposure to materials normally contained in
Page 29 of 407

entered storages. In general, personnel used for storage entry must be trained
in confined space entry methods/procedures.
-Properly use of PPE
-Communicate hazards or concerns with the attendant.
-Alert the attendant if an unforeseen hazard surfaces.
-Evacuate the Confined Space if situation dictates or told to do so by
attendant.
-Wear a full body harness, with retrieval attached.
RESCUER
-The rescuer must know the hazards, including signs or symptoms and
consequences of exposure to materials normally contained in entered
storages.
-Trained to use properly the personnel protective equipment, procedures and
tools necessary for making rescues from Confined Spaces.
-Practice rescue drill at least once every 12 months.
-Trained in First Aid and CPR with at least one member holding a current
certification in both.
-If a third party provides rescue services, all previously mentioned
requirements should be checked by Contractor’s responsible personnel to
ensure compliance by the third party.
 Contractor shall note that the Confined Space Entry Permit is valid for a
maximum time of 12 hours. All permits will expire at the end of each 12-hour
shift. If the job is not completed, a new permit must be issued before work
continues.
If work is suspended for one hour, the permit must be revalidated by the
Contractor’s responsible personnel (after all checklist conditions have
been satisfied – see Figure 2). If work is suspended for more than one
hour the permit becomes invalid and a new permit must be issued.
 Contractor shall ensure that all personnel involved in this job take the
following actions, in the event of an emergency:
 Stop work, all entrants must vacate the storage tanks.
 Make the work site safe.
 Isolate all sources of power and heat.
 Stop all engines and secure static equipment.
 Walk briskly to muster area.
 Follow facility / emergency procedures.
 Contractor shall ensure that the Permit Preparer performs a check to confirm
that all locks and tags, blinds and skillets are removed, leak test performed and
work site is left in a safe manner before the permit is closed out.
 Contractor shall adhere strictly to the following conditions that warrant or are
associated with the monitoring of gas in and around the storage tanks:
A total hydrocarbon (THC) and gas monitoring is required for entries into Confined
Spaces that contain or have contained hydrocarbons.
Page 30 of 407
A benzene monitoring test is required for all entries into Confined Spaces that have
been exposed to a hydrocarbon stream with benzene > 0.1% by weight unless
respiratory protection is utilized.
Additional gas level monitoring beyond the initial testing is required and must be
documented on the permit.
Mechanical ventilation must be shut off at least 30 minutes prior to gas testing in
confined spaces. Continuous monitoring of the space must be performed using
monitoring equipment set to alarm the presence of LEL, H2S, and low and high
oxygen levels.
The table below serves as a guide to describe the minimum conditions under which
entry may be allowed or prohibited. MPN may review these requirements
periodically and specify actual requirements before or during the course of the
project. Table 3-4 is from Section 3.4.1 of the UN Work Management System Manaul
(pg 3-36) and reference should be made to Section 3.4 of this document for further
detail of the requirements for obtaining a ConfinedSpace Entry Permit.
 Contractor shall barricade and label the work at all times: “Danger- Entry Permit
Required – Do Not Enter”
 Contractor shall ensure that all confined spaces are sufficiently cleaned of all
materials, solids, liquids or gases which may present a hazard to personnel before
entry permit is approved
Page 31 of 407

 Contractor shall check the job site to ensure that it is cleaned up and left in a safe
manner prior to leaving the site
 Contractor shall ensure that all personnel who issue or use the permit must be trained
in the application of the work permit procedures, including but not to: lock-out/tag-
out requirements, by-pass of safety systems, confined space entry, etc.
 Contractor shall, at the end of each day’s work during the cleaning operation or
whenever work is suspended, cover all manways and clean out doors with
wooden blind.
 CONTRACTOR shall issue certificates of Incineration/Disposal to COMPANY on

the safe disposal of debris/solids on the total quantity of debris/solids disposed and/or
incinerated.
 CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary permits and operating licenses for
Delegated Supervisory Decontamination units and adhere strictly to all relevant
environmental, health and safety procedures and regulations pertaining to operation
of the plant.
 CONTRACTOR shall submit proper inventories of all solid waste and debris
recovered, transported and treated with sign-off from COMPANY.
 CONTRACTOR shall submit Completion/Disposal certificates to COMPANY.
 CONTRACTOR shall insure that COMPANY has access to the Delegated
Supervisory Decontamination units during the disposal of COMPANY waste and can
audit associated records.
Page 32 of 407
Figure 1 serves as a guide to the minimum requirements expected for this type. MPN may
review these requirements prior to, or during the course of the project.
Page 33 of 407
Page 34 of 407
NOTE: PIC stands for the most senior Contractor personnel at the location
Anything mentioned in COMPANY’S SCOPE OF WORK and not shown on
CONTRACTOR’S METHOD STATEMENT or shown on the METHOD STATEMENT and
not mentioned in the SCOPE OF WORK shall be of like effect as if shown or mentioned in
both. In case of any conflict or inconsistency among any of the incorporated documents,
CONTRACTOR shall bring this to the attention of COMPANY, which shall resolve the
conflict in writing. In most cases, the more stringent of the two cases shall suffice.
CONTRACTOR should note that COMPANY shall exercise zero tolerance to issues
pertaining to non-compliance with procedures (particularly Confined Space Entry
procedures/guidelines as earlier outlined). COMPANY expects strict adherence to these
Page 35 of 407

guidelines, as violation may lead to disciplinary action – including but not limited to
contract termination.
Page 36 of 407
7 COMPANY’S Responsibilities:
COMPANY shall provide or assist CONTRACTOR in providing any existing technical
data and equipment location diagram as may be necessary to execute the project.
COMPANY shall ensure that the tank is ready for the CONTRACTOR by landing
floating roof on legs for crude/condensate storage tanks (draining to minimum level) and
draining settling tanks to a minimum level.
COMPANY shall provide crude oil as cutting stock if required by CONTRACTOR (If
light gravity stock is required, CONTRACTOR to reimburse company for the cost).
Page 37 of 407
8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK

At completion of desludging/dewaxing and cleaning of the tank and recovering of the oil
and proper disposal of the solid waste and debris, CONTRACTOR shall submit a detailed
work report to the COMPANY Project Representative for documentation and
verification. CONTRACTOR shall include in the report observations, lesson learned and
recommendation for improvement in the tank cleaning process.
Upon satisfactorily cleaning of the tank, CONTRACTOR shall complete each activity
shown in Appendix A & B, respectively, to obtain a Gas Free Certified clean tank (Class I
entry requirements)., A Project Completion Certificate shall be signed by the COMPANY
Project Manager or his delegated authority upon receipt of the signed off form by
QIT/BRT operations. If not cleaned to the Class I requirement, CONTRACTOR shall be
required to repeat whatever tasks are needed to meet the Class I requirement at his
expense. Approved Project Completion Certificate will be required with submitted
invoice (except in the case where a milestone completion certificate is approved, if
applicable).
Page 38 of 407
9 Procedures/Drawings to be Provided by Contractor
S/No. Procedure Description

1 Recovery of Residual Oil From Tanks
2 Desludging/DeWaxing/Debris Removal From Tanks
3 De-Oiling,Cleaning and Gas Freeing of Pontoons
4 Cleaning and Gas Free Certifying of Tanks
5 Recovery of Oil From Sludge - Including Metering
6 Debris/Solids Disposal - Including Weighing
7 Final Water Washing and Wipe Down
S/No. Drawings to be Provided
1 Process & Utility Flow Diagram
2 Piping & Instrumentation Diagram
3 Safety System Diagram
Page 39 of 407
A Compensation
The entire tank de-sludging and cleaning scope as described in sections 1 thru 9 of this document will
be compensated through the following unit rate items based on relevance/applicability. (e.g. items A.3
and A.4 are not applicable for De-sludging and cleaning of Fixed Roof settling Tank). All contractor
costs including but not limited to Project management, overhead, manpower, materials, consumables,
fuel, power, water, SHES compliance, community development, lodging, boarding, emergency
response, profit, etc for Tank de-sludging and cleaning of tank shall be included in the relevant unit
rate items below.
A.1 Mobilization
CONTRACTOR shall mobilize to site all personnel workforce, equipment, materials and
consumables necessary to progress the work without interruption.
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall jointly carry out Pre-Mobilization inspection on all
CONTRACTOR’s equipment; materials and consumables required for the work and certify
them satisfactory prior to mobilization to site.
The mobilization scope includes providing the following Job Specific Procedures and Job
Safety Analysis (JSA) but not limited to:
 Sequence of Operation Plan (including Ventilation & Lighting Plans)

 Schedule and Progress Reporting – Earned Value
 Residual Oil Recovery
 Desludging/Dewaxing
 Cleaning – including Pontoons
 Oil Recovery from Sludge
 Final Washing of tank internals
 Handling, transportation and disposal of solid or environmentally unsafe waste
through Department of Petroleum Resources(DPR) approved site
 HSE, QA/QC and Document Management
Mobilization will be deemed to be completed when all listed procedures are reviewed and
approved by COMPANY.
A.2 Residual Oil Removal
CONTRACTOR shall remove the residual oil after COMPANY operations has handed over
the tank and transfer the oil to the Emulsion sump or any other location within QIT/BRT as
per COMPANY direction.
A.3 Pontoon Cleaning
CONTRACTOR shall drain oil from pontoons of single deck or double deck floating roof, if
found containing oil, and wash/clean with detergent if necessary and make the pontoon gas
free. (Unit rate quoted shall be for each pontoon).
a. Floating roof tank 260' in diameter and 56' in height(QIT)
Page 40 of 407

b. Floating roof tank 300' in diameter and 58' in height(QIT)
c. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height (BRT)
A.4 Roof Deck Cleaning
CONTRACTOR shall drain oil from top deck of single deck or double deck floating roof, if
found containing oil, and wash/clean with detergent if necessary. (Unit rate quoted shall be
for entire roof deck).

c. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height (BRT)
A.5 Recovery of Oil from Sludge
CONTRACTOR shall recover oil from sludge/solids/wax content of the tank using a non-
entry integrated system that receives sludge from the tank and produces Oil, Water and
Solids/Debris. The CONTRACTOR would provide all equipment, temporary storage,
vacuum trucks (if required), and metering to recover maximum oil from the sludge.
Recovered oil shall be transferred to the QIT/BRT emulsion sump by CONTRACTOR or as
directed by MPN.

c. Fixed roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height(QIT)
d. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height (BRT)
e. Fixed roof tank 60' in diameter and 42' in height(BRT)
A.6 Waste Disposal
CONTRACTOR shall dispose all solid and debris generated during entire tank cleaning
operation. The solids and debris removed from the tank shall be weighed by the
CONTRACTOR and witnessed by COMPANY and a document of Duty of Care issued for
onward transportation by roadworthy certified truck to DPR approved Waste disposal
agency/site . The crane, forklifts, load cells and any other equipment for weighing/handling
shall be provided by CONTRACTOR. Duty of Care documents for transporting the solid
waste and debris renders the loaded waste truck the sole responsibility of the
CONTRACTOR.
A.7 Final Washing and Cleaning
CONTRACTOR shall wash and clean the tank internal surface with water/detergent if
necessary and wipe clean with rags/absorbents. Wash water to be transported to designated
tank with in QIT/BRT by COMPANY operations. Contractor Supervisor to enter the tank to
performed the API 2016 checklist and finds the inside of the tank in safe condition,
CONTRACTOR will enter the tank with a minimum of two tank cleaners and remove the
remaining water/oil mixture by washing material to per CONTRACTOR residual cleaning
procedure. Contractor will continue in this manner until tank is cleaned. Tank will be
continuously monitored while personnel are inside of tank.
Page 41 of 407

CONTRACTOR shall complete each activity shown in Appendix A & B, respectively, to
obtain a Gas Free Certified clean tank (Class I entry requirements). Cleanliness of the tank
shall be certified by COMPANY operations to the required Total Petroleum Hydrocarbon
(TPH) standards (Class1entry requirements) per Table 3-4 of Section 3.4.1 of the UN Work
Management System Manaul (pg 3-36).

c. Fixed roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height(QIT)
d. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height (BRT)
e. Fixed roof tank 60' in diameter and 42' in height(BRT)
Page 42 of 407
A.8 Decontamination & Demobilization of Tools & Equipment
Upon completion of the work, all tools and equipment will be properly cleaned and
decontaminated to remove residual process products.
i) DE-ENERGIZE and Properly DRAIN ALL processing equipment

ii) DISCONNECT equipment and hoses
iii) DECONTAMINATE all hoses, tools, and equipment
iv) INSPECT all hose, tools, and equipment to ensure it is free of contamination
of materials or waste
v) TAG and LABEL all trash and debris for disposal
vi) LOAD out all hoses, tools, and equipment
vii) INSPECT jobsite to ensure it is left in a condition equal to or better than
arrival
A.9 Mobilization from one tank site to another tank site
Mobilize from one tank site to another tank site within the QIT/BRT and perform all activities
specified in A.1 (Rate for A.1 will not be applicable when A.9 is applicable)
APPENDIX A – Tank Components to be cleaned to obtain Gas Free Certification

Crude Storage Tank – External Floating Roof
Page 43 of 407
Note: Items excluded for cleaning for Gas Free Certification are Gauging Platform and Wind Girder.
Gas Test 3 Consecutive Shifts to Gas Free Certify:
Date Assigned Supervisor Gas Tests Results (O2, H2S, LEL, THC, CO, BZ)
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
APPENDIX B – Tank Components to be cleaned to obtain Gas Free Certification

Settling Tank – Fixed Cone Roof
Page 44 of 407
Gas Test 3 Consecutive Shifts to Gas Free Certify:
Date Assigned Supervisor Gas Tests Results (O2, H2S, LEL, THC, CO, BZ)
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
__________ ____________________ _________________________________
Page 45 of 407

Section D2
Scope of Work – Tank Revamp
Job Specification
SECTION D2: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK

REVAMP
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 46 of 407

Section D2
A. Scope of Work:
Until tank cleaning, API 653 inspection and joint inspection between MPN and
CONTRACTOR is concluded, the specific scope may not be fully known. The Work Order
for one tank project will be issued with the base estimate by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR
will carry out tank cleaning, API 653 Inspection on the tank and other preparatory works.
Subsequent to the Inspection Report, the Work Order will be supplemented by other repair
items specified in the Inspection Report and accepted by COMPANY. However, the detailed
general scope of work activities that are expected for repair of any tank (Floating Roof Tanks
and Cone Roof Tanks) are as follows:
A.1 General Scope of Work (Floating Roof Tank)

The project general work scope includes but not limited to the engineering, procurement, and
construction for the repair of Floating Roof Tanks. The revamp work for the crude/Pentane
Plus storage tank includes the following major components:
i. Execute repair and replacement work in compliance with API 650, 653 and the MPN
Standard Specifications (Global Practices). In case of conflicts between API and
MPN Standard specifications, MPN standard specifications (Global Practices) shall
take precedence. All other applicable references are listed in Table 1.
ii. Replacement of corroded sections of floating roof and the pontoons (pontoon plates
top/bottom, inner/outer rims, bulkheads, manholes, roof dam, roof vents and roof
drains etc.). The replacement is based on the notable plate defects, excessive metal
loss, and patches.
iii. Replace/repair tank shell plates/bottom plates
iv. Replace primary and secondary seals with new
v. Replace old fire foam ring main and foam nozzles and install new fixed foam system
vi. Repair wind girder and supports
vii. Repair shell stiffeners and supports
viii. Repair emergency escape ladder and rolling ladder
ix. Upgrade roof drainage system (replace existing drain lines with new coflexip hoses)
x. Upgrade tank level gauging system with Enraf Gauging system
xi. Maintenance of external coating, internal lining, and tank base seals
Other findings noted in the incident investigations and the out-of-service inspection reports
will also be addressed. Replacement in-kind of worn or defective material and components is
the preferred approach. Steel plates and structural members will be replaced in line with API
653 and API 650 specifications.
A.2 General Scope of Work (Cone Roof Tank)

The project general work scope includes the engineering, procurement, and construction for
the repair of Fixed Cone Roof Tanks. The repair work for the settling tank includes the
following major components:
i. Removal and replacement of existing columns, rafters and girders with new ones.
ii. Design, fabrication and installation of a new cone roof; design shall include
replacement of all the existing appurtenances including personnel access provisions
with handrails.
iii. Replace/repair shell plates/bottom plates
iv. Remove existing inlet diffuser, and install newly designed and fabricated spreader
bar.
Page 47 of 407

Section D2
v. Remove the existing 30 inch suction internal stand pipe;

vi. Design, supply and install a new floating suction assembly with Stay-tite double
bearing swivel.
vii. Provision of new access platform with appropriate stairway to the shell mounted
instruments/valves
viii. Provision of additional vertical emergency stairway
ix. Remove Tank mixers / heaters with their supports that are corroded and seal the
opening with new manway covers.
x. Replace existing gauging hatch with Shand & Jurs model 95021-03-02-01 or
equivalent
xi. Surface preparation and maintenance lining of all sections of the Tank’s internals
including underside of roof, shell upto full height, all roof supporting structures and
all internal structures and fittings.
xii. Install new downward facing elbow on the existing 24” water suction line and install
a vortex breaker at the bottom of the elbow
xiii. Surface preparation and maintenance coating of all sections of tank’s externals
including roof, handrails, fittings, shell and shell fittings, and all piping and structures
within the tank bund area.
xiv. Surface prep concrete ring wall top, and injecting sealant between the wall and the
chime.
xv. Remove the existing 12 inch PVSV’s on the roof. Supply and install new Protego 10
inch pipe away style vents model # VD/SD-PA-250
xvi. Carry out recalibration of the tank.
xvii. Replacement of the GSI level gauging device with the Enraf level gauging device.
xviii. Providing cable trays and cabling for hooking up the Enraf system and other Controls
system to CCR and concerned pumps/motor controls
xix. Provide Local Control Panels for Enraf and Interface Controls
xx. Refurbish the level switch access platform to safely accommodate operations
personnel for routine maintenance.
xxi. Remove and install 2 new supports at the 30” outlet line to 36” header and the 24”
inlet line
xxii. Remove and install new pipe supports at the water draw-off line MOV and the water
draw-off line check valve
xxiii. Fabricate and install new access platforms with handrails for the inlet header MOV ,
outlet header MOV , header to skimmers MOV
xxiv. Provision of an AGAR or similar instrument to detect and alarm when emulsion is
growing. Provision of an Automatic Interface Control (ILC) for the water-emulsion
interface level control. Inspect and determine requirements to re-commission the
existing ILC. Provide necessary upgrade to make the existing ILC functional.
xxv. Remove existing Lightning arrestor; design, supply and install new Lightning
Arrestor System
xxvi. Provide 2 nos roof manway mounted PVSVs.
xxvii. Remove the existing foam piping system; replace with new foam system including 2
nos laterals & risers and 2 nos. foam pourers.
xxviii. Repair the 1 no. inlet and 1 no. outlet nozzles where existing foam system has been
terminated.
Replacement in-kind of worn or defective material and components is the preferred approach.
Page 48 of 407

Section D2
Page 49 of 407

Section D2
A. DETAILED WORKSCOPE:
The entire tank revamp scope as described below shall be compensated through the following unit rate
items based on relevance/applicability.
1. Preparatory Works
1.1
Mobilization of all facilities, equipment, machinery, vehicles and personnel for executing work in
QIT/BRT tank farm for one tank, including Site preparation for equipment access into the tank bund
area while protecting any MPN pipeline/equipment as directed by MPN. CONTRACTOR shall
supply CAD drawings of access ramps or crossover etc. that may be required for equipment access to
COMPANY for approval prior to installation. Also included are careful dismantling of all light poles
with fixtures, cable & cable trays within bund area and collapsing the cable and burying it
temporarily with appropriate protection to facilitate crew/equipment movement (if required).
1.2 Mobilization from One Tank Site to Another within same terminal:
Mobilize from one tank site to another tank site within the QIT/BRT and perform all activities
specified in 1.1 (Rate for 1.1 will not be applicable when 1.2 is applicable)
1.3 Demobilization:
Demobilization of all contractor equipment, machinery, vehicles, kiosks, caravans, scraps etc. and
restoring bund area grade level and handing over clear possession of company provided laydown area
(if any). Restore the removed cable trays, cables, light poles with fixtures etc. to original state and
COMPANY specification after the project work is over Barrier gate, access ramps/cross overs or
grading material in dyke area shall be removed and bund wall/area restored by CONTRACTOR when
project work inside bund area is completed.
1.4 Install Fencing:

Supply, fabricate, install chain link fencing including posts, concrete, excavation etc. complete around
the perimeter of settling tank sites including two lockable gates as directed by MPN. All fencing shall
be standard height (not less than 6 ft above grade) and made of galvanized chain link type and
maintain till project completion. Include demolition/removal of fencing at the end of the project. Job
will be measured for elevation area of fence.
1.5 Install Fire Screen:

Design, supply, fabricate and install 50' high Fire screen all around the tank only and maintain its
integrity till completion of the project to segregate hot work area from adjacent tanks, includes
necessary foundation and frame structures and removal of the same at the end of the project.
1.6 Leak Testing:

Leak testing of pontoons by low pressure compressed air and repeating the test for affected pontoons
after repairs of detected leaks including making necessary provision/modification to pontoon for
attaching air intake nozzle/temporary cover plate with air intake nozzle, valve other materials as
required for the test and blinding/removing at the end of the test in a manner approved by MPN.
a. 260' dia Single deck Floating Roof with 36/42 pontoons (unit rate shall be for entire
roof covering all pontoons)-QIT
b. 300' dia Single deck Floating Roof with 36 pontoons (unit rate shall be for entire roof
covering all pontoons)-QIT
Page 50 of 407

Section D2
c. 200' dia double deck Floating Roof with 56 pontoons (unit rate shall be for entire roof
covering all pontoons)-BRT
1.7 Clean and Gas Free Floating Roof Pontoons:

Clean the pontoons of any free standing liquid and gas free the area with chemical treatment (if any)
for carrying out hot work.
a. 260' dia Single deck Floating Roof with 36/42 pontoons (unit rate shall be for each
pontoon)-QIT
b. 300' dia Double deck Floating Roof with 36 pontoons (unit rate shall be for each
pontoon)-QIT
c. 200' dia double deck Floating Roof with 56 pontoons (unit rate shall be for each
pontoon)-BRT
1.8 Floating Roof Stabilization:
Provide hardwood cribbing supports and/or structural steel supports below the roof. Allow minimum
of 25% of existing roof support legs as per support plan to be approved by COMPANY. Rate to
include removal/shifting as per job requirement and final removal at the end of construction.
a. For Tanks 260 ft. dia. single/double deck roof-QIT
b. For Tanks 300 ft. dia. double deck roof-QIT
c. For tanks 200 ft. dia double deck roof-BRT
1.9 Tank Inspection:
Carry out API 653 inspection of following tanks as per scope detailed in Appendix C to be conducted
by an authorized inspection agency (having certified API 653 inspector) as defined in API 653 and
approved by COMPANY including making all arrangements, providing necessary equipment, crew,
tools, illumination, access for working in confined space or working at height and submitting report
with drawings and photographs.
a. Tanks 100 ft. dia. cone roof tank-QIT
b. Tanks 260 ft. dia. single deck roof-QIT
c. Tanks 260 ft. dia. double deck roof-QIT
d. Tanks 300 ft. dia. double deck roof-QIT
e. Tanks 200 ft. dia. Double deck roof-BRT
f. Tank 60 ft dia cone roof tank-BRT
1.10 Vacuum Box Testing:

Vacuum box testing of all weld joints of tank bottom and shell to bottom joints including necessary
joint preparation before testing.
a. Tanks 100 ft. dia. tank bottom-QIT
b. Tanks 260 ft. dia. tank bottom -QIT
c. Tanks 300 ft. dia. tank bottom –QIT
d. Tanks 200 ft. dia. Double deck roof-BRT
e. Tank 60 ft dia tank bottom-BRT
Page 51 of 407

Section D2
2 ROOF WORKS
2.1 Cone Roof Demolition and New Roof Installation

Remove existing cone roof and roof support structure consisting of columns, rafters,
girders, cleats, crown plates etc. of 100 ft. dia. settling tanks and replace with a new
cone roof with support structures as per scope detailed in Appendix D.
2.2 Demolition of Existing Single Deck Floating Roof and Installation of New Double
Deck Roof
Remove complete single deck floating roof of 260' dia tank and design, supply,
fabricate, install a new double deck floating roof including providing necessary
temporary supports, doorsheets as required, if doorsheets are removed, the same will
be re-installed at no extra cost. Any damage made to tank shell or bottom has to be
made good at no extra cost to COMPANY. For detailed scope refer Appendix E.
2.3 Demolition Work
2.3.1 Removal of Roof Plates/Rafters and other structural members in Cone and
Floating Roof Tanks as directed by COMPANY
a. from 3/16" up to and including 1/4" plate for roof, lower deck, upper deck, pontoon
rims, pontoon partition plates, foam dam, sub pontoons
b. from 1/4" up to and including 3/8" plate for roof, lower deck, upper deck, pontoon
c. Rafter beams with clips, angle, channel and any other structural sections associated
with roof
2.3.2 Removal of Roof Penetrations (when entire roof is not being demolished)
including all reinforcing pad plates etc.
a. 3" to 6" roof penetrations
b. 20" to 30" roof penetrations
2.4 Roof Plate and Roof Structure Installation
2.4.1 Supply, Fabricate and Install New Roof Plates/Structural Sections Per API
650/653.
a. from 5 mm up to and including 6 mm plate for roof, lower deck, upper deck, pontoon
b. above 6 mm up to and including 10 mm plate for roof, lower deck, upper deck,
pontoon rims, pontoon partition plates, foam dam, sub pontoons
c. Rafter beams with clips, angle, channel and any other structural sections associated
with roof
Page 52 of 407

Section D2
2.4.2 Roof Appurtenances, Accessories & Structures
2.4.2.1 Supply, Fabricate and Install New Roof Manways, Hatches, and
Nozzles per API 650 Complete with Flanges, Gaskets, Hinges, Bolts,
Reinforcement Plate, Cover Plate etc.
a. 6" Roof Nozzles
b. 8" Roof Nozzles
c. 10" Roof Nozzles
d. 12" Roof Nozzles
e. 20" Pontoon Manways
f. 24 " Roof manways
g. 30 " Roof manways
2.4.2.2 Remove and Replace Rolling Ladder Earthing Cable Set

a. Tanks 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT
b. Tanks 300' in diameter and 58' in height-QIT
c. Tanks 200’ in diameter and 54’ in height-BRT
2.4.2.3Removal and like Replacement of Shell Top Angle and Floating

Roof Rim Angle
a. Angle sections up to and including 75 x 75 x 8 mm
b. Angle sections up to and including 100 x 100 x 10 mm
c. Angle sections up to and including 200 x 200 x 25 mm
2.4.2.4 Pontoon Manway Cover Lockdown Arrangement

Add lockdown arrangement to existing pontoon manway cover with
new seal between the pontoon cover and access hole. Pontoon
manway of 20" dia / 24" dia.
2.4.2.5Remove and Replace Coflexip Pipe Drain System:

Supply, fabricate, install 6” dia. Coflexip hoses along with the
bending restrictors, pipe braces, and leg guards after removing these
items and stacking these at designated site. The length of the hose
and Installation shall be done as per manufacturer recommendations.
Refer Appendix F for typical details.
a. Tanks 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT
b. Tanks 300' in diameter and 58' in height-QIT
c. Tanks 200’ in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
2.4.2.6 Roof Drain Sump:

a. Remove existing centre sump of floating roof and supply, fabricate and install new
roof drain sumps per API 650 with 2nos 6" Check Valve
Page 53 of 407

Section D2
b. Supply, fabricate and install new collection sump and connect to existing roof drain
centre sump along with below deck piping (4" dia.) up to 15 m long including pipe
braces/supports etc.
2.4.2.7 Gauge Pole:

Supply, fabricate and install new gauge pole with slots and supports
for cone and floating roof tanks as per appropriate EM Global
Practices with flange, aluminium gauge hatch etc. for the sizes
specified below. All pipes shall be; API 5L Gr B Sch 40. Scope
includes; supply, fabricate, install new stilling well through the
floating roof including SS cover plates, roller guides, nuts, bolts,
gaskets, neoprene seal, 12x8 reducer, modification and expanding
the size of gauger platform etc.
a. 8" gauge pipe

b. 2" pipe with drilled holes including min 5 attachment connections to 8" gauge pipe
c. 12" gauge pipe
2.4.2.8 Floating Roof Support Legs:

Remove and replace Floating roof tank's roof support legs with pin
holes, leg seal, base plate, pad plate & cotter pins, split pins etc. Each
support leg pipe length shall be 3.0 - 4.0 meter. Where leg sleeves are
required to be replaced, scope shall include; supply, fabricate and
install support leg sleeves with pad plates. Each support leg sleeve
length shall be 2.0 - 3.0 meter.
a. 3" dia. Sch. 80 pipe support legs.

b. 4" dia. Sch. 40 pipe leg sleeves.
2.4.2.9 Remove and Replace Pad Plates

Remove existing pad plates and supply, fabricate and install new top
reinforcement pad plates 600 mm dia. and suitable gusset plates for
the existing leg sleeves.
2.5 Blasting and Coating of roof

Surface preparation to SP 10 standards and maintenance coating of the total external
surface of the roof of tank with Zinc rich epoxy primer, HB epoxy intermediate and
final coat of Paint (system M of GP 56-02-03) manufactured by approved vendors of
ExxonMobil as per Appendix G.
a. Cone Roof Tanks 100' in diameter-QIT
b. Floating roof Tank 260' in diameter-QIT
c. Floating roof Tank 300' in diameter-QIT
d. Touch up Coating with surface preparation and a 3 coat system for identified areas on the roof
surface. Refer Appendix G for details-QIT/BRT
e. Floating roof Tank 200' in diameter –BRT
f. Cone Roof Tanks 60' in diameter-BRT
Page 54 of 407

Section D2
2.6 Floating Roof Seal:

Remove existing mechanical shoe type primary and secondary seal and supply and
install new Mechanical Shoe type primary roof seal and secondary seal with metallic
weather shield and bonding shunts on the top, stainless steel hardware and PTFE or
equivalent seal fabric. This item will not be applicable if item 2.2 is opted.
a. Floating roof Tank 260' in diameter-QIT
b. Floating roof Tank 300' in diameter-QIT
c. Floating roof Tank 200' in diameter-BRT
Page 55 of 407

Section D2
3 SHELL WORKS
3.1 Remove and Replace Shell Plates, Insert Plates, Door Sheets or Wind Girder
3.1.1 Remove and Replace Shell Plates
Remove existing and supply, fabricate and install new shell plates, insert plate, door sheet in
identified shell courses at any height per API 653 and COMPANY standards. Plates shall conform to
ASTM A36 or original spec. Door sheet for construction access shall have necessary supports to
prevent shell deformation.
a. Up to and including 3/8" thick plates
b. Above 3/8" and up to and including 7/8" thick plates
c. Greater than 7/8" thick plates
3.1.2 Remove and Replace Wind Girder

Remove existing (either in part or full) and supply, fabricate and install new primary/secondary wind
girder plates (6mm to 10mm) and all kinds of structural sections for its support brackets, hand rails,
posts, mid rail, kicker plate, shell stiffeners, beams, channels etc. as identified by COMPANY.
3.1.3 Remove and Replace Complete Shell Course

Remove complete shell course or shell ring of certain width determined by COMPANY and replace
with same number of shell course/s or more with designed width and thickness. Scope includes
supply, fabricate and install new shell plates for working at any height, access arrangement, proper
support to prevent shell distortion when plate is removed.
3.1.4 Remove Shell Attachment:

Remove any small attachment of the tank shell weighing less than 25kg e.g. roof stopper which is not
associated with any other removal item and not covered elsewhere in the unit rate table.
3.2 Blasting and Coating of Shell (External)

Surface preparation and maintenance lining of the entire external surface of the shell including all
appurtenances and fittings, stairways, platforms, wind girders etc. as per specification detailed in
Appendix-G .
a. Cone roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height-QIT
b. Floating roof tank 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT
c. Floating roof tank 300' in diameter and 58' in height-QIT
d. Coating with complete surface preparation and coating as detailed in
Appendix G for specific areas of the shell and top surface of roof after
inspection-QIT/BRT
e. Top coat touch up with only the top coat paint in line with the
specifications detailed in Appendix G for identified areas on the roof
surface including surface preparation on the intermediate coat for proper
bonding-QIT/BRT
f. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
g. Cone Roof Tanks 60' in diameter-BRT
3.3 Blasting and Coating of Shell (Internal) Top 1 meter band

Surface preparation and maintenance lining of the internal surface of one meter band from the shell
top angle/curb angle with aluminium surface tolerant epoxy, surface preparation to near white metal
Page 56 of 407

Section D2
blast SSPC SP10, primer, intermediate coat and top coat with paints of approved vendors of
ExxonMobil. DFT of the coats shall be as per manufacturer's recommendation. Refer Appendix G.
a. Floating roof tanks 260' in diameter-QIT
b. Floating roof tanks 300' in diameter-QIT
c. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter -BRT
3.4 Manways and Nozzles

Supply, fabricate, and install shell nozzles in shell in the field as per API 650, API 653. Scope
includes reinforcement pad, nozzle, associated weld neck flange, cover plate, Nuts & bolts, gaskets
and testing. Scope of work and rate shall include removing the existing shell nozzles & pad plates.
a. 4" CS nozzle (thickness of shell 5/8" through 7/8")
b. 6"or 8" CS nozzle (thickness of shell 1" through 1.5")
c. 16" CS nozzle (thickness of shell 1" through 1.5")
d. 24" CS nozzle (thickness of shell 5/8" through 7/8")
e. 30" CS nozzle (thickness of shell 1" through 1.5")
f. 30" Shell Manway (thickness of shell 1" through 1.5")
Page 57 of 407

Section D2
4 BOTTOM WORKS
4.1 Demolition and Removal Work:

Removal of tank bottom plates (applicable for both sketch plate and annular plate ) using hot/cold
cutting procedures as necessary, remove existing tank floor and annular plates and store them at
location identified by COMPANY.
a. 6 to 8mm thick plate
b. 10 to 14mm thick plates
c. 15 to 18mm thick plates
4.2 Install Tank Bottom plates:

Supply, fabricate and install in position new bottom plates (applicable for sketch plate and annular
plate) as per API 653/650 in locations where the bottom plates have been removed under item
no.6.1a/b/c/ or for patch plating.
a. 6 mm to 8 mm thick carbon steel plate
b. 10mm to 14 mm thick carbon steel plate
c. 15 mm to 18 mm thick carbon steel plate
4.3 Blasting and Coating of Tanks’ Internal Surfaces:

Cone roof tank scope shall include; surface preparation to SSPC SP 5 standards and maintenance
coating of the underside of roof, shell internal surface and tank bottom.
Floating roof tank scope shall include; surface preparation to SSPC 5 standards and maintenance
coating of the tank bottom and shell internal surface up to 2m from bottom.
Paint for both types of tanks internal painting shall be; Marine epoxy primer, intermediate and final
coat as per Appendix G.
a. Cone roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height-QIT
b.Floating roof tanks 260' in diameter -QIT
c. Floating roof tanks 300' in diameter -QIT
d.Touch up coating with complete surface preparation and 3 coat system
application for specific areas as identified by COMPANY.-QIT/BRT
e. Floating roof tanks 200' in diameter –BRT
f. Cone roof tank 60 ft dia and 42 ft high-BRT
4.4 Supply and Install Joint Sealant at Chime:

Seal the gap between tank chime and concrete ring wall by installing mastic sealant with necessary
backer rod. Sealant shall be thiokol 2235M over a primer of thiokol 5050 of PolySpec. Surface
preparation and installation shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications as in Appendix
H.
4.5 Tank Bottom Bed Lining Installation:

Supply and install 4" thick asphalt and sand mix for tank bottom where motorized equipment can be
used for floating and cone roof tank.
Page 58 of 407

Section D2
5 PIPE WORKS
5.1 Demolition and Removal Works
5.1.1 Removal of Piping:
Remove of large bore carbon steel pipework over 2" diameter (excluding steam coils) where hot work
is permissible and stack the removed pipes at a designated place within company terminal as directed.
a. Remove 3" piping
b. Remove 4" piping
c. Remove 6" piping
d. Remove 8" piping
e. Remove 30" piping
f. Remove 10”NPS to 24” NPS piping
5.1.2 Removal of Valves

Remove various size valves / NRV for size range as below and stack these at site as directed.
a. from 2 1/2 inch to 6 inch
b. from 8 inch to 10 inch
c. from 12 inch to 30 inch
5.2 Piping installation works:
5.2.1 Installation of Piping:

Supply, fabricate and install new CS seamless pipeline of following sizes conforming to API-5L grade
B schedule 40 scope includes supply, fabrication and installation of pipe supports.
a. install 4" piping
b. install 6" piping
c. install 8” piping
d. install 10” piping
e. install 12” piping
f. install 16” piping
g. install 20” piping
h. install 24” piping
i. install 30” piping
5.2.2 Install Pipe Fittings:

Supply, fabricate & install the following pipe fittings - Sch.40 Carbon Steel.
a. 6" - 90 deg. elbows

b. 6" - 45 deg. elbows
c. 6" - Tee
d. 4" - 45 deg. Elbows
e. 6" x 4" Concentric Reducers
f. 10” to 12”- 90 degree elbows
g. 16” to 20”- 90 degree elbows
h. 24” to 30”- 90 degree elbows
i. 10” to 12”- equal Tee
Page 59 of 407

Section D2
j. 16” to 20”- equal Tee

k. 24” to 30”- equal Tee
5.2.3 Install Flanged Joints:

Supply, fabricate, install flanged joints on large bore pipework with supply and installation of CS
ASA-150# RF serrated flanges (2 nos.) complete with making joints using CAF gaskets & Nut-bolts.
a. 4" flange joints
b. 6" flange joints
c. 8" flange joints
d. 10" flange joints
e. 12" flange joints
f. 16" flange joints
g. 20" flange joints
h. 24" flange joints
i. 30" flange joints
5.2.4 Handling and installation of MPN issue valves

Handling and installation of previously removed/free-issue valves of following sizes including supply
of all nuts, bolts and gaskets, bonding wire required for the installation.
a. Upto and including 8” size valves
b. From 10” to 16” size valves
c. From 20” to 30” size valves
5.3 Install Inlet Spreader Pipe in Cone Roof Tank:

Remove existing 24” inlet nozzle and spreader bar of settling tanks and replace with new 24” inlet
nozzle and 30" dia. Spreader bar and other components as per Appendix I.
5.4 Install Inlet Spreader Pipe in Floating Roof Tank:

Remove existing spreader bar of floating roof storage tanks and replace with 30" dia. Spreader bar
and other components as per Appendix I.
5.5 Install Floating Suction System:

Remove existing 30" vertical outlet pipe inside cone roof tank and design, supply, install and
commission new Floating Suction System suitable for the 30” suction nozzle of the tank. The system
should as a minimum have support bench on tank floor, central swivel joint on double bearings (make
Staytite or approved equivalent) with float and the submerged pipeline, designed to suck crude from
an elevation of about 42 ft. in compliance with requirements of GP and OEM standards. Refer
Appendix J for further details.
5.6 Install Stainless Steel Piping:

Supply, fabricate, install SS316 - Sch. 40S (minimum wall thickness) Stainless Steel pipe and fittings
of following sizes (Applicable for excess piping than what is specified in Foam System Upgrade)
a. 6" SS piping
b. 8" SS piping
c. 6" - 90 deg. SS elbows
Page 60 of 407

Section D2
d. 6" - SS Tee
5.7 Install Vortex Breaker:

Supply, fabricate and Install 24 inch CS A 234 WPB, 90 deg. Standard sch elbow and vortex breaker
on 24" line inside of the Tank. Include supply and welding of 24 inch flanges on elbow to connect to
existing water drainage nozzle.
5.8 Install Pipe Supports:

Supply, fabricate / construct and install miscellaneous pipe supports as described below. (Applicable
for foam system lateral length beyond 200m specified in foam upgrade system)
5.8.1 Structural Steel Supports:

All types of steel support of either welded or bolted construction including neoprene coated U-bolt,
neoprene spacer etc. complete. (Measured only for steel sections)
5.8.2 Concrete Sleeper Supports:

Install concrete sleeper supports / foundation with all associated works; reinforcement, excavation,
backfilling, including supply of materials, labour equipment etc.
5.9 Pipeline / Equipment Coating:

Surface preparation and maintenance coating of the external surface of the pipelines of various sizes.
Surface preparation to Near White Metal blast SSPC SP 10, primer with Organic Zinc rich epoxy,
HB epoxy intermediate coat with urethane final coat of approved make as per Appendix G. Scope
includes surface preparation of equipment involving solvent washing, hand sanding, blasting where
possible etc. as approved.
Page 61 of 407

Section D2
6 FOAM SYSTEM UPGRADE:

Remove existing foam system & stack at designated site and design, supply, fabricate, install, test and
commission the upgraded foam system for tanks specified below, using designed sizes of lateral / riser
stainless steel piping SS 316 of UP TO 200 M length, distribution ring length to suit tank diameter,
including concrete sleeper and structural pipe supports as required. (additional lateral / riser length, if
any, will be paid under item 5.6 Scope includes all pipes, pipe-fittings, flanges, elbows, tees, reducers,
valves, non-return valves, drain valves, storz couplings with chained cover, foam makers, windshield,
foam chambers, foam monitors, nuts, bolts, gaskets, structural sections, reinforced concrete work,
excavation, crash barrier, neoprene coated u- bolts, pipe wrap for underground section and all other
items as per Appendix K.
a. Floating roof Tank 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT

b. Floating roof Tank 300' in diameter and 58' in height_QIT
c. Cone roof Tanks 100' in diameter x 48' in height-QIT
d. Floating roof Tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
e. Cone Roof Tanks 60' in diameter and 42’ high-BRT
Page 62 of 407

Section D2
7 ANCILLARY WORK
7.1 Remove Mixers

Decommission and remove tank mixer and cable connections including securing both the cable ends
in approved manner. (Typical mixer is installed in a 30" manway.)
7.2 Remove and Replace

Remove items specified below and stack at a designated place inside QIT/BRT. Scope includes
supply, fabricate and install new components and all associated fittings for replacement or re-install
the existing components:
a. Remove existing safety gate at the entrance of spiral stairway and replace with modified
lockable design.
b. Remove vertical access ladder (Emergency escape) on the tank 260' dia. x 56' high and
replace with new design complete with rungs, cage, intermediate and top landing platform,
grounding, etc.
c. Remove complete spiral access stairway on tank 100' dia. x 48' high and replace with new
design complete with intermediate and top landing platforms, handrails, treads, grounding,
toe guard, midrail etc.
d. Remove complete spiral access stairway on tank 260' dia. x 56' high and replace with new
design complete with two intermediate and top landing platforms, handrails, treads,
grounding, toe guard, midrail etc.
e. Remove Access Stairway tread of 760mm x 255mm and replace with new stairway tread
(when 7.2c & 7.2d are not opted)
7.3 Install New Steel Platforms / Walkways:

Supply, Fabricate and Install MOV access platforms, Level switch access platform, vertical access
ladder, pipeline crossovers, walkway with galvanized serrated grating floor panel along with hand rail
including necessary foundation works like excavation, concrete, foundation bolt, painting as per
ExxonMobil GP/industry standards.
7.4 Install 30” Manway Covers:

Supply, Fabricate and Install 30” ribbed manway covers suitable for tanks; 300' dia. X 58' high, 260’
dia. X 56’ high and 100’ dia. X 48’ high
7.5 Remove and replace RGA in Floating Roof:

Remove the existing Retractable Grounding Assemblies (RGAs) in the tank and replace with new
Moveable Arm Grounding System (MAGS) roof bonding system of Lightning Master Corporation,
USA. Complete installation shall be re-certified as required by MPN. (Unit rate shall be for each
MAGS)
7.6 Remove and replace Dissipation Array System:

Remove existing Dissipation Array System and supply/install new Lightning Protection System
consisting of air streaming terminal of Lightning Master Corporation, USA on new structural supports
to be mounted on the tank shell as per OEM recommendations. The new lightning system shall be re-
certified as required by MPN.
Page 63 of 407

Section D2
a. For Floating roof tank 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT

b. for Floating roof tank 300' in diameter and 58' in height-QIT
c. for Fixed roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height-QIT
d. For Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
7.7 Install Dewatering System:

Supply, install and commission Automatic Agar system and Dewatering system including
Fisher/Emerson Electric make 10" control valve (Type V150) / actuator (Type 1052) / DVC 2000
series digital controller. Supply, installation of all accessories e.g. cables, cable tray, cable glands etc.
and integrating with the control panel complete. Refer Appendix L (Automatic Interface Control) for
detailed scope.
7.8 Install New Control Panel:

Supply, install, commission new PLC Control Panel for a typical storage tank for controlling /
monitoring instruments like Enraf Gauge, Magnetrol Level Switch, Proximity Switch and including
existing wonderware software upgrade in HMI/PLC etc. Refer Appendix N for detailed scope; (not
applicable if7.9 is opted)
7.9 Install New Interface Panel:

Supply, install, commission new interface panel (without PLC) for a typical storage
tank to be integrated with the existing PLC Control Panel. Refer Appendix N detailed
scope; (not applicable if 7.8 is applicable)
7.10 Remove and Install Tank Gauging System:

Remove existing mechanical Tank Gauging System and supply, install and commission new Enraf
system with new Enraf Automatic Gauge as per Appendix M.
a. Floating roof Tanks 200’, 260' or 300' in diameter and upto 58' in height
b. Settling Tanks 100' in diameter x 48' in height
7.11 Supply and install Power / Instrument Cables:

Supply and install following power/Instrument cables including flameproof glands and cable trays
related to Enraf, Agar control, Proximity switches, control valve or Magnetrol level switches. This
item will be applicable for extra quantity outside the specified quantity for respective job item.
a. 1P x 16AWG, Type 1 (MC-HL BC PVC/NYL 600V BLK/WHT/#5 FOIL SHLD

ARMOR-X PVC JKT IEEE 1202)
b. 2P x 16AWG, Type 1 (MC-HL BC PVC/NYL 600V BLK/WHT/#S FOIL SHLD
c. 3C X 14AWG Type 2 (Class B, stranded, bare, annealed copper, XLP insulation Type
UL-XHHW2 & CSA RW90, insulated conductors cabled with single UL grnd
uninsulated grnd wire and fillers, Inner & overall Jkt-BLK sunlight PVC low acid gas
jkt, An AL interloked armor with UL1569, ICEA &CSA, 600V, 90 deg. C)
d. NORTEK OR OKONITE MAKE 9C X 14AWG Type 2 (Class B, stranded, bare,
annealed copper, XLP insulation Type UL-XHHW2 & CSA RW90, insulated
conductors cabled with single UL grnd uninsulated grnd wire and fillers,Inner &
Page 64 of 407

Section D2
overall Jkt-BLK sunlight PVC low acid gas jkt,An AL interloked armor with
UL1569, ICEA &CSA, 600V, 90 deg C)
e. OKONITE OR NORTEK MAKE 3C x 12 AWG Class B stranded, bare, annealed CU
ASTM B-3 B-8, XLP, BLK sunlight resistant PVC (inner & outer JKT) to ICEA, AL
interlocked armor UL1569 ICEA& CSA, 600V, 90 deg C.
f. NORTEK OR OKONITE MAKE 14C X 14AWG Type 2 (Class B, stranded, bare,
annealed copper, XLP insulation Type UL-XHHW2 & CSA RW90, insulated
conductors cabled with single UL grnd uninsulated grnd wire and fillers,Inner &
overall Jkt-BLK sunlight PVC low acid gas jkt,An AL interloked armor with
UL1569, ICEA &CSA, 600V, 90 deg C)
g. 2P x 18AWG, Type 1 (MC-HL BC PVC/NYL 600V BLK/WHT/#S FOIL SHLD
h. 16AWG-2P MC-HL BC PVC/NYL 600V ARMOR – X BLK/WHT/# EA PR
IND+OA SHD PVC JKT IEEE1202
i. 10AWG – 11C MC – HL BC XLP 600V 90C CC: E2 1X#10 GRDS ARMOR – X –
40 PVC JKT 1EEE1202
j. 18AWG-25P OKONITE BC 600V 30 XLP INS W/GRD PVC JKT AIA BLK PVC
JKT UL CSA
k. 10C X 10AWG MC – HL BC XLP 600V 90C CC: E2 1X#10 GRDS ARMOR – X –
40 PVC JKT IEEE1202
7.12 Supply and Install Fibre Optic Cables:
Supply and install Fiber Optic cable, single mode, 8 strands minimum, including patch panels.
8 WELD REPAIR:
Remove defective butt, fillet or lap weld, prepare and re-weld and carry out appropriate NDT on the
new weld. (applicable for max plate thickness of 10 mm and 5 mm fillet weld) (rate shall be for unit
length in meter).
Page 65 of 407

Section D2
9 TESTING:
9.1 Hydrostatic Test:
Hydrostatic testing of tanks as per API 650 including all necessary
connections, equipment/pump set, labour, corrosion inhibitor, access,
disconnection, removal at the end of testing complete.
a. Floating roof tank 260' in diameter and 56' in height-QIT

c. Fixed roof tank 100' in diameter and 48' in height-QIT
d. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
9.2 Floating Roof Tanks Roof Floatation Test:

Floatation Test including all necessary connections, equipment/pumpset, labour,
corrosion inhibitor, access, disconnection, removal at the end of testing complete.
(not applicable if item 9.1 is opted)

c. Floating roof tank 200' in diameter and 54' in height-BRT
Page 66 of 407

Section D2
10 TANKS RECALIBRATION
10.1 Tank Calibration - OPTION I (Option shall be determined by COMPANY)

Recalibration of tanks with DPR approved agency. Tank shall be manually strapped
with the tank empty and the bottom calibration shall be done with approved liquid
metering method. The Calibration Charts shall be approved by DPR and submitted to
COMPANY. Special attention shall be paid to tank shell, internals and deadwood for
calibration compensations following modifications to roof drain piping. All costs
associated with execution of job and liaison with DPR etc. shall be included in the
rate.

10.2 Tank Calibration – OPTION II (Option to be determined by COMPANY)

Recalibration of tanks shall be performed by a DPR approved vendor. The tank
calibration shall be accomplished using an API / ISO approved Electro-Optical
Distance Ranging (EODR) and result in the issuance of certified API Tank Tables.
Tank Tables shall be approved by the DPR for use and submitted to COMPANY.
Tank floor bottom calibration (when required) shall be performed using approved
liquid metering method. Special attention shall be paid to tank shell, internals and
deadwood for calibration compensations following modifications to roof drain piping.
All costs associated with execution of job and liaison with DPR etc. shall be included
in the rate

Page 67 of 407

Section D2
11 Design Engineering and Document & Data Submission and Handover

Requirements
CONTRACTOR shall carry out detailed engineering for the works to be executed and shall manage
design engineering, procurement, construction and completions documentation in accordance with the
requirements defined in the JOB SPECIFICATION Contract Coordination Procedure Section F
CONTRACTOR shall produce a “List of Deliverables”, as required and identified in various sections
of the JOB SPECIFICATION, which shall be submitted to COMPANY for review and acceptance.
The “List of Deliverables” shall include a schedule of delivery for the documentation which shall be
linked to Work Scope delivery Milestones. Submission dates of documents for COMPANY review,
as recorded in the “List of Deliverables“, shall be tracked and progress reported within Contractor’s
monthly reports.

12 Tank Jacking Up
Install hydraulic synchronous jacking system including design and construct necessary foundation,
necessary steel work to jack up the tank shell up to a height of 3.2m from top of tank foundation and
maintaining it in jacked up condition till the revamp work is completed by CONTRACTOR. Unit rate
quoted shall be lumpsum all inclusive cost for each type of tank.

13 Descaling of Installed Piping
Descaling of installed piping/valves/fittings emanating from and connected to tankage system at

QIT/BRT terminals using chemical/mechanical means including removal of pipe spools if
required and re-installation. Job includes providing all necessary arrangements required for the
purpose of descaling. Scales to be collected and handed over to MPN for safe disposal. ( Rate to
be quoted per meter of the piping cleaned)
a. Upto and including 8” piping

b. From 10” to 16” piping
c. From 20” to 30” piping
14 Appendices
Appendix A Scaffolding
Page 68 of 407

Section D2
Appendix B Tank Drawings

Appendix C Tank Inspection
Appendix D Cone Roof Demolition and Replacement
Appendix E Single Deck Floating Roof Demolition and Replace with
double Deck Roof
Appendix F Roof Drain Modification
Appendix G Painting Specification
Appendix H Joint Sealant
Appendix I Spreader Bar
Appendix J Floating Suction
Appendix K Foam System Upgrade
Appendix L Dewatering Control System
Appendix M Tank Gauging System
Appendix N New Control Panel
Page 69 of 407

JOB SPECIFICATION Section E
Schedule Basis
SECTION E: SCHEDULE BASIS
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 70 of 407

Schedule Basis
A. Purpose
The information in this Section E defines timing and scheduling requirements relevant to the
performance of the WORK. The Company Plan is an integrated execution plan that reflects not
only CONTRACTOR's WORK but also the activities of COMPANY’s other contractors. It
defines the overall timing and scheduling of activities and site access windows that are available
to the various Contractors working on the Project. It also contains key activities where interfaces
among the COMPANY's various contractors are critical. Cooperation, interface management,
and timely communication among the various Contractors on the project will be critical to the
success of the overall Project.
B.Definitions
Throughout this document, words and expressions established as defined terms in the Principal
Document - Article 1 shall apply. Other words, expressions, and abbreviations used in this
section are defined below.
Company Plan is an integrated execution plan prepared by COMPANY that reflects not only
CONTRACTOR's WORK but also the activities of COMPANY’s other contractors.
Contract Control Schedule is a CONTRACTOR-generated document specifying the order and

estimated times in which all the various parts of the WORK, including the Schedule Milestones,
are to be completed. The Contract Control Schedule shall include, as a minimum, all of the
Schedule Milestones more fully described in Appendix 2.
Milestone Completion for each Milestone shall be deemed to occur on the date COMPANY
issues the appropriate Milestone Completion Certificate.
Milestone Completion Certificate for each Milestone is a document to be issued by COMPANY

signifying COMPANY’s agreement that the Milestone and all previously planned WORK
activities defined in the Contract Control Schedule are complete according to the JOB
SPECIFICATION. The Milestone Completion Certificate shall stipulate the date Milestone
Completion has occurred.
Schedule Milestone(s) are specific parts of the WORK.
Scheduled Milestone Completion Date(s) are the date(s) by which CONTRACTOR has agreed
to achieve Milestone Completion for each Schedule Milestone.
Schedule Control: is an activity which continuously predicts final schedule outcomes based on
project experience to date (forecast) and applying corrective actions where necessary to help
control the forecast within the approved schedule.
Cost Control: is an activity which continuously predicts final cost outcomes based on project
experience to date (forecast) and applying corrective actions where necessary to help control the
forecast within the approved budget.
Page 71 of 407

Schedule Basis
C. Company Plan
The Company Plan specifies the overall schedule for the Project. The Company Plan is an integrated
execution plan that reflects not only CONTRACTOR's WORK but also the activities of COMPANY
and other COMPANY’s contractors. The Company Plan is included as Appendix 1.
CONTRACTOR’s planning and scheduling of the WORK shall be based on, and consistent with, the
Company Plan.
The Company Plan contains an execution sequence that depicts the overall schedule and Appendix 2
describes key Schedule Milestones to achieve the overall project objectives and for those activities
where interfaces among the various COMPANY contractors are critical. These key Schedule
Milestones, and the associated interfaces, are particularly important for proper planning and execution
of activities where several contractor activities are dependent on each other or may be occurring
simultaneously.
D. Schedule Milestones
For schedule control purposes, the completion of certain parts of the WORK is referred to as
Schedule Milestones and have been described in Appendix 2. The Schedule Milestones are key
events that form the basis of planning and scheduling the project and reflect completion of significant
parts of the WORK. Any slippage of these Schedule Milestones may impact the activities of other
contractors working on the Project and the overall Project completion date.
The Coordination Procedure sets forth detailed requirements for the preparation, management, and
control of the Contract Control Schedule. The Contract Control Schedule shall include Contractor's
Plan to complete each Schedule Milestone on or before the Scheduled Milestone Completion Dates
stipulated in Appendix 2. Completion of each Milestone includes, but is not limited to, submittal of
all required documentation to COMPANY, completion of repairs, inspections, and non-destructive
examinations to COMPANY's satisfaction. Milestones shall only be considered complete when all
portions of the WORK included in the appropriate Milestone description and the Contract Control
Schedule, including all prior WORK activities (defined in the Contract Control Schedule), are
complete to COMPANY's satisfaction as evidenced by a Milestone Completion Certificate.
No adjustments to Scheduled Milestone Completion Dates or the SCHEDULED COMPLETION
DATE may be made except by the use of CHANGE ORDERS as described in Article 7 of the
Principal Document.
E. Contract Control Schedule
The Contract Control Schedule sets forth CONTRACTOR's definitive plans for performing the
WORK, including the Schedule Milestones, and defines the order, estimated duration and dates in
which key parts of the WORK are planned to be completed including histograms of direct manpower
(by craft), subcontract, indirect, and total manpower for each major construction related work
breakdown structure area. The Contract Control Schedule is included as Appendix 3.
F. Schedule Control
CONTRACTOR-PMT shall include a dedicated full time planning engineer with experience in
Tank cleaning and revamp to steward development of work packs and detailed execution
schedule (level IV - resource loaded) for all aspects of the WORK.
The planning engineer shall maintain, monitor, control and report progress throughout the
duration of the project.
Page 72 of 407

Schedule Basis
CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY access, without restriction, to all information inputted
to and generated under CONTRACTOR's Schedule Control Systems, including, but not limited to
the following;
» Planning and scheduling
» Progress measurement
» Resource loading and man-hours
» Benchmark data and productivity data etc.
This access shall be for data at any level, including interface data and data prepared by
CONTRACTOR.
 CONTRACTOR shall develop schedule in a hierarchical manner, and shall maintain the
ability to roll up individual activity assessments into an overall schedule assessment for
the WORK.
 CONTRACTOR's schedule shall reflect the entire WORK and provide sufficient details
in all areas of project execution
» Development of plans and procedures
» Final documentation, as-builting
» Project close-out etc.
 Schedule shall incorporate the SCHEDULE MILESTONES.
 CONTRACTOR shall include plan versus actual histograms and forecast histograms of direct
resources (by discipline/craft) and total resources for the WORK. These histograms shall include
the following:
» Man-power adjustments and productivity
» Productivity forecasts through completion
» Work-hours per percent complete
 CONTRACTOR shall provide time-resource (TR) sheets during execution phase to include the
following:
i. A description of each activity and descriptions of the resources including man-hours, materials
and equipment to be utilized in completing each activity and the duration of time for which the
resources will be employed.
ii. Construction work-hours broken down by discipline/craft.
iii. Material and equipment descriptions including type and quantity to be used for the execution of
the WORK.
 CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY with CONTRACTOR's schedule both in print and
electronic copy (PDF and native Primavera backup file PRX or .XER file and/or Microsoft
Project back up file MPP), which shall include all information necessary to duplicate
CONTRACTOR's schedule, progress measurement, and resource requirements.
 As requested by COMPANY or when schedule slips up to 5% of the baseline agreed at project
kick off, CONTRACTOR shall immediately provide a schedule recovery plan.
Page 73 of 407

Schedule Basis
 CONTRACTOR shall develop a progress measurement system that incorporates all activities
consistent with the milestone payment schedule for COMPANY review and approval prior to
project kick off meeting.
 CONTRACTOR shall submit weekly updated S-curves tracking baseline versus actual work
progress throughout the duration of the project.
G. COST CONTROL
CONTRACTOR shall track and report project cost performance on plan, actual and forecast basis
throughout the duration of the project on a weekly and monthly basis.
Appendix 1
COMPANY PLAN
Page 74 of 407

Schedule Basis
Page 75 of 407
Tender Number – 00000144 JOB SPECIFICATION
Section E
Schedule Basis
Appendix 1
COMPANY PLAN
To Be Determined at Time of Work Order Execution
To Be Inserted
Page 76 of 407

Schedule Basis
Appendix 2
SCHEDULE MILESTONES
Page 77 of 407

Schedule Basis
Storage & Settling Tanks Revamp Program

SCHEDULE MILESTONES
Item
Milestone # Week
#
Work Order Award 0
MILESTONES TO BE NEGOTIATED AT TIME OF

WORK ORDER EXECUTION
Page 78 of 407

Schedule Basis
Storage & Settling Tanks Revamp Program

MILESTONE INFORMATION TABLE
Item
Milestone Title Intent of Milestone Deliverables/Specific Actions
No.
1 Work Order Award  To initiate WORK  Contract execution and WORK initiation
2  
3  
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
Page 79 of 407

Schedule Basis
Appendix 3
CONTRACTOR's CONTROL SCHEDULE
Page 80 of 407

Schedule Basis
(CONTRACTOR's Control Schedule submitted with Technical Proposal to be

inserted here)
Page 81 of 407
Tender Number – 00000144 JOB SPECIFICATION Section F

Coordination Procedure
Job Specification
[Contract Number – WS2682825
SECTION F: COORDINATION PROCEDURE
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 82 of 407

Preface
The COORDINATION PROCEDURE sets forth administrative and procedural requirements to be
met by COMPANY and CONTRACTOR in performing the WORK.
The COORDINATION PROCEDURE specifies requirements regarding Systems,

Procedures, Project Plans, reporting, reviews, workshops, and assessments.
The COORDINATION PROCEDURE describes the requirements for planning, coordinating,
and administering various elements of the WORK.
Each section of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE covers a separate topic and consists of
the following major subsections:
1) COMPANY Duties
2) CONTRACTOR Duties
3) Systems, Procedures, and Plans
4) Reports
COMPANY provided documents referenced in this COORDINATION PROCEDURE are
included in Section G - DESIGN BASIS DOCUMENTS of the JOB SPECIFICATION.
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of these COMPANY-provided
documents.
The COORDINATION PROCEDURE includes Special Conditions.
Page 83 of 407

1. Introduction
This Coordination Procedure provides detail regarding administrative responsibilities of and
interfaces between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR. This Coordination Procedure also serves to
describe the following:
1) Minimum requirements for the execution of specified elements of the WORK.
2) Guidelines that facilitate alignment between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
3) Involvement by COMPANY in monitoring and appraising the WORK and results thereof.
Terms that are fully capitalized are defined in the Principal Document (e.g. CONTRACTOR,
COMPANY, and WORK), and those terms defined elsewhere in this CONTRACT and in this
Coordination Procedure, begin with a capital letter (e.g. Project).
1.1 COMPANY Duties

COMPANY will perform the following:
1) Interpret CONTRACT requirements and provide additional information, as may be requested by
CONTRACTOR and that COMPANY judges is necessary to perform the WORK.
2) May modify the COORDINATION PROCEDURE requirements at any time upon giving notice
to CONTRACTOR.
3) Monitor and appraise the WORK for compliance with the CONTRACT.
4) Plan and conduct Independent Project Reviews (IPRs) throughout the performance of the WORK.
COMPANY's IPR activities include the following:
a) Notify CONTRACTOR 30 days in advance of IPRs

Identify CONTRACTOR personnel and DOCUMENTS required to support the IPR two
weeks prior to the IPR
Interview CONTRACTOR's Key Personnel (generally one to two hours per interview)
Review DOCUMENTS selected by COMPANY
1.2 CONTRACTOR Duties

CONTRACTOR shall perform the following activities:
1) Systematically manage the WORK
2) Maintain close management alignment with COMPANY during execution of the WORK
3) Provide all information requested by COMPANY to support COMPANY's appraisal of
CONTRACTOR's performance of the WORK, including performance of CONTRACTOR's
Suppliers and Subcontractors. Such information may include, without limitation, the following:
a) CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor systems, methods, and procedures for performing the
WORK
Calculations, estimates, working drawings, specifications, purchase requisitions, and
recommendations
Estimates
Labour productivity data
Schedules
Alternative studies
Page 84 of 407

4) Actively support and administer lessons learned as follows:

a) Develop a Lessons Learned Procedure for identifying, analyzing, documenting, and
implementing lessons learned.
a) Participate in COMPANY-sponsored lessons learned workshops as requested by
COMPANY.
a) Maintain a Lessons Learned Register for documenting lessons learned activities throughout
the duration of the Project. This register shall include information regarding lessons learned
identification, analysis, and implementation of planned upgrades.
5) Support COMPANY IPRs conducted periodically throughout the performance of the WORK.
IPRs typically require two to three days of CONTRACTOR involvement. CONTRACTOR's IPR
responsibilities include the following requirements:
a) Provide all DOCUMENTS selected by COMPANY one week in advance of IPRs
b) Make available CONTRACTOR's Project personnel for IPR interviews
c) Provide office and administrative services (e.g., meeting rooms, printing and photocopying
support, and other logistics support), as required to support the reviews
1.3 Systems, Procedures, and Plans
1.3.1 Project Systems and Procedures

1) CONTRACTOR shall use, to the extent possible, CONTRACTOR's existing Systems and
Procedures in planning and performance of the WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY to conduct workshops as required to establish
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY alignment on CONTRACTOR's existing Systems and
Procedures that will be used during performance of the WORK. Workshop(s) shall commence
within 14 days of EFFECTIVE DATE and shall be completed within 45 days of EFFECTIVE
DATE, or later if directed by COMPANY. To support these workshop(s), CONTRACTOR shall
perform the following:
a) Provide an overview of CONTRACTOR's existing Systems and Procedures and demonstrate
how existing Systems and Procedures are integrated into the Project Plans, Systems, and
Procedures.
b) Identify interfaces and gaps between CONTRACTOR's existing Systems and Procedures and
the CONTRACT requirements.
c) Modify CONTRACTOR's existing Systems and Procedures to correct deficiencies and meet
CONTRACT requirements, and submit for COMPANY's approval.
d) At least five days prior to the commencement of the workshop(s), submit to COMPANY
Systems and Procedures specified in Table F1-1.
Table F1-1: CONTRACTOR's Systems and Procedures for Project Use

Section Systems and Procedures
1. Lessons Learned
2. Personnel Authorization
3 Correspondence
3 Business Standards
3 Correspondence
Page 85 of 407

Section Systems and Procedures

3 Foreign Corrupt Practices Act Compliance
3 Workplace Harassment Communication and Reporting
3 Human Rights Policy Communication and Reporting
4. Information Management (Refer to Section 4. for review timing requirements)
5 Interface Management System
5 Interface Management Procedure (Refer to Section 5 for review timing requirements)
6. Engineering and HVEC Management
6. Weight Management and Geographic Information
7. Procurement, including Spare Parts
7. Materials Management
7. Subcontracting
8. Construction
Error: Transportation and Installation
Reference
source not
found
9. Mechanical Completion
9. Systems Completion Management
10. Integrated Logistics Management
Cost Estimating
Cost Control
11.3 Schedule Control and Progress Measurement
13. Change Management
14. Quality Management
15. Risk Management
16. Safety Management
17. Security Management
Health Management
19. Regulatory Compliance and Environmental Management
22 Invoicing and Payment
22 Accounting
23 Readiness for Operations
1.3.2 Execution Plan
As part of the tendering process, CONTRACTOR submitted a proposed Execution Plan and parts
thereof may have been incorporated into CONTRACTOR's Execution Basis (in Section K –
CONTRACTOR’s Execution Basis of the JOB SPECIFICATION). CONTRACTOR shall update the
tendered Execution Plan incorporating any COMPANY-approved changes made after tender
submission and submit to COMPANY for review and approval in accordance with the due date
specified in Table F1-2.
Page 86 of 407

Table F1-2: Project Plans

Table F1-2 summarizes the various Project Specific Plans CONTRACTOR is required to submit for
COMPANY review and approval during the early stages of Contract execution. The table F1-2
documents together with System and Procedure documents listed in Table F1-1 and F1-3 and as is
required by Sections of this Coordination Procedure identifies the documents CONTRACTOR is
expected to provide to COMPANY over the course of the Project. The table F1-2 provides the
required timing of the first submission of each listed deliverable. COMPANY reserves the right to
amend it as the circumstances of the Project dictate. CONTRACTOR shall maintain these deliverables
in a current state throughout the life of the Project. Any subsequent amendments to Plans are to be
submitted to COMPANY for review.
1)
Section Document Name Submittal Date

"Not later than CONTRACT
Effective Date (CED) + …"
4 Documentation For Operation (DFO) Plan CED + 30 days
4 Work Specific Information Management Plan CED + 30 days
4 Master Document Register CED + 30 days
4 Supplier Master Document Register (Draft) CED + 30 days
4 Supplier Document Register (Draft) CED + 30 Days
7 Overall Purchasing, Subcontracting, Materials CED + 30 days
Management, and Expediting Plans
12 Cost Control Plan CED + 30 days
13 90 Day Plan / Schedules CED +30 days
15 Project Quality Plan CED + 30 days
17 Project / Site Specific Journey Management CED + 30 days
Plan
18 Project / Site Specific Security Plan CED + 30 days
13 Schedule Development and Control Plan CED + 45 days
1 CONTRACTOR's Execution Plan CED + 60 days
6 List of Deliverables (LOD x Quantities) CED + 60 days
6 Design Verification Plan CED + 60 days
7 Logistics Plan CED + 60 days
8 Constructability Plan CED + 60 days
8 Fabrication Plan CED + 60 days
9 Transportation and Installation Plans CED + 60 days
12 Surveillance and Audit Plan CED + 60 days
16 Risk Management Plan CED + 60 days
17 Project Safety Management Plan CED + 60 days (2)
17 Project Safety Training Plan CED + 60 days
17 Project Safety Induction Plan CED + 60 days
Page 87 of 407

Section Document Name Submittal Date

"Not later than CONTRACT
Effective Date (CED) + …"
17 Project Safety Pre-Mobilization Inspection CED + 60 days
Plan
17 Subcontractor Safety Management Plan CED + 60 days
17 Radiography Subcontractor Safety Plan CED + 60 days
20 Community and Labor Relations Plan CED + 60 days
21 Training Plans for Nigerian Professional & CED + 60 days
Workers
4 Site Specific Document Control Plans Prior to new site mobilization

7 Spare Parts Management Plan CED + 75 days
13 Project Execution Schedule (initial) CED + 75 days
7 Field Material Management and Warehousing CED + 90 days
Plan
13 Project Execution Schedule CED + 90 days
17 Project Site Specific Safety Plans CED + 90 days (2)
17 Project/Site Emergency Preparedness & CED + 90 days (2)
Response Plan
19 Project/Site Specific Health Plans CED + 90 days (1)
20 Regulatory Compliance Plan CED +90 days
20 Environmental Management Plan CED + 90 (1)
6 Operability Management Plan CED + 120 days
10 Systems Completion Plan (initial) CED + 120 days
10 Systems Completion Execution Plan (final) CED + 270 days (2)
Notes: (all days mean calendar days)
1) Prior to start of construction in the field.
2) Or 120 days prior to start of construction in the field, whichever is earlier.
3) Before dynamic commissioning activities commence.
For the CSTR II Contract effective date (CED) refers to Work Order effective date
1) CONTRACTOR shall develop its Execution Plan in a format and structure that is consistent with
its existing systems. CONTRACTOR shall provide a list of cross-references from its Execution
Plan topics and sections to the relevant section in the COORDINATION PROCEDURE and the
required Project Plans (see Table F1-2).
2) The Project Plans—as listed in Table F1-2 and detailed in each section of the COORDINATION
PROCEDURE—will serve to supplement CONTRACTOR's Execution Plan with more specific
Page 88 of 407

plans, systems, and procedures describing how CONTRACTOR will execute the WORK. Project
Plans shall build upon the overall strategies, guidance, and milestones contained in the Execution
Plan. If the Project Plans deviate from current Execution Plan, CONTRACTOR shall update the
Execution Plan.
3) CONTRACTOR shall update the Execution Plan and review changes with COMPANY on a
monthly basis. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a record of changes made to the Execution Plan.
CONTRACTOR shall inform COMPANY, at weekly meetings, of any major changes to the
Execution Plan
1.3.3 Project Plans

1) Within the times specified in Table F1-2, CONTRACTOR shall develop and submit for
COMPANY's review and approval CONTRACTOR's Project Plans, which are further described
in the respective sections of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE. CONTRACTOR may
leverage its existing Plans, but CONTRACTOR's submitted Plans must comply with the JOB
SPECIFICATION.
2) CONTRACTOR shall continuously work with COMPANY to develop and update the Project
Plans.
3) CONTRACTOR shall maintain these Project Plans in a current state throughout the duration of
the Project and shall submit to COMPANY for review and approval any subsequent proposed
changes to the Plans.
4) CONTRACTOR shall implement the WORK based on CONTRACTOR's Project Plans.
5) CONTRACTOR's Project Plans shall comply with the following:
a) Be a concise written description of the organization, activities, and procedures for effectively
performing the respective aspect of the WORK.
Demonstrate that the Project Plans are integrated and consistent for each area of activity and
the WORK as a whole.
Describe how CONTRACTOR's Systems and Procedures are integrated for application to
the WORK.
6) CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY to conduct workshops as required to establish
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY alignment on CONTRACTOR's Project Plans that will be used
during performance of the WORK. During or subsequent to these workshops, CONTRACTOR
shall perform the following:
a) Provide an overview of CONTRACTOR's Project Plans
a) Modify Plans to correct deficiencies and meet CONTRACT requirements, and submit final
Project Plans to COMPANY for approval, in accordance with Table F1-2.
Table F1-3: Summary of Systems and Procedures Reviews

Table F1-3 is a listing of those Systems and Procedures that CONTRACTOR intends to utilize on the
Project, which are to be submitted to COMPANY for review immediately after CONTRACT award.
The timescale for submittal, review, and return shall be determined by COMPANY with the intent to
complete the approval process within forty-five (45) calendar days following CONTRACT award.
Where deficiencies exist CONTRACTOR shall modify the Systems and Procedures and document the
modifications in the Project Specific Plans. COMPANY reserves the right to require
CONTRACTOR to submit additional Systems and Procedures as COMPANY deems necessary to
support the CONTRACT if an omission is noted during the course of the Project.
Table F1-3: Summary of System and Procedure Reviews
Page 89 of 407

Section Document Name

3 Correspondence Procedures
4 Work Specific Information Management Plan
4 Document & Information Management System
5 Interface Management System
6 Engineering Systems
6 Progress Measurement System
7 Purchasing Procedures, including Spare Parts
7 Subcontracting Procedures
7 Materials Management System
11 Security Management System
13 Schedule Development and Control System
14 Change Management System
14 Change Control Procedures
15 Quality Management System
16 Risk Management System
17 Journey management System
17 Project Safety Management Systems
17 Emergency Preparedness & Response Management Systems
17 Subcontractor Safety Management System
17 Permit To Work (PTW) Management System
19 Health Management System
20 Regulatory Compliance and Environmental Management System
23 Invoicing and Payment
Table F1-4: Global Practices and Guidelines

Documents referenced in the COORDINATION PROCEDURE include those listed in 4. Where the
referenced documents have been superseded by Project specifications (as indicated by the column
labeled "Project Specification No." in Table F1-4), CONTRACTOR shall comply with the
requirements of such Project specifications in place of the referenced documents.
Page 90 of 407

Table F1-4: Global Practices and Guidelines
International Codes & Standards: As referenced within the Upstream Nigeria (UN) Global Practices
MPN Global Practice Version to be per current Upstream Nigeria(UN) Global Practices index
GP 00-00-02 Explanation and Use of Upstream Global Practices
GP 00-00-02S Explanation and Use of Upstream Global Practices
GP 01-01-03 & GP 01-01-03S Upstream CAD Requirements - Drawings, Data, and System
GP 02-01-01 GP 02-01-01S Facility Noise Design Criteria
GP 03-01-01 & GP 03-01-01S Upstream piping general design
GP 03-05-01 Fill and Discharge Lines and Auxiliary Piping for Storage Tanks and
Vessels
GP-03-06-01 GP 03-06-01S Piping for Instruments
GP 03-06-04 Vents and Drains, Flushing and Cleaning Connections
GP-03-12-09 General Requirement for Valves
GP-03-19-02 Piping Fabrication Shop or Field
GP-03-20-02 Upstream Piping Classification - Line Classes Atmospheric and 125
GP-03-20-03 Upstream Piping Classification - Line Class 150
GP-03-20-10 Upstream Piping Classifications - Valve Indices and Descriptions
GP-04-01-01 Concrete Design and Construction
GP-04-01-02 Structural Steel Design
GP-04-01-03 Design Load for Structures
GP-04-02-01 & GP-04-02-01S Auxiliary Structures for Operation and Maintenance
GP-04-02-02 Pipe Supports
GP-04-06-01 Reinforced Concrete Foundations Anchor Bolts and Grout
GP-04-08-01 Tank Foundations
GP-04-14-01 Equipment Lifts by Cranes
GP-09-04-01 & GP-09-04-01S Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-09-07-01 Accessories for Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP 09-07-03 Vents for Fixed Roofs Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-09-07-04 Internal Floating Roofs for Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-12-01-01 & GP-12-01-01S Upstream Numbering System for Project Technical Documents
GP-12-01-02 Upstream Identification of Equipment Components and Devices Lines and
Valves
GP-15-01-03GP 15-01-03S Instruments for Storage Tanks and Vessels
GP-15-02-01 Temperature Instruments
GP-15-03-01 Pressure Instruments
GP-15-04-01 Flow Instruments
GP-15-05-01 Level Instruments
GP-15-06-01 Electronic & Pneumatic Instruments
GP-15-06-03 Programmable Logic Controllers
GP-15-06-04 Instrumentation Inspection, Testing, Calibration, Pre-commissioning
GP-15-07-07 Upstream Protective System
GP-15-09-01 Control Valves
GP-15-09-03 Actuators for on / off Valves
Page 91 of 407

GP-15-11-01 Instrument Control Panels

GP-15-12-01 Instrument Wire & Cable
GP-16-02-01 GP 16-02-01S Electrical - General Requirements
GP 16-03-01 Wiring methods and material selection.
GP 16-04-01 GP 16-04-01S Grounding and Over voltage Protection
GP-16-13-01 Electrical testing and Commissioning
GP 20-01-01 Inspection of Equipment and Materials
GP-20-01-02 Administrative Procedures for Obtaining Inspection
GP 20-01-04 Upstream Project Quality Assurance - General Requirements
GP-21-01-01 System Completion
GP 21-01-02 Upstream Project Technical Documentation Requirements and Deliverables
GP 21-01-03 Upstream Systems Completion Management Database Requirements
GP 29-01-34 & GP 29-01-34S Upstream Material Identification and Traceability
GP 56-02-03 Painting General Requirements - Onshore
GP 29-02-15 Cathodic Protection for Vessels and Tanks
GP 29-02-18 Maintenance Coating of Structures, Plant, and Equipment
GP 29-03-06 Onshore Structural Welding and Inspection
GP 50-05-07 Technical Data Sheet (T500507C01) - Meteorological Data for Plant Design
GP-70-01-02S -06-11-30 Fire protection - Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP 70-01- 03 Loss Prevention for Upstream Onshore Production Facilities
GP 70-01-02 Loss Prevention - Storage Tanks
GP 70-01-12 Upstream Human Factors
GP 81-81-02 Vertical tank calibration
1.4 Reports
1.4.1 Monthly Reports
CONTRACTOR shall report or provide the following on a monthly basis:

1) Status and percent complete on CONTRACTOR's development and approvals of Project Plans
and Project Systems and Procedures.
2) Status of planning for the Systems and Procedures and Project Plan workshops.
3) A copy of the current Lessons Learned Register.
4) A copy of the Execution Plan change log and the updated Execution Plan.
Page 92 of 407

2. Organization and Staffing
2.1 COMPANY Duties

a) COMPANY will provide on request, the Project Organization Charts specifying job titles
and the organization structure.
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
b) COMPANY will advise CONTRACTOR of any changes to COMPANY's Project
organization.
c) COMPANY will identify CONTRACTOR's Key Positions and will interview
CONTRACTOR's Key Personnel for approval. CONTRACTOR’s non-key personnel may
also be required for interview by COMPANY at COMPANY request.

1) In accordance with Section 1, CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY review
and approval:
a. CONTRACTOR's Personnel Authorization System
b) Staffing Plan
c) Organization Plan
2) CONTRACTOR shall establish and fully staff CONTRACTOR's organization to ensure
performance of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall provide and maintain its organization
throughout each of the various phases of the WORK, subject to COMPANY's review and
approval.
3) CONTRACTOR's organization for the WORK is further identified in CONTRACTOR's Project
Organization Chart(s) included below:
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
 [Insert Here]
4) CONTRACTOR's Project Organization Chart(s) shall specify and maintain, as a minimum, the
organizational structure, job titles, and the names of personnel. If the organization for the WORK
deviates from current Organization Chart(s), CONTRACTOR shall update the Organization
Chart(s).
5) CONTRACTOR's Key Positions and Key Personnel shall be as identified in the Table F2-1 and
Table F2-2 below. CONTRACTOR shall perform background checks on CONTACTOR’s
personnel in security-sensitive positions.
Table F2-1: CONTRACTOR's Key Personnel
Page 93 of 407

Position WORK SITE Name Reporting To
Table F2-2: CONTRACTOR's Security-Sensitive Positions

Position WORK SITE
6) CONTRACTOR shall develop, and maintain throughout the duration of the Project, an electronic
directory containing names, position titles, and contact and other relevant information for all of
CONTRACTOR's Project personnel and select COMPANY Project personnel.
7) CONTRACTOR shall submit, upon COMPANY's request, job descriptions for positions shown
on CONTRACTOR's Organization Chart. COMPANY may require CONTRACTOR to facilitate
COMPANY interviews of CONTRACTOR Key Personnel candidates (including major
Subcontractors' Key Personnel) prior to granting approval of personnel assignment or changes.
8) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY for approval any mobilization or demobilization of
personnel, or any other personnel changes.
2.3.1 Personnel Authorization System

CONTRACTOR's Personnel Authorization System shall be capable of tracking CONTRACTOR's
Project personnel throughout the duration of the Project. The Personnel Authorization System will be
used to manage personnel mobilization, demobilization, and changes during the Project.
CONTRACTOR shall submit a personnel authorization form (PAF) to request authorization for
personnel mobilization, demobilization, and changes. COMPANY’s approval is required prior to
making any personnel changes. The PAF shall include the following:
1) Estimated starting and ending dates for the position
2) Proposed personnel to fill the Project positions
3) Employee classification
4) Other requirements as directed by COMPANY
2.3.2 Staffing Plan

The Staffing Plan shall describe the following as a minimum:
1) Description of CONTRACTOR's Personnel Authorization System
2) Project positions in accordance with the Organization charts
3) Position starting dates and ending dates
Page 94 of 407

4) Proposed personnel to fill the Project positions

5) Position sourcing plan (e.g., CONTRACTOR's in-house staff, or agency or affiliate staff; high-
value engineering centers; fulltime or part-time; whether reimbursable; etc.)
6) Project personnel transition plans from home office to WORK SITES for all phases of the WORK
7) Personnel loading by month and total for each job category employed (e.g., full-time, part-time,
direct or contract), specified by WORK element and discipline.
8) Staff mobilization and demobilization plans
2.3.3 Organization Plan

The Organization Plan shall describe the following as a minimum:
1) How CONTRACTOR is organized and resourced to execute all aspects of the WORK
2) For subcontracted elements of the WORK, Subcontractors' Organization Charts, clearly
demonstrating how Subcontractors report to CONTRACTOR
3) Listing of WORK locations (e.g., WORK SITES; Off Sites; home and branch office sites; high-
value engineering centers; etc.) and the portion of WORK to be performed at each
4) Summary of how the WORK at the various locations will be coordinated and managed throughout
the Project's phases
5) Organization chart for each location and all phases of the WORK illustrating lines of reporting
both internally and to external Project participants
6) Job description, including roles and responsibilities, for each position
7) Explanation of any anticipated issues to organization structure, size, or personnel (e.g., staffing or
labor shortfalls, changes in Key Personnel, etc.)
2.4 Reports
On a monthly basis, CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
1) Submit the current Organization Chart(s) and Staffing Plan to COMPANY highlighting updates
and changes from the previous month.
2) Report any significant personnel or staffing issues
3) Report staffing and organization status, open positions, and fulltime equivalents (FTEs).
3. Administration
3.1 COMPANY Duties

1) At COMPANY's discretion, COMPANY will participate in COMPANY or CONTRACTOR
initiated meetings.
2) COMPANY will direct CONTRACTOR, as needed, regarding ad hoc meetings.
3) COMPANY will allocate CONTRACTOR's originator codes, which are given in GP 12-01-01
and other GP supplements.
4) COMPANY will adhere to the requirements for written formal communications and informal
communications as stated in Section 3.2.4 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
5) COMPANY will review all CONTRACTOR's submitted Procedures.
Page 95 of 407

6) COMPANY will advise CONTRACTOR on requirements for the fixed asset record.
3.2.1 General
In accordance with Section 1, CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY review and
approval:
1) CONTRACTOR’s Correspondence Procedure
2) CONTRACTOR's Business Standards Procedure
3) Foreign Corrupt Practices Act Compliance Procedure
4) Workplace Harassment Communication and Reporting Procedure
5) Human Rights Policy Communication and Reporting Procedure
3.2.2 Meetings
3.2.2.1 Ad Hoc Meetings

CONTRACTOR shall participate in various discipline meetings and any other ad hoc meetings with
COMPANY to discuss the status of the WORK, resolution of problems encountered or anticipated,
and other topics pertinent to the WORK.
3.2.2.2 Weekly Progress Review Meetings

CONTRACTOR shall conduct weekly progress review meetings with COMPANY and key members
of CONTRACTOR GROUP at all WORK SITES. Meetings shall cover the topics listed in the
weekly summary report, as described in Section 3.4 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES, and any other pertinent information.
3.2.2.3 Monthly Project Leadership Team Meetings

1) CONTRACTOR shall conduct monthly PLT meetings addressing, as a minimum, a review of the
issues covered in the weekly reports and any new significant issues. The purpose of the monthly
meetings is to inform CONTRACTOR's and COMPANY's senior management of progress of the
WORK and any significant issues.
2) CONTRACTOR shall prepare and issue for COMPANY's review and comment an agenda in
advance of the meeting. COMPANY and CONTRACTOR will agree on attendees for the PLT
meetings.
3.2.3 Minutes of Meetings

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare and issue minutes of meeting for all weekly progress review,
monthly PLT meetings, and ad hoc meetings.
2) CONTRACTOR shall prepare minutes of meetings for COMPANY's review and approval within
three working days following the meeting. COMPANY’s approval is required before signature
by both parties and release by CONTRACTOR. Minutes for the weekly progress review
meeting and the monthly PLT meeting will be signed by COMPANY Representative and
CONTRACTOR Representative. Minutes for ad hoc meetings may be signed by others.
3) CONTRACT Changes with respect to the WORK shall not be initiated through minutes of
meetings.
4) Minutes of meetings shall be designated with a unique identification number in accordance with
the instructions provided in the Section 3.2.4 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES
Page 96 of 407

5) The minutes of meetings form shall contain, as a minimum, the following attributes:
a) Project name
CONTRACT number (or purchase order number)
Minutes of meeting number
Subject of meeting
Date of meeting
Meeting called by (or N/A)
Meeting location
Meeting participants (name and company)
Agreed action item list and concerns noting
i. Responsible person and target completion or resolution date for each item
ii. Previously identified actions, status, and explanation if not completed
COMPANY Representative and CONTRACTOR Representative signature blocks
6) COMPANY may expand the minutes of meetings numbering system or attributes to include the
following:
a) Discipline
a) Meeting type (e.g., interface, cost and schedule, Project management, steering, other)
a) Meeting frequency (e.g., single, weekly, monthly, quarterly, annual)
3.2.4 Communications
3.2.4.1 Written Formal Communication

1) All communication of importance shall be documented by signed written communication
complying with the requirements of this section, and shall be considered formal communication.
2) Formal communication shall be by letter, transmittal, or other forms of communication as
defined by COMPANY. Each shall be given a unique identification number in accordance with
Section 3.2.4 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES and shall clearly reference the
identification number of any related COMPANY-initiated communication. No deviations to the
numbering syntax will be accepted without COMPANY's prior written approval.
3) Formal communication documents may include Technical Queries (TQs), Engineering Queries
(EQs), Requests for Information (RFIs), and Site Instructions (SIs) sent between
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY. CONTRACTOR Correspondence Plan shall define how
these communications shall be handled.
4) Formal communication shall be considered received when arriving by 1400 hours local time on a
regular business day. Formal communication arriving after 1400 hours shall be considered
received on the next regular business day.
5) Transmittals shall be utilized to transfer technical DOCUMENTS between CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY.
6) Formal communication between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall be addressed to
COMPANY Representative and CONTRACTOR Representative.
Page 97 of 407

7) Letters are the appropriate means for transferring the monthly reports, invoices, and CHANGE
ORDERS. Each letter shall deal with one subject only. Attachments shall be uniquely
identifiable in the body of the main document.
8) Formal communication shall include the following information:
a) Project name
a) CONTRACT number
Letter number
Date of letter
Sender's company, person, and address
Recipient's company, person, and address
To attention
Subject
Reference letter number (if letter is a reply)
Body of letter
List of attachments
Authorizing signature
9) Hard copy international correspondence shall be by airmail, except that CONTRACTOR shall
operate a courier service between its main site and any foreign site(s). COMPANY may use the
courier service at COMPANY's discretion. National mailing shall be by first class mail or by
other quicker means of mailing. Large mailings shall be split into small packages to facilitate
handling and delivery. Split packages are to be numbered per the following format: package
[sequence number of package] of [total number of packages]
10) Confirmation of receipt is required for all letters. Email confirmation of receipt with the letter
number in the subject line is acceptable.
11) Formal communication shall be date stamped on receipt. The date stamp shall include provision
for a distribution list for both COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
12) Correspondence between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall be addressed as follows in
Table F3-1 below.
Table F3-1: Contact Information for General Correspondence

CONTRACTOR Representative COMPANY Representative
Name: Name:
Address: Address:
Phone Number: Phone Number:
Fax Number: Fax Number:
Email Address: Email Address:
13) Letters and transmittals shall be designated with a unique identification number as given in Figure
F3-1.
Figure F3-1: Format for Letter and Transmittal Unique Identification Number
Page 98 of 407

Page 99 of 407

14) Minutes of Meetings shall be designated with a unique identification number per the format
specified in Figure F3-2.
Figure F3-2: Format for Minutes of Meetings Unique Identification Number
15) Copies of CONTRACTOR-originated Procurement documents—including, as a minimum,

inquiry requisition with specifications and unpriced purchase orders with attachments—shall be
distributed by approved Transmittal Note to COMPANY within 48 hours of their being processed
by CONTRACTOR to the physical and email addresses listed below:
Physical Address Mobil Producing Nigeria Ltd.

Business Services - Information Management Group
Attn: XXXXXXXX
1 Lekki Expressway, 5th Floor
Victoria Island, Lagos, Nigeria
Email Address XXXXXXX@XXXXXX
16) Individual Purchasing Plans are required for each purchase order with a value greater than [Insert
Value Here].
17) Individual Subcontracting Plans are required for each subcontract with a value greater than [Insert
Value Here].
Page 100 of 407


3.2.4.2 Informal Communication

1) Informal communication includes verbal communication and communication by email or fax, is
encouraged for daily interactions between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.
2) Letters may be emailed or faxed by prior agreement with COMPANY, but these will be treated as
informal copies until the original signed hard copy version is received.
3.2.4.3 Representatives for COMPANY and CONTRACTOR

1) COMPANY Representative has the authority to represent COMPANY in all matters, and such
authority includes the power to agree on behalf of COMPANY with regard to all aspects of the
WORK. Only COMPANY Representative, or COMPANY Representative's designee, shall have
authority to act on behalf of COMPANY with respect to matters pertaining to the CONTRACT.
COMPANY Representative’s designee shall be identified by letter to CONTRACTOR.
2) CONTRACTOR Representative shall have authority to represent CONTRACTOR in all matters,
and such authority shall include the power to agree on behalf of CONTRACTOR with regard to
all aspects of the WORK. Only CONTRACTOR Representative, or CONTRACTOR
Representative's designee, shall have authority to act on behalf of CONTRACTOR with respect to
matters pertaining to the CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR Representative’s designee shall be
identified by letter to COMPANY.
3) COMPANY Representative and CONTRACTOR Representative are identified in Table F3-1.
3.2.4.4 Correspondence Register

CONTRACTOR shall maintain an updated register and files for all correspondence sent or received in
connection with the CONTRACT. The electronic register and files submitted to COMPANY shall be
in a format acceptable to COMPANY. Correspondence register and files shall be indexed to allow for
quick retrieval of correspondence and shall be issued to COMPANY in source format on request.
3.2.4.5 Copies of Other Correspondence

1) CONTRACTOR shall supply to COMPANY one copy of all correspondence (including
attachments) that passes between CONTRACTOR and other parties concerning matters
considered material to the WORK.
2) On request from COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall supply to COMPANY copies of any other
correspondence between CONTRACTOR and other parties related to the WORK.
3.2.5 Systems, Procedures, and Plans
3.2.6 CONTRACTOR's Correspondence Procedure

CONTRACTOR's Correspondence Procedure shall detail CONTRACTOR's processes for handling
correspondence.
3.2.7 CONTRACTOR’s Business Standards Procedure

CONTRACTOR's Business Standards Procedure shall include, but not be limited to, its process to
make its employees and agents, and CONTRACTOR GROUP, aware of COMPANY's requirement of
discouraging the giving or receiving of any significant gifts, extravagant entertainment, or favors of
any kind to COMPANY's employees.
Page 101 of 407


3.2.8 Foreign Corrupt Practices Act Compliance Procedure

CONTRACTOR shall establish a Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA) Compliance Procedure
describing the process to ensure CONTRACTOR GROUP's compliance with the FCPA during
CONTRACTOR GROUP's performance of the WORK. Key areas of the FCPA that
CONTRACTOR's process and procedure shall address are documentation of the following:
a) Any gifts provided to Officials (as defined in the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT) in relation to
WORK under the CONTRACT
b) Any entertainment and/or hosting of Officials
3.2.9 Workplace Harassment Policy Communication and Reporting Procedure

CONTRACTOR's Workplace Harassment Policy Communication and Reporting Procedure shall
include the processes CONTRACTOR will use to communicate its workplace harassment policy to all
members of CONTRACTOR GROUP’s personnel, and CONTRACTOR’s process for incident
handling and reporting in accordance with the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT.
3.2.10 Human Rights Policy Communication and Reporting Procedure

CONTRACTOR's Human Rights Policy Communication and Reporting Procedure shall include the
processes CONTRACTOR will use to communicate its human rights policy to all members of
CONTRACTOR GROUP’s personnel and CONTRACTOR’s process for incident handling and
reporting in accordance with the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT.
3.3 Reports
3.3.1 Weekly Reports
3.3.1.1 Weekly Summary Reports

1) CONTRACTOR shall issue on a weekly basis a weekly summary report. The Weekly Summary
Report shall summarize the previous week's activities and planned activities for the following
week, and highlight concerns and issues with key metrics.
2) CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY to determine the content and level of detail
required for the Weekly Summary Report.
3) CONTRACTOR shall issue the Weekly Summary Reports no later than 1400 hours on the first
working day of the following week.
4) Other specific weekly report content requirements are described in the other Sections of this
COORDINATION PROCEDURE and may be incorporated into the Weekly Summary Report as
agreed with COMPANY.
3.3.2.1 Monthly Summary Report

CONTRACTOR shall issue on a monthly basis a summary report. The monthly summary report shall
be issued within 10 calendar days after each monthly cutoff, which is the last Sunday of a month or as
otherwise directed by COMPANY. The report shall summarize the previous month's activities and
planned activities for the following month, and highlight concerns and issues with key metrics.
CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY to determine the content and level of detail
required for the monthly summary report. Additional monthly report content requirements are
described in the other Sections of this COORDINATION PROCEDURE and may be incorporated
into the Monthly Summary Report as agreed with COMPANY.
Page 102 of 407


CONTRACTOR's monthly summary report shall include an executive summary with the following as
a minimum:
1) Narrative highlights of major activities by discipline and phase (engineering, operations readiness,
procurement, construction, commissioning)
2) Critical issues list including delays, standby activities, causes, responsible parties, timing to
resolve
3) Schedule outlook for activities to be started or finished during the upcoming 30 to 90 days
4) Progress versus planned performance, with particular emphasis on those activities on the Critical
and Sub-Critical Paths
5) A cataloged, digital photographic report that illustrates the progress of the WORK.
6) A safety narrative describing safety performance during the prior month for both leading and
lagging safety indicators in appropriate detail, including the following:
a) A detailed description of each safety incident: injuries, illnesses, and safety near misses.
b) Root causal factors, assessment learnings, and corrective actions shall be listed.
c) Comprehensive safety statistics and leading and lagging safety indicators for the prior
month and Project to-date. Leading and lagging safety indicators for the prior month and
Project to-date shall include the following, as indicated for each:
Leading Safety Near misses

Indicators  Number of near misses
 Percent near miss program quality
Leadership in Safety Workshop (LISW)
 Number of safety sessions
Job Safety Analyses (JSAs)
 Number of JSAs conducted
 Percent quality JSAs
Observation and Intervention (O&I) cards
 Number of O&I cards
 Percent quality O&I cards
Observation and Intervention Behaviors
 Number of at-risk behaviors
 Number of safe behaviors
Page 103 of 407


Lagging Safety  Number of Exposure Hours Worked

Indicators  Number of Workforce Hurt
 Project-to-Date Total Hurt Incident Rate (THIR)
 Number of Near Misses (NMs)
 Number of No Treatment Incidents (NTs)
 Number of First Aid Incidents (FAs)
 Number of Medical Treatment Incidents (MTIs)
 Number of Restricted Work Incidents (RWIs)
 Number of Lost Time Incidents (LTIs)
 Number of Fatalities
 Project-to-Date Total Recordable Incident Rate (TRIR)
 Project-to-Date Lost Time Incident Rate (LTIR)
3.3.3.2 Minutes of Meeting Register

A copy of CONTRACTOR's minutes of meeting register shall be issued to COMPANY monthly and
upon request. Minutes of meeting register will include all attributes as specified by COMPANY.
3.3.3.3 Correspondence Register

A copy of CONTRACTOR's correspondence register shall be issued to COMPANY monthly and
upon request highlighting outstanding responses to correspondence between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR. The correspondence register shall include all required attributes as specified by
COMPANY.
3.3.3.4 FCPA Reporting

CONTRACTOR shall provide documentation to COMPANY on a quarterly basis on the first working
day of the following month listing any gifts provided to Officials in relation to WORK under the
CONTRACT or any entertainment and/or hosting of Officials during the preceding quarter. If no
such activities occurred, then CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY a report stating that no
such activities occurred during the preceding quarter.
3.3.4 Loss and Damage Reporting

1) CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify COMPANY in the event of an occurrence related to the
WORK involving loss of or damage to property and/or injury to persons.
2) COMPANY's and CONTRACTOR's Representatives will be responsible for putting into action
the Emergency Response Plan.
3) CONTRACTOR shall subsequently perform a thorough investigation of the incident; provide
prompt notification to COMPANY of each claim, anticipated claim, loss of or damage to property
and injury to persons; determine the resulting costs with supporting evidence; and provide claims
handling services.
Page 104 of 407


3.3.5 Closeout Report

Within 60 calendar days of the COMPLETION DATE and prior to ACCEPTANCE, CONTRACTOR
shall prepare and submit a Closeout Report for COMPANY's review and approval. CONTRACTOR
shall coordinate with COMPANY to determine the content and level of detail required for the
Closeout Report. The Closeout Report shall be submitted in an electronic format agreed to by
COMPANY and include the following as a minimum:
1) In separate sections, the results of the following:
 Project management  Export Control
 Organization and staffing  Procurement
 Administration  Logistics
 Information management  Fabrication and construction
 Interface management  Offshore Transportation and Installation
 Cost  Systems Completion
 Schedule and progress  Commissioning activities
 Change management  National Content
 Engineering  Community Affairs
 Operations readiness  Accounting
 Safety  Security
 Health  Environment
 Quality  Risk
2) An analysis of overall job execution, citing those actions by CONTRACTOR or COMPANY that
enhanced or detracted from execution performance
3) Lessons learned over the course of the WORK
4) During the course of the WORK, CONTRACTOR will submit lessons learned by individual team
members as these concepts are recognized.
Page 105 of 407


4. Information Management
4.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will provide clarification and additional direction to CONTRACTOR regarding
information management, as needed.
2) COMPANY will respond to CONTRACTOR-created documents in accordance with the
COMPANY Response Codes as defined in GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements.
4.2.1 General Requirements

1) In accordance with Section 1., CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY
review and approval:
a) Work-Specific Information Management Plan
b) Site specific Document Control Plans
Required contents for the Work-Specific Information Management Plan and for Site-specific
Document Control Plans are as defined in GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements.
c) CONTRACTOR’s Electronic Document Management System (EDMS)
d) Master Document Register.
e) Supplier Master Document Register (based on SDRL/SDR requirements)
f) Documentation for Operations (DFO) Plan
2) CONTRACTOR shall maintain updated, accurate, and comprehensive data, documentation,
documentation records and status reporting required for the performance of the WORK at all
WORK SITES.
4.2.2 Document Control

1) CONTRACTOR shall give a functional demonstration of CONTRACTOR's Document Control
System and Document Registers to COMPANY within 30 calendar days after EFFECTIVE
DATE.
2) Contractor’s proposals for the demonstration shall be submitted to Company in advance for
acceptance. Proposals shall include location, agenda, attendees and technical support.
3) CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of GP 12-01-14, GP 12-01-15, and GP 21-
01-02 and other GP supplements. Note: The Supplier Data Requirements List (SDRL) format
provided in GP 12-01-14 is superseded by the SDRL format contained in Appendix A of these
Contract Coordination Procedures.
4) Contractor shall implement a Supplier document management system which, as a minimum,
meets the control processes detailed within Company’s document NG00-MP-QXXER-00-00001,
titled “Information Requirements: Instruction to Suppliers (IRIS) - Template” This document is
provided as Appendix FB to these Contract Coordination Procedures.
5) Contractor shall operate a comprehensive system for transmittal and tracking of documents to and
from all parties. Contractor’s transmittal and tracking system shall be defined within Contractor’s
Work-Specific Information Management Plan
Page 106 of 407


4.2.3 Master Document Register

1) CONTRACTOR shall create, develop, compile, and maintain the Master Document Register
(MDR) in accordance with the requirements of GP 12-01-15.
2) CONTRACTOR's MDR shall record all DOCUMENTS produced as part of the WORK.
3) CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
a) Indicate newly identified entries
Incorporate comments from COMPANY's previous review
4) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY the MDR in a native electronic format that is
acceptable to COMPANY.
5) CONTRACTOR shall assign numbers to all DOCUMENTS in accordance with GP 12-01-01.
4.2.4 Supplier Master Document Registers

1) CONTRACTOR shall create, develop, compile, and maintain the Supplier Master Document
Register (SMDR) in accordance with GP 21-01-02 and GP 12-01-14 and other GP supplements.
The SMDR shall be managed as a stand-alone register with its own unique document number
and revision control.
2) CONTRACTOR shall record all DOCUMENTS produced by Subcontractors and Suppliers as
part of the WORK.
3) CONTRACTOR shall as a minimum ensure that the SMDR complies with the following:
a) Indicate newly identified entries
b) Incorporate comments from COMPANY's previous review
4) CONTRACTOR shall submit the SMDR in native electronic format that is acceptable to
COMPANY.
5) CONTRACTOR shall assign numbers to all DOCUMENTS in accordance with GP 12-01-01 and
other GP supplements.
4.2.5 Document Distribution Matrix

CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a Document Distribution Matrix (DDM for MDR
documents and a separate Supplier Document Distribution Matrix (SDDM) for SMDR) documents.
Contractors control processes for managing the DDM and SDDM shall be incorporated into
Contractor’s Work Specific Information Management Plan.
CONTRACTOR shall establish a standard DDM to ensure a consistent review, endorsement, and
approval of Project documents. Prior to implementing the DDM and SDDCONTRACTOR shall
submit the DDM and the SDDM to COMPANY for COMPANY's review and approval.
4.2.6 Review Category System
CONTRACTOR shall issue DOCUMENTS in accordance with the review category designations
specified in GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements. Table F 0 -3 provides examples of
DOCUMENTS for each review category.
Table F0-3: Review Category System Examples

Category Examples
Category I and II  Safety and risk assessments
 Internal control and project management procedures
Page 107 of 407

Category Examples
Category III  Utility sizing calculations
 Utility equipment arrangement plans, elevations, isometrics, and special support
drawings
 Utility piping special item data sheets, material takeoffs, material requisitions
 Utility equipment and engineered package requests for quotations (RFQs)
 Secondary process piping stress reports
 HVAC design calculations, equipment data sheets, arrangement plans, and
elevations
 Quarters equipment list, architectural layout, arrangement plans, and piping and
cable routing
 Instrumentation calculations, logic diagrams, loop drawings, data sheets, and
installation drawings
 Instrumentation panel layouts (utilities)
 Electrical, instrumentation, and control equipment building layout plans and
elevations, installation details, and bulk takeoffs
 Electrical and instrumentation global drawings, sheet index, symbols, legend,
and general notes
 Secondary structural steel drawings, model, steel specifications, shop drawings
 Utility system boundary diagrams and commissioning and operating procedures
 Turnover and completion packages (ancillary process systems and utilities)
 Low-criticality spare parts lists
Category IV  Low-criticality utility sizing calculations

 Low-criticality utility equipment and engineered package RFQs with data sheets
 Low-criticality utility piping material takeoffs, piping special item data sheets,
and requisitions
 Low-criticality utility piping isometrics and special support drawings
 Instrumentation cable and junction box schedules
 Instrumentation wiring diagrams
 Instrumentation special support drawings
 Tertiary structural steel model, drawings, steel specifications, and shop drawings
 Hookup plans (drinking water, wash water, sewage treatment)
4.2.7 Document Issue

CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
a) Submit DOCUMENTS to COMPANY in the quantities requested by COMPANY; typical
quantities are set forth in Appendix FC of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
Comply with the review period requirements of GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements.
Highlight, communicate, and supply to COMPANY all Supplier interface documentation produced
within each Supplier's scope, and comply with GP 12-01-14 and other GP supplements.
Transmit, as directed by COMPANY, identified documentation to other Contractors and other parties
in agreed quantities and formats, copying COMPANY on a covering transmittal.
Exchanges between CONTRACTOR and COMPANY of technical DOCUMENTS shall be provided
in electronic format (unless hard copies are additionally specified) under cover of a transmittal.
Transmittal form attributes shall be as specified in GP 12-01-15 and as further elaborated by
COMPANY.
Page 108 of 407


4.2.8 Document Disposition Coding

CONTRACTOR shall comply with the document disposition requirements of GP 12-01-15 and other
GP supplements. Documentation that is retained by CONTRACTOR shall be retained for the periods
detailed in GP 21-01-02 and other GP supplements.
4.2.9 Response Codes

CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY Response Codes requirements specified in GP 12-
01-15 and other GP supplements.
4.2.10 COMPANY Access to CONTRACTOR Data and Document Control Systems

CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY access (read only or write for resident or remote) to
CONTRACTOR's Data and Document Control System in accordance with the requirements of GP
12-01-15 and other GP supplements.
4.2.11 Final Documentation and Data

After issuance of the ACCEPTANCE NOTICE, or at COMPANY's request, CONTRACTOR shall
provide to COMPANY all documentation and data, both hard copy and electronic, identified for
delivery to COMPANY in accordance with GP 21-01-02 and other GP supplements.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all such documentation is quality-checked, indexed and cross-
referenced, externally identified, and delivered to such destination(s) as specified by COMPANY.
4.2.12 Information Security

CONTRACTOR shall comply with the information security requirements of GP 12-01-15 and other
GP supplements.
4.3.1 Contractor’s Work-Specific Information Management Plan and Site Specific

Document Control Plans
CONTRACTOR's Work-Specific Information Management Plan and Site Specific Document Control Plans
shall describe CONTRACTOR's information management systems and CONTRACTOR's processes to meet the
requirements specified in GP 12-01-14 and GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements..
4.3.2 Documentation for Operations Plan

CONTRACTOR's DFO Plan shall comply with GP 21-01-02, GP 12-01-14 and other GP
supplements. The DFO Plan shall ensure appropriate registers are set up early to obtain information
from both Suppliers' and CONTRACTOR's systems to support DFO Technical Documentation needs.
4.4 Reports
4.4.1 Document Control Reports

CONTRACTOR shall provide regularly scheduled document control status reports based on the
requirements of GP 12-01-15 and other GP supplements, and also as agreed by COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR.
4.4.2 Master Document Register Reporting

CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the MDR is issued on a weekly basis until COMPANY is satisfied
with content and authorizes alternative timing.
Page 109 of 407


4.4.3 Supplier Master Document Register Reporting

CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the SMDR is issued biweekly or as directed by COMPANY.
4.4.4 Document Status Reports

On a monthly basis, CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY the number of DOCUMENTS
issued relative to plan (by CONTRACTOR GROUP discipline, and DOCUMENT type) including
status of COMPANY review per the following categories as applicable:
1) CONTRACTOR documents planned date - overdue
2) Received by CONTRACTOR for re-submission - due within the next 14 days
3) Received by CONTRACTOR for re-submission - overdue
4) Received by COMPANY for review and return - due within next 14 days
5) Received by COMPANY for review and return - overdue

CONTRACTOR's Closeout Report shall include the following in the Information management
section:
1) List of final documentation submitted to COMPANY
2) Plan for providing remaining DOCUMENTS
Page 110 of 407


5. Interface Management
5.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will provide to CONTRACTOR the COMPANY-produced Contractor Interface
Management Plan (IMP), which includes the following:
a) Requirements for CONTRACTOR's management of interfaces
b) Strategies, process, and associated tools that CONTRACTOR shall use as the basis for
CONTRACTOR's Interface Management System
2) COMPANY will perform the following:
a) Steward CONTRACTOR's implementation and execution of CONTRACTOR's Interface
Management Procedure to assess issues or misalignment between CONTRACTOR and
CONTRACTOR's interface parties and between COMPANY's other Contractors
b) Facilitate resolution of any interface management issues not being resolved to COMPANY's
satisfaction

1) In accordance with Section 1, CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY review
and approval:
a) Interface Management System
b) Interface Management Procedure
2) CONTRACTOR shall comply with and implement the requirements described in the
COMPANY-produced Contractor IMP.
3) CONTRACTOR shall have primary responsibility for and shall manage all CONTRACTOR
Internal and External Interfaces required to effectively accomplish the WORK, including any
interfaces associated with any other contracts assigned by COMPANY to CONTRACTOR.
4) CONTRACTOR shall identify, define, and manage its Internal and External Interfaces through a
structured process. The External Interface Management process is further described within the
COMPANY-produced Contractor IMP. Appendix FD1 provides an overview of the interface
process.
5) CONTRACTOR shall use the External Responsibility Matrix (ERM) included in Section D –
Scope of Work of the JOB SPECIFICATION as the initial basis for generation of its Interface
Data Register (IDR), interface identification, and further definition activities.
6) CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY's decisions and directions related to resolution of
any interface management issues.
7) CONTRACTOR shall generate Interface Agreements (IA) for all External Interfaces identified in
the ERM and for all other External Interfaces subsequently identified.
8) For clarity, an IA shall not alter any portion of the CONTRACT. In the event of a conflict
between an IA and the CONTRACT, the CONTRACT shall take precedence and govern. If
CONTRACTOR believes that an IA deliverable or activity constitutes a CONTRACT Change,
then CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify COMPANY using the CONTRACT CHANGE
ORDER Management procedure.
9) CONTRACTOR shall use a standard IA form, provided in Appendix FD2, to document, record
delivery of, and close out all CONTRACTOR External Interfaces. CONTRACTOR shall assign
Page 111 of 407


IA document numbers utilizing a format as agreed by COMPANY. A copy of the executed

External IA and any associated documentation shall be submitted to COMPANY.
10) If an IA is developed for CONTRACTOR Internal Interfaces, CONTRACTOR will provide a
copy of the Internal IA and associated documentation to COMPANY upon request.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY upon request copies of any interface
documentation related to Internal Interfaces, whether or not the Internal Interface was
documented by an IA.
11) CONTRACTOR shall provide a dedicated Interface Manager and resources to effectively manage
CONTRACTOR's Internal and External Interfaces.
12) CONTRACTOR shall actively work with COMPANY's other Contractors, including
COMPANY's Verification Agents and Certifying Agents, to agree on interface deliverables and
dates and to resolve potential interface issues before they impact any Project activity.
13) CONTRACTOR shall incorporate key Internal and External Interface deliverables or activities
into CONTRACTOR's schedule for the WORK.
14) CONTRACTOR shall schedule, participate in, and chair (when appropriate) interface
coordination meetings with COMPANY, COMPANY's other Contractors, Subcontractors,
Suppliers, and other organizations, as required to manage interfaces.
15) CONTRACTOR shall participate in meetings and workshops as scheduled by COMPANY for
addressing Project-wide interface issues that may impact CONTRACTOR and COMPANY's
other Contractors.
16) CONTRACTOR shall invite COMPANY to the following:
a) All External Interface meetings
All Internal Interface meetings identified as material to the success of the Project
17) CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify COMPANY of any non-performing or Critical Interfaces,
or any other interface issues for resolution.
18) CONTRACTOR shall regularly advise COMPANY on the resolution status of interface issues.
COMPANY may, at its sole option, be involved in the resolution of such issues.
19) CONTRACTOR shall establish a document control function for interface information. The
document control function shall ensure full traceability of interface information collected,
maintained, tracked, controlled, and documented. This function will also include the ability to
track, control, and deliver subsequent revisions of interface management deliverables if required.
20) If an interface deliverable or activity changes after being delivered by the Interface Supplier to the
Interface Receiver, then the Interface Supplier shall promptly notify the Interface Receiver and
reissue the revised deliverable or activity to the Interface Receiver.
5.3.1 Interface Management System

1) CONTRACTOR shall implement and utilize a COMPANY-approved Interface Management
System that enables CONTRACTOR to manage CONTRACTOR's interfaces in accordance with
the provisions of this CONTRACT and the associated process described in the COMPANY-
produced Contractor IMP. CONTRACTOR's Interface Management System shall be capable of
performing the following:
a) Collecting, tracking, controlling, and documenting Internal and External Interface
information.
Page 112 of 407


b) Providing for the creation of an IDR for managing, tracking, forecasting, and reporting
interface activity for which CONTRACTOR is responsible. The IDR template shall be in a
format approved by COMPANY and shall be updated on a regular basis.
c) Identifying and tracking any Critical Interfaces in the IDR.
2) All interface-related correspondence, referenced documents, and exchanged deliverables between
CONTRACTOR and other entities will be compiled to and tracked in a document register.
5.3.2 Interface Management Procedure

CONTRACTOR shall provide within 30 days after EFFECTIVE DATE CONTRACTOR's Interface
Management Procedure. CONTRACTOR's Interface Management Procedure shall be in accordance
with the provisions of this CONTRACT and the process described in the COMPANY-produced
Contractor IMP. CONTRACTOR's Interface Management Procedure shall further describe the
following:
a) CONTRACTOR's Interface Management System
b) CONTRACTOR's Interface organization
c) How CONTRACTOR's Internal and External Interfaces will be identified, managed, executed,
closed out, and reported through all phases of the WORK
5.4 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall provide interface management status reports accompanied with associated
back-up data (such as the IDR) in formats and frequencies as agreed by COMPANY.
6. Engineering and Technical Documentation
6.1 COMPANY Duties

1) Review CONTRACTOR's engineering deliverables, provide Review Codes in accordance with
Companies Engineering Surveillance Program and return to Contractor.
2) Provide the templates and standards, where available, for CONTRACTOR's use in the
development of CONTRACTOR deliverables
3) Provide Company CADD standards to be used for development of all deliverables
4) Provide a list of standard engineering software to be used in performing engineering services
5) Provide copies of Companies checklists that will be used to review Contractor’s documents
6.1.1 Independent Reviews

COMPANY will plan and conduct Independent Design Reviews throughout the performance of the
WORK. COMPANY's Independent Design Review activities include the following:
1) Identify CONTRACTOR personnel and DOCUMENTS required to support the design review
2) Interview CONTRACTOR's personnel (generally one to two hours per interview)
3) Review DOCUMENTS selected by COMPANY
Page 113 of 407


6.2 CONTRACTOR’s Duties

1) In accordance with Section 1., CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY
review and comment:
a) Weight Management System
Geographic Information System (If required and specified in the scope of work)
Design Verification Plan
Engineering Management Plan
High-Value Engineering Centers Management Plan

a) Manage CONTRACTOR GROUP to ensure all plans, activities, deliverables, and technical
documentation are consistent with the JOB SPECIFICATION. This shall include but not be
limited to review, checking, and approval of drawings, designs, and specifications
developed or provided. CONTRACTOR shall make such drawings, designs, and
specifications available to COMPANY upon request.
a) Manage CONTRACTOR GROUP's WORK activities and development of deliverables for
compliance with the WORK plans and schedule and for timely COMPANY review, review,
and comments.
a)
Assist and provide necessary supporting documentation to COMPANY in connection with
applications to Certifying Agent, local regulatory agencies, and other approvals throughout the
different phases of the WORK.
Highlight, communicate, and supply to COMPANY all Supplier interface documentation produced
within each Supplier's scope. Interface documentation includes the manufacturer’s installation,
Operation and Maintenance recommendations. Unless otherwise agreed by COMPANY in advance,
CONTRACTOR shall address each identified interface issue in discrete and separate documentation,
clearly identifying the issue as being interface related. Such documentation shall contain only
interface information. CONTRACTOR's interface comments shall be copied to all affected parties
and additional parties as identified by COMPANY.
Support the activities outlined in COMPANY's Engineering Surveillance Plan (ESP), as well as any
corrective actions.
Execute quality-related programs as required in Section 14..
Conduct weekly progress meetings.
6.2.1 3D CADD Implementation (If required by the Job Specification)

1) CONTRACTOR shall comply with the following:
a) Provide COMPANY with free access to the 3D Computer-Aided Design and Drafting
(CADD) models at WORK SITES and all applicable Off Sites.
a) Provide COMPANY with access to and use of dedicated 3D CADD "walk-through"
machine(s) located at the applicable design offices.
a) Make personnel available to assist COMPANY with CADD reviews.
At the end of the design Contractor shall provide Company with an electronic copy of the 3D
CADD model based upon the latest IFC drawings produced by the Contractor.
Page 114 of 407


Contractor shall update the 3D CADD model to reflect As-Built conditions and submit to
Company
2) The 3D CADD model shall be the latest static version and shall be updated periodically based on
design progression from the latest dynamic model.
3) CONTRACTOR's planning and execution of the 3D CADD models shall be in accordance with
GP 01-01-03, GP 01-01-03S and other GP supplements. Additionally, CONTRACTOR shall
comply with the following:
a) Assign an overall Design Drafting Coordinator, whose function is to manage inter-discipline
design conflicts and ensure consistent 3D CADD implementation across all disciplines.
a) Ensure 3D CADD model design is led by experienced designers with prior experience in 3D
CADD modeling. The designers shall interface with an experienced core team of 3D
CADD designers (per discipline) who will input design data into the system.
Ensure onsite technical support is available on a day-to-day basis to troubleshoot hardware and
software issues that may arise.
Early during the WORK, develop a computerized line list so that 3D CADD models can be monitored
on a line-by-line basis. The line list shall include status information such as the following:
i. Routing of lines in model
ii. Generation of isometrics
iii. Checking of isometrics
iv. Release of isometrics to construction
v. Revision levels
Link the 3D CADD Model to CONTRACTOR's Materials Management System (MMS) so that
material takeoffs (MTOs) can be directly downloaded from the 3D CADD Model to the MMS.
Verify the accuracy of MTOs.
Ensure that all disciplines use the 3D CADD system and the same database.
4) COMPANY's model review and CONTRACTOR's implementation of comments into the 3D
CADD model shall be scheduled milestone activities that are part of the progress measurement
system utilized for measuring and controlling progress of the electronic model.
5) To maximize the clash-checking capability of the electronic model, CONTRACTOR shall draft
and design appropriate disciplines (e.g., piping; structural; electrical; instrumentation; heating,
ventilation, and air conditioning [HVAC]; insulation and fire-proofing envelopes; operations and
maintenance envelopes) within the 3D CADD environment.
6) CONTRACTOR shall schedule clash-check dates as key milestones in the development of the 3D
CADD model. CONTRACTOR shall perform simultaneous clash-checks for all disciplines.
7) CONTRACTOR shall perform clash-checking for junction boxes and cable trays and shall review
junction boxes for adequacy and interference with passageways and equipment.
6.2.2 Design and 3D CADD Model Reviews

CONTRACTOR shall conduct 30, 60, and 90 percent Design and 3D CADD Model Reviews in
accordance with the requirements of COMPANY's Design Review Procedure.
6.2.3 COMPANY-Led Independent Design Reviews

CONTRACTOR shall support COMPANY's Independent Design Reviews. CONTRACTOR's design
review responsibilities shall include the following:
Page 115 of 407


1) Provide all COMPANY-selected DOCUMENTS one week in advance of design reviews

2) Make available CONTRACTOR's personnel for design review interviews
3) Provide office and administrative services (e.g., meeting rooms, printing and photocopying
support, and other logistics support) as required to support the reviews
6.2.4 Specification Deviations

1) If CONTRACTOR wishes to deviate from a Project specification, or a manufacturer’s
Installation, Operation and Maintenance recommendations, then CONTRACTOR shall prepare
and submit for COMPANY review and approval a written request for the Specification Deviation
in advance using the Specification Deviation Request (SDR) form (see Appendix FF). The SDR
submittal and evaluation process is as follows:
a) CONTRACTOR shall submit a separate SDR form for each Specification Deviation
requested.
b) CONTRACTOR shall use the SDR form to fully describe the Specification Deviation and
provide sufficient details necessary for COMPANY's evaluation of the Specification
Deviation, including the Specification Number affected and copies of all applicable
pertinent information such as drawings, calculations, test reports, etc.
c) If COMPANY determines the requested Specification Deviation is technically acceptable,
then COMPANY will so indicate in its response on the SDR form.
d) CONTRACTOR shall not proceed with any Specification Deviation without COMPANY's
written approval.
2) Any approved Specification Deviation is valid only for the specific occurrence of the
nonconformity described on the SDR form. If CONTRACTOR seeks approval for multiple
occurrences of the nonconformity in a single SDR, then CONTRACTOR shall adequately
describe, in the SDR form, the combined scope of the occurrences for which CONTRACTOR
requests the Specification Deviation.
3) Should CONTRACTOR wish to expand the scope of an approved Specification Deviation to
cover additional occurrences, then CONTRACTOR shall submit a new and fully substantiated
SDR for COMPANY's consideration. As with any SDR, COMPANY is not obligated to approve
the new SDR but may do so at COMPANY's sole discretion.
4) If COMPANY or CONTRACTOR judges that a Specification Deviation has a cost or schedule
impact (positive or negative), then the Change Management process described in Section 13. of
Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES shall be used. The requirement for
CONTRACTOR to prepare a Change Request will be noted by COMPANY on the SDR form.
6.2.5 Quantity Tracking

1) CONTRACTOR shall track and report engineering MTO quantities in accordance with the
requirements in COMPANY's Quantity Assessment Sheets and COMPANY's Quantity Tracking
Report Form.
2) CONTRACTOR shall track engineering MTO quantities using the end of Front-End Engineering
and Design (FEED) quantities (the start of Engineering, Procurement, and Construction [EPC]) as
the quantity basis for the Cost Control Estimate. During detailed engineering, the quantity data
shall be updated, as a minimum, at the 30, 60, and 90 percent Design Reviews.
Page 116 of 407


6.2.6 Weight Tracking

1) CONTRACTOR shall manage weight and center of gravity with a defined Weight Management
System compliant with the philosophy and guidance provided in GP 23-02-01, GP 23-02-02, GP
23-02-03 and other GP supplements.
2) CONTRACTOR shall maintain a list of weight optimization opportunities along with the impacts
to other priorities (e.g., safety, quality, cost, schedule). CONTRACTOR shall review the Weight
Optimization Opportunities list with Engineering Management on a periodic basis. Decisions to
implement or not implement potential weight optimization recommendations will be documented.
6.2.7 Geographic Information System Data Management (If required in the scope of
work)
1) CONTRACTOR shall develop and manage its Geographic Information System (GIS) data
compliant with the philosophy and guidance provided in GP 85-02-01 and other GP supplements.
2) CONTRACTOR or Subcontractors shall collect and submit completed GIS data deliverables on a
regular basis utilizing the geodatabase templates furnished by COMPANY or COMPANY's GIS
Data Management Contractor.
6.2.8 High-Value Engineering Centers

CONTRACTOR shall manage and monitor its high-value engineering centers' (HVECs') cost,
schedule, and quality performance. To ensure consistency with CONTRACTOR's home office
processes and procedures, CONTRACTOR shall complete a detailed gap assessment of HVEC
procedures to ensure that they include recording and reporting of metrics to manage the WORK and
to meet CONTRACTOR's reporting requirement to COMPANY. As a minimum HVECs shall
provide regular reporting in the following categories:
1) Progress measurement
2) Productivity
3) Cost and schedule control
4) Quality
6.3.1 Weight Management System

1) CONTRACTOR's Weight Management System shall calculate, track, report, and trend weight
and center of gravity throughout the execution of the WORK.
2) Define procedures that CONTRACTOR will implement to actively control weight growth and
center of gravity movement through the course of the WORK.
3) Contractor shall advise Company when estimate weight reaches 90% of the Not to Exceed weight
and put in place a weight management plan to ensure the Not to Exceed weight is maintained.
6.3.2 Geographic Information System (If required in the scope of work)

CONTRACTOR shall develop a GIS that complies with COMPANY's requirements and GP 85-02-01
and other GP supplements.
6.3.3 Design Verification Plan

1) The Design Verification Plan shall define the process that will be used to conduct reviews of the
FEED documents provided in the JOB SPECIFICATION to allow CONTRACTOR to take
responsibility for the final design.
Page 117 of 407


2) For the detailed design phase, the Design Verification Plan shall also include the following:
a) Key milestones for the execution of the design verification, including the following:
i) Submittal of Design Verification Plan
ii) Review of the Plan by COMPANY
iii) Timing window for queries to COMPANY
iv) Submittal of draft verification report
v) Issue of final report
vi) Target closeout of identified design verification deficiencies
b) Summary of verification philosophy, extent of review, and key activities for each discipline.
c) Process for submittal and finalization of verification queries.
d) Plans and timing for status reviews with COMPANY.
e) Clear definition of metrics that will be used to track deliverables throughout the design phase
(e.g., deliverable initiated, issued for internal review, issued for COMPANY review, issued
for design [IFD], issued for construction [IFC], etc.)
f) Plan for how cost and schedule impacts identified from the verification process will be
addressed, if applicable.
g) Identification of party responsible for 3D CADD model verification against engineering
deliverables.
h) Identification of party responsible for ensuring the 3D CADD designers are utilizing the
Project 3D CADD specifications.
i) Identification of the checking and verification activities for CONTRACTOR engineering,
Subcontractor engineering, and procurement and Supplier data. Checking and verification of
Supplier Data shall include confirmation that the manufacturer’s Installation, Operation and
Maintenance recommendations are being followed.
j) Engineering software control and verification.
k) Identification of party responsible for the verification activities including third-party
Verification and Certifying Agents.
6.3.4 Engineering Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's Engineering Management Plan shall outline the various processes, procedures, and
methodologies to be utilized by CONTRACTOR to manage the WORK through to Start-up. The
Engineering Management Plan shall demonstrate compliance with Nigerian Content Directive (NCD)
and shall include the following:
1) For the period from the beginning of WORK through issuance of IFC deliverables, details
covering the following, as a minimum:
a) Summary of engineering execution strategy for the key phases of the Project.
b) Engineering organization and staffing plan and roles and responsibilities including the
following:
i. Description of the management and oversight of CONTRACTOR GROUP
ii. Staffing plans for all offices in which CONTRACTOR will perform design activities
c) Clear definition of what WORK will be performed by each of the various design offices (if
applicable).
Page 118 of 407


d) Listing of CONTRACTOR work processes and copies of those processes, with clear
identification as to which processes are unique to the WORK and which processes are
CONTRACTOR standards.
e) Description of the work processes, management, and oversight to be used if CONTRACTOR
uses multiple offices for the WORK, including how activities between various offices will be
transferred, monitored, reviewed, etc., as well as who has overall responsibility for the
finished deliverable
f) Description of how engineering quality processes will be conducted, including the following:
i. Checking and verification activities for CONTRACTOR engineering, Subcontractor
engineering, and procurement and Supplier data
ii. Checking and verification activities for interfaces with other COMPANY entities (e.g.,
Construction, Drilling, and Operations)
iii. Checking and verification of Supplier Data shall include confirmation that the
manufacturer’s Installation, Operation and Maintenance recommendations are being
followed
iv. Design change control, revision control, and management of change process including
performing risk assessments on CONTRACT Changes, design changes, CHANGE
ORDERS, and Specification Deviations
v. Engineering software control and verification
vi. Identification of third-party Verification and Certifying Agents
vii. How CONTRACTOR will track key quality metrics and report to COMPANY
g) A constructability plan that provides, as a minimum, for early input by key construction
stakeholders into the design to establish guidance and direction as it relates to construction,
including execution steps, sequence, productivity enhancements, standardization, etc., as well
as the following:
i. Risk reduction
 Incorporate mitigations from construction hazards review identified in early
construction execution planning strategy
 Design erection attachment points and vessel shells to minimize work at heights –
fully dress equipment prior to erection
 Incorporate attachment points for construction access platforms into permanent
facilities and equipment
 Minimized tie-ins to energized facilities e.g. hot taps as last resort, shutdowns for
tie-ins, etc.
ii. Productivity considerations
 Suitability of approach for major equipment entry (maintenance considerations are
also to be accommodated)
 Suitability of adjacent areas for use as work areas (maintenance considerations are
also to be accommodated)
 Scheduling design deliverables based on sequences of installation and delivery of
major equipment
 Three-dimensional accessibility
 Industrialized construction – modularization, factory built vs. stick built
Page 119 of 407


iii. Construction philosophy, including design basis drivers, such as the following:
 Location conditions – weather, labor supply, social and economic
 Schedule constraints
 Quality objectives
 National content
 Construction equipment limitations
As applicable, CONTRACTOR shall include constructability requirements as stated in the
Offshore Installation and Transportation section of the COORDINATION PROCEDURE.
h) An operability plan that provides, as a minimum, for early input by key operations
stakeholders into the design to establish guidance and direction as it relates to Operations
including accessibility, maintenance, ergonomics, etc.
i. Description of the following:
 Engineering software and its application in the design process, including
descriptions of capabilities and quality control documentation for all
noncommercial programs
 Processes for ensuring quality and integrity of the databases and program inputs to
be used in the design process and the databases for the design results.
2) CONTRACTOR shall indicate if any of the design offices propose to use any database software
for the first time during the course of the Project.
3) Description of the process used to capture design input from the Risk Assessment activities during
design evolution as outlined in Section 15. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
4) A 3D CADD implementation plan outlining the various procedures to ensure systematic
development, maintenance, and control of the 3D CADD Model. The 3D CADD implementation
plan shall address the following:
a) The early studies required prior to start of 3D CADD inputs
b) Milestone schedule, including model freeze milestones such as hold points, reviews, freeze
points, etc.
c) Management of change process
d) The timing of model reviews
e) Review and verification process including how review comments will be tracked and
implemented
f) The quality and content of electronic-model-generated general arrangement drawings, plans,
and sections (i.e., the extent of annotation to assure adequacy to support construction)
g) How pipe supports will be accounted for in 3D CADD model and clash checks
h) How clash-checking will be done
i) How isometric drawings will be extracted from the model, including the timing and number
of extractions before the IFC extraction
j) Process for developing IFC drawings from the model
k) How MTOs will be performed, including MTO release and its interface with
CONTRACTOR's MMS
Page 120 of 407


l) How early (pre-IFC) purchase orders for bulk materials (e.g., valves, piping, etc.) and
overages will be reconciled with future MTOs extracted from the model
m) How the 3D CADD model will be electronically linked to CONTRACTOR’s MMS
n) How the 3D CADD database will be controlled and managed
o) How progress on the 3D CADD model status will be measured and controlled
p) Management of the disciplines and respective management of the interfaces
q) The organizational aspects of 3D CADD, including how flow of WORK between disciplines
will be managed
r) An organization chart identifying personnel and positions and their reporting hierarchy with
respect to managing and executing the 3D CADD model and engineering design
s) How progress of the 3D CADD model will be monitored, tracked, and reported
5) Clear definition of who is responsible (CONTRACTOR or Supplier) for identification, inclusion
into the model (if at all) of, and the procurement of the following:
a) Non-process vents and drains (those used by Systems Completions for hydro-testing and
high- and low-point vents and drains)
b) Items required for pipe spooling for construction efforts (e.g., extra flanges, valves, gaskets,
etc.)
6) Clear definition of the following:
a) Procedures for adding multi-discipline supports in the model (piping, electrical, instrument,
etc.)
b) Who has the responsibility for multi-discipline support input and the timing in which they are
to be added
7) If the model is to be turned over to fabricator at various stages of completion, then a description
of how transitions will be handled, including the following:
a) Model turned over one deck at a time, sections and blocks of a deck at a time, etc.
b) How will material-handling (no touch) areas that spreads across decks be handled
c) Procedures for handling changes once a section of the model has been turned over to the
fabricator
d) Penetrations between decks and walls that will be shared between the areas turned over at
various stages in the design.
a) A plan to document and control Specification Deviation requests
Site-specific document control plans that include the following:
i. Technical documentation controls
ii. Plans for complying with CONTRACT Information Management requirements
iii. Turnaround cycles for deliverables listed in the Master Document Register (MDR)
8) Description of how CONTRACTOR's engineering and project controls groups will interface to
develop and maintain a detail design schedule, work-hour estimates, and inputs to measure and
report physical progress, and to provide development and status of key engineering milestones.
To the extent possible, the physical progress measurement for detailed engineering shall be
based on deliverables completed.
Page 121 of 407


9) A communications plan including a process to request clarification or interpretation from

COMPANY (i.e., technical queries from CONTRACTOR to COMPANY) as well as a structured
process for communication between various CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor groups to
ensure adequate sharing of information.
10) Critical issues and decisions lists, which shall be compiled and updated weekly identifying any
issues or decisions that are hindering CONTRACTOR's ability to meet COMPANY objectives.
This list will focus on items that, if not resolved, will negatively impact overall design execution
and production of deliverables. The list will be reviewed biweekly by the Project Leadership
Team.
11) How CONTRACTOR will facilitate Design Reviews, including the following:
a) The necessary metrics to verify that the pre-requisites for the 30, 60, and 90 percent Design
Reviews, as agreed between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR, have been completed to the
satisfaction of COMPANY
b) The methodology for management and closeout of all resulting action items
12) Scope of work for the Materials Integrity Report (MIR) and plans to develop an MIR, which shall
be based on COMPANY's Materials Design Basis Memorandum (MDBM).
13) An engineering quantities and tracking plan that includes the following as a minimum:
a) Description of quantity-based system that will be used to estimate quantities that form the
basis of the Cost Control Estimate and track quantities throughout the design process
b) Description of the tracking process and how quantities will be captured to ensure the
categories align with COMPANY's requirements
c) Organization description identifying who is responsible in each discipline and how the
discipline quantities are rolled up into an overall reporting structure
d) Description of how FACILITY changes will be tracked and rolled into a quantity trending
program
e) Description of how key reassessments or updates for quantities will be accomplished
14) A weight management plan that includes the following as a minimum:
a) Description of the procedure CONTRACTOR will use to develop and refine weight estimates
throughout the design process. The procedure shall describe how CONTRACTOR will
evolve estimating methods through the different phases of design to refine the weight as
definition increases.
b) Definition of key metrics that CONTRACTOR shall track and trend to evaluate the quality of
weight estimates and efficiency of space utilization. Metrics can include but are not limited
to equipment maintenance factors, packing factors, and area density factors.
c) Definition of CONTRACTOR's weight management organization and the process for
discipline participation in the weight reporting process including responsibility for data
compilation, transfer, updating, and quality control. The extent of the weight management
program and the organization will be based on the following:
i. Competence – CONTRACTOR's experience (and COMPANY personnel's experience)
in managing weight for comparable projects
ii. Confidence – The level of certainty that the weight has been or can be identified
iii. Criticality – The impact of not achieving weight and/or center of gravity targets
d) Description of CONTRACTOR's procedure to track and trend the impact of design changes
on weight growth and center of gravity movement.
Page 122 of 407


e) Identification of measures CONTRACTOR will implement to proactively reduce weight, if

the weight exceeds defined budget values.
f) Description of CONTRACTOR's implementation of the estimating, reporting, and weighing
requirements defined in GP 23-02-01, GP 23-02-02, GP 23-02-03 and other GP supplements
throughout the execution of the WORK.
2) For the period from issuance of IFC deliverables until Start-up, a follow-on engineering plan
detailing CONTRACTOR's interface with construction activities and support of the Project,
including the following, as a minimum:
a) Engineering organization, staffing plan, and roles and responsibilities for each construction
location and home office support, with a key focus on the following:
i. Key personnel that will carry on from the design through the follow-on phases
ii. Transitions in phases of the WORK (e.g., engineering to fabrication, construction to
commissioning, etc.)
iii. Times when both follow-on engineering and completion of design activities are
occurring simultaneously
iv. Division of WORK between different groups
a) Description of key follow-on activities and how they will each be managed, including but
not limited the following:
i. Home office support of sites
ii. Equipment delivery and closeout
iii. Factory acceptance tests (FATs)
iv. As-builting
v. Assembly of documentation for operations
vi. Support for Systems Completion
vii. Management of closeout reporting
Process explaining how the key handover dates of deliverables will be agreed with the execution
parties on the Project.
Description of how alignment of drawing formats, level of detail, and requirements for construction
deliverables will be obtained.
Description of how key communication processes will be managed, including Requests for
Information (RFIs) from the sites, Technical Instructions (TIs) that need to be issued to the sites,
SDRs, and drawing change requests.
How the 3D model will be available to site locations and how it will be shared if needed.
How modifications to IFC DOCUMENTS will be handled.
6.3.5 High-Value Engineering Centers Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's High-Value Engineering Centers (HVECs) Management Plan shall include the
following:
1) Outline of the various processes, procedures, and methodologies to be utilized by
CONTRACTOR to manage all phases of HVEC WORK, including issuance of IFC deliverables
and follow-on engineering.
Page 123 of 407


2) Requirements for engineering completed at offices away from CONTRACTOR’s home office,
including but not limited to offices that may be referred to as Remote Engineering Offices,
Satellite Engineering Offices, and subcontracted or Integration Engineering offices.
3) All requirements as set forth in Section 1. as they apply to HVEC WORK.
4) HVEC qualifications to complete the assigned portions of the WORK with specific reference to
how critical processes will be managed by the home office, including the following:
a) Clearly define WORK scope assignments and how they match HVEC capabilities
Define roles and responsibilities of the HVEC team and the reporting structure in relation to
CONTRACTOR’s home office
Define specific plans and procedures to be used to maintain security and protection of proprietary
information at each HVEC
5) Definition of the process by which the HVEC knowledge base will be validated to meet the
requirements of the WORK, with specific reference to the following:
a) How the WORK-sharing relationship between HVEC Lead Discipline Engineers and their
home office counterparts will be leveraged to enhance WORK efficiency and productivity
a) Provisions for home office oversight, including timing of regular meetings, frequency of
visits by home office management, the need for home office personnel to be located in the
HVEC, and provisions for visits from COMPANY representatives to the HVEC
The process by which HVEC Lead Discipline Engineers are aligned with the home office work
processes and CONTRACTOR's Quality system
How the JOB SPECIFICATION requirements are shared with HVECs and how CONTRACTOR will
ensure that discipline engineers are familiar with their use
Processes to align the HVEC 3D Model with the 3D CADD implementation requirements, including
the procedure for sharing model results between the HVECs and the home office on a “real time
basis”
6) Identification of CONTRACTOR's interface management process for the HVEC, including
specific references to the following:
a) Definition of positions in the HVEC that are duplicates of those on the home office team
(e.g., Project Manager [or Engineering Manager], Project Engineers, Lead Discipline
Engineers, Controls Engineers)
a) The procedures and practices to be used to manage the interface between the home office
and HVEC
7) An HVEC coordination procedure that includes the following:
a) Clear definition of the areas of WORK, and the division of responsibilities between the
home office and HVECs
a) Methodology for transferring information and WORK from and to the HVEC for all
disciplines
The process by which concurrent engineering in multiple offices will be kept consistent to avoid
recycle and rework
Definition of persons responsible for detailed activities by discipline
Definition of the WORK share system and division of responsibility between the home office and
HVECs
Page 124 of 407


Definition of how the HVEC progress and productivity measurement system will be compatible with
the home office systems and how it will integrate into the overall Project progress system to meet
reporting needs
Process to ensure the effectiveness and completeness of HVEC quality assurance and quality control
processes and ensure that the Quality Plan addresses Project needs
Procedure for conducting face-to-face alignment meetings between the home office Lead Engineers
and the HVEC Lead Engineers prior to starting WORK at the HVEC offices.
8) Description of how CONTRACTOR will provide for and perform the following:
a) Define practices for establishing progress and productivity measurements and assessment of
physical progress that specifically relate to the HVEC team
a) Review procedures and processes of integrating HVEC progress into overall progress
Obtain a clear list of deliverables that are populated into the MDR that will ensure tracking of WORK
completed by the HVECs
Develop a Level 3 schedule for the HVECs as part of the overall Project schedule.
Develop an integrated planning protocol between home office and HVECs
Ensure that the HVEC mobilization plan is consistent with the schedule, work hour budget, available
work, and deliverables sequencing and priorities per the Execution Plan
Develop surveillance plans that specifically address HVEC WORK and that are consistent with
COMPANY's ESP requirements
Develop a quantity assessment plan for HVEC WORK that is consistent with the quantity assessment
and tracking requirements of Section 6.2.5 and Section 6.3.4 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES.
Ensure a system is in place for HVEC personnel assignments, overtime, and travel authorization
consistent with home office established procedure
6.4 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall submit regular reports as described below. The engineering reports' content
may be incorporated into the Weekly and Monthly Summary Report described in Section 3.4 and
Section 1.4.1 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
6.4.1 Engineering Weekly Reports

CONTRACTOR shall submit weekly engineering reports that identify key metrics, key activity status,
accomplishments and critical issues or actions necessary to progress the WORK. The reports shall
include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Weekly metrics and rationale for any divergence of plan versus actual
a) Deliverables weekly status tracking (by discipline and count)
Deliverables weekly cumulative status tracking (by discipline and count)
Deliverable run-down curve
Weekly deliverable status summary
Weekly overdue report
Issue to Bid (ITB) package deliverables status
2) Summary of key activities, key accomplishments, and critical issues
Page 125 of 407


3) Log of decisions or actions necessary for CONTRACTOR to progress the WORK

4) Two-week look ahead schedule with variances and total float
5) HVEC key metrics
6) Areas of Concern
7) Weekly engineering progress meeting minutes
6.4.2 Engineering Monthly Reports

CONTRACTOR shall submit monthly engineering reports that identify key metrics, key progress and
productivity data by discipline, key activity status or accomplishments and critical issues or actions
necessary to progress the WORK. The reports shall include, but are not limited to, the following:
1) Progress metrics and rationale for any divergence of plan versus actual
a) Overall
i. Work status summary
Engineering Schedule
i. Three-month look-ahead schedule noting Gate milestones and Critical Path
ii. Engineering system and package deliverables
Engineering Milestones
i. Status of CONTRACT milestones
Engineering Progress
i. Overall progress curve
ii. Discipline progress curves
iii. Payment progress curves
Engineering Productivity by discipline (based on earned man-hours)
i. Man-hours per percent complete (by discipline)
Engineering Man-Hours
i. Overall man-hours status
ii. Discipline man-hours status
Engineering Deliverables
i. Deliverable count by discipline
ii. Deliverable graph by discipline
iii. Engineering work step trend
 Draft
 IDC (Inter-Discipline Squad Check)
 IFR (Issued for Client Review)
 IFD
 IFC with Holds
 IFC without Holds
Page 126 of 407


 IFH (Issued for HAZOP)

 Percent complete by month and system
2) Weight control report compliant with the requirements and format defined in GP 23-02-02 and
other GP supplements.
3) Quantity tracking report (CONTRACTOR shall use COMPANY's Quantity Tracking Report
Form)
4) Key activities, key accomplishments, and critical issues
5) Trends and CHANGE ORDERS
6) Upcoming reviews (e.g., design readiness review [DRR], hazard and operability review
[HAZOP], safety integrity level review [SIL], etc.)
7) 3D CADD Model review pre-requisite status
8) 3D CADD computerized line list report
9) Design review action item register (FDRR, HAZOP, etc.)
10) A list of design verification comments or punch list items from any CONTRACTOR or
COMPANY third-party verifiers that were closed during the month or that are currently open
11) Status summary of technical and WORK SITE queries, deviations, and waiver requests, with
number of items issued, pending, and resolved and any associated schedule impact
12) HVEC key metrics including progress measurement, schedule control, and Quality
6.4.3 Engineering Surveillance Plan Monthly Report

CONTRACTOR shall provide information as requested by COMPANY to support monthly ESP
reporting requirements.
6.4.4 Engineering Progress

1) CONTRACTOR shall credit and report engineering progress using COMPANY's rules of credit
for engineering drawings, as follows:
IDC – 20 percent (issued internal to CONTRACTOR and to COMPANY)
IFR – 40 percent
IFH (Issued for HAZOPs) – 60 percent
IFD – 70 percent
IFC (with holds) – 85 percent
IFC (with no holds) – 100 percent
Poor quality deliverables that are rejected by COMPANY shall receive no credit.
2) CONTRACTOR shall not gain engineering progress for the 30 percent, 60 percent or 90 percent
3D CADD Model Reviews until associated pre-requisites (see Design Review Procedure) have
been met and the referenced review completed
3) Contractor shall advise Company when 80% of either the approved cost or man-hours for
engineering services have been reached. Contractor shall prepare a recovery plan to complete the
remaining work with the approved budget.
Page 127 of 407


6.4.5 Specification Deviation Logs and Reports

1) CONTRACTOR shall maintain, and provide to COMPANY on a monthly basis, logs of all
Specification Deviations, including details as follows:
a) The identification number and a brief description of the potential Specification Deviation
a) Dates for submittal of Specification Deviation and response by COMPANY
The correspondence reference numbers
Each step, at the time of occurrence, within the Specification Deviation review cycle
The action taken (approval, rejection, or withdrawal)
Reference to applicable specifications
Any remarks
2) CONTRACTOR shall maintain and keep current the Specification Deviation Log in a
database for easy sorting and retrieval.
Page 128 of 407


7. Procurement
Procurement means all Purchasing, Subcontracting, and Materials Management activities required for
the WORK. Purchasing means activities related to the acquisition and delivery of materials, whereas
Subcontracting means activities related to the acquisition of services or portions of the FACILITY
having significant labor content. Materials Management means activities related to inspection,
expediting, FATs, logistics, customs, and custody transfer issues, Spare Parts, warehousing, etc.
In executing its procurement activities, CONTRACTOR shall keep COMPANY informed of
CONTRACTOR's ongoing procurement activities to maintain alignment with COMPANY via
meetings with COMPANY and the issuance of procurement reports on an agreed schedule, but not
less frequently than monthly. CONTRACTOR shall ensure meetings and reports highlight all
problem areas related to procurement and describe actions being taken to resolve these issues.
CONTRACTOR shall also invite appropriate COMPANY representative(s) to all bid clarification,
technical bid evaluation, pre-production, and other procurement-related meeting between
CONTRACTOR and Suppliers in sufficient time for the Representative(s) to attend, if COMPANY
desires. For the purposes of coordination, COMPANY will assign a procurement advisor as a focal
point with CONTRACTOR in matters of communication, meetings, approvals, and related
procurement matters.
7.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will provide oversight of CONTRACTOR's procurement activities in matters of
communication, meetings, approvals, and other related procurement matters.
2) COMPANY will provide access to the SPIDDC software and training, as appropriate.
7.2.1 General
In accordance with Section 1, table F1-2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY review and approval:
1) Materials Management System (MMS)
2) Overall Procurement Management Plan
3) Overall Purchasing Plan
4) Overall Subcontracting Plan
5) Materials Management Plan
6) Expediting and Logistics Plan
7) Individual Purchasing Plans
8) Individual Subcontracting Plans
9) Spare Parts Management Plan
7.2.2 Procurement Duties

CONTRACTOR shall perform the general procurement activities listed in Sections 7.2.2.1 through
7.2.2.3 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
7.2.2.1 Subcontractor and Supplier Selection

When selecting Subcontractors and Suppliers, CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
Page 129 of 407


1) Maximize practical use of National and/or Local Content Subcontractors and Suppliers to meet
Project objectives.
2) Use, as appropriate or as required by the JOB SPECIFICATION, COMPANY’s and
CONTRACTOR's existing procurement agreements to meet cost and schedule objectives.
3) Develop bid lists subject to the following:
a) Use only Subcontractors and Suppliers listed in Section J of the JOB SPECIFICATION for
the categories of goods and services listed therein as may be later modified with
COMPANY’s approval.
Use instructions provided in Section J of the JOB SPECIFICATION for evaluating and nominating
additional Suppliers and Subcontractors for performance of the WORK.
CONTRACTOR's non-compliance with nomination procedures prescribed in Section J of the JOB
SPECIFICATION may be considered sole grounds for disapproval or rejection of Supplier and/or
Subcontractor nominations.
COMPANY shall have no obligation to approve nominations for such Suppliers or Subcontractors.
4) For Criticality I and II equipment and materials, develop a list of proposed Supplier purchase
orders and identify sub-suppliers and sub-orders comprising the entire supply chain for review by
COMPANY.
7.2.2.2 Subcontractor and Supplier Data

CONTRACTOR shall establish document control Systems and Procedures compliant with
COMPANY's information management and document control requirements and GP 12-01-14, and
other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR’s document control Systems and Procedures shall ensure
timely transmittal, receipt, and control of Subcontractor and Supplier data in support of the
engineering and construction schedule, including but not limited to, information requiring review
and/or approval by CONTRACTOR and/or COMPANY.
7.2.2.3 Subcontract and Purchase Order Administration

CONTRACTOR shall comply with the following:
1) Invite COMPANY Procurement Advisor, Contract Administrator, or other appropriate
COMPANY representative(s) to all bid clarification, technical bid evaluation, pre-manufacturing,
and other procurement-related meetings between CONTRACTOR and Suppliers or
Subcontractors in sufficient time for COMPANY representative(s) to attend. COMPANY’s
participation in such meetings shall be discretionary and COMPANY’s involvement, or lack
thereof, shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of any of CONTRACTOR's procurement
responsibilities under the CONTRACT.
2) Maintain records to ensure that the procurement process has been carried out in accordance with
the agreed Procedures and good business practices.
3) Prepare and maintain PO and subcontract registers. PO and subcontract registers shall include a
schedule for managing all milestone activities. The PO and subcontract registers shall include
pertinent data such as, but not limited to, the following:
a) Requisition, PO, and subcontract numbers
Contract compensation basis
Scope
Value
Page 130 of 407


Execution milestones (e.g., dates of inquiries, awards, and deliveries, including target and actual dates
of COMPANY approvals where applicable)
Latest revisions, change orders, or amendments
Export control and classification numbers (ECCNs)
4) Manage principal procurement interfaces between CONTRACTOR and its Suppliers and
Subcontractors, as well as interfaces with COMPANY's other Contractors, as set forth in the JOB
SPECIFICATION or as directed by COMPANY.
5) Assume responsibility for POs and subcontracts assigned to CONTRACTOR by COMPANY
including, but not limited to, the following:
a) Remaining engineering
a) Expediting
Related Supplier documentation
Invoice payment
Quality management activities
Logistics
Material traceability
WORK SITE material control
Factory acceptance testing (FAT), commissioning, if applicable, and warranty
6) Ensure that CONTRACTOR’s Suppliers and Subcontractors meet their contractual obligations in
connection with the WORK.
7) Immediately notify COMPANY of any claims received.
8) Process and handle claims in accordance with CONTRACTOR’s claims handling Procedures
approved by COMPANY for the Project
9) Ensure the following items have been resolved prior to final payment and closeout of the POs and
subcontracts:
a) Revisions
b) Claims and liens
c) Back-charges
d) Liquidated damages
e) Overages, shortages, and damages (OS&Ds)
f) Insurance claims
g) Disputed invoices or payments
10) Provide such assistance as required to support COMPANY's task of setting up equipment or
materials codes in COMPANY's fixed asset accounting system prior to COMPLETION of the
WORK.
11) Maintain and provide to COMPANY a copy of CONTRACTOR's master procurement file, paper
and/or electronic, which shall include copies of incoming and outgoing correspondence (including
mail, facsimile, etc.) sent to or received from Subcontractors, Suppliers, agents, or the like,
dealing with procurement matters.
12) Perform administrative activities through completion of the subcontracted or purchased WORK.
Page 131 of 407


7.2.3 Purchasing
With respect to the purchasing of equipment and materials, CONTRACTOR shall perform the
following:
1) Identify equipment and material criticalities for each PO in accordance with GP 20-01-04 and
other GP supplements, and adjust purchasing and materials management efforts accordingly.
2) Prepare Individual Purchasing Plans for Critical Items and for POs valued above the amount
stated in the Section 3.2.4 - 16) and 17) of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
3) Monitor engineering design schedule to ensure that drawings, specifications, and requisitions are
produced and received in time to meet the schedule for issuing inquiries and placing POs.
4) Purchase only new materials, equipment, and spare parts for the WORK (the meaning of "new" in
this context is defined as unused and originating from a non-secondary market).
5) Issue POs in accordance with COMPANY-approved format and content requirements, including
POs for spare parts and technical support services, etc., as required in the JOB SPECIFICATION.
6) Be responsible to negotiate the terms and conditions and obtain COMPANY's approval for any
deviations if Supplier takes exception to the standard terms and conditions approved by
COMPANY. Unless otherwise agreed in writing by COMPANY, COMPANY’s approval of such
deviations shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of its obligations under the CONTRACT for
CONTRACTOR GROUP.
7) Ensure that Suppliers and sub-suppliers permit timely access for CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY personnel to facilitate expediting and inspection.
8) Ensure that COMPANY receives full benefit of all allowable exemptions, discounts, and refunds.
9) Provide information and assistance to COMPANY in the event that COMPANY is required to
apply for refunds or waivers of sales tax, duties, or similar items.
10) Prepare Individual Purchasing Plans for Critical Items and for POs valued amount stated in the
Special Conditions Article of Section F of the Coordination Procedures.
7.2.4 Title, Insurance, and Shipping

CONTRACTOR shall perform the following, regarding titling, insurance, and shipping:
1) Obtain COMPANY's prior approval to proceed with any potential Subcontractors or Suppliers
that propose terms governing passage of title and risk of loss that differ from those in the
PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT or the approved standard forms.
2) In support of COMPANY's option to provide its own transit insurance, or otherwise to assume the
risk if provided for by the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT (at COMPANY’s request), confirm with
COMPANY prior to purchasing any of the following:
a) Transit insurance, either directly or through payments to a Supplier, covering loss or
damage to property to be incorporated into the FACILITY while in transit.
b) Transit insurance for items owned by CONTRACTOR that may have special or significant
risks.
3) Submit to COMPANY for review a list of shipping lines, airlines, and ports of export and import
that CONTRACTOR intends to use for ocean or air freight movements in accordance with
Section J of the JOB SPECIFICATION.
Page 132 of 407


7.2.5 Customs and Importation

1) CONTRACTOR shall provide all necessary expediting, transportation, and customs clearance for
all items furnished by CONTRACTOR and required for performing the WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible to arrange their delivery to the WORK SITE.
2) CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY’s customs and importation guidelines or, at
COMPANY’s request, shall develop and submit for COMPANY review and approval a customs
and importation guideline covering the requirements as set forth in the CONTRACT.
3) COMPANY shall pay all customs duties except for consumables and CONTRACTOR
equipment. Goods valued at $0.5M and above should be imported in COMPANY’s name. Any
customs duties overpaid or fines against COMPANY due to inaccurate customs documents
submitted by CONTRACTOR shall be to the account of the CONTRACTOR. Delays in customs
duty payment or customs clearance caused by wrong or inadequate documentation submitted by
CONTRACTOR for customs duty payment are also to the account of CONTRACTOR.
7.2.6 Subcontracting
With respect to the subcontracting of the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
1) Identify subcontracts that contain services related to Critical Items and adjust subcontracting
management efforts accordingly.
2) Monitor engineering design schedule to ensure that drawings, specifications, and requisitions are
produced and received in time to meet the schedule for issuing inquiries and placing subcontracts.
3) Prepare Individual Subcontracting Plans for subcontracts valued above the amount stated in the
Special Conditions Article of Section F of the Coordination Procedures.
4)
Negotiate the terms and conditions and obtain COMPANY's approval for any deviations if
Subcontractor takes exception to the standard terms and conditions approved by COMPANY.
Unless otherwise agreed in writing by COMPANY, COMPANY’s approval of such deviations
shall not relieve CONTRACTOR of obligations for CONTRACTOR GROUP under the
CONTRACT.
5) Issue subcontracts in accordance with COMPANY-approved format and content requirements.
7.2.7 Procurement Document Submittal and Approval Requirements

1) CONTRACTOR shall submit all POs and subcontracts for COMPANY's review and approval
prior to execution with Suppliers or Subcontractors.
2) Review and approval requirements for commitments requiring Individual Purchasing Plans and
Individual Subcontracting Plans are as per Table F7-1
3) CONTRACTOR shall comply with a review and approval procedure agreed upon with
COMPANY for commitments not requiring Individual Purchasing Plans and Individual
Subcontracting Plans, GP 12-01-14 and other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY will establish this procedure as soon as practical, and preferably before any POs or
subcontracts have been issued by CONTRACTOR.
4) CONTRACTOR shall timely submit priced copies of all POs and subcontracts to COMPANY
following execution.
5) Additional copies of CONTRACTOR-originated procurement documents, including as a
minimum, inquiry package with specifications and priced POs with all associated attachments,
shall be distributed monthly to the physical and email addresses listed Special Conditions Article
of Section F of the Coordination Procedures.
Page 133 of 407


6) Unless directed otherwise by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall submit the documents listed in
Table F7-1 to COMPANY for review and approval within the targeted lead times specified.
Table F0-4: Documents for COMPANY Review and Approval

Documents Target Lead Time
Individual Purchasing Plans and Individual Prior to start of development of inquiry packages
Subcontracting Plans
Prequalification Packages for new Subcontractors or Prior to start of bid slate development
Suppliers
Inquiry packages (Note 1) A minimum of 7 calendar days before planned issue
date
Technical and Commercial Evaluation Plans (Note 1) A minimum of 7 calendar days before bid due date
Award Recommendation with technical and commercial A minimum of 14 calendar days before target execution
evaluation summaries (Notes 1, 2, 3)
Notes
1) Required for equipment/material items and subcontracts that require an Individual Purchasing Plan or
Individual Subcontracting Plan
2) Proposed exceptions to technical requirements, commercial items, and contract terms and conditions must be
highlighted.
3) For POs and subcontracts that do not require an Individual Purchasing Plan or Individual Subcontracting Plan,
CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY’s review and approval of schedule requirements, warranty terms,
spare parts lists, and related cost; technical support services terms and rates; and execution plans including
interface management.
7.2.8 Materials Management and Warehousing

CONTRACTOR shall manage equipment and material delivery, issue transactions, and be responsible
for inventory at the WORK SITE. The delivery dates shall be compatible with the fabrication and/or
construction sequence and schedule. CONTRACTOR shall perform the following for field materials
management and warehousing:
1) Provide and identify the location of warehouses, laydown yards, and staging areas for storing
equipment and materials, before they are needed for construction and/or fabrication.
2) Provide and maintain a records system for equipment and materials issue, receipt, and
preservation, and for the related physical locations of material and equipment.
3) Maintain documentation at the warehouse or storage site for reference and provide to COMPANY
upon COMPANY's request.
4) Properly label materials, including original PO number, job name, description, and part number, if
applicable.
5) Document Overage, shortage and damage (OS&Ds) and resolve with Supplier.
6) Make and record, in a timely manner, receipt and issuance of equipment and material.
7) Identify equipment requiring special arrangements for unloading and moving to storage area
and/or having special storage requirements.
8) Implement Positive Material Identification (PMI) in accordance with GP 29-01-01 and other GP
supplements to ensure that goods received are of the correct material and meet specification
requirements.
9) Develop receipt documentation suitable for inclusion with invoices to COMPANY for goods
received.
Page 134 of 407


10) Ensure the following:

a) All goods are kept in a secure, controlled-access area
COMPANY-provided items and spare parts are not mixed with inventory belonging to other parties
Access to inventory is properly controlled
All goods are marked properly to allow traceability
11) Institute preservation measures as required to protect equipment and materials from all elements
of the weather, including the following as a minimum:
a) Provide a climate-controlled area for the protection of sensitive electronic equipment and
materials.
a) Ensure rotating equipment, motor windings, control valves, and other specialized equipment
are properly maintained in the warehouse or laydown yards per Supplier recommendations.
a) Provide a preservation surveillance team to ensure such materials are properly preserved
and maintained until installation.
12) Perform Supplier-recommended maintenance to ensure materials and equipment are available in a
ready-for-use state; comply with vendor warranty terms and conditions; and ensure warranty
maintenance records are maintained. This shall include materials and equipment installed for the
WORK during the construction phase but not commissioned or turned over to COMPANY.
13) Ensure accurate records of quantities on hand by conducting physical inventories as required, and
maintain detailed inventory records to reflect transaction activity.
14) Report to COMPANY any goods lost or damaged while in CONTRACTOR's care, custody, and
control.
15) Provide purchasing organization at the WORK SITE as may be needed to support Construction.
16) Provide material reconciliation upon completion of WORK.
7.2.9 Spare Parts

1) CONTRACTOR shall utilize the established Spare Parts Inventory Development (SPID) process
and the web-based SPID Data Center (SPIDDC) software provided by COMPANY to fulfill spare
parts requirements for the Project. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with COMPANY's spare
parts team or COMPANY's designated Spares Coordinator to ensure Suppliers understand the
SPID process and deliverables.
2) The SPID process requires COMPANY to directly interface with Suppliers throughout the spare
parts procurement cycle; therefore CONTRACTOR shall ensure POs include provisions to
facilitate COMPANY communication with Suppliers. CONTRACTOR shall also facilitate
COMPANY's interface with spare parts Suppliers when requested by COMPANY.
3) CONTRACTOR shall order COMPANY-approved capital and two-year operating spare parts,
and arrange for their delivery to warehouse location(s) specified by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall also order and arrange delivery of special tools and COMPANY equipment
as directed by COMPANY.
4) CONTRACTOR shall ensure Suppliers provide all required spare parts data specified in the PO
prior to paying invoices for spare parts. Required documentation includes, but is not limited to,
the following:
a) Certifications
a) Test reports
a) Spares cataloging and identification data
Page 135 of 407


Information related to customs clearance

Country-specific regulatory requirements
5) CONTRACTOR shall identify spare parts (including commissioning and start-up spares, capital
spares, and two-year operating spares) with the purchase of the parent equipment.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure Suppliers submit the following spare parts information to
COMPANY in the English language and in a format prescribed by COMPANY:
a) Suppliers' completed Notification of Intent Letter (with quote for parent equipment).
a) Equipment bill of material (BOM) and Supplier or sub-Supplier BOMs in electronic format.
BOMs shall be submitted within 21 days after manufacturing completion.
a) Recommended Spare Parts List (RSPL) information (using a COMPANY-provided web-
based tool or an alternate electronic format approved by COMPANY).
Equipment special tools list by equipment tag number, if applicable.
A list of all spare parts subject to export controls as established by appropriate regulatory authorities.
Listings shall include spare parts identification numbers.
6) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY the Suppliers' spare parts information.
7) CONTRACTOR shall submit a list of planned commissioning and start-up spares to COMPANY
for review and approval within 120 days after the associated parent equipment PO is issued to
Supplier. CONTRACTOR shall modify the list as directed by COMPANY.
8) CONTRACTOR shall appoint a Spares Procurement Advisor as the single point of contact for
Project spare parts matters. Prior to assignment, CONTRACTOR shall submit the proposed
candidate’s qualifications (e.g., resume or CV) for review and approval.
7.2.9.1 Recommended Spare Parts List

1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure Suppliers submit to COMPANY, via the SPIDDC, their initial
RSPLs for capital spares, commissioning and start-up spares, two-year operating spares, special
tooling, and diagnostic equipment within 90 days after the PO is issued to Supplier or 60 days
prior to manufacturing completion, whichever is earlier.
2) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that each Supplier's final RSPL submission shall be received by
COMPANY via the SPIDDC no later than 21 days after manufacturing completion.
CONTRACTOR shall also ensure that equipment POs require Suppliers to guarantee spare parts
price validity for a minimum of 180 days from the date of COMPANY's acceptance of each
Supplier's final RSPL.
3) CONTRACTOR shall keep current the RSPL as spare parts information is identified.
7.3.1 Materials Management System

1) CONTRACTOR shall have a comprehensive computerized Material Management System (MMS)
that provides the following:
a) Efficient transfer of information from drawings and BOMs to requisition, inquiry, and
purchase orders
a) Dissemination of information to various reports that track expediting, shipment, payment,
and receipt of equipment and materials in the field
2) The MMS shall have the following minimum capabilities:
a) Sort by various activities
Page 136 of 407


a) Useable from various site locations providing real-time information

a) Generate POs and other purchasing documents.
Maintain and provide to COMPANY delivery status data, with comparison to fabrication and field
required dates for purposes of reporting and initiating corrective actions as required for all
procurement milestones—commencing from engineering and continuing through purchasing,
fabrication or manufacturing, inspection, delivery, and transportation to final destination.
Track material location from receipt to issuance for fabrication and/or installation.
Be capable of summarizing engineered equipment or bulk materials used in a module, discrete
fabrication unit, or substructure.
Track field allocation of bulk materials purchased.
Maintain historical records of all materials from identification of need through actual field issue.
Identify equipment and materials by tag number or material code and the associated isometrics,
drawings, BOMs, or similar engineering documentation that links to the related WORK.
Identify requisition and PO numbers, associated line item numbers, or similar significant or non-
significant numbering systems.
Maintain data on all warehouses and outside storage locations.
Track material and equipment issued from the warehouse by tag number and record the receiving
location and any subsequent moves.
Be accessible from both the home office and field sites.
Make reports from the system available to COMPANY for review and monitoring.
3) Produce electronic files suitable for loading into the current COMPANY business-applicable
program with cross-reference of CONTRACTOR’s equipment and material codes to
COMPANY's materials codes.
4) CONTRACTOR shall load COMPANY's codes prior to Start-up and Turnover to Operations. In
general, CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
a) Review all data and provide any other quality control checks required to ensure the accuracy
of the data contained in the database.
a) Provide the data using MS Excel or other software specified by COMPANY.
7.3.2 Overall Procurement Management Plan

The Overall Procurement Management Plan shall include the following information:
1) A description of CONTRACTOR’s procurement organization. This shall include structuring the
organization to ensure there is an appropriate separation of duties between personnel involved in
receiving and other activities to maintain adequate controls through the end of the Project.
2) Details on allocation of roles and responsibilities to ensure effective integration of procurement
activities with other functions such as engineering, construction, and commissioning, including
the following procurement functions:
a) Purchasing
Subcontracting
Subcontract administration
Expediting
Logistics
Page 137 of 407


Materials management at the WORK SITE

Management of spare parts
3) A description of processes, including training, to ensure effective and efficient assimilation of
procurement personnel and job handover throughout the course of Project execution.
4) A summary explanation of CONTRACTOR’s procurement management systems and processes
that will be used for the WORK from execution planning through warehousing and final
disposition of equipment and materials at the WORK SITE.
5) Materials preservation plan to include the minimum requirements set forth in Section 7.3.8 of
Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
7.3.3 Overall Purchasing Plan

The Overall Purchasing Plan shall include the following information:
1) An explanation of purchasing systems and sample reports, processes, and procedures, and
description of how CONTRACTOR will employ them in executing purchasing activities to
achieve Project objectives. The plan shall include a listing of purchasing procedures developed
and those yet to be developed, showing a corresponding timeline for completion.
2) Description of CONTRACTOR's strategy for identification of engineered equipment and bulk
material Suppliers for those items not covered in Section J of the JOB SPECIFICATION.
3) Description of details of CONTRACTOR's prequalification process used to evaluate any
additional Suppliers prior to nominating them for COMPANY approval, including guidelines,
checklists, and related document templates. The qualification process shall focus on the
following qualifications:
a) Technical performance qualification including technical capabilities, capacities, safety,
quality, and schedule
b) Commercial qualification compliance screening, including methods to ensure:
c) The prospective Supplier is not restricted by LAW (e.g., restricted parties screening
d) Financial strength and stability of prospective Supplier
e) The above commercial screening process is required for all Suppliers commensurate with the
PO criticality and value (i.e., including those listed in Section J of the JOB
SPECIFICATION).
4) Description of CONTRACTOR's plan for addressing COMPANY's goal to standardize
manufacturers of equipment and bulk materials for spare parts and maintainability benefits,
including plan to optimize use of COMPANY’s and CONTRACTOR’s enabling purchasing
agreements.
5) CONTRACTOR's plan to identify and use Local Suppliers in executing the WORK.
6) CONTRACTOR's purchasing-related templates, including but not limited to pro forma POs (with
criteria for use of the various forms) and sample reports.
7) Strategy for the timely purchase of spare parts per the JOB SPECIFICATION, recognizing
opportunities for cost savings and the unique interfaces with COMPANY representatives based on
specified types (e.g., capital, two-year operating, and commissioning and start-up spares),
quantities and special packaging, shipping, and documentation requirements (e.g., database
format).
8) Description of CONTRACTOR's needs for Supplier data and CONTRACTOR's plan for
acquisition of the Supplier data, including organizational responsibility for tracking, receiving,
expediting, and reporting.
Page 138 of 407


9) Initial PO register with content consistent with Section 7.2.2.3 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES.
10) A list of planned equipment purchases where technical support agreements or long-term service
agreements are required and a description of CONTRACTOR's plans for obtaining these services,
either for CONTRACTOR or on behalf of COMPANY. The list shall include Supplier services
required for installation, commissioning, start-up, or operator training.
11) List of inquiries and POs initiated by COMPANY prior to EFFECTIVE DATE, as may be
specified in the JOB SPECIFICATION, and a process to transition them into CONTRACTOR's
system where necessary for CONTRACTOR to complete the purchasing activities.
12) List of materials and equipment that will potentially be purchased at the WORK SITE. The value
of items purchased at the WORK SITE shall be limited to levels approved by COMPANY.
13) A list of Critical Items as well as equipment and material at or near the Critical Path. COMPANY
will review and include additional items on the list as required. In addition to reviews required
per Table F7-1, where applicable COMPANY’s review shall include proposed sources of key
materials and critical components, including sub-suppliers, sources of billets, and fabrication
locations (see GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements).
14) A list of the major purchasing issues anticipated for the WORK (with emphasis on interface
management and priority based on Project risk (e.g., work scope, schedule, value, etc.), and
recommended actions to successfully address these issues.
15) CONTRACTOR's procedures for export compliance.
16) CONTRACTOR's plans for materials surplus mitigation and strategy with Suppliers on restocking
rates or buy back to be included in equipment and material POs.
7.3.4 Individual Purchasing Plans

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare Individual Purchasing Plans for Critical Items and for POs valued
above the amount stated in the Special Conditions below.
2) The level of detail for each Individual Purchasing Plan shall be commensurate with its criticality
and the PO value. Each Individual Purchasing Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following:
a) Scope of supply, by tag numbers, if applicable.
b) Recommended procurement method (e.g., single source, call-off from enabling agreement,
competitive bid, etc.) and bidders list.
c) Lead time estimates for major purchasing milestones developed by CONTRACTOR for
scheduling purposes.
d) Target dates for principal events, such as requisition receipt, bid list finalization, inquiry issue
and proposal due dates, bid evaluation, award recommendation, target date for execution of
Page 139 of 407


order, and required-onsite (ROS) date. These times shall be compatible with the schedule for
the WORK.
e) Description of relevant quality control and testing requirements.
f) General technical requirements and specifications.
g) If applicable, relevant post-order delivery dates for design and interface information,
materials and/or services, and special interface management issues resulting from placement
of the order such as interfaces with COMPANY's other Contractors.
h) General discussion of proposed technical and commercial evaluation criteria, which may
include but is not limited to the following:
i) Schedule (equipment and spares delivery)
ii) Execution considerations
iii) Delivery terms
iv) Quality considerations
v) Anticipated technical aspects of the competing proposals
vi) Anticipated commercial aspects of the competing proposals (including estimated cost of
spare parts and technical services, as appropriate)
vii) Licensing requirements
viii) Confidentiality requirements
ix) Other such terms to be requested from bidders, including payment terms, damages for
delay, warranties and buy-back of surplus materials
Releases against CONTRACTOR's or COMPANY's existing pre-priced enabling agreements and POs
placed on a single-source basis do not require detailed bid evaluation plans if the original agreement
has already been approved by COMPANY (e.g., agreement covering bulk materials).
7.3.5 Company Provided Items

COMPANY may formally assign previously COMPANY-awarded equipment and material purchase
orders and subcontracts to the CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall assume responsibility for
COMPANY-assigned purchase orders and subcontracts as if they were CONTRACTOR's own,
including all administrative activities, until completion of the WORK.
Specifically CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for remaining engineering, purchase order
management (e.g., CHANGE ORDERS), Expediting, related vendor documentation, invoice
payment/s, Quality Assurance/Quality Control (QA/QC), Logistics, Material Traceability, and Site
Material Control of COMPANY-assigned purchase orders and subcontracts. CONTRACTOR'S
responsibility also includes related warranty and performance integrity of the assigned equipment.
All COMPANY-provided equipment and materials are included in Section I of the JOB
SPECIFICATION.
7.3.6 Overall Subcontracting Plan

The Overall Subcontracting Plan shall include the following information:
1) An explanation of CONTRACTOR's subcontracting systems and sample reports, processes, and
procedures, and description of how CONTRACTOR will employ them in executing
subcontracting activities to achieve Project objectives. The plan shall include a listing of
subcontracting procedures developed and those yet to be developed, showing a corresponding
timeline for completion.
Page 140 of 407


2) Description of portions of the WORK that CONTRACTOR proposes to subcontract, including the
following:
a) The general division of responsibility between CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors for
providing engineering documents, materials, equipment, services, etc., and definition of
each party's roles and responsibilities
The number and proposed compensation basis of subcontracts, including the scope of WORK and
estimated value for each
3) CONTRACTOR’s plan to identify and use local Subcontractors in executing the WORK.
4) Subcontracts that CONTRACTOR proposes to manage from the WORK SITE, including a
description of any portion of oversight or assistance to be provided by the home office.
5) CONTRACTOR’s subcontracting-related templates, including but not limited to, pro forma
subcontract (with criteria for use of the various forms).
6) Description of details of CONTRACTOR's prequalification process used to evaluate any
additional Subcontractors prior to nominating them for COMPANY approval, including
guidelines, checklists, and related document templates. The qualification process shall focus on
the following qualifications:
a) Technical performance qualification including technical capabilities, capacities, safety,
quality, and schedule.
a) Commercial qualification compliance screening, including methods to ensure the following:
i. The prospective Subcontractor is not restricted by LAW (e.g., restricted parties
screening
ii. Financial strength and stability of the prospective Subcontractor based on a
subcontract value or other criteria as determined by COMPANY
7) Initial subcontract register consistent with Section 7.2.2.3 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES, with schedule for managing all subcontracting activities (e.g., issuance of
inquiries, bid evaluations, execution of subcontracts, etc.) through subcontract closeout, ensuring
that the key dates shown are compatible with the CONTRACT SCHEDULE. The register shall
include pertinent data such as requisition and subcontract numbers, scope, execution milestones
(target and actual dates, including for required COMPANY approvals), and amendments.
8) List of inquiries and contracts initiated by COMPANY prior to EFFECTIVE DATE, as may be
specified in the JOB SPECIFICATION, and a process to transition them into CONTRACTOR’s
system where necessary for CONTRACTOR to complete the subcontracting activities.
9) A list of the major subcontracting issues anticipated for the WORK with emphasis on interface
management and priority based on Project risk (e.g., work scope, schedule, value, etc.), and
recommended actions to successfully address these issues.
10) A summary of subcontracting activities already completed by CONTRACTOR.
11) Subcontract administration processes and procedures, including the following:
a) A description of how CONTRACTOR will ensure that Subcontractors comply with all
requirements of the subcontract
a) CONTRACTOR's allocation of roles and responsibilities for oversight of subcontract
activities, including change management and document control
7.3.7 Individual Subcontracting Plans

CONTRACTOR shall prepare Individual Subcontracting Plans for subcontracts valued above the
amount stated in the Special Conditions below.
Page 141 of 407


The level of detail for each Individual Subcontracting Plan shall be commensurate with its value and
potential impact on the Project. Each Individual Subcontracting Plan shall include, as a minimum, the
following:
1) Scope of WORK to be subcontracted.
2) The detail division of responsibility between CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors for providing
engineering documents, materials, equipment, WORK SITE services, etc., and definition of each
party's roles and responsibilities.
3) Recommended procurement method (e.g., single source, call-off from enabling agreement,
competitive bid, etc.), proposed compensation basis, and bidders list.
4) Lead-time estimates for major milestones developed by CONTRACTOR for scheduling purposes.
5) Subcontracting process milestones such as inquiry issue and proposal due dates, proposal
evaluation, award recommendation, and target dates for subcontract award and execution.
6) General technical and execution requirements and specifications.
7) If applicable, relevant post-award delivery dates for interface information, materials and/or
services, and a special interface management issues with COMPANY's other Contractors.
8) General discussion of proposed bid review program including technical, execution, and
commercial evaluation criteria addressing the following:
a) Pricing and other commercial considerations
Schedule
Interface and execution considerations
Quality considerations
Confidentiality requirements
Page 142 of 407


7.3.8 Materials Management Plan

The Materials Management Plan shall include the following information:
1) An explanation of CONTRACTOR’s Material Management System (MMS) and management
processes to address execution planning and support from engineering through purchasing,
fabrication or manufacturing, inspection, transportation, and delivery, and through warehousing
and final disposition of equipment and materials at the WORK SITE. The explanation shall
include, as a minimum:
a) A description of how CONTRACTOR will establish realistic and achievable ROS delivery
dates for equipment and materials that are consistent with the fabrication and construction
sequence and schedule,
A description of how CONTRACTOR will track materials (and material traceability) and equipment
throughout the entire procurement chain from issuance of process data requirements and requisitions
by Engineering, through purchase, receipt of Supplier data, release to Supplier for fabrication,
transport, delivery to final destination, material receipt, and issuance to end users.
2) Explanation of CONTRACTOR’s material management systems, processes, and procedures, and
a description of how CONTRACTOR will employ them in executing materials management
activities at the WORK SITE to achieve Project objectives. The plan shall include a listing of
material management procedures developed and those yet to be developed, showing a
corresponding timeline for completion.
3) Process CONTRACTOR will use to identify and track equipment, materials, and services.
4) Description of CONTRACTOR's field materials management and warehousing systems and
processes.
5) CONTRACTOR's plans to properly store, preserve, and maintain equipment and materials
received to maintain the validity of all warranties and to prevent damage
6) CONTRACTOR’s plans to properly dispose of scrap, junk and waste.
7) CONTRACTOR's methods to minimize (to the extent possible) Project surplus, including a
description of CONTRACTOR's processes to perform the following:
a) Early identification of surplus material and periodic reporting to COMPANY with
recommended disposition plans
b) Execute agreed disposition plans in accordance with the following, as applicable:
i. Return of material to Suppliers under buy-back or restocking provisions
ii. Sale of material to third parties or transfer for use by COMPANY at other locations
iii. Re-export
8) Description of CONTRACTOR's field materials management and warehousing plan, including
the following:
a) How CONTRACTOR will meet the field materials management and warehousing
requirements listed in Section 7.2.8 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES and
elsewhere in the JOB SPECIFICATION
a) Procedures to adequately verify that the correct material was received in good condition, was
received per the purchase order, and was issued to the appropriate WORK location in the
quantities authorized
Process to track and close OS&Ds
Page 143 of 407


7.3.9 Expediting and Logistics Plan

The Expediting Plan shall include the following information:
1) CONTRACTOR’s expediting and logistics systems, processes, and procedures, and description of
how CONTRACTOR will employ them in its expediting and logistics activities to achieve Project
objectives. The plan shall include a listing of expediting and logistics procedures already
developed and those yet to be developed, showing a corresponding timeline for completion. The
procedures and reports shall be designed to assure timely delivery of the equipment and materials
purchased for the WORK, covering all aspects of expediting and transportation, from placement
of the PO through receipt of goods, including spare parts.
2) List of Critical Path items and specific expediting/logistics plans for these purchases.
3) Matrix showing CONTRACTOR responsibilities by discipline (e.g., management, purchasing,
expediting, engineering, etc.) for Critical Path items.
4) Target dates for order placement, initial Supplier alignment meetings, and follow-up meetings.
5) Description of how CONTRACTOR shall expedite the following:
a) Supplier acknowledgment of POs and revisions
Submittal of required Supplier drawings and data
CONTRACTOR's comments and/or timely approval of Supplier drawings and data received
Placement of sub-orders by Suppliers
Inspection requirements and dates
Delivery of equipment and materials
Shipping invoices (as needed for exporting)
Receipt of detailed schedules from Suppliers showing the following:
i. Delivery of preliminary and final Supplier drawings, calculations, and data
ii. Delivery of key raw materials (steel plate, castings, forgings)
iii. Completion of final assembly or fabrication
iv. Preliminary and final Supplier data books as required by the JOB SPECIFICATION
v. Coordination of closeout of Supplier-related deliverables and payment of retention
7.3.10 Nominated Suppliers and Subcontractors

1) CONTRACTOR shall utilize instructions provided in COMPANY guidelines – Qualified
Suppliers and Subcontractors for evaluating and nominating additional suppliers and
subcontractors for performance of the WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR’s non-compliance with nomination procedures prescribed in COMPANY
guidelines – Qualified Supplier and Subcontractors may be considered sole grounds for
disapproval or rejection of supplier and/or subcontractor nominations. COMPANY shall have no
obligation to approve nominations for supplier or subcontractor nominations submitted for
approval by CONTRACTOR.
3) Nomination procedure should be applied for instances where qualified supplier and
subcontractors intend to also sub-contract.
4) COMPANY's Materials Management group shall review the nominated Freight Forwarders and
Customs Clearing Agent’s actual process and procedures prior to execution.
Page 144 of 407


7.3.11 Spare Parts Management Plan

The Spare Parts Management Plan shall include the following information:
1) Method CONTRACTOR will use to ensure Suppliers and freight forwarder(s) enter required
information and updates into the SPIDDC.
2) High-level spare parts procurement schedule that illustrates method CONTRACTOR will use to
ensure all capital and two-year operating spare parts will be received at COMPANY designated
location(s) no later than one month prior to system commissioning.
3) Method CONTRACTOR will use to advise COMPANY of issues that may adversely impact the
execution of the Spare Parts Management Plan. CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY as
soon as possible after issue is identified.
4) Process CONTRACTOR will use to ensure spare parts are continually under control for
identification and tracking purposes, are properly preserved, and are delivered with proper
Supplier, customs, and regulatory documentation.
5) Method CONTRACTOR will use to address and resolve spare parts OS&Ds.
6) CONTRACTOR's procedures for replacement of COMPANY-owned two-year and/or capital
spare parts used during commissioning and start-up.
7) Method CONTRACTOR will use to ensure preservation and material labeling by Suppliers and/or
freight forwarder to meet COMPANY specifications.
8) Procedures CONTRACTOR will use to ensure spares shipped with packaged equipment are
accounted for and tracked.
9) Process CONTRACTOR will use to ensure spare parts for equipment delivered to
CONTRACTOR by COMPANY (e.g., LLE, free issue, etc.) are managed, tracked, preserved, and
delivered in accordance with requirements herein.
7.4 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall regularly inform COMPANY of CONTRACTOR's ongoing procurement
activities via meetings with COMPANY and issuance of procurement reports on an agreed schedule
not less frequently than monthly. Format and content for the reports will be agreed upon between
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR prior to first issuance and shall include the following as a
minimum:
1) A six-week look-ahead on procurement-related activities.
2) Customs reports including full detailed and itemized reports of import duties, TAXES, or any
other required payments made by CONTRACTOR or CONTRACTOR's agents necessary for the
clearance of items through customs. These reports shall be submitted to COMPANY at least once
a month or more frequently as requested by COMPANY.
3) Procurement status reports showing the overall progress of the following:
a) Preparation of requisitions
Issuance of inquiries
Receipt of bids
Issuance of POs and subcontracts
Cost comparison of actual PO and subcontract value versus CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET
PO and subcontract change orders, claims, and potential or actual impacts
Page 145 of 407


4) Materials delivery status report, in Microsoft Excel format, that includes the following
information for each PO or suborder:
a) PO number
a) Brief description of the equipment or materials
a) ECCN of any controlled materials
Supplier and manufacturing location for each part of the PO
Date required (i.e., construction ROS dates or equivalent), with updates as engineering and
construction of the WORK progresses
Original and current promised delivery dates
Date of last expediting contact and type of contact
Estimated time of departure (ETD), actual time of departure (ATD), estimated time of arrival (ETA),
and actual time of arrival (ATA)
5) Materials delivery exception reports listing all items (including, if applicable, fabricated piping
spools) that are required to meet construction schedules but which have not yet been delivered to
the WORK SITE. These reports shall show for each listed item the forecasted and promised
delivery dates, PO number, name of Supplier, and date of last expediting visit.
6) Ad hoc purchasing reports such as the following:
a) Field material requisition, procurement, and expediting reports
a) Construction, commissioning, and remote site material shortage reports
a) Supplier technical support reports
Closeout status reports
Surplus material disposal reports
7) For field materials management and warehousing, weekly reports showing receipt date, storage
location, preservation status, date issued to field, and key issues that will negatively impact
materials management activities. CONTRACTOR shall send the weekly report electronically to
COMPANY in a format to be agreed upon between COMPANY and CONTRACTOR.

In addition to other specific information requested by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR's Closeout
Report shall include the following:
1) Statistics, highlights and issues for the following:
a) Purchasing
Subcontracting
Materials Management
Spare Parts
2) Final PO, subcontract, and spare parts lists.
3) List of equipment, materials, and related CONTRACTOR GROUP member names with contact
information.
Page 146 of 407


8. Construction, Fabrication, and WORK SITE Operations
8.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will provide the following:
a) Timely review of all construction work plans, procedures, and programs submitted for
approval and provision of comments normally within 10 business days
b) Timely response to all inspection and witness requests, provided the requests have been
properly submitted
c) Timely release of the work front
d) The results of construction execution studies and other information deemed beneficial by
COMPANY
e) Formal site instructions (persons authorized to issue site instructions is to be advised by
COMPANY Project Manager)
f) COMPANY toolkits and go-bys deemed beneficial by COMPANY as guidance for applicable
WORK (e.g., the Mechanical Completion Toolkit)
2) COMPANY will lead and conduct Construction Readiness Reviews.

1) CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY for review CONTRACTOR’s preventive
maintenance program for construction equipment. CONTRACTOR shall perform inspections and
maintain test records for cranes and associated lifting and rigging aids or equipment used for lifts
as defined in GP 04-14-01 and other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR shall make all test
records available to COMPANY at COMPANY’s request.
2) In accordance with Section 1, Table F1-2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval the Construction Plan(s).
a) Implement CONTRACTOR's Construction Plan(s).
b) Breakdown the Project scope under simple, sequential, and systematic activities that facilitate
work group analysis for identification of potential hazards, mitigations, and controls and to
reduce the risk to levels that are attainable and acceptable (i.e., work activity planning and
work packages, job safety analyses [JSAs], and Permit-to-Work [PTW] System)
c) Develop and utilize construction work packages for all elements or activities of the WORK,
d) Work packages shall clearly define the following:
i. Scope of work for the package
ii. Brief description of execution plans and procedural requirements and any special
requirements such as shutdown or live work, work permits, special permits, etc.
iii. Risk analyses – JSAs, mitigations, and emergency protocols
iv. Identification of responsible persons, their manager, and immediate subordinate with
complete contact information for each
v. Scheduling and planning details
vi. Reference Documents – drawings, specifications, and procedures (listed and copies of
specifics provided within the work package)
Page 147 of 407


vii. Resource requirements – personnel, construction equipment, special tools, scaffolding,

and materials
viii. Witness, hold points, and inspection requirements (requests prepared in advance)
Starting at commencement of the WORK, conduct focused and effective planning,
communication, and coordination for Mechanical Completion (MC), integrating with
Quality activities and to support Systems Completion priorities. CONTRACTOR shall
provide the following:
i. An MC team composed of the following:
 Leadership personnel from CONTRACTOR's MC group who shall serve as the MC
Coordinator(s)
 Representatives from construction, quality control/assurance, and Systems
Completion
 Sufficient dedicated facilitation crews composed of highly skilled craftsmen from
each discipline, with all necessary resource support to execute the activities related
to MC.
 Sufficient resources to repair any deficiency or complete any unfinished work
found during the regular inspection in order to achieve the objective of zero punch
list items for MC.
 Refer to Section 9. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES for
additional MC requirements.
Verify the correctness of information provided by COMPANY, especially datum and benchmark
survey data prior to use.
Upon receipt of authorized site instructions, take immediate action to comply with the requirements of
said instructions. CONTRACTOR shall follow the CHANGE ORDER Management procedures for
site instructions that may constitute a CONTRACT Change.
Maintain a register of all received site instructions including verified status and review with
COMPANY in the weekly construction meetings.
Prepare reports, perform verifications, and hold meetings as follows:
i. Daily, weekly, and monthly construction meetings with COMPANY to discuss
current status of safety performance and initiatives, productivity, progress, critical
issues, and projected activities for the upcoming three weeks
ii. Weekly review meetings—which COMPANY representatives may attend at their sole
discretion—with each of CONTRACTOR's Subcontractors and Suppliers to discuss
current status of safety performance and initiatives, progress completeness,
productivity, critical issues, and projected activities for the upcoming three weeks
4) CONTRACTOR shall develop and utilize a waste collection program that shall be based on
segregation of waste from time of collection using a “reuse / repurpose / recycle / dispose”
philosophy so as to minimize waste disposal and environmental impact.
5) CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to COMPANY's satisfaction that the removal of useable
surplus bulk materials or construction equipment will not impact progress.
6) CONTRACTOR shall demonstrate to COMPANY's satisfaction that the dismissal of construction
workforces or management will not negatively impact progress.
Page 148 of 407


8.2.1 Construction Reviews

CONTRACTOR shall support all COMPANY-led construction reviews, including as a minimum the
Construction Readiness Review, Mechanical Completion reviews, and safety reviews.
CONTRACTOR shall perform the following in support of these reviews:
1) Provide all DOCUMENTS selected by COMPANY one week in advance of reviews
2) Make available CONTRACTOR's Project personnel for interviews
3) Provide office and administrative services (e.g., meeting rooms, printing and photocopying
support, and other logistics support), as required to conduct the reviews
8.2.2 Construction Readiness Review

Prior to mobilization, Construction and Installation Readiness Reviews shall be held involving the key
personnel from CONTRACTOR, and CONTRACTOR’s contractors, If any approved by
COMPANY. The Readiness Reviews shall be used to confirm that all parties have a clear mutual
understanding and are aligned on execution objectives, safety management, incident reporting, and
emergency preparedness. The reviews shall also be used to confirm that the Contractor has the proper
plans, procedures, documents, certifications, personnel, tools, equipment, etc. to begin or continue
construction / installation activities that are in full compliance with the contract and can be conducted
in a timely and efficiency manner.
8.3 Fabrication
CONTRACTOR will advise COMPANY on CONTRACTOR's fabrication strategy at its own WORK
SITE(s) and those of its subcontractors. CONTRACTOR will obtain COMPANY agreement on the
following, as a minimum:
1) Plans for mobilizing and demobilizing equipment, material, personnel, and subcontractors to/from
the WORK SITE.
2) Erection plan, including size of components built in shops or outside areas; erection of major
sections/blocks for outside yard and assembly; erection sequence; placement and selection of
construction equipment, such as cranes, jacking towers, transporters, and their degree of
utilization.
3) Detail for workflow through the yard, beginning with delivery of steel and continuing to each
phase of each work element to the completed component.
4) Plan for protection of equipment and materials from the time CONTRACTOR takes custody until
the item is turned over to COMPANY at the installation site. The Plan shall include provisions
for preventive maintenance per vendor requirements.
5) Ensure that all steel plates provided are nested in the most efficient manner prior to cutting and
rolling. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all steel pipe, tubulars, sections, etc., are measured and
cut with the minimum scrap as is practical.
6) Plan and procedures for material traceability from the time CONTRACTOR receives materials
that are to be provided by CONTRACTOR.
7) Requirements for major construction tools and equipment and for their maintenance.
8) Requirements for temporary offices, warehousing, and other facilities.
9) Requirements for electrical power, water, sewage disposal, and all other utilities. Mitigation
measures to ensure adequate drainage at WORK SITE(s).
10) Plans for hiring craft personnel, identifying employment criteria, orientation, and training
requirements.
11) Plans for measuring, monitoring and reporting field labor productivity at the individual or craft
level weekly and plans continuously to improve productivity during the work
Page 149 of 407


12) Details regarding the use of vendors' technical representatives during construction, systems
completion, installation, commissioning, and start-up.
13) Procedures for managing subcontracted work.
14) Consideration of Critical lifts with sufficiently detailed plans to demonstrate all aspects of the lift
(e.g., size and capacity of rigging equipment, crane and/or load movements, radii, and capacities
and ground conditions).
15) Dimensional control, including, but not limited to, adherence with tolerance, documentation,
certification, personnel qualifications, etc.
16) Weight control, including weight certification for equipment, modules, etc., and development of a
database to steward the weight budget.
17) Plans and procedures for load out and tie down of all components four (4) weeks prior to load out.
8.4.1 Construction Plan

1) CONTRACTOR shall develop and use a Construction Plan with an execution strategy that
encompasses the requirements of all COORDINATION PROCEDURE sections.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure the execution strategy within the Construction Plan meets the
requirements of the CONTRACT and sets no higher priority than safety in the execution of the
WORK.
2) The Construction Plan shall be the basis for implementation of construction activities and provide
governance of all such activities at locations where WORK is performed.
3) As a minimum the plan(s) shall address the following:
a) Plans for achieving all requirements, including safety, security, health, and environment
(SSH&E); quality (Section 14.); schedule; and cost:
b) Execution strategy
i. Assessment of WORK SITE
 Access, possession, security, laydown area, etc.
 Local resources – availability, skills, cost, and other influences
 Assessment of community affairs
ii. Assessment of Risks
 Identification of risks
 Strategies to mitigate
 Backup plans and provisions
 Risk assessment update process
iii. Execution method
 Self-performed
 Subcontractor-performed
 Vendor-performed with support
 Modular or stick
 Fabrication – at the WORK SITE or Off Site
Page 150 of 407


 Work planning – scope, sequence, interdependences, JSAs, PTW requirements,

and etc.)
c) Construction management
i. Construction organizational structure
ii. Staffing plans
iii. Mobilization and demobilization
iv. Reporting authorities
d) Subcontractors
i. Overall Subcontractor management – methods, strategies, policies, procedures for pre-
qualification, engagement process, COMPANY approval, etc.
ii. Scope of Work – roles and responsibilities, interfaces, etc.
iii. Coordination – interfaces
iv. Performance monitoring
v. Controls
e) Construction labor
i. Estimation of required resources
ii. Workforce availability – local vs. imported and sourcing
iii. Engagement requirements – employment terms, work permits, visas, security
background check, medical check, holidays, leaves, benefits, etc.
iv. Skills assessment – developmental training
v. Retention of developed crafts persons
vi. Life support facilities
vii. Transport requirements
viii. Labor Conditions - CONTRACTOR will establish labor conditions and/or agreements
and provide copies of such agreements to COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall keep
COMPANY informed on labor conditions at the WORK SITE(s). CONTRACTOR
will notify COMPANY six (6) months in advance of proposed changes to, or the
expiration of, any labor agreements.
ix. CONTRACTOR shall maintain a catalogued, digital photographic library and
notebook, with fine resolution, capturing monthly progress and key delivery, erection,
and installation events
4) Human factors in construction – including anthropometrics and biomechanics
a)Ergonomics – tools choices, correct usage, rest cycle, requirements changes, etc.
b) Power zones – accessibility placement, tools vs. strength, multiple persons, different
accessibility requirements for multiple uses, etc.
c) Environmental considerations – heat, noise, light, ventilation, vibration, accessibility,
exposure times, etc.
5) WORK SITE constructability
a) Hazard mitigation and control plans in place before the start of construction
b) Suitability of adjacent areas for use as work areas
Page 151 of 407


c) Sequences of installation
d) Maintenance of three-dimensional accessibility
e) Erection and assembly safety – cordoning, sequencing work, fall protection, and etc.
f) Coordinated usage of major construction equipment
g) Minimized work at heights – i.e., dressing of equipment prior to erection
h) Coordinated scaffolding and minimized support from ground – i.e., incorporate attachments
into permanent facilities and equipment for hanging scaffold
i) Brownfield tie-ins – i.e., utilize replacement spools instead of hot taps as philosophy
j) Conflict identification
6) Temporary facilities requirements
a) Infrastructure development – materials offloading and receiving facilities, access roads, onsite
roads, parking, staging, storage, laydown areas, etc.
b) Life support facilities, including accommodations, medical care, recreation, food handling
and serving, housekeeping, laundry services, security, and all other facilities to render a
physically and mentally healthful environment
c) Temporary utilities generation and distribution, and wastes collection, treatment and disposal
for the life support facilities, temporary facilities, and construction work areas
d) Temporary facilities maintenance and operations
e) Construction fuels, lubricants, and equipment servicing
f) Layouts should consider the following:
i. Cross-wind locations from hydrocarbon areas (before and after start-up)
ii. Location of temporary facilities should consider potential expansion areas for future
work
iii. Preservation of emergency and delivery accessibility with a minimum of two routes
iv. Allowance for large equipment turning radius and not creating blind intersections
v. Separation of travel paths for personnel from equipment
vi. Drainage
vii. Proximities so as to minimize utilities distribution costs
7) Construction equipment
a) Sources of equipment and spare parts
b) Pre-inspection of equipment at origin prior to mobilizing
c) Customs and import duties, and duration limitations for recovery of duties
d) Export requirements
e) Validation of any temporary construction equipment
8) Simultaneous operations (SIMOPS)
a) Identification of SIMOPS activities and interfaces
b) Constraints such as not affecting operating company production
c) Hazards analysis and mitigations
Page 152 of 407


d) Scheduling and coordination

e) Permit requirements and procedures
9) Mechanical Completion
a) Define MC organization and authorities
b) Define the process for generation of integrity documentation by quality team during
construction and integration of quality efforts with MC objectives
c) Define completion package documentation requirements
d) Coordination of MC with Systems Completion requirements
e) Define the plan and process by which MC transitions from area-based to system-based
f) Ensure compliance with COMPANY records requirements
g) Establish the requirements and process to prepare the Mechanical Completion Dossier
h) Describe use of a tri-party walk down for verification of completeness and preparation of
punch list
i) Promote a zero punch list objective for Mechanical Completion
j) Establish a clearance program to close out the Category "A" punch list items in a timely
manner, with minimum impact to the schedule and to the commissioning activities
k) Develop a plan to close out Category "B" and "C" punch list items after MC Certification
l) Define metrics for tracking of MC status and potential issues impeding progress
10) Permit-to-Work System
a) CONTRACTOR shall plan to implement Operating Company PTW System (to be provided)
for brownfield WORK
a) CONTRACTOR shall plan to implement a PTW System as per COMPANY requirements or
approved CONTRACTOR plan for greenfield WORK
11) Isolation plan
a) Positive vs. proved disconnect from all sources of energy
i. Removed pipe sections with open ends fitted with full rated blinds
ii. Full rated blinding
iii. Double block and bleed with vent
a) Lockout/tagout (LOTO) – e.g., electrical, mechanical, pressurized systems, etc.
14) Lift planning – ensuring compliance with GP 04-14-01 and other GP supplements.
15) Rigging apparatus and other lift equipment
a) Develop for implementation a control system that includes the following:
i. Tagging that displays easily identifiable current certification validity
ii. Certification for all lifting and rigging equipment onsite
iii. Usage records for all lifting over 80 percent safe working load
iv. Storage requirements (equipment without required certification to be quarantined)
v. Inspection after each use
Page 153 of 407


vi. Maintenance, inspection, and tests plans for cranes and associated lifting aids or
equipment lifts as per GP 04-14-01 and other GP supplements.
16) Heavy haul plans
a) Load parameters – weight, center of gravity, and eccentricity confirmation
b) Route attributes – interfaces, obstructions, facilities crossings, bearing capacities confirmed
for all bridges, culverts and road sections, and required enhancements
c) Transport equipment selection
d) Notifications and permits
17) Materials receiving, storage, preservation, traceability, and issue
a) Materials storage and preservation in accordance with CONTRACT and provider
requirements
b) Full retention of Supplier records and traceability
18) Compressed gas cylinder control procedure addressing the following as a minimum:
a) Isolated storage area, shaded and incorporating blast directional control provisions
b) Segregated areas for full, partial, and empty cylinder storage
c) Segregation of differing gasses
d) Specialist cylinder handling team that delivers, moves, and recovers cylinders
19) Pressure testing plans for each system or system component to be tested, defining the following:
a) Test medium – source, treatment, disposal
b) Test specimen structural stability
c) Stored energy release study and mitigations
d) Controlled entry test areas – cordoning, notices, enforcement
e) Positive isolation – removed sections, full rated blinding, double block and bleed, etc.
f) Physical disconnection from equipment and non-included components
g) Thermal input variation
20) Waste management and construction site cleanliness
a) Waste collection and receptacle schedule
b) Reuse / repurpose / recycle / dispose waste collection plan
c) Temporary detention areas
d) Clean site policy, plan, and procedures
e) Additional procedures as needed
21) Demobilization plan
a) Plan for disposal of all useable surplus bulk materials
b) Demobilization plans for the following:
i. Materials
ii. Construction equipment
iii. Construction workforces
Page 154 of 407


iv. Management
8.5 ABANDONMENTS, DISMANTLING AND DEMOLITION

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for all abandonment, dismantling, and demolition engineering,
and all related supporting operations and this work shall be documented. CONTRACTOR will advise
COMPANY of CONTRACTOR’S abandonment, dismantling and demolition plans and obtain
COMPANY agreement on the following, as a minimum:
1) Plans to minimize environmental impact of abandonment, dismantling and demolition activities.
2) Shutdown requirements/duration.
3) Abandonment operation equipment, and temporary facilities
4) Proper disposal of abandoned water, chemical as well as waste fluids
5) Approvals required from relevant Regulatory Authority, Port State Authorities, Certification
Verification Agent and MWS and notification requirement to same.
6) Rigging material, appurtenances and special equipment to be used, with current certificates
available for COMPANY review.
7) Weather contingencies for all phases of onshore operations, including severe weather responses.
8.6 Reports
8.6.1 Daily Reports

CONTRACTOR's daily reports shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Weather condition’s effect upon planned work activities and schedule
2) SSH&E incidents, inspections, and initiatives
3) Site labor count by discipline and position effect upon planned work activities and schedule
4) Status of major construction equipment affect upon planned work activities and schedule
5) Interface requirements
6) Issues (work stoppages, advancement opportunities, recoveries, etc.)
7) Notable events (e.g., audit, visit by a very important person, major equipment setting, system
completion, etc.)

CONTRACTOR shall submit weekly reports to COMPANY a minimum of 24 hours in advance of
the weekly meeting. CONTRACTOR's weekly reports shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Safety statistics and trend analysis
2) Weekly expediting status report: less than 90 days from required-onsite (ROS) date and any
known issues
3) Three-week look-ahead report: status of actual vs. planned work completion tracked on a three-
week look ahead and one-week arrears bar chart schedule format with vertical delineation status
lines with arrow-indexing to identify current status by craft disciplines and by area
4) Weekly production report: actual vs. planned construction activities, labor productivity by crew,
craft or gang vs. USGC norms, changes in productivity from previous reports
Page 155 of 407


5) Weekly quality report (Audit schedule and results of audits conducted, Corrective Action Request
and Nonconformity Report status showing (open, closed, past agree closure date),, inspection
witness and hold point requests including FAT/SAT’s with a one month look ahead and weekly
look ahead schedules, rejections, and reschedules)
6) Summary of notable events (achievements, milestones, work stoppages)
7) List of work permits planned within the following two weeks
8) Record of work packages completed versus total with one-month projection
9) Materials receiving, storage, preservation, traceability, and issue, including the following:
a) Update of expected delivery dates of tagged items, bulk materials, and prefabricated items
versus ROS schedule requirements
Shipping dimensions, packing protection, and bracing details
Receiving; over, short, and damaged verification; Positive Material Identification; storage;
preservation; and issue accountability
Construction consumables control
10) Site instruction status

CONTRACTOR's monthly reports shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Safety statistics and trend analysis
2) Issues and activities carrying forth from the prior month

3) Items lagging planned progress, focusing on remediation plans, requirements, and recovery
forecast
4) Site instruction status
5) Status and discussion of punchlist item
Page 156 of 407


9. Systems Completion
Systems Completion spans the entire life cycle of a project, from engineering to stable operations. It
is a multi-discipline, multi-team, and multi-organization activity with multiple interfaces requiring
careful management.
This section provides detail regarding administrative responsibilities of, and interfaces between,
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR in the execution of Systems Completion. Effective planning,
communication, and coordination must start early after CONTRACT award.
9.1 COMPANY Duties

COMPANY will provide guidance to and work with CONTRACTOR through all Systems
Completion planning and execution activities.

1) CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval the Systems Completion Plan.
2) Immediately after CONTRACT award, CONTRACTOR shall begin effective planning,
communication, and coordination for Systems Completion.
3) CONTRACTOR shall plan and execute the following:
a) Factory Acceptance Testing (FAT)
Mechanical Completion (MC)
Static Commissioning
Dynamic Commissioning
4) Following COMPLETION and issuance of a TURNOVER NOTICE (see Section 9.2.8 of Section
F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES below), CONTRACTOR shall provide personnel,
services, tools, equipment, etc. as requested by COMPANY to support the Start-up and
Performance Testing activities led by COMPANY.
9.2.1 Systems Completion Management Database

1) CONTRACTOR shall develop and utilize an electronic Systems Completion Database (SCDB) as
specified in GP 21-01-03 and other GP supplements for the following activities:
a) Tracking Systems Completion activities
b) Tracking equipment maintenance and preservation
c) Documenting and tracking that all systems are inspected and tested to the agreed requirements
2) CONTRACTOR shall utilize the SCDB, as approved by COMPANY, as the support platform for
Systems Completion and Turnover activities.
3) CONTRACTOR shall group systems and subsystems to facilitate orderly Start-up.
4) CONTRACTOR shall set up and implement the SCDB early at the Engineering WORK SITE to
support FAT activities, and then relocate the SCDB to the construction WORK SITE to support
progression of Mechanical Completion and subsequent commissioning activities.
5) CONTRACTOR shall develop jointly with COMPANY a change management procedure to
manage content changes to the SCDB for entries that have already been approved by
COMPANY.
6) CONTRACTOR shall grant COMPANY full access to the SCDB.
Page 157 of 407


9.2.2 Training Program

CONTRACTOR shall develop for COMPANY's review and approval a complete training program for
all personnel involved in Systems Completion of the FACILITY.
9.2.3 Factory Acceptance Testing

1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all equipment required to meet the design conditions for each
Supplier package is completely assembled and "function-tested" at the Supplier's shop in
accordance with the JOB SPECIFICATION and the documentation included in the purchase
requisitions. CONTRACTOR further shall ensure that appropriate Supplier as-built documents
are managed as follows:
a) Supplied to COMPANY prior to commencing the FAT
Verified during the FAT
2) CONTRACTOR shall use checksheets to document the FAT activities.
3) CONTRACTOR shall document and track punch list items from FATs using the electronic
SCDB.
4) CONTRACTOR shall invite COMPANY's Systems Completion representative to attend all
FATs.
9.2.4 Punchlist Management

1) CONTRACTOR shall record and maintain in the SCDB a Master Punch list, compiled from all
punch list items, for all outstanding and corrective work associated with a component, subsystem,
or system.
2) CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY approval the categories attached to each item on the
Master Punchlist. Refer to GP 21-01-01 and other GP supplements for the recommended punchlist
categories.
3) Using the SCDB change management procedure, CONTRACTOR shall manage any change of
punchlist item categorization for items already approved by COMPANY.
9.2.5 Mechanical Completion

1) CONTRACTOR shall refer to GP 21-01-01 and other GP supplements for definitions of
Mechanical Completion and associated Mechanical Completion terms.
a) Ensure that MC documentation is assembled by system as it is developed to facilitate
handover for commencement of Static Commissioning
b) Complete MC checksheets, also known as "A" checksheets. Record MC Checks in the
SCDB on a daily basis as work activity is completed
c) Complete Mechanical Completion integrated, single, tri-party walkdown (by
CONTRACTOR, SC, and Operations).
d) Log within the database, address and clear category "A" punchlists from the database.
e) Ensure that mechanical completion documentation is assembled by system, as it is developed
to facilitate handover for commencement of static commissioning.
f) Unless otherwise indicated by COMPANY, mechanically complete systems in the order
stipulated in the systems priority list. COMPANY's Completions Lead / Coordinator must
approve changes to the assigned priorities before implementation.
Page 158 of 407


3) CONTRACTOR shall not implement changes to assigned priorities prior to COMPANY

approval.
4) Refer to WP.09 Mechanical Completion Toolkit for additional MC requirements.
9.2.6 Commissioning
CONTRACTOR shall refer to GP 21-01-01 and other GP supplements for definitions of Static and
Dynamic Commissioning.
9.2.7 Handovers
CONTRACTOR's teams shall execute defined handovers of each system (e.g., from the Mechanical
Completion team to Static Commissioning team at Mechanical Completion, and from Static
Commissioning team to Dynamic Commissioning team after Static Commissioning).
1) Handovers shall occur as follows:
a) Each handover can proceed only with COMPANY approval
Each handover must be documented and certified by issuing the appropriate certificate and/or notice
ensuring the following:
i. All requirements have been met
ii. A minimal number of outstanding punchlist items remain
iii. None of the outstanding punchlist items are of a nature that could compromise
personnel safety or equipment integrity
iv. For a list of Systems Completion certificates and notices, refer to Appendix FI of
9.2.8 COMPLETION and Turnover

1) COMPLETION occurs as follows:
a) At the end of Dynamic Commissioning when, in COMPANY's opinion, the system is
completed sufficiently for COMPANY to safely commence Start-up activities
b) Only after ensuring the following:
i. All requirements have been met
ii. A minimal number of outstanding punchlist items remains
iii. None of the outstanding punchlist items are of a nature that could compromise
personnel safety or equipment integrity
2) When CONTRACTOR believes the FACILITY or part thereof has reached COMPLETION,
CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY by issuing a Ready for COMPLETION (RFC)
Certificate. CONTRACTOR's RFC Certificate will then be processed in accordance with the
PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT.
3) COMPLETION and Turnover of the FACILITY may be by system, groups of systems, or by
entire FACILITY at COMPANY's discretion. If done by system or groups of systems, then there
will be multiple TURNOVER NOTICES and Turnover events during the Project.
CONTRACTOR shall achieve COMPLETION and Turnover of systems in accordance with the
priority agreed to with COMPANY and documented in COMPANY's Systems Priority List.
Page 159 of 407


9.2.9 Start-Up and Performance Testing

Key objectives of this phase of the Project are a safe and smooth Start-up of the FACILITY,
successful completion of performance and acceptance tests, and transition of the FACILITY to stable
operations. CONTRACTOR shall perform the following for Start-up, stable operations, performance
testing, and transfer to COMPANY's Operations Group:
1) Develop specific plans to support COMPANY's activities
2) Support COMPANY's activities
9.2.10 Preparation for Operations

Upon the issuance of partial or final Turnover Notice, the Systems Completion Team shall, with the
assistance of CONTRACTOR, prepare the system or FACILITY for operations. As a minimum, the
following reviews must be completed prior to start-up:
1) Pre-Start-Up Independent Project Review (IPR)
2) Operational Readiness Review (ORR)
9.2.11 Stable Operations

Stable Operations is achieved when performance testing is complete and all ACCEPTANCE criteria
have been met
9.2.12 Acceptance
Upon successful conclusion of the FACILITIES Performance and Acceptance Testing, data and
documentation transfer, CONTRACTOR-purchased spare parts stocked in Operations warehouse, and
CONTRACTOR-supplied logistics and infrastructure material transferred to Operations, COMPANY
will issue to CONTRACTOR an ACCEPTANCE NOTICE, certifying its agreement that the specified
criteria and any performance guarantees have been satisfied. This signifies the commencement of the
Warranty Period
9.3. Systems, Procedures, and Plans
9.3.1. Systems Completion Plan

1) Within the time specified in Table F1-1 of Section 1 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES, CONTRACTOR shall prepare a detailed Systems Completion Execution Plan
that includes both process and non-process deliverables from CONTRACTOR and submit it to
COMPANY for review and approval. CONTRACTOR's Systems Completion Plan shall address
and include, as a minimum, the following information, components, and documents:
2) Description of how the Systems Completion and Turnover schedule and resources are integrated
with fabrication, area build construction, Mechanical Completion, commissioning, preparation for
Start-up, and Turnover
3) The requirements of Systems Completion as specified in GP 21-01-01 and COMPANY's
Preliminary Systems Completion Plan
4) System and subsystem listing of all systems and subsystems, including numbers and descriptions
in accordance with GP 12-01-02 and other GP supplements.
5) Turnover and Completion Packages (TCP) – CONTRACTOR's Plans for development of the
TCPs. TCPs shall be developed in accordance with the COMPANY Systems Completion
Specifications. Turnover and Completion Packages (TCPs), including development, management,
and Turnover for each system, in accordance with the following:
a) GP 21-01-01 and other GP supplements
Page 160 of 407


a) COMPANY's Preliminary Systems Completion Plan

The TCP list shall be grouped by type of system and prioritized to support completions and Start-
up.
6) System boundary drawing plans for development of boundary and definition drawings (e.g.,
color-coded piping and instrumentation diagrams [P&IDs], electrical single-line diagrams,
automation and control logic, loop folder assignments, etc.) for the TCPs.
7) Database – CONTRACTOR shall utilize Company provided EMPegasus or WinPCS database as
a platform for the Systems Completions and Turnover activities. Further guidance on this
software can be found in JOB SPECIFICATION. Detailed plan for SCDB development and
implementation in accordance with GP 21-01-03 and other GP supplements.
8) Summary level FAT plan for the following:
a) Equipment FAT at Supplier locations
b) Testing utility, process, and non-process equipment at the fabrication site,
integration location, and at the WORK SITE (including offshore for offshore
installations)
This summary level FAT Plan shall be in accordance with COMPANY's FAT Coordination Plan
to ensure that function testing is executed to COMPANY's satisfaction. COMPANY's FAT
Coordination Plan will provide further guidance regarding which FATs will be performed, as
well as the personnel who will attend and the expectations for each attendee. These plans shall
be used to form the core testing to be detailed in the TCPs.
9) Specific plans for the following:
a) Mechanical Completion of all systems and subsystems
b) Transition from working on an area completion basis to working on a system
completion basis
10) Recording Mechanical Completion with Mechanical Completion Check Records (A-Checksheets)
including plans to facilitate handover for commencement of Static Commissioning through the
following:
a) Organization and assembly by system of Mechanical Completion documentation
b) Timely recording of status in the electronic SCDB
11) Static Commissioning plans for recording Systems Completion activities with Static
Commissioning Checksheets (B-Checksheets), in accordance with the following:
a) Specific plans for the following:
i. Static Commissioning of all systems and subsystems in accordance with
the JOB SPECIFICATION
ii. Transitioning from Static Commissioning to Dynamic Commissioning
a) Details on the execution of the following minimum elements:
i. Verification that documentation to support Mechanical Completion is in
place.
ii. Preparation and execution of Static Commissioning Checksheets and the
process to be used to gain required certification approvals, including the
following:
Page 161 of 407


 Plans to ensure that Static Commissioning documentation is

organized and assembled by system, as it is developed to
facilitate handover
 Update of completed WORK in the SCDB
c) Energizing materials, equipment, or systems under a Permit to Work (PTW)
system and verification that such PTW plan has been put in place to govern the
WORK prior to commencement.
d) Function testing and documentation through discipline-specific Static
Commissioning Checksheets of individual components or subsystems, such as the
following examples:
 Instrument loop checks  Equipment alignment validation and recheck
 Cause-and-effect testing  Flushing of lube/seal oil systems
 Panel function test  Motor no-load running
 Switchgear function tests  Control system interface testing
 Energizing electrical equipment
e) Managing and clearing Category "B" Punchlist items.
f) Ensuring and documenting the status and availability, materials, solvents,
equipment, spares, etc. required for Dynamic Commissioning and Start-up
preparations.
g) Completing Static Commissioning of systems and subsystems in the order
stipulated in the Systems Priority List.
h) Static Commissioning completion system and subsystem tri-party walkdowns by
CONTRACTOR's construction team, the Project's Systems Completion team, and
Operations representatives.
i) Issuance of System Static Commissioning Completion Certificate (SCC
Certificate) to signify that all Static Commissioning Checksheets and associated
works in a particular system have been completed.
j) Facilitating handover for commencement of Dynamic Commissioning through the following:
i. Organization and assembly by system of Static Commissioning documentation
ii. Timely recording of status in the electronic SCDB
12) Dynamic Commissioning specific plans of all systems and subsystems, including details on the
execution of the following minimum elements:
a) Transition from Dynamic Commissioning to Start-up preparations generally aligned with the
Start-up priority sequence.
b) Demonstration, as far as reasonably practicable, that the system meets the design intent.
c) Functional Testing Procedures for each system and subsystem.
d) Functional and dynamic testing of the FACILITY by system and subsystem as a number of
steps set out in a procedure using simulated conditions (e.g., nitrogen leak testing to verify
system integration and integrity). Typically, most utility and life support systems will be
fully operational as a result of Dynamic Commissioning. Hydrocarbon processing systems
are normally brought to a state of operational readiness pending Start-up activities.
e) Documentation of Dynamic Commissioning Procedures in the TCPs with appropriate
COMPANY approvals required to confirm completion.
Page 162 of 407


f) Involvement of a multi-discipline team of engineers and Operations and Maintenance staff in

executing the testing.
g) Ensuring the managed transition from CONTRACTOR PTW system to COMPANY PTW
system will be in place prior to the introduction of process hydrocarbons at commencement of
Start-up.
h) Implementation of a Turnover process by system, groups of systems, and entire FACILITY.
i) Facilitating Turnover of systems and any associated Category "C" punchlist work agreed to
be completed post-Start-up from those responsible for commissioning to those responsible for
Start-Up. This is achieved through completion of the TCP and issuance of a system or
FACILITY TURNOVER NOTICE.
j) Providing support and participate in the Pre-Start-up Safety Reviews (PSSR).
13) Start-up and performance testing plans, including details on CONTRACTOR's support or
performance of the following minimum elements:
a) COMPANY's initiation of process operation, checkout of the systems, and tuning of the
control system
b) CONTRACTOR's completion of any open Category "C" punchlist items
c) CONTRACTOR's development of the Performance Test Procedure
d) CONTRACTOR's support of COMPANY's development of the Performance Test Plan
14) Completions and Turnover schedule and resources plan integrated with CONTRACTOR's
fabrication, construction, Mechanical Completion, commissioning, and hookup (if required)
plans.
15) Special safety requirements beyond what is normally in place at COMPANY workplaces,
including Supplier cautions, commissioning procedure hazard awareness, safety system defeats
and bypasses, and Simultaneous Operations (SIMOPS) considerations.
16) Obtaining commitment and assignment of Supplier Commissioning and Start-up representatives
to assist or perform certain commissioning and Start-up tasks, tests, and system documentation,
including equipment and special tools required.
17) Resourcing, mobilization, and utilization of CONTRACTOR commissioning personnel and
equipment at Supplier factories, fabrication locations, integration locations, and at the WORK
SITE, including plans for the following as a minimum:
a) Provision for tools, equipment, and special equipment used by commissioning personnel
b) Temporary weather shelters to allow for commissioning activities to continue during periods
of inclement weather (e.g., heavy rainfall, wind, fog, snow and sand storms)
c) Temporary lighting for working at night and for areas where permanent lighting has not yet
been energized
18) Ensuring the following for Commissioning and Start-up (C/SU) spares and consumables:
a) Identification
b) Procurement
c) Delivery
d) Inventory
e) Storage at the locations where they will be used well in advance of the commencement of the
activity for which they will be required
Page 163 of 407


f) Transportation, preservation, and environmental considerations managed in accordance with

the JOB SPECIFICATION
19) Preservation and de-preservation of materials, components, equipment, and systems during
Systems Completion.
20) Use of existing utilities or piping, use of temporary utilities or piping, or installation of new
utilities or piping required to perform Systems Completion activities, including the following:
a) Managing electrical loads to systems equipment during commissioning activities.
b) Providing temporary facilities to commission electrical generation equipment (i.e., load
banks).
21) Commissioning Tools and Equipment: CONTRACTOR’s plan for using existing
fabrication/integration site tools and equipment and the subcontracting of special equipment to
perform the commissioning work, including tools and equipment required offshore
commissioning and start-up.
22) Accommodations plan for the following:
a) CONTRACTOR's plan for CONTRACTOR and COMPANY commissioning and start-up
personnel offices, support staff, equipment and supplies at the fabrication/integration site, and
those required to support offshore commissioning and start-up. Work Permitting Plan:
b) CONTRACTOR’s plan for controlling work permitting during the phases of WORK in which
any combination of construction, installation, or commissioning activities are occurring
simultaneously, including CONTRACTOR's plan for interfacing with the COMPANY
SIMOPS plan and routine work execution process.
23) Punch Lists: CONTRACTOR’s procedures for attesting work completion, generating punch lists,
including Factory Acceptance Tests punch lists, as defined in the references, including the
classification of the items included on the punch lists, the process to remedy the deficiencies, the
resources to be used, and the timing for correcting any such deficiencies. The punchlist process
will capture items within and outside the scope of the CONTRACT. Incorporation and
maintenance of the Master Punchlist maintained in the SCDB in which the punchlist records will
be logged and cleared.
24) Training: CONTRACTOR will develop a complete Training Program COMPANY review and
approval and for all personnel involved in systems completions, operations, and maintenance of
the FACILITY.
25) Tracking, controlling, communicating, and measuring Systems Completion execution progress,
using the following metrics as a minimum:
a) Liquidation curves for Mechanical Completion quantities, MC Checksheets (A-Checksheets),
Static Commissioning Checksheets (B-Checksheets), Loop Checks, and commissioning
procedures
b) TCP development metrics
c) Mechanical Completion and handover skyline charts
d) Punchlist additions, liquidation, and items outstanding chart
e) Systems Completion milestone icicle charts
26) Providing regular progress reports to COMPANY.
27) Lessons-learned capture, review, communication, and documentation process, during and after
work planning and execution.
Page 164 of 407


28) Plans for providing dedicated radio communication channels for commissioning activities and an
adequate quantity of radios for CONTRACTOR's, COMPANY's, and Suppliers' representatives
and staff for support of commissioning activities.
9.4 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall provide regular progress reports to COMPANY as requested by COMPANY.
Progress reports shall include, as a minimum, current Systems Completion status with a one-month
projection.
On a monthly basis, CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY the following:
1) Status and discussion of punchlist items
2) Systems completed for handover, Turnover, and ACCEPTANCE, with a list of systems in service

CONTRACTOR's Closeout Report shall include a copy of all TURNOVER NOTICES and the
request for the ACCEPTANCE NOTICE.
Page 165 of 407


10. Logistics
This section describes CONTRACTOR’s logistics responsibilities related to CONTRACTOR’s
procured materials and equipment, and CONTRACTOR's equipment and personnel for the WORK.
10.1 COMPANY Duties

COMPANY will review for approval and monitor, as required, CONTRACTOR's duties.
COMPANY will provide CONTRACTOR with any logistics information that COMPANY has (e.g.,
road surveys, infrastructure tests, logistics studies, etc.) and that is pertinent to CONTRACTOR's
logistics duties.

1) In accordance with Section 1.3.2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
2) Logistics Management PlanCONTRACTOR shall develop and staff a logistics organization that
has the responsibility to plan and execute logistics responsibilities for the WORK.
10.2.1 Logistics Assessments

1) CONTRACTOR shall conduct and document a comprehensive assessment and evaluation of all
aspects of logistics regulations, operations, resources, and infrastructure for the WORK
2) CONTRACTOR shall use the assessment and evaluation results to develop, support, and execute
its logistics organization,
3) The assessment and evaluation shall include, but not be limited to the following:
a) National, regional, and local LAW, regulatory requirements, limitations, and prohibitions as
they affect personnel, equipment, materials, supplies, materials management, supply chain
management, and operations
b) Security and environmental effects and/or limitations with respect to logistics personnel,
operations, equipment, supplies, materials, and Subcontractors
c) National, regional, and local resources, Subcontractors, equipment, supplies and material
d) Infrastructure capabilities and or limitations for land, air, and sea equipment and operations
10.3.1 Logistics Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's Logistics Management Plan shall include the following as a minimum:
1) Logistic assessment and evaluation plans
2) Preliminary logistics objectives and strategies
3) Logistics scope of WORK – Planning and execution
4) Logistics management organization, including the following:
a) CONTRACTOR WORK locations and staffing levels
b) Reporting flow charts and interface with other CONTRACTOR organizations (procurement,
engineering, construction, etc.)
c) Qualification of personnel
Page 166 of 407


d) Defined roles and responsibilities of each person in logistics management

5) Integrated Logistics Management System – identification of computer-based system with specific
modules to be used and minimum technical requirements
6) Subcontracting, including the following:
a) Description of Subcontractors' scopes of WORK
b) Qualification of potential Subcontractors
c) Assessment of Subcontractor performance
d) Acceptance criteria for Subcontractor-completed WORK
e) Monitoring procedures, including fully integrated logistics management systems
7) Logistics Safety Management Plan
8) Logistics Security Management Plan
9) Logistics Quality Assurance / Quality Control Plan
10) Project Master Schedule and Logistics Management Schedule
11) Logistics operations risk assessments and readiness reviews that are jointly conducted with
COMPANY, Suppliers, and Subcontractors
12) Identification of key internal and external interfaces
13) If applicable, logistics sustainability practices incorporated into logistics scope of work
10.4 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY weekly and monthly reports that provide detailed
information with respect to all of the following:
1) Plan versus actual logistics schedule for procurement, transport, and supply chain management of
all materials and supplies, specifying associated cost
2) Status and location of all materials, supplies, and equipment
3) CONTRACTOR shall deliver these weekly and monthly reports in an electronic format that can
be submitted to a third-party data management company based on CONTRACTOR's system
capabilities and COMPANY request.
Page 167 of 407


11. Cost Control and Estimating
11.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will review for approval CONTRACTOR's Cost Control Estimate and CONTRACT
PRICE BUDGET to ensure that they accurately reflect the scope of WORK as defined in the
CONTRACT.
2) COMPANY will monitor CONTRACTOR's ongoing cost control activities to assure that cost
objectives are being achieved.
3) COMPANY will provide to CONTRACTOR the cost work breakdown structure.
11.2. CONTRACTOR Duties

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit to COMPANY for approval a Cost Control Estimate
for the WORK, consistent with the cost work breakdown structure, CONTRACT bid components,
progress and milestone payment terms, and the Execution Plan.
2) CONTRACTOR shall monitor costs on an ongoing basis to compare actual costs with the Cost
Control Estimate and ensure that all cost estimates are consistent with the compensation basis
3) CONTRACTOR shall identify, and review with COMPANY, the following:
a) Trends that indicate a potential variance in cost
Any potential corrective actions to address any trends that could result in cost overruns
5) CONTRACTOR shall monitor corrective actions, and review the results with COMPANY on a
monthly basis, to ensure that such actions effectively manage costs at or below the levels
contained in the Cost Control Estimate. Monthly corrective action reviews will cover the
following information:
a) Results of those actions taken previously
b) Actions initiated since the last review
c) Identified trends
d) Planned corrective actions
6) CONTRACTOR shall identify, and review with COMPANY, any opportunities to reduce Project
costs. CONTRACTOR shall review with COMPANY the results of any COMPANY-approved
actions to determine whether such actions have been effective in accomplishing cost reductions.
7) CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY supplementary estimating WORK, as required by
COMPANY, for effective Project execution and cost control, including providing timely
estimates for the cost impact of potential changes in accordance with Section 13. to keep the Cost
Control Estimate and CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET current.
8) CONTRACTOR shall analyze the cost history related to the WORK and apply the results of this
analysis in forecasting the costs of the remaining portions of the WORK on a monthly basis.
CONTRACTOR shall perform this same type of analysis for all known remaining WORK items.
CONTRACTOR shall base the analysis of all undefined or uncertain items upon past experience.
9) On a monthly basis or as otherwise requested by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall review with
COMPANY the basis and assumptions used in forecasting.
10) CONTRACTOR may use standard development allowances in forecasting costs of equipment,
materials, and subcontracts. The allowances and any adjustments shall be agreed with
COMPANY.
Page 168 of 407


11) CONTRACTOR's Project Manager shall hold regular meetings with members of
CONTRACTOR's Project Organization to discuss, as a minimum, the following topics:
a) Cost control and forecasting
b) Trends and corrective actions
c) Effectiveness of corrective actions
d) CONTRACTOR's staff and organizational changes
e) Change control
12) The frequency and schedule for such meetings shall be agreed by CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY.
11.2.1 Cost Control Estimate

1) The basic cost control tool for the WORK shall be the detailed Cost Control Estimate covering
the full scope of the WORK as defined in the CONTRACT. CONTRACTOR shall provide for
COMPANY review and approval CONTRACTOR's Cost Control Budget Basis Memorandum,
which shall document the basis and assumptions of the Cost Control Budget. It will be supported
by sufficient details and unit pricing to allow for a full understanding of how all activities
contribute to the overall cost of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that this estimate
may be readily used to accomplish the following:
a) Establish the initial CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET
b) Form the basis of estimate against which all change is measured
c) Appraise CONTRACTOR's cost performance
2) CONTRACTOR shall review the Cost Control Estimate with COMPANY prior to submittal for
the purpose of timely finalization of the CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET.
3) Prior to CONTRACTOR beginning WORK on the assigned portions of the detailed Cost Control
Estimate, CONTRACTOR shall meet with COMPANY to discuss and agree upon the following
items:
a) Design Basis – CONTRACTOR shall base the estimate on the JOB SPECIFICATION. The
estimate shall not reflect any anticipated design or execution changes.
b) Cost Basis – CONTRACTOR shall use the same cost basis for the entire Cost Control
Estimate. Factors that must be agreed by COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall include the
following:
i. Wage rates and productivity factors
ii. Unit costs for common commodities
iii. Data sources for equipment costs
iv. Source of bulk material quantities and cost
v. Escalation based upon Project timing
vi. Foreign Exchange ("Forex")
Allowances – CONTRACTOR shall identify any and all allowances, takeoff factors, or
contingencies that CONTRACTOR normally uses as part of its estimating methods, together
with a description of the costs that these are intended to cover. CONTRACTOR must submit
all allowance to COMPANY for review and approval before incorporation into the Cost
Control Estimate.
Page 169 of 407


Exclusions – CONTRACTOR shall review with COMPANY estimate content exclusions and
inclusions to define estimating responsibilities.
Code of Accounts – CONTRACTOR shall prepare the Cost Control Estimate using the same
code of accounts and area breakdown that CONTRACTOR will use to report and control the
costs and progress of the WORK. This code of accounts shall apply to CONTRACTOR's
accounting system. CONTRACTOR's code of accounts shall meet COMPANY's
requirements for the Project cost breakdown structure.
Supporting Documentation – CONTRACTOR shall provide supporting documentation and
information, as defined by COMPANY, for the Cost Control Estimate. Prior examples of
CONTRACTOR's control estimates and documentation will be used to gain agreement on the
information to be included in supporting documentation.
i. Material takeoff (MTO) data
ii. Equipment and materials quotes
iii. Historical performance information
iv. Direct and indirect labor costs
Review – In accordance with the timing prescribed by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall review
with COMPANY the Cost Control Estimate, or portions of the Cost Control Estimate.
Timing – Relevant details of the cost estimate must be available before any cost commitment is made.
These will include quantity estimates, as well as costs.
Release of Cost Control Estimate details – The detailed cost estimate, whether developed by
COMPANY or CONTRACTOR, shall be released incrementally if necessary.
11.2.2 Cost Analysis

2) CONTRACTOR shall perform cost analysis for each budgeted item.
3) For tagged equipment items, CONTRACTOR shall perform variance analysis between Cost
Control Estimate and the committed cost. CONTRACTOR shall adjust the forecast according to
variance analysis.
4) For bulk materials, CONTRACTOR shall compare actual design quantities and unit prices with
estimated quantities and unit prices. It is expected that sampling will occur as early in the design
as possible. CONTRACTOR shall adjust the forecast to reflect actual design quantities and unit
prices.
5) CONTRACTOR's forecast shall also include, as a minimum, analyses of the following COSTS:
a) Engineering, construction, fabrication, and pre-commissioning labor hours, including
productivity by discipline
b) Subcontracts
c) Field supervision
d) Field labor overheads
e) Major construction equipment
f) Temporary construction and consumables
g) Onshore transportation and installation
h) Offshore transportation and installation
5) For other REIMBURSABLE COSTS, CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY with full
access to CONTRACTOR's native electronic files for reports, analyses, and backup data.
Page 170 of 407


CONTRACTOR shall grant COMPANY access to historical data and benchmarks that may have
been used by CONTRACTOR.
11.3 Reports
11.3.1 Monthly Cost Report

9. Promptly after the EFFECTIVE DATE, COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall agree to the
format and content of the monthly cost report (to be included in the monthly progress report). As a
minimum, the monthly cost report shall contain the following information:
1) A tabulation of the initial CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET, the current CONTRACT PRICE
BUDGET, committed costs to date, incremental and cumulative Value of Work Done (VoWD),
and the latest forecasted costs
11.3.2 Final Cost Report

When the WORK is completed, CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Final Cost Report in a format and
level of detail to be agreed with COMPANY.
The Final Cost Report shall clearly identify the initial CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET, approved
CHANGE ORDERS, final CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET, and final CONTRACT PRICE, including
reconciliation between final CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET and final CONTRACT PRICE.
CONTRACTOR shall include the Final Cost Report in CONTRACTOR's Closeout Report.
Page 171 of 407


12. Schedule Management
12.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will, at COMPANY's discretion; approve the CONTRACT Control Schedule and
any revisions to Current Control Schedule resulting from CHANGE ORDERS.
2) COMPANY will review for approval schedule recovery plans and direct CONTRACTOR to
modify these plans as needed. COMPANY will approve schedule recovery plans that
COMPANY deems acceptable.
12.2.1 General
1) In accordance with Section 1 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
a) CONTRACTOR Schedule Basis Memorandum
CONTRACT Control Schedule
Schedule Control System
Schedule Development and Control Plan
90-Day Plan
2) Upon issuance of a CHANGE ORDER, CONTRACTOR shall incorporate approved changes into
the Current Control Schedule.
3) CONTRACTOR shall impose the same schedule and progress requirements in the CONTRACT
on Subcontractors and Suppliers.
4) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY CONTRACTOR's intended schedule control,
progress measurement, and data reporting procedure(s) for CONTRACTOR GROUP.
12.2.2 Access
1) CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY access, without restriction, to all information input to
and generated under CONTRACTOR's Schedule Control Systems, including, but not limited to,
planning, scheduling, progress measurement, work-hours, resources analysis, productivity data,
and benchmark data used to develop project schedules. CONTRACTOR may remove from
benchmark data any project names or other project-specific information. This access shall be for
data at any level, including interface data and data prepared by CONTRACTOR GROUP.
2) CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY with CONTRACTOR's schedule both in hard copy
and Microsoft Project file which shall include all information necessary to duplicate
CONTRACTOR's schedule, progress measurement, and resource requirements.
12.2.3 CONTRACTOR Schedule Basis Memorandum

CONTRACTOR shall develop and provide to COMPANY the CONTRACTOR Schedule Basis
Memorandum (CSBM). The CSBM documents the basis and assumptions for the schedule activities
and milestones. The CSBM shall include discussion of the following:
1) Schedule Work Breakdown Structure (WBS)
2) Cost WBS
3) Overall Purchasing Plan and Overall Subcontracting Plan
Page 172 of 407


4) Permitting
5) COMPANY, partner, or government requirements
6) Management of interfaces
7) Local content activities
8) Equipment and bulk material delivery, including vendor data information
9) Resource availability
10) Workweek basis
11) Construction equipment and marine asset utilization
12) Weather assumptions and other schedule assumptions or allowances
13) Logistics
14) Brownfield activities
12.2.4 Corrective Actions

1) CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY promptly when any of the following situations occur,
which may require corrective actions:
a) An indication that the current SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE will not be achieved
An opportunity to counteract potential schedule slippages
An opportunity to shorten the Current Control Schedule that creates a conflict with COMPANY
schedule requirements
Other situations potentially requiring corrective action
2) CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY approval prior to implementing any corrective actions.
3) CONTRACTOR shall monitor corrective actions and review with COMPANY on a monthly basis
the following information:
a) Identified trends
b) Planned corrective actions
c) Results of completed actions
d) Actions initiated since the last review
e) Status of all other actions initiated but not completed
4) If requested by COMPANY, then CONTRACTOR shall provide a schedule recovery plan for
COMPANY's review and approval that CONTRACTOR considers appropriate to avoid, recover,
or limit delay. CONTRACTOR shall not perform any WORK or activities in a schedule recovery
plan without receiving COMPANY's prior approval.
5) CONTRACTOR shall not Re-Baseline the schedule and progress systems without COMPANY's
prior written approval.
12.2.5 Schedule Development

1) CONTRACTOR shall develop schedules in a hierarchical manner, and shall maintain the ability
to roll up individual activity assessments into an overall schedule assessment for the WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR shall implement activity coding to enable WBS, system, discipline, and area-
related presentations of scheduling and progress.
Page 173 of 407


3) CONTRACTOR's schedule shall reflect the entire scope of WORK, including the WORK of
CONTRACTOR GROUP. Schedules shall provide sufficient detail in all areas of Project
execution (engineering, procurement, fabrication, construction, commissioning, transportation,
and installation) to enable monitoring and control of those execution areas impacted by key
Project issues.
4) CONTRACTOR shall identify Critical and Sub-Critical Paths.
5) Schedules shall be presented as time-scaled bar charts with an associated logic network, which
set forth the planned order and estimated dates for activities. Schedule networks shall be
thorough and complete and shall sequence all activities using schedule logic rules. Logic rules
include, but are not limited to, the following examples:
a) All activities shall have predecessors and successors (with the exception of the first and last
activity, milestones, etc.).
b) Schedules shall have one logical start and one logical finish.
c) For each activity, schedules shall identify activity type, calendar, and constraints.
d) Activity constraints, float constraints, and negative lags for establishing logic relationships
shall be minimized as agreed with COMPANY.
e) The use of expected finish dates shall be avoided for the purpose of the network update.
6) For each WORK SITE and Off Site, CONTRACTOR shall indicate the daily work-hours, work
week, shift schedule, scheduled facility shutdowns (if any), and holidays used to develop
schedules.
7) CONTRACTOR's schedules shall be structured to provide three activity code fields for
COMPANY's use, titled EM1, EM2, and EM3, and each of these fields shall be four characters in
length. COMPANY will provide the applicable activity coding to CONTRACTOR for inclusion
within these COMPANY code fields.
8) Schedules shall incorporate the SCHEDULE MILESTONES and payment milestones.
9) CONTRACTOR shall identify and provide a description of those activities associated with
material sources, Subcontractors, Suppliers, and offsite fabrication. The schedule shall show, as a
minimum, the following subcontracting and purchasing activities:
a) Preparation of the tender package, tendering period, tender evaluation and subcontract
award, engineering duration, field mobilization, and duration of field construction
Preparation of Request for Quotation (RFQ), bid review and clarification period, Purchase Order (PO)
issue date, receipt of vendor data, and delivery span for major equipment and materials including
sequential deliveries from a Supplier and required-onsite (ROS) dates.
10) Schedules shall include the following:
a) Identify potential constraints on execution
b) Facilitate monitoring and control of scheduled activities and timely identification of potential
problem areas
c) Show interfaces within the WORK, and between the WORK and all other key external
Project participants.
11) Schedule control activities will interface effectively with CONTRACTOR's Progress
Measurement System. Progress measurements shall be made in such a manner that the physical
progress of the WORK can be related easily to established SCHEDULE MILESTONES and
CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule.
Page 174 of 407


12) Schedules shall be resource-loaded to reflect distribution and resource leveling for the following:
a) External interfaces
b) CONTRACTOR-imposed and COMPANY-imposed limits used to develop the schedule
activity durations
c) CONTRACTOR shall periodically update resource loading and leveling.
13) To support CONTRACTOR's schedule, CONTRACTOR shall include time-resource (TR) sheets
for each activity, including the following:
a) A description of each activity and descriptions of the resources including work-hours,
materials, and equipment to be employed in completing each activity and the duration of time
for which the resources will be employed
b) Construction work-hours broken down by directs (by craft) and indirects, and by subcontract
c) Material and equipment descriptions including type and quantity of bulk materials to be
procured and installed by CONTRACTOR
14) CONTRACTOR shall include plan versus actual histograms and forecast histograms of
engineering resources (by discipline), project management resources, direct resources (by craft),
subcontracts, indirects, and total resources for each major WBS area. These histograms shall
include the following:
a) Early and late loading
b) Staffing adjusted for productivity
c) Productivity forecasts through completions
d) Work-hours per percent complete
12.2.6 CONTRACT Control Schedule

1) The CONTRACT Control Schedule shall
a) Be consistent with the CONTRACT SCHEDULE
b) Demonstrate the overall schedule logic
c) Show definitive plans for execution of the WORK at WORK SITES and Off Site locations,
including, but not limited to:
i. the achievement of each SCHEDULE MILESTONE on or before its corresponding
SCHEDULE MILESTONE DATE
ii. Major activities, durations, start dates, finish dates, float, and Critical and Sub-Critical
Paths
2) The schedule shall be based upon the JOB SPECIFICATION and reasonable and realistic
durations for schedule activities.
3) If directed by COMPANY, then CONTRACTOR shall perform special analysis of the
CONTRACT Control Schedule. Any agreed changes to the CONTRACT Control Schedule shall
be captured in the Current Control Schedule and shall be supplied to COMPANY as specified in
Page 175 of 407


12.2.7 CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule

1) CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule is based on the approved CONTRACT Control Schedule or
Current Control Schedule. The level of detail will increase and continue to be developed during
the performance of the WORK commensurate with improved Project definition and evolving
execution plans. As the WORK progresses, CONTRACTOR shall develop and include Work
Plans as follows and as applicable to the WORK:
a) Construction and Fabrication Work Plans – Developed before engineering is 30 percent
complete and the effective start of construction WORK, whichever occurs first.
b) Systems Completion Work Plans – Developed as early as possible before engineering is 70
percent complete and prior to 50 percent construction complete. The Work Plan for Systems
Completion shall focus on back end (final 50 percent) construction activities, with emphasis
on integration of construction with COMPANY's agreed prioritized planned commissioning
and Turnover activities, and shift from an area construction mode to a system mode.
CONTRACTOR shall clearly indicate the Critical and Sub-Critical Paths for each unit or
system when phased completion of units or systems is specified and provide forecast dates of
handover of systems. This plan shall be prioritized by subsystem, system, and detail activities
related to Mechanical Completion, Static Commissioning, Dynamic Commissioning, and
Turnover.
c) Integration Work Plans – Including the hookup of the modules or other components after
construction/fabrication is complete. This phase can be completed dockside or offshore
depending on the design of the FACILITIES. After the physical attachment of the steel, the
following systems are connected:
i. Mechanical
ii. Electrical
iii. Instrumentation
d) Installation Work Plan – Including installation, transportation, mooring, and hookup of subsea
elements to the topsides facilities.
e) Commissioning Work Plan – The WORK will define CONTRACTOR's involvement in Static
Commissioning and Dynamic Commissioning.
2) CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule will be in the form of updated bar charts, logic diagrams, and
accompanying output data. Forecasts shall include the effects of approved, pending, and potential
changes and effects of actual work-hour expenditures, equipment/material delivery times, quantity
adjustments, achieved progress, and other factors, and shall do the following:
a) For each activity the actual progress achieved from the Progress Measurement System will be
incorporated as the percent complete for the applicable schedule activity.
b) Estimated engineering work hours shall be replaced with "spent-to-date" plus "forecasted-to-
complete" work hours. For each activity that is resource-loaded with work hours, the actual
progress achieved will be incorporated. Engineering analysis shall be done by discipline and
will consider discipline resource availability. The engineering schedule shall include at least
one activity representing each type of engineering deliverable.
c) Estimated equipment and bulk material delivery times shall be replaced with purchase order
delivery dates and updated with current Supplier delivery forecasts. Field ROS dates shall be
reflected within the schedule as a milestone; any misalignment against equipment or material
delivery forecast shall be highlighted in CONTRACTOR’s Detail Schedule and reviewed
with COMPANY.
Page 176 of 407


d) Construction durations based upon estimated design quantities shall be updated by replacing
the estimated design quantities with actual quantities installed each period and
CONTRACTOR's material takeoffs.
e) Construction activities shall be resource loaded with work-hours and updated with spent-to-
date and forecasted-to-complete hours.
f) As actual fabrication or construction progress and productivity data becomes available, it
shall be reflected in activity durations. This analysis will incorporate such items as
considerations of resource availability, remaining overtime/shifting flexibility as agreed with
COMPANY, and work face availability (by craft).
g) Latest status of major CONTRACTOR Internal and External Interfaces shall be included.
h) Latest status of installation vessels (for offshore projects) shall be included.
3) CONTRACTOR shall progress the WORK and forecast the remaining duration of each activity
on CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule and compare the forecasted COMPLETION DATE to the
SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE.
4) CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule shall be updated to include as a minimum, resources, progress,
quantities, and remaining durations for all activities, including data from peripheral databases.
The activities must be updated with a minimum of the following five fields:
a) The activity actual start date
b) The activity actual finish date
c) Physical percentage progress earned
d) Remaining duration to complete the activity in progress (a discipline engineer's or craft
supervisor's estimate of the required working time for completion of the task. determined by
remaining work, and availability of resources, materials, drawings, etc.)
e) Earned man-hours (cumulative)
12.2.8 Progress Measurement

1) CONTRACTOR shall measure progress as follows:
a) Minimum progress measurement cycles shall be as follows and consistent with Section 12.4
of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES:
i. Monthly for engineering and procurement
ii. Weekly for fabrication, construction, integration, transportation, installation, and
Systems Completion
b) CONTRACTOR shall report progress and forecast against the Current Control Schedule and
SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE, as adjusted for approved CHANGE ORDERS.
c) CONTRACTOR shall assess progress for all progress earning activities required for each
component of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate additional progress earning
WORK into the base level of WORK as it is identified in approved CHANGE ORDERS.
d) CONTRACTOR shall measure progress based on an earned value system as agreed with
COMPANY, and not based on spent hours.
e) Progress measurement shall be based on discrete, identifiable deliverables for each major
Project activity and weighted by budgeted work-hours to determine an overall weighted
percent for each activity. CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY approval the
weighting of percentages (rules of credit).
Page 177 of 407


f) Progress measurement shall use established budgeted work-hours for each activity or
deliverable.
g) Rules of credit shall allow for rework when measuring progress. No progress-measurable
deliverable should be given full credit until rework for that deliverable has been completed.
h) Progress shall be calculated by measuring the proportion of actual WORK accomplished
towards completion of given Project deliverables or activities, and shall not be calculated by
spent versus budgeted work-hours.
i) Physical progress measurements shall exclude home office and field support functions such as
project management, administration, project controls, engineering office follow-up during
construction, and site management, supervision, and indirect support.
j) The method of earning progress and activity progress milestones/rules of credit shall be
subject to COMPANY's review and approval, and shall not be changed without COMPANY's
approval.
2) CONTRACTOR shall monitor and notify COMPANY of the following:
a) Significant changes during the reporting period, special actions being implemented or
recommended, and the outlook for activities that will be started or finished during the next six
to eight weeks.
b) Schedule delays and deviations, as well as impacts to the Current Control Schedule.
c) Changes to Critical Path and Sub-Critical Paths
d) Activities on standby or hold
3) CONTRACTOR shall develop progress "S" curves showing planned, actual, and forecasted
progress (cumulative and by period) for each of the major elements of measurable items. The
forecast element of the "S" curves is derived from the updated CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule.
4) CONTRACTOR shall provide units of measure, actual quantities installed overall, quantities
installed in the current period, forecasted quantities at COMPLETION, and percent of physical
progress (defined as actual quantities completed divided by forecasted quantities at completion).
5) When the WORK is 85 to 95 percent complete, CONTRACTOR shall provide run-down curves
that reflect the remaining quantities to be liquidated. Sufficient backup information shall also be
available to show location of actual quantities installed.
6) For Mechanical Completion and commissioning, CONTRACTOR shall report progress based on
prioritized systems. CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule shall reflect prioritized Systems
Completion consistent with COMPANY's system priorities, including Mechanical Completion,
Static Commissioning, and Dynamic Commissioning to Systems. Skyline charts reflecting
System handover status shall be used for reporting.
7) CONTRACTOR shall develop histograms indicating actual-to-date, planned, and forecasted
resources by month. The resource projections shall include production engineering by discipline
and principal construction requirements by craft or by Subcontractor resources. Histograms
should show equivalent resources adjusted for work-week differences
8) CONTRACTOR shall develop tracking profiles that show actual-versus-planned productivity and
forecasted productivity for production engineering (by discipline) and construction activities (by
craft or subcontract).
Page 178 of 407


12.3.1 Schedule Control System

1) CONTRACTOR's Schedule Control System shall, as a minimum, incorporate the following
requirements:
a) CONTRACTOR shall construct the schedules utilizing Primavera scheduling software.
Acceptable versions of Primavera are P3, P6, or later releases.
b) CONTRACTOR's Schedule Control System shall not link remaining duration and schedule
percent complete (reference autocost rules).
c) CONTRACTOR may request alternate planning and scheduling software that is part of
CONTRACTOR's normal business routine. Approval by COMPANY of this alternative will
require a satisfactory demonstration that the proposed software provides all planning and
scheduling functionality and work product specified herein, including but not limited to bar
charts, resource management, calculations, and compatible backup files for COMPANY use.
Additionally, CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for maintaining a lookup table to cross
reference the alternate software activity numbers to corresponding Primavera activity
numbers in COMPANY's Level 1 and Level 2 schedules.
2) Description of CONTRACTOR's Progress Measurement System shall be included in
CONTRACTOR's Schedule Control System and shall meet the minimum requirements set forth
herein.
12.3.2 Schedule Development and Control Plan

CONTRACTOR's Schedule Development and Control Plan shall describe the following:
1) Essential areas of schedule development and control, including schedule development, schedule
analysis (e.g., Critical Path analysis, etc.), schedule forecasting, schedule reporting, and corrective
actions.
2) How planning and scheduling information will flow among the various groups (e.g., project
management, production engineering, subcontracting, fabrication, construction, controls).
3) How CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule and work plans will be developed, reviewed, and
updated.
4) How CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule (lower level [Level, 2, 3, 4, etc.] schedules and Work
Plans) will integrate and roll-up to the CONTRACT Control Schedule.
5) CONTRACTOR's schedule WBS and coding system, and how it will relate to the cost WBS, and
how it will allow summarization and reporting flexibility.
6) How CONTRACTOR will validate activity duration of major tasks (i.e., benchmarks, hours per
deliverable, team/crew sizes).
7) The method to integrate MICC and MEC schedule activities in CONTRACTOR's Detail
Schedule.
8) The method that CONTRACTOR will use to analyze and forecast the progress of the WORK
relative to the Current Control Schedule.
9) How CONTRACTOR's plans and schedules will integrate relevant functions and activities of
CONTRACTOR GROUP required for the WORK, from the EFFECTIVE DATE through
COMPLETION of the WORK, including related activities of other Project participants, such as
COMPANY and COMPANY's other Contractors.
10) How corrective action, when required, will be initiated, implemented, and tracked.
Page 179 of 407


11) How CONTRACTOR's schedule control activities interface with progress measurement, cost
control activities, and organizations.
12) How resource analysis will consider the performance to date versus the plan, including planned
productivity patterns throughout engineering, fabrication and construction, use of overtime and
multiple shifting to allow better use of available resources or the adding additional resources, and
other corrective actions to meet Project schedule requirements.
13) The frequency of updates (and responsibility for updates), and level of detail for each of the
various Project schedules CONTRACTOR shall develop to control the execution of the Project.
14) Details of CONTRACTOR's Progress Measurement System to be applied to the WORK, and how
planned progress curves will be developed.
15) The method of earning progress and developing activity progress milestones/rules of credit.
16) How CONTRACTOR will measure, verify, and report physical progress of each of the various
activities or groups of activities in engineering (specifically addressing use of 3D CADD models),
procurement, logistics, fabrication, construction, Systems Completion, operations readiness and
other major activities related to the WORK (e.g., permitting / regulatory).
17) The method for weighting and combining individual craft/discipline progress measurements to
arrive at the overall progress assessments for engineering, procurement, fabrication, construction,
and other major activities related to the WORK. Progress weightings shall be subject to
COMPANY's review and approval and shall not be changed without COMPANY's prior written
approval.
18) Procedures within CONTRACTOR's organization for review and verification of progress
measurement information prepared at each WORK SITE.
19) The method for recognizing the impact of rework on apparent progress during engineering,
procurement, fabrication, and construction, and the method for specifically progressing and
tracking the rework.
20) The methods and procedures for incorporating the effects of CHANGE ORDERS on the
assessment of progress.
12.3.3 90-Day Plan

The 90-Day Plan shall include CONTRACTOR's planned activities for the first 90 days after the
EFFECTIVE DATE and shall be used to steward progress until the baseline CONTRACT Control
Schedule is approved. CONTRACTOR shall update the 90-Day Plan weekly (and extend it for 90
days from date of update) until the CONTRACT Control Schedule is approved by COMPANY.
12.4 Reports
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR will agree on a reporting calendar, which will include the reporting
cutoff dates for CONTRACTOR GROUP and report issue dates
12.4.1 Monthly Reporting Activities

1) CONTRACTOR's monthly schedule reports shall include the following:
2) Copies of CONTRACTOR's Detail Schedule electronically
3) Narrative to explain the following:
a) Outlook for activities that will be started or finished during the next six to eight weeks
Schedule delays, deviations, and progress shortfalls, with associated impacts to the Current Control
Schedule and discussion of causes and recovery actions planned and/or implemented by the parties'
assigned responsibility to resolve each issue and when and where resolution will be accomplished
Page 180 of 407


Critical Path and Sub-Critical Path analysis

Total float analysis explaining trends
Activities on standby or hold
Corrective actions being planned or recommended, and the status of earlier corrective actions taken
4) Status of schedule milestones and narrative explaining deviation from the plan.
5) Progress "S" curves showing planned, actual, and forecasted progress (cumulative and by period)
with explanatory legend for each of the major elements of measurable items. The minimum
required progress curves include the following:
a) Overall Project Progress
b) Engineering
i. Overall progress curve for engineering activities
ii. Curve for each major engineering discipline
iii. Key engineering commodity curves (e.g., piping isometric production, structural steel
releases, instrument data sheets and loop diagrams)
iv. Progress for 3D CADD modeling
v. Drawing revisions after issued for construction (IFC) shall be tracked and forecasted
vi. Status of Supplier data
vii. Status of engineering deliverables versus field need dates
viii. Procurement
 Overall progress curve for procurement activities
 Progress curves and tables for equipment
 Key bulk material and commodity curves (e.g. pipe, valves and fittings, electrical,
instrumentation, steel, etc.)
 Count of Requests for Quotations issued and remaining
 Count of purchase orders issued and remaining
 Count of Supplier drawings received – both initial submittal and certified
submittal (equipment only) and expected vendor data receipt dates
 Arrival and inspection of materials and equipment at each WORK SITE
 Tracking, forecasting, and reporting of all critical and long lead equipment
manufacturing and delivery dates
 Equipment expediting summaries
a) Construction, Fabrication, Integration, and Installation
i. Overall construction progress curve that includes fabrication, construction,
integration and installation
ii. Individual progress curves for fabrication, construction and integration and
installation
iii. Individual curves for each WORK SITE and Offsite by craft and module or area/unit.
Page 181 of 407


iv. Report units of measure, actual quantities installed overall, quantities installed current
period, forecasted quantities at COMPLETION, and percent physical progress
(defined as actual quantities/forecasted quantities to complete)
v. Report run-down curves, which reflect the remaining quantities to be liquidated.
Sufficient backup information shall also be available to show location of actual
quantities installed
Report Mechanical Completion and commissioning on prioritized systems based methodology, and
curves/tables of the liquidation of punchlist items, e.g., total and number completed by unit checking,
pressure testing, function testing, and commissioning of the installed WORK. Skyline charts
reflecting System handover status shall be used for reporting.
Report readiness for operations activities associated with development of readiness for operations
documentation including training manuals, operations and maintenance procedures, and other
maintenance, reliability, and surveillance data.
6) Histograms indicating actual to date, planned, and forecasted resources by month. Histogram or
table with comparison of direct, indirect, and total personnel by discipline or craft, between the
number of personnel actually engaged on the WORK and the number planned.
7) Graphs showing actual-versus-planned and forecasted productivity for production engineering by
discipline and construction activities by craft or Subcontractor.
8) Monthly analysis of the progress of the WORK as compared to the Current Control Schedule with
particular emphasis on those activities on the Critical and Sub-Critical Paths.

CONTRACTOR shall submit the following information on a weekly basis:
1) Progress summary showing both planned and actual percent complete by overall, by phase, and
by discipline/craft for CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR GROUP.
2) A three-week bar chart schedule, including previous week's progress and a two-week look ahead
reflecting both CONTRACTOR and CONTRACTOR GROUP related activities.
3) Histogram or table with a daily comparison of direct, indirect, and total personnel by discipline or
craft, between the number of personnel actually engaged on the WORK and the number planned.
4) All installed tagged equipment and bulk quantities and supporting commodity curves (e.g. pipe,
concrete, cables, terminations, tagged instruments, steel, etc.)
5) Status and discussion of punchlist items.
Page 182 of 407


13. Change Management

CONTRACT Changes are comprised of Specification Deviations and CHANGE ORDERS. Change
Management applies to any potential Change to the WORK, including information, processes, plans,
procedures, drawings, or other documents related to the WORK. The Change Management Process
applies irrespective of what party initiates, or has approval authority for, the Change.
This section applies only to CHANGE ORDER management and related processes and procedures.
Specification Deviations are addressed in Section 6. and Appendix FF – Specific Deviation Requests
of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES. COMPANY's objectives with regard to a proper
and robust Change Management process are as follows:
1) To minimize CONTRACT Changes of all types
2) To fully document, review, and have the appropriate approvals of all CONTRACT Changes
before implementation to ensure that no unrecognized cost, schedule, safety, security,
environmental, or operability risks are introduced into the WORK
3) To identify in a timely fashion CONTRACT Changes to minimize cost and schedule impacts
Terms used in this section are defined in Table F14-1 below.
Table F13-1: Change Management Definitions
Term Definition
Change Any Revision or Contract Change.
Contract Change A revision to JOB SPECIFICATION, a revision to elements of
WORK already completed or being performed, a deletion of WORK
already authorized additional goods or services requested by
COMPANY of CONTRACTOR, revisions to Payment Milestones or
Schedule Milestone requirements or dates. All Contract Changes
require COMPANY approval.
Change Inquiry A request by COMPANY for CONTRACTOR to evaluate cost and
schedule implications of a potential Contract Change.
Change Proposal CONTRACTOR's proposal for a Contract Change, including cost and
schedule impacts and assessment of risk including health, safety,
environmental, regulatory, and technical implications.
Change Order Company's formal authorization to Contractor for execution of a
Contract Change. It represents full and complete compensation for the
change and any cumulative effect that the Contract change may have
on the overall WORK.
Change Notice CONTRACTOR's written notice to COMPANY to indicate in their
opinion that a part or parts of the WORK is entitled to Contract
Change in accordance with the Principal Document, Article 7.2.
Deviation Future developments to the JOB SPECIFICATION. These generally
result from detailed design progress, data from vendors or
subcontractors. The Principal Document outlines the criteria to
determine if a contract change is necessary.
Revision Any modification to a deliverable after it has been approved.
Waiver Acceptance of an existing nonconformance to the JOB
SPECIFICATION. The Principal Document outlines the criteria to
determine if a contract change is necessary.
Page 183 of 407


13.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will advise CONTRACTOR as to the disposition of CONTRACT Changes and
shall respond to Change Requests and Change Proposals.
2) COMPANY will issue Change Inquiries and CHANGE ORDERS as needed.

1) In accordance with Section 1.3.2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following for COMPANY's review and approval:
a) Change Management Plan
b) Change Management System
2) CONTRACTOR shall endeavor to minimize CONTRACT Changes
3) CONTRACTOR shall timely identify potential CONTRACT Changes to minimize cost and
schedule impacts
13.3.1 Change Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's Change Management Plan shall include the following:
1) A description of CONTRACTOR's Change Management System
2) How CONTRACTOR will meet change management obligations of the CONTRACT
3) How CONTRACTOR will manage changes with its Subcontractors and Suppliers on their
subcontracts and purchase orders
13.3.2 Change Management System

CONTRACTOR's Change Management System shall include the following:
1) Procedures for identifying the change baseline, i.e., the Cost Control Estimate (frozen design
basis drawings, plans, procedures, and other documentation issued for Project execution activities
[e.g., procurement, construction, fabrication, hookup, and commissioning, etc.]).
2) Processes and criteria to identify all changes to the JOB SPECIFICATION, ensure required
reviews are carried out, and track each CHANGE ORDER or potential CHANGE ORDER from
identification to closeout including details of responsibilities.
3) Definition of the authorities that review and or approve CHANGE ORDERS.
4) Description of the technical reviews of CONTRACT Changes that includes the following:
a) Assessments of risk and impact on cost, schedule, safety, security, health, environment,
operability, and maintainability
How these assessments will be incorporated into CONTRACTOR's Risk Assessment and
Management Plans
5) Process for ensuring that Subcontractors and Suppliers have similar change management
procedures and processes in place.
6) Procedures, including as a minimum the following, for estimating the man-hours and cost and
schedule impact of CHANGE ORDERS:
a) A flowchart of the typical estimating process and key interfaces with disciplines outside of
estimating
Page 184 of 407


b) Planned cost estimating methodologies and any planned estimating allowances

c) Proposed procedures for handling and conditioning Supplier quotes
d) Unit prices to be used for estimates and planned methodology for creating new unit prices
when required
e) Methods for estimating indirect costs and overhead costs including but not limited to TAXES
and FEE
f) Evaluating the full effect of each and every CHANGE ORDER on the schedule's critical path
and SCHEDULE MILESTONES
7) Procedures for processing requests from its Subcontractors or Suppliers for changes to their
respective subcontracts or purchase orders.
8) Procedures for identifying potential CHANGE ORDERS resulting from Project interfaces.
9) Procedures for obtaining COMPANY approvals, when required.
10) Description of how approved CHANGE ORDERS are to be documented, including, but not
limited to, update of specifications, drawings, plans, procedures, and as-built documentation.
11) Description of how CONTRACT Changes are to be communicated to CONTRACTOR GROUP
personnel, or external interfaces.
Refer to Section of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES for procedures for incorporating
Change Proposals and CHANGE ORDERS into the Cost Control Estimate and for incorporating
CHANGE ORDERS into the CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET.
Refer to Section 11.3 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES for procedures for
incorporating Change Proposals and CHANGE ORDERS into the Project Execution Schedule and
Progress Measurement System.
13.1.1 Change Order Log

1) CONTRACTOR shall maintain a Change Order Log of all CONTRACT changes, CHANGE
ORDERS, and the status of related key activities, including the following:
a) Change Inquiries
b) Change Requests
c) Change Proposals
d) Rejected, withdrawn, and cancelled changes
2) CONTRACTOR shall maintain the Change Order Log in a database for easy sorting and retrieval.
Similar separate logs shall also be maintained for tracking changes made to subcontracts and
purchase orders.
3) Each log entry will include the following information:
a) Identification number
b) Revision number
c) Originator (individual and discipline)
d) Brief description
e) Issue, receipt, and response dates by CONTRACTOR and COMPANY
f) Correspondence reference numbers
Page 185 of 407


g) Notation for each entry of the following:

i. The actions taken by COMPANY and CONTRACTOR (pending, approved, disputed,
withdrawn, or rejected)
ii. The effect upon the CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET, forecast, payment milestones,
SCHEDULE MILESTONES, and/or SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE
iii. Any remarks
iv. The dates submitted and/or authorized that each activity associated with a CHANGE
ORDER was completed and the name of CONTRACTOR's personnel who verified
completion
13.1.2 Change Inquiry

1) COMPANY will issue a Change Inquiry to CONTRACTOR if COMPANY is considering
potential changes to the JOB SPECIFICATION. The Change Inquiry will include COMPANY's
authorization of activities required to determine the effects of a potential CONTRACT Change.
2) The Change Inquiry will include a brief description of the proposed revision to the JOB
SPECIFICATION or the services required, including appropriately identifying references and the
reason for the Change Inquiry (for example, safety, security, operability, COMPANY preference,
economics, etc.).
3) CONTRACTOR shall respond to a Change Inquiry by submitting a completed Change Proposal
to COMPANY within seven calendar days of the initial request.
4) In response to a Change Inquiry, if CONTRACTOR determines that the Change Proposal cannot
be completed within seven calendar days, then CONTRACTOR shall promptly advise
COMPANY of that fact, the reason for the delay, and the date that the Change Proposal is to be
available for COMPANY's review.
13.1.3 Change Request

1) CONTRACTOR shall issue a Change Request to COMPANY if CONTRACTOR desires
changes to the JOB SPECIFICATION, or has identified changes made by COMPANY or others,
where a cost or schedule impact is anticipated. Also, CONTRACTOR shall issue such requests
to notify COMPANY without delay when CONTRACTOR believes that any instruction,
interpretation, decision, or other act of COMPANY, or any omission of COMPANY, including,
without limitation, unreasonable delay in providing approvals, authorizations, agreements, or
reviews, meets the criteria for a CHANGE ORDER.
2) Change Requests shall include a description of the revision to the JOB SPECIFICATION and the
services required, including appropriate identifying references and the reason for the Change
Request. Change Requests shall also include an order of magnitude estimate of the attendant cost
and schedule impact, if known.
3) If COMPANY agrees with CONTRACTOR's Change Request, then COMPANY will authorize
CONTRACTOR to prepare a Change Proposal.
13.1.4 Change Proposal

1) A Change Proposal is required to document the basis for all proposed CHANGE ORDERS,
either as CONTRACTOR's response to COMPANY's Change Inquiry or, in follow-up to
CONTRACTOR's Change Request, as result of an approved request for Change Proposal from
COMPANY.
Page 186 of 407


2) Change Proposals shall be numbered sequentially and shall include the following:
a) A detailed description of the requested revision to the JOB SPECIFICATION and the services
required, including supporting documentation and references (e.g., previously approved
Change Request).
b) The estimated adjustment, if any, to the CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET, including a detailed
estimate of the quantities of materials, equipment, and resources related to the change. These
items shall be defined on new or revised cost, time, resource (CTR) sheets. The detailed
estimate will include quantity takeoffs and shall be broken down into categories aligned with
the CONTRACT PRICE BUDGET.
c) The proposed adjustment to any FEE and supporting calculations.
d) The estimated adjustment, if any, to the SCHEDULE MILESTONES, SCHEDULED
COMPLETION DATE or forecasted COMPLETION DATE, with appropriate accompanying
backup data.
e) At COMPANY's discretion, CONTRACTOR shall provide a proposed schedule and
associated logic network, which demonstrates new tasks, modifications to existing tasks, and
the estimated work hours associated with the Change Proposal.
f) A risk assessment in accordance with Section 16., including impact on any completed risk
assessments.
g) The latest date that authorization can be given without affecting the SCHEDULED
COMPLETION DATE or impacting the SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE in the
Change Proposal. CONTRACTOR shall target timely completion of its proposal so as to
allow COMPANY 21 calendar days for review and approval before impacting the above
latest date of authorization.
13.1.5 CHANGE NOTICE

CONTRACTOR shall without delay issue a Change Notice to notify COMPANY in accordance with
the Principal Document, Article 7.2. when CONTRACTOR believes either of the following:
1) A written instruction from COMPANY, is not based on the JOB SPECIFICATION.
2) A certain piece of WORK or performance or change in CONTRACTOR's WORK plan is caused
by COMPANY's default.
The Change Notice shall detail the circumstances under Section 14.3.7 of Section F –
COORDINATION PROCEDURES, Items 1 or 2 above that CONTRACTOR believes warrant a
CHANGE ORDER and shall include copies of or references to all relevant correspondence.
13.1.6 CHANGE ORDER

If COMPANY approves a Change Proposal, then COMPANY will issue a CHANGE ORDER, as
described below:
1) COMPANY will transmit two unsigned originals of the CHANGE ORDER to CONTRACTOR
for signature. CONTRACTOR shall sign and return both originals to COMPANY. After
signature of the CHANGE ORDER by COMPANY, the CHANGE ORDER shall be considered
executed and one original will be returned to CONTRACTOR.
2) COMPANY will use the CHANGE ORDER form provided in Appendix FE.
3) When necessary, COMPANY may direct CONTRACTOR to commence the WORK described in
the Change Proposal prior to receipt of the Change Proposal or issuance of the CHANGE
ORDER. Such authorization will be given on an exception basis with work normally limited in
scope and value, and later incorporated into a confirmed CHANGE ORDER once approved by
COMPANY.
Page 187 of 407


13.1.7 Disputed Change Requests

If COMPANY does not approve CONTRACTOR's Change Request, COMPANY will request that
CONTRACTOR withdraw the Change Request. If CONTRACTOR does not agree on withdrawing
the Change Request, then CONTRACTOR shall so note this on the Change Order Log. The disputed
change resolution process is set forth in the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT.
13.1.8 Deviations and Waivers

1) If COMPANY decides to approve any Deviation or Waiver, it will direct CONTRACTOR to
make the Contract Change by written response to CONTRACTOR's Change Proposal.
2) COMPANY's approval of a Deviation or Waiver shall only be given in writing and is valid only
for the specific occurrence of the nonconformance described in the Change Proposal. If
CONTRACTOR seeks approval for multiple occurrences of a nonconformance in a single Change
Proposal, the combined scope of the occurrences for which the CONTRACTOR requests the
Deviation or Waiver shall be adequately described in the Change Proposal.
3) Should CONTRACTOR desire later to ask that COMPANY expand the scope of an approved
Deviation or Waiver to cover additional occurrences CONTRACTOR must submit a new and
fully substantiated Change Proposal for COMPANY's consideration. As with any Change
Proposal, COMPANY is not obligated to consider or approve it but may do so at COMPANY's
sole discretion.
13.2 Reports
1) CONTRACTOR shall issue the Change Order Log(s) to COMPANY at least monthly and as may
otherwise be requested by COMPANY.
2) CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY on a monthly basis the status of potential changes for
which CONTRACTOR has not yet issued a Change Request to COMPANY, along with
CONTRACTOR's estimate of the effects to any activities involved and impact on the Critical
Path schedule.
Page 188 of 407


14. Quality
14.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY has the right to review, monitor, witness, inspect, and test WORK and associated
documentation.
2) COMPANY has the right to audit and assess for quality CONTRACTOR GROUP.
3) COMPANY has the right of approval of the following:
a) Quality documents used to control WORK
b) Management, supervisory, lead, lead audit quality personnel, discipline construction site
inspectors
c) Corrective actions for products that do not conform to Project requirements and corrective
actions for causes of Nonconformities identified by COMPANY
d) Source Inspection management and source inspectors
e) Quality reporting format, typical content, and frequency
f) CONTRACTOR's audit management tools including audit schedules and checklists
g) Members of Quality Steering Team

1) In accordance with Section 1. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES,
CONTRACTOR shall submit the following WORK- specific documents for COMPANY's
review and approval:
a) Quality Management System
b) Quality Plan
c) Supplier Oversight Plan
d) Subcontractor Oversight Plan
e) Quality Audit Schedule
f) Schedule for Construction Inspection and Test Plans
g) G Construction Inspection & Test Plans
2) CONTRACTOR shall submit or make available, as indicated by COMPANY, documents for
COMPANY review and approval.
3) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for implementing requirements specified in the JOB
SPECIFICATION.
4) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the quality of the WORK
5) CONTRACTOR shall maintain a documented, functional quality management system and ensure
its subcontractors, vendors, and sub-vendors maintain a documented, functional quality
management system to ensure the quality of WORK and FACILITY.
6) The performance of any quality management activities by COMPANY shall not relieve
CONTRACTOR of its overall responsibility for quality of WORK and FACILITY.
Page 189 of 407


7) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the implementation of COMPANY's GP 20-01-04

Upstream Project Quality Assurance - General Requirements.
14.2.1 Quality Planning

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for quality planning for all phases of the WORK.
14.2.2 Quality Organization

1) CONTRACTOR shall plan and maintain its Quality Organization in accordance with
CONTRACTOR's Organization Plan and GP 20-01-04.
2) CONTRACTOR's Quality Organization must be autonomous from production, report directly to
senior management, and have the authority to instruct on matters relating to quality.
3) CONTRACTOR's Quality Organization shall be staffed with the required number of competent
and, where required by COMPANY, certified personnel to comply with the assigned tasks
referenced in the Quality Plan. Staffing shall address extended hour, double shift, and rotational
work practices.
4) CONTRACTOR shall define required qualification / certification levels for quality personnel,
including those of Sub-Contractors, Vendors and Sub-Vendors for all phases of the WORK.
5) All welding and NDT personnel responsible for inspecting and reporting the WORK shall be
qualified in accordance with a nationally recognized certification scheme e.g.: AWS /CSWIP
Certied Welding inspector or ASNT SNT-TC-1A /PCN Level 2 NDT Inspector. Personel
qualifications shall be submitted to COMPNAY for approval prior to the start of WORK.
6) CONTRACTOR's Quality Organization shall include, as a minimum, requirements consistent
with GP 20-01-04 and as specified by COMPANY.
7) CONTRACTOR shall form a Quality Steering Team which shall include, but not be limited to,
Project management, Engineering management, and Construction management. The Quality
Steering Team shall perform the following:
a) Review quality performance metrics and key quality issues
b) Identify quality program improvements and adjustments to resources
c) Promote quality awareness
14.2.3 Execution
14.2.3.1Control of WORK
1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that required documents related to quality—such as drawings,
specifications, Inspection and Test Plans (ITPs), and procedures—are of latest issue, complete,
and available, with all required comments resolved and/or with required approvals, prior to start
of the corresponding WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR shall ensure appropriate controls are implemented in accordance with approved
procedures and plans.
14.2.3.2Subcontractor Quality Oversight

1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure a Quality representative verifies that documentation used to
subcontract WORK includes all quality requirements.
2) CONTRACTOR shall perform quality oversight of Subcontractors in accordance with GP 20-01-
04 and other GP supplements.
Page 190 of 407


14.2.3.3Purchasing Documentation
1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure a Quality representative verifies that documentation used for
purchasing materials, equipment, and fabricated items includes all quality requirements, in
accordance with GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements.
2) CONTRACTOR shall obtain from COMPANY or prepare Criticality Ratings for systems and
their subcomponents, purchased materials, equipment, and fabricated items in accordance with
GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements. In the event CONTRACTOR prepares Criticality
Ratings, CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY approval of the assigned Criticality Ratings,
including approval for any addition or revisions, prior to the start of related WORK.
14.2.3.4Source Inspection
1) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for Source Inspection of purchased equipment, materials,
and fabricated items in accordance with GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements.
2) CONTRACTOR shall determine inspection levels and obtain written COMPANY approval of
inspection levels prior to placement of purchase order. Source Inspection assignment packages
and Source Inspector selection are subject to COMPANY approval prior to start of Source
Inspection activities. CONTRACTOR shall not change the nominated Source Inspector unless
agreed in writing by COMPANY.
3) CONTRACTOR shall perform Source Inspections of purchased equipment, materials, and
fabricated items in accordance with the approved ITPs.
14.2.3.5Inspection and Testing of Fabrication and Construction

1) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for inspection and testing of fabrication and construction.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure acceptance inspection and testing is performed by personnel
independent of those who perform or directly supervise the WORK being inspected and tested.
2) CONTRACTOR, Sub-Contractors and NDT service providers proposing to utilize radiographic
isotopes for radiographic inspections shall submit evidence of NNRA certification compliance
(Permit) for importation, transportation, storage and use of their radiographic source materials.
3) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all inspections and tests are performed in accordance with
approved ITPs and in accordance with GP 20-01-04.
4) CONTRACTOR shall implement a documented weld parameter testing program that shall ensure
each welder and welding operator in all welding processes are regularly monitored for
compliance with the applicable Welding Procedure Specification (WPS). CONTRACTOR shall
ensure that equipment used for measuring welding parameters i.e.:voltmeters / ammeters is
available for use at all work locations prior to commencement of welding activities.
5) CONTRACTOR shall issue phased inspection release certificates for fabricated elements that
will be incorporated into final fabricated products.
6) CONTRACTOR shall record inspection and test results. CONTRACTOR shall issue weekly
status reports which record quantity of welds completed per week, quantity of NDT work
completed and weld repair rates recorded. Records of inspection and test results shall clearly
identify the WORK product, status, and the individual accepting the inspection or test.
Inspection and test records shall be part of final quality documentation deliverables.
14.2.3.6Access, Notification, and Support

1) All access, notification, and support requirements apply to all of CONTRACTOR GROUP's
WORK locations unless specifically stated otherwise.
Page 191 of 407


2) CONTRACTOR shall support COMPANY and any COMPANY third parties, including
providing access, notification, and CONTRACTOR resources necessary to perform quality
activities.
3) CONTRACTOR shall provide for unrestricted safe access for COMPANY's Quality Organization
and any COMPANY third parties to any WORK facility, personnel, WORK areas, elevated
access ways (such as scaffolding or man lifts), and Project documentation, as required to facilitate
physical cross checking, audit, assessment, and verification activities.
4) CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient notification (as a minimum, 24 business hours of notice)
via a Request for Inspection (RFI) to COMPANY and any COMPANY third parties to enable
participation in inspections and tests at fabrication and construction sites.
5) CONTRACTOR shall provide sufficient notification (as a minimum, five days of notice) to
COMPANY and any COMPANY third parties to participate in inspections and tests at Supplier
facilities. CONTRACTOR shall provide notification within one business day of receiving
inspection notification from Supplier.
6) CONTRACTOR shall immediately upon COMPANY's request re-perform inspections and tests
solely at CONTRACTOR expense, regardless of findings, in cases where CONTRACTOR fails to
provide required notice of inspection or fails to provide safe access to WORK and proceeds
independently with inspections and testing and/or subsequent WORK.
14.2.3.7Third-Party Inspection Required by Statutory Regulations

CONTRACTOR shall arrange for, support, and provide safe access and notification to third-party
inspection and government agency inspection required by statutory regulations. CONTRACTOR
shall give COMPANY notice of at least five calendar days prior to visits by third-party inspectors.
14.2.3.8Quality Audits
1) CONTRACTOR shall perform quality audits of WORK. CONTRACTOR shall ensure Quality
audits are conducted by qualified personnel independent of those who perform or directly
supervise the activity being audited.
2) CONTRACTOR shall include COMPANY, at COMPANY's discretion, in CONTRACTOR's
audit planning and execution.
14.2.3.9Control of Nonconformities and Corrective and Preventive Actions

1) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for early identification, reporting, resolution, and approved
disposition of nonconforming processes and products. CONTRACTOR shall ensure that the
causes of nonconformities are determined and that appropriate corrective action is taken within
the timeframe agreed with COMPANY.
2) CONTRACTOR shall document and report to COMPANY all product nonconformities.
Reporting is to be within two business days of identification. Within five business days of
reporting, CONTRACTOR shall present for COMPANY approval a written resolution proposal
for each nonconformity, regardless of whether identified by CONTRACTOR or COMPANY.
3) CONTRACTOR shall document and report to COMPANY all process nonconformities within
two business days of identification. For process nonconformities identified by COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR shall present a written resolution proposal within five business days of written
identification.
4) CONTRACTOR shall resolve, to COMPANY's satisfaction, quality issues identified by
COMPANY.
5) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that appropriate improvements and preventive actions are taken
when evidence indicates a potential nonconformity or other undesirable potential situation.
Page 192 of 407


14.2.3.10 Quality Records

CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for identification, development, review, protection, and delivery
of all quality records associated with WORK, including CONTRACTOR GROUP records.
14.3.1 Quality Management System

CONTRACTOR shall have a current, documented, and effective Quality Management System (QMS)
approved in accordance with a recognized national or international standard (e.g., ISO 9001, API Q1,
etc.). Certification of the QMS is not mandatory, provided that CONTRACTOR can demonstrate by
audit and assessment that the requirements, processes, systems, plans, and controls are compliant with
a recognized national or international Quality standard. An exception to this is where product
specification (e.g., ASME "U" Stamp, API, EuroNorm, EN BSI etc.) is required.
14.3.2 Quality Plan

CONTRACTOR's Quality Plan shall comply with the JOB SPECIFICATION, GP 20-01-04, other GP
supplements and CONTRACTOR's QMS. The Quality Plan shall apply to the WORK, including
associated temporary facilities and construction aids. CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY
approval of subsequent revisions prior to the revision being issued for use.
The Quality Plan shall contain an organization chart showing the CONTRACTOR’s total organization
responsible for performing the WORK and shall clearly show the assignments and numbers of
personnel responsible for all phases of the WORK. The organization chart shall show reporting
relationships from the inspectors up to and including senior Project management. The organization
chart shall be supported with a description of each person’s reporting and functional responsibility.
14.3.3 Supplier Oversight Plan

CONTRACTOR shall prepare, and update as needed, a plan to manage Supplier oversight and Source
Inspection in accordance with GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR shall submit
an initial version of the Supplier Oversight Plan for COMPANY approval prior to start of purchasing.
14.3.4 Subcontractor Oversight Plan

CONTRACTOR shall prepare, and update as needed, a plan to manage Subcontractor oversight in
accordance with GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR shall submit an initial
version of the Subcontractor Oversight Plan for COMPANY approval prior to start of Subcontractor
activities.
14.3.5 Suppliers' Inspection and Test Plans

1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that Suppliers' ITPs are prepared by each Supplier and that these
ITPs comply with GP 20-01-04 and other GP supplements, and incorporate Project requirements
where necessary to ensure Supplier's items meet Project requirements. CONTRACTOR shall
review and approve Supplier ITPs.
2) Prior to start of activities covered by any Supplier ITP, CONTRACTOR shall obtain written
COMPANY approval of the corresponding Supplier ITP and updated Supplier ITPs where
indicated by COMPANY.
14.3.6 Inspection and Test Plans Used for Construction

1) CONTRACTOR shall provide construction ITPs that comply with GP 20-01-04 and other GP
supplements. ITPs shall cover inspections and tests necessary to demonstrate compliance of
Page 193 of 407


WORK by CONTRACTOR or its Subcontractors with Project specifications, regulatory

requirements, and Mechanical Completion requirements. Construction ITPs shall identify and
align quality checks with respective Mechanical Completion checks to the extent practical to
minimize duplication of checks.
2) CONTRACTOR shall prepare and maintain a written schedule to manage development of
construction ITPs.
3) Prior to start of activities covered by the construction ITP, CONTRACTOR shall obtain written
COMPANY approval of the corresponding construction ITP and updated construction ITPs
where indicated by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall review construction ITPs developed by
Subcontractors prior to submittal to COMPANY for approval.
14.3.7 Procedures
1) CONTRACTOR shall establish and provide to COMPANY, directly or via Subcontractors and
Suppliers, quality procedures that comply with the JOB SPECIFICATION, GP 20-01-04 and
other GP supplements, and that are sufficient for monitoring all aspects of Quality Management
for the WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR shall identify and notify COMPANY of procedures that require COMPANY
approval, using standard industry documents such as distribution matrices, weld procedure
matrices, etc. CONTRACTOR shall manage the development and approval process such that
procedures are approved and available prior to the start of related WORK.
3) As a minimum, procedures shall cover the following:
a) Design change control
b) Qualification of Subcontractors and Suppliers
c) Management of Source Inspection, including the following:
I. Determining the level of Source Inspection
II. Assigning, managing, coordinating, and reporting Source Inspection activities,
including the tools, databases, and reporting for Source Inspection management,
status, planning, and coordination
III. Monitoring the effectiveness of the Source Inspection program and of individual
Source Inspectors
d) Notification to COMPANY for COMPANY to participate in inspections and tests at Supplier
facilities and at fabrication and construction sites.
e) Management of Positive Material Identification (PMI) for materials subject to PMI controls
in GP 29-01-01 and GP 20-01-04.
f) Management of Material Traceability for compliance with GP 29-01-34 & GP 29-01-34S
g) Oversight of Subcontractors, including review and approval of Subcontractor documents,
assessing Subcontractor work processes, inspecting and testing WORK performed by
Subcontractors, and review and acceptance of Subcontractor records.
h) Management and assessment of material and equipment handling, storage, shipping,
receiving inspection, material control including segregation, markings and tracking, and
preservation, including COMPANY-supplied material and equipment.
i) Where the ability of the work process to conform to requirements is proven through process
qualification, validation and control of special processes, such as the following:
i. Welding
Page 194 of 407


ii. Painting and coatings

iii. Pipe bending and stress relieving
iv. Distortion control
v. Nondestructive examination (NDE)
vi. Others as required by the JOB SPECIFICATION
j) Inspection and test of WORK, including functional, acceptance, and/or integration testing as
required by the JOB SPECIFICATION, applicable product standards, and regulatory and/or
manufacturer's standards.
k) Control of measuring and test devices.
l) Planning, executing, and reporting quality audits.
m) Reporting, controlling, planning corrective actions for, and correcting product
nonconformities.
n) Reporting, controlling, planning corrective actions for, and correcting process
nonconformities.
o) Analysis of data, reporting, and improvement.
14.3.8 Quality Audit Schedule

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Quality Audit Schedule that complies with GP 20-01-04 and
other GP supplements. The Quality Audit Schedule shall include audits of CONTRACTOR
GROUP where appropriate.
2) CONTRACTOR shall obtain COMPANY approval of their Quality Audit Schedule including
subsequent revisions prior to the revision being issued for use.
14.4 Reports
1) CONTRACTOR shall determine, collect, and analyze Quality Management data. On a monthly
basis as a minimum, CONTRACTOR shall prepare and submit a status report—for each site and
for the overall Project—specific to Quality Management, in accordance with GP 20-01-04 and
other GP supplements. CONTRACTOR's monthly report shall include quality activities
performed and those planned for the next month, as well as a list of all nonconformities and
metrics per discipline.
2) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY report frequency, format, and type of report content
to be used 30 days in advance of initiation of site activities.
3) CONTRACTOR shall report, as a minimum, quality issues requiring management attention,
status of activities required to manage quality of WORK, status of nonconformities, quality audit
status and results, quality metrics and trends (e.g., rework rates by discipline, etc.), inspection and
test status, Mechanical Completion check sheet status, and planned Quality Management
activities.
4) Reports shall include relevant information from Subcontractors and Suppliers.
(See Appendix FN Quality management for additional Requirements)
Page 195 of 407


15. Risk Management and Loss Prevention

Risk Management and Loss Prevention include COMPANY and CONTRACTOR GROUP planning,
conducting, evaluating, and follow-up of process hazard analyses (including Hazard and Operability
Reviews [HAZOPs]), formal risk assessments, and Loss Prevention engineering studies, and closing
action items that arise from these assessments and studies.
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall work together to accomplish the following Project risk
objectives:
1) Risks related to project design (all operating modes), construction, installation, Systems
Completion, and Start-up operations are identified using a structured approach
2) Risk assessments are planned and conducted in advance of appropriate Project milestones or
activities to allow resolution of identified risks without schedule disruption
3) Appropriate COMPANY and CONTRACTOR personnel attend risk assessments to ensure risks
are correctly identified and assessed
4) Results of risk assessments and any associated risk mitigation measures are reviewed by
appropriate levels of management
5) Recommendations from Loss Prevention studies are considered in the design and documented for
closure
6) Recommendations from Risk Assessments are documented, approved by COMPANY, and
systematically stewarded to completion such that risks are managed and mitigated to an
acceptable level at a reasonable cost
7) Open risks and associated resolutions are documented for acceptance and subsequent handover to
Operations
15.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will provide to CONTRACTOR COMPANY's Risk Management Plan.
2) COMPANY will monitor CONTRACTOR compliance with the COMPANY Risk Management
Plan and processes. COMPANY's monitoring activities include, but are not limited to, the
following:
a) Reviewing CONTRACTOR risk assessments for completeness and accuracy
Monitoring risk assessment and Loss Prevention studies action item closure plans and closure
progress
Conducting periodic compliance reviews at a COMPANY-specified frequency to verify the
following:
i. That formal risk assessments and follow-up actions are being implemented according
to approved Current Control Schedule
ii. That risk assessment and Loss Prevention study action item closure processes
(including the development and approval of action plans and appropriate review and
closure approval) are being implemented according to approved COMPANY Risk
Management Plan.
3) COMPANY will review for approval whether the risk resolution action plans have been
completed in accordance with the original intent of the risk prevention/mitigation step.
4) COMPANY will review for approval risk assessment study charters, leader/facilitator, and
agendas, produced by CONTRACTOR.
Page 196 of 407


5) COMPANY will review for approval the final Risk Assessment report for distribution and
implementation.
6) COMPANY will audit CONTRACTOR's risk register periodically to ensure documentation
required for action item closure is adequate and complies with COMPANY Project Risk
Management Plan.
7) Risk reduction actions shall be followed to COMPLETION with the use of an action tracking
System that is acceptable to COMPANY. The action tracking report shall show priority,
responsibility, and timing for completion of each action. COMPANY may choose to provide the
tracking System or provide a specific format for the tracking System. Deviations from agreed-
upon actions and timings shall be approved and endorsed by the levels of CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY management that approved and endorsed the original actions and timings.
8) Action tracking reports shall be submitted to COMPANY monthly. At the completion of each
risk assessment and its associated response actions, the results of the risk assessment and response
actions shall be communicated in a closeout report to those affected

a) CONTRACTOR's Risk Management Plan
b) CONTRACTOR's Risk Assessment Plan
a) Comply with COMPANY's Risk Management Plan
b) Incorporate the requirements of COMPANY's Risk Management Plan into CONTRACTOR's
Risk Management Plan, work process, and staffing plans
c) Provide CONTRACTOR's Risk Management Plan and internal risk management system to
COMPANY for review
3) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for providing all logistics needed for the implementation of
the Risk Management Plan, including risk assessments and Loss Prevention studies.
4) For each risk assessment, CONTRACTOR shall deliver to COMPANY a Risk Assessment
Charter and Agenda for COMPANY approval. Each assessment-specific charter shall address the
following:
a) Purpose (e.g., to manage risk associated with a specified Project activity through early
identification of hazards, assessment of associated risk, and capture of potential preventive
and mitigating actions)
b) Objectives (e.g., to identify and assess significant risks to safety, health, environment, assets,
schedule, and costs associated with the assessment scope; to identify plans or proposals to
further evaluate or manage the risks; to provide related documentation so management can
address the identified risks)
c) Scope and boundaries
d) Assessment team membership (e.g., Project Team members and Project-independent experts)
e) Risk assessment dates and location
f) Process (e.g., multidisciplinary team process that includes identification of hazards and issues,
identification of causes and consequences related to scenarios that could lead to incidents,
ranking the risk of each scenario qualitatively based on the probability and consequence of
Page 197 of 407


those incidents, identifying additional potential mitigation measures, and assessing the risk of
each scenario with potential mitigation measures in place)
g) Agenda overview
h) Deliverables
i) Roles and responsibilities of sponsor, risk coordinator, and team members
5) CONTRACTOR shall comply with the following risk assessment requirements:
a) The members of risk assessment teams shall be qualified for ensuring risks are correctly
identified and assessed.
b) Risk assessments shall include the identification of potential risk scenarios associated with
Project execution and operation, including, but not limited to, risks related to the following:
i. Safety, health, and environment (SHE)
ii. Labor relations
iii. Community relations
iv. Financial impact on COMPANY
a) Risk assessments shall include the identification of environmental hazards and the completion
of approved risk reduction plans for the WORK, incorporating, as necessary, control
measures into CONTRACTOR's Plans.
All risk assessments shall include consideration of human and health factors.
Risk assessments shall be conducted at least 35 calendar days prior to their related Project milestones
or activities to allow resolution of risks without schedule disruption.
Charters, pre-read information (including procedures for the activities being assessed), and all
required drawings shall be issued at least 15 calendar days prior to the risk assessment commencing.
6) For the evaluation, resolution, tracking, and incorporation into execution of the Project findings or
any risk reduction actions resulting from COMPANY's risk, Loss Prevention, or technical safety
studies, CONTRACTOR shall use the following:
a) COMPANY's Risk Matrix (). The use of numbering in the Risk Matrix is internal to
COMPANY and indicates the requirements for endorsement by COMPANY management of
specific hazard consequence and probability combinations.
b) COMPANY's Risk Management Plan.
7) Before any risk reduction action commences, CONTRACTOR shall submit risk scenarios,
evaluations, and proposed risk reduction actions to CONTRACTOR's management for approval
and then to COMPANY for endorsement. COMPANY's Risk Management Plan outlines the
approval and endorsement process.
Page 198 of 407


Figure F0-1: Risk Matrix
Page 199 of 407


8) CONTRACTOR shall assess all credible risk scenarios for possible risk reduction by the
following (in order of preference):
a) Elimination of the hazard source
b) Reduction of the likelihood or mitigation of the consequences
c) Control of the resultant impact or damage
d) Emergency response and recovery systems
9) Immediately after design freeze and preceding construction and fabrication, CONTRACTOR
shall conduct HAZOPs based on the detailed design and Supplier data.
10) CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY approval CONTRACTOR's risk assessment
facilitator. COMPANY may elect to provide a facilitator for risk assessments, HAZOPs, and
safety integrity level (SIL) studies.
Page 200 of 407


15.2.1 Risk Assessment Process

CONTRACTOR shall comply with the detailed work flow processes provided in COMPANY's Risk
Management Plan.
15.2.2 Risk Assessment Tracking

1) CONTRACTOR shall develop and maintain a standard risk register.
2) CONTRACTOR shall track action items to closure and shall assign for each action item the
priority, responsibility, and timing for completion. COMPANY may choose to provide the
tracking system, but CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY using the provided templates in
Appendix G. CONTRACTOR may request the Microsoft Excel format of the tracking
templates. CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY approval any deviations from
previously agreed actions and timings.
3) CONTRACTOR shall issue to COMPANY for each risk assessment a Risk Assessment Closeout
Report that documents the results of each response action.
15.2.3 Risk Assessments Required by COMPANY

1) CONTRACTOR shall invite COMPANY to participate in and/or facilitate, at COMPANY's
discretion, those risk assessments required by COMPANY. When the facilitator is provided by
CONTRACTOR, CONTRACTOR's facilitator must, as a minimum, have prior risk assessment
and HAZOP facilitation experience for the oil and gas industry of five years or more.
CONTRACTOR shall provide risk assessment and HAZOP facilitator credentials for
COMPANY review and approval. CONTRACTOR shall maintain consistency in the
facilitator(s) used on the Project, once approved by COMPANY. COMPANY may choose to
provide facilitators and reject CONTRACTOR's facilitators for any reason.
2) CONTRACTOR shall participate in risk assessments conducted by COMPANY or COMPANY's
other Contractors when these risk assessments include work activities where CONTRACTOR is
involved. CONTRACTOR shall perform, track, and report on any assigned risk assessment
actions resulting from risk assessments conducted by COMPANY or COMPANY's other
Contractors.
3) presents the minimum risk assessment activities with supporting Loss Prevention
activities/studies planned for this Project. The full list of risk assessments and Loss Prevention
studies is included in COMPANY's Risk Management Plan. CONTRACTOR shall use
COMPANY Guidance Documents as required.
Page 201 of 407

Table F0-5: Risk Assessments, Loss Prevention Activities, and Human Factors Activities
Activity Description When Responsible
Risk Detailed Design Focuses on detailed piping and instrumentation After design freeze, CONTRACTOR
Assessments HAZOP diagrams (P&IDs) / plot plans to ensure equipment can prior to Construction
be operated in a safe and efficient manner. Emergency
shutdown (ESD), safe control, and alarm strategies are
essential aspects.
Detailed Design Focuses on detailed P&IDs / plot plans to ensure After design freeze, CONTRACTOR
HAZOP – Supplier equipment can be operated in a safe and efficient prior to Construction
Packages manner. ESD, safe control, and alarm strategies are
essential aspects.
Construction Risk Addresses the major hazards associated with Prior to Construction CONTRACTOR
Assessment construction and fabrication activities, including major and Fabrication
lifts and modifications of the FACILITY.
Hookup & Addresses the major hazards associated with hookup & Prior to Hookup CONTRACTOR
Commissioning Risk commissioning for the Project.
Assessment
Transportation and Addresses the risks associated with transportation of After completion of CONTRACTOR
Installation Risk equipment and facilities to the field location and execution plan and
Assessment installation. installation procedures;
Prior to transportation
and installation
SIMOPS Risk To assess the risk associated with concurrent activities Prior to SIMOPS CONTRACTOR
Assessment on the site activities
Revision 1 Page 202 of 407 Error! No text of specified style in document.


Loss Prevention P&ID Reviews CONTRACTOR process safety / Loss Prevention Upon issue of all P&ID CONTRACTOR
Activities to engineer to participate in all P&ID Review revisions
Support Risk Escape, Evacuation, Develop EER Plan to include the final design features In conjunction with fire CONTRACTOR
Management and Rescue (EER) and ensure the facility can be safely evacuated in all and explosion
Implementation Plan identified credible emergency scenarios; there will be assessments
adequate means of escape from the facility in each of
the identified scenarios where escape is required.
Fire and Explosion Hazard and Consequence Study to assist in the facility As part of detailed CONTRACTOR
Assessment layout, gas detection design basis, hazardous area level layout design
classification, and emergency response planning.
Ensures fire and explosion protection strategy has been
adequately implemented and will mitigate and control
credible fire scenarios.
Relief, Vent Systems, Third-party verification of the design of the relief, the Input to Detailed CONTRACTOR
and Blowdown blowdown, and the flare systems. Verification shall Design HAZOP
Verification include basis for the relief and blowdown layout and
hydraulic, radiation, and material selections. This
activity will be performed by a third-party approved by
COMPANY.
Intermediate Loss Perform a Loss Prevention Review of the 3D model During Detailed CONTRACTOR
Prevention Reviews proposed layout design to identify accessibility and Design
of the 3D Model maintainability issues to be resolved during detailed
design. The review should be performed on 30%, 60%, and 90%
3 separate reviews intermediate levels of definition, at 30%, 60%, and 90% 3D model completion
3D model completion
Occurs simultaneous to
Human Factors (HFs)
Intermediate Reviews
Detailed Layout Review of the design layout for EER, blast loading, and Input into final layout CONTRACTOR
Review safety system layouts


SIL Assignment and To ensure the SIL requirement of each of the SIS loops Input to Detailed CONTRACTOR
Verification is adequately defined and verified. Design HAZOP
Safety Plan Description of the location of emergency and safety After detailed layout CONTRACTOR
equipment on the facility. and evacuation
drawings completed
Dropped Object and Ensure equipment access and maintenance can be Prior to finalization of CONTRACTOR
Material Handling completed safely with certified lifting equipment while detailed structural
Study minimizing the risk of a dropped object onto safety design
critical equipment.
Hazardous Area Verifies that appropriately rated equipment is provided Input to detailed level CONTRACTOR
Classification in potentially hazardous areas. layout design
Compliance Review
Loss Prevention Review fabrication at site with COMPANY to check Prior to facilities CONTRACTOR
Survey at 50% compliance with Loss Prevention Standards on the leaving the fabrication
Mechanical Project. yard
Completion
Loss Prevention Review final installation at site with COMPANY to After onsite installation CONTRACTOR
Study at 90% check compliance with the Loss Prevention standards on of components
Mechanical the Project.
Completion
Emergency Response For credible/foreseeable emergency conditions, After major hazards CONTRACTOR
Plans and Procedures development of clear response plans that document and response strategies
responsibility, command and control, and emergency have been identified
contact number information. Such plans should identify
requirement and locations of emergency and safety
equipment on the facility and should utilize the guidance
provided from the Loss Prevention Studies regarding
potential fires and explosion and potential toxic gas
releases.


Human Factors HF Training of To ensure CONTRACTOR Design Personnel are aware During Early Detailed CONTRACTOR
Activities to COMPANY & of the HF requirements for the Project. Design Phase (trainer approved by
Support Risk CONTRACTOR COMPANY)
Management Design Personnel
Intermediate HF Perform HF Reviews of the 3D model, including review During Detailed CONTRACTOR
Reviews of the 3D of proposed layout design to identify accessibility and Design
Model maintainability issues to be resolved during Detailed
Design. The review should be performed on 30%, 60%, and 90%
3 separate reviews intermediate levels of definition, at 30%, 60%, and 90% 3D model completion
3D model completion
Occurs simultaneous to
Loss Prevention
Intermediate Reviews
HF Survey at 50% Survey HF compliance during construction During Construction CONTRACTOR
Mechanical
Completion
HF Survey at 90% Survey HF compliance during construction During Construction CONTRACTOR
Mechanical
Completion


15.3.1 CONTRACTOR's Risk Management Plan

CONTRACTOR shall use the Risk Management Plan Template, provided in the JOB
SPECIFICATION, to complete CONTRACTOR's Risk Management Plan.
15.3.2 CONTRACTOR's Risk Assessment Plan

1) CONTRACTOR's Risk Assessment Plan shall describe the following:
a) Formal risk assessments to be performed during Project execution, with the following
information:
Description of the method to be used for each assessment
List of the participants
The schedule with durations and the status of completed and future activities
2) Evaluation, resolution, and incorporation into the design of findings or any risk reduction actions
from previously conducted risk, Loss Prevention, and technical safety studies or assessments,
including Concept Design Risk Assessment, Design Risk Assessment, and Preliminary HAZOPS
3) Final HAZOPs based on the detailed design data (usually at a design freeze preceding
construction and fabrication)
4) Construction, loadout, transportation, and installation risk assessments
5) Other specified risk assessments, including but not limited to the following:
a) WORK SITE emergency preparedness and response risk assessments
b) WORK SITE health risk assessments
c) Regulatory and environmental risk assessments
d) Risk assessments required by JOB SPECIFICATION
15.3.2.1Conducting and Documenting a Risk

Assessment
1) CONTRACTOR shall set the date for risk assessment, hazard identification (HAZID), HAZOP,
or SIL studies and submit the proposed date for COMPANY approval. CONTRACTOR shall
coordinate timing of the Risk Assessment, HAZID, HAZOP, or SIL study based on Project
requirements, Risk Assessment Plans, ad hoc request, or Change Management requirement.
CONTRACTOR shall schedule and conduct risk assessments in advance of appropriate Project
milestones or activities to allow resolution of risk without schedule disruption.
2) CONTRACTOR shall submit the Risk Assessment Charter and Agenda for COMPANY approval.
3) CONTRACTOR shall nominate for COMPANY approval a Risk Assessment Leader or facilitator
and/or scribe resource as appropriate for the Risk Assessment, HAZID, HAZOP, or SIL study.
4) CONTRACTOR shall conduct risk assessment, HAZID, HAZOP, or SIL studies.
CONTRACTOR shall identify, analyze, and evaluate risks in accordance with defined
procedures, using appropriate methods for the activity or facility being addressed as defined in the
Risk Assessment Charter.
5) CONTRACTOR shall document the risk assessment and draft a final report to be reviewed by
Risk Assessment participants and COMPANY. This report will include the Risk Assessment
Charter, draft scenario sheets, and hazards identified.


15.3.2.2Management of Risk Assessment and

HAZOP Action Items
1) Results of risk assessments are to be evaluated by appropriate levels of Project management and
risk reduction measures are documented, and followed through to completion to reduce risks to
an acceptable level at a reasonable cost.
2) CONTRACTOR shall identify and assign a responsible lead to resolve each of the assessment or
study findings. The responsible person will develop action plans for each action item.
CONTRACTOR shall provide technical resources for risk assessment activities and for
stewarding risk action items to closure.
3) CONTRACTOR shall approve the action plans and then submit the action plans to COMPANY
for approval. The action plans shall be approved at an appropriate level of authority, including
Operations or Construction and Project Team, as outlined in COMPANY's Risk Management
Plan.
4) CONTRACTOR shall provide a Risk Management Summary report to COMPANY for approval.
5) CONTRACTOR shall record all action items into its risk register to ensure traceability and that
adequate reviews and updates have been undertaken. CONTRACTOR shall ensure the Risk
Action Items Tracking Register is kept up to date and shall describe the details of identification,
explanation, and the mitigation techniques. CONTRACTOR's Risk Action Items Tracking
Register shall comply with the following requirements:
a) Be exportable to Microsoft Excel
b) Meet minimum reporting requirements per the provided reporting templates in XXXX
c) Track approvals and authorizations
6) CONTRACTOR shall assemble closeout documentation for COMPANY to verify that all
documentation required for closeout is in place to ensure compliance with COMPANY’s Risk
Management Plan.
7) CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review a Risk Assessment Closeout Report for
each risk assessment. The reports are issued when all action items are complete and are approved
by COMPANY. The Risk Assessment Closeout Report identifies status and closeout for the
following purposes:
a) To obtain management support and awareness
b) To demonstrate that the risk acceptance criteria have been met
15.3.3 Management of Loss Prevention Studies Results

1) CONTRACTOR shall review all Loss Prevention studies (HAZID, SIL study, HF, and Loss
Prevention Model Review, etc.); derive observations, design recommendations, etc.; and propose
potential design instructions for COMPANY approval. COMPANY may also derive additional
design instructions from these studies and approve such instructions at COMPANY's discretion.
2) CONTRACTOR shall track to closure COMPANY-approved Loss Prevention design
instructions. These design instructions will be tracked on the attached template (XXX).
CONTRACTOR shall assign Project engineering personnel to work and monitor the design
instructions. CONTRACTOR shall assemble documentation for COMPANY verification and
approval of closure of Loss Prevention study recommendations.
15.4 Reports
1) CONTRACTOR shall submit the following reports, as a minimum, to COMPANY:


a) CONTRACTOR shall update on a monthly basis forecasted dates of existing and newly
proposed risk assessment activities/studies as well as the activities that have been completed
monthly.
b) CONTRACTOR shall use the COMPANY-provided standard templates (in Appendix FG of
Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES) to report and document risk assessments
and risk action item status.
c) Using the standard templates for roll-up reporting, CONTRACTOR shall submit the
following information, as a minimum, to COMPANY on a monthly basis:
i. Assessments and studies planned vs. completed
ii. Approval and completion status of action plans
iii. The number of risk assessments formally closed out
iv. The number of unresolved Action Plans
d) CONTRACTOR shall submit as part of its monthly report a list of assessments with proposed
dates.
e) CONTRACTOR shall include progress and description of risk management activities and
issues in the summary monthly report.


16. Safety
16.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will endeavor to meet the following safety objectives:
a) Achieve an injury-free and incident-free workplace
b) Promote a culture where "Safety is a Core Value"
c) Reinforce the message that safety shall never be compromised to achieve any other business
objectives
d) Work collaboratively with CONTRACTOR and Subcontractors to continually improve
safety culture, management systems, and performance through the use of structured
improvement initiatives
2) To achieve these safety objectives, COMPANY requires that all levels of CONTRACTOR and
subcontractor line management demonstrate safety leadership and that the WORK be planned and
executed using an effective and systematic approach (i.e., plan  do  assess  adjust).
This section of the Coordination Procedure must be read in conjunction with the General Terms
and Conditions, Scope of Work, Section D of the JOB SPECIFICATIONS, and NGER-ED-
BSPDS-000001 Minimum Safety Requirements for Executing Major Projects, in order to fully
understand COMPANY safety requirements and expectations.
COMPANY recognizes that CONTRACTOR and subcontractors have existing safety
management systems with established policies, processes, procedures, and work practices in
place. COMPANY supports their use where they meet the intent of this section, are fit for
purpose, and are demonstrated to be effective.
3) Nothing contained in this Section 16. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES, shall be
interpreted as enlarging the legal responsibilities of COMPANY to CONTRACTOR, creating any
legal responsibility to any other member of CONTRACTOR GROUP or to any third party, or
affecting the independent status of CONTRACTOR.

CONTRACTOR shall modify and/or further define its established policies, processes, procedures, and
work practices (or otherwise develop new policies, processes, procedures, and work practices) to
address scope-specific considerations in the following circumstances:
1) To satisfy the requirements of this section
2) Based on COMPANY feedback from the Gap Analysis and/or Cold Eyes Review described in
subsequent sections
3) Based on COMPANY feedback during the review of safety deliverables (e.g., Project Safety
Management Plan, WORK SITE Safety Plan) during planning of the WORK
4) Based on COMPANY feedback associated with implementation of safety deliverables (e.g.,
Project Safety Management Plan, WORK SITE Safety Plan) during execution of the WORK
16.2.1 Organizational Relationship

COMPANY intends to work collaboratively with CONTRACTOR, its subcontractors and lower tier
subcontractors to progress toward an injury-free and illness-free workplace. CONTRACTOR and its
subcontractors shall work with COMPANY in this capacity and shall support COMPANY's intention
to positively influence safety. COMPANY recognizes that


CONTRACTOR is responsible for managing safety aspects of the WORK and COMPANY's
oversight and coaching role shall not create an obligation on COMPANY and shall in no way relieve
CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors of their responsibilities for managing safety aspects of the
WORK.
Figure F17-1 provides an overview of the high level safety roles between COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR, and it subcontractors.
Figure F0-2: High-Level Safety Roles and Relationships among COMPANY, CONTRACTOR,
and Subcontractors
Direct Contractual Relationship

Company Project Focus
 Demonstrate leadership and
commitment to safety.
 Collaborate with Contractor
to develop and implement
Work Package Focus
improvement initiatives. Contractor Project
 Provide safety contract Level Team
language to Contractor.  Demonstrate leadership Work Site(s) Focus
 Review and endorse and commitment to safety.
Contractor Project Safety  Collaborate with Company Direct Contractual
Management Plan and and subcontractor(s) to Contractor Relationship
Contractor Work Site Safety develop and implement Site Level Team(s) [Note 1]
Plan(s). improvement initiatives.
 Provide oversight to  Demonstrate leadership
 Provide safety contract and commitment to safety.
implementation of Project language to
Safety Management Plan subcontractor(s) when not  Collaborate with Company,
and Work Site Safety Plans. Contractor project team,
self performing. Lower Tier
 Actively participate in Project and lower tier
 Develop, implement, and subcontractor(s) to develop Subcontractor(s)
Safety Management Plan execute Contractor Project
and Work Site Safety Plan and implement  Demonstrate leadership
Safety Management Plan. improvement initiatives.
activities. and commitment to safety.
 Execute the work in  Provide safety contract
 Coach Contractor to facilitate alignment with safety  Collaborate with Company
continuous improvement. language to lower tier and dominant onsite
contract language. subcontractor(s). organization (i.e.,
 Actively participate in  Develop and implement Contractor or other
Project Safety Work Site Safety Plan(s). subcontractor) to develop
Note 1 Management Plan and
 Execute the work in and implement
When Contractor does Work Site Safety Plan improvement initiatives.
activities. alignment with safety
not self perform and  Provide oversight to
contract language and the  Execute the work in
utilizes a subcontractor Work Site Safety Plan. alignment with safety
implementation of Work contract language and the
as the dominant onsite Site Safety Plan(s)  Actively participate in Work
Site Safety Plan activities. Work Site Safety Plan.
organization, the managed by Contractor
and Subcontractor.  Coach lower tier  Actively participate in Work
subcontractor is  Coach Contractor and subcontractor(s) to Site Safety Plan activities.
responsible for these subcontractor's site teams facilitate continuous
roles. to facilitate continuous improvement.
improvement.
16.3.1 Project Safety Management Plan

In accordance with the general requirements set forth in Section 1 of Section F, CONTRACTOR shall
submit its initial Project Safety Management Plan to COMPANY for review and comment.
CONTRACTOR’s Project Safety Management Plan shall describe how CONTRACTOR will manage
Project-level safety considerations across all WORK SITES managed by CONTRACTOR or its


subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall update the document to address COMPANY’s feedback before
issuing for use.
Sections 17.2 through 17.3.7 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES describe the
minimum Project-level safety requirements that CONTRACTOR shall address during the planning
and execution phases of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall incorporate these requirements into its
Project Safety Management Plan.
Safety requirements for major WORK SITES are described in Section 17.3.2. of Section F –
COORDINATION PROCEDURES. Safety requirements for other WORK SITES are described in
Section 17.3.5. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
1) Safety Leadership
CONTRACTOR shall work with COMPANY to mutually develop and implement an integrated
collection of safety leadership processes on the Project. The objective is to collaborate early and often
to achieve world class safety performance, which may require CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors
to implement safety improvement initiatives with support from COMPANY. The overall approach is
to create and maintain a high level of alignment between CONTRACTOR and COMPANY senior
and project management personnel through the systematic application of the safety leadership
processes described in this Section 17.3.1. For clarity, robust safety leadership from Project level
management is intended to supplement, but not replace, robust safety leadership from WORK SITE
management.
2) Safety Leadership Roadmap
CONTRACTOR shall develop and update quarterly a Safety Leadership Roadmap to describe how
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY will implement the various safety leadership processes, as well as
any Project-specific improvement initiatives resulting from the implementation of such processes.
The Safety Leadership Roadmap supplements, but does not replace, the Project Safety Management
Plan.
CONTRACTOR shall initially submit a draft Safety Leadership Roadmap to COMPANY with its
Technical Proposal.
The draft Safety Leadership Roadmap shall reflect any alternative proposals that CONTRACTOR
would like COMPANY to consider regarding scope or sequencing. CONTRACTOR shall describe
the rationale for any alternative proposals. COMPANY shall review and approve the draft Safety
Leadership Roadmap after CONTRACT AWARD.
The approved Safety Leadership Roadmap shall be stewarded by the COMPANY-sponsored Safety
and Health Leadership Team utilized on the Project.
3) Safety and Health Leadership Team
CONTRACTOR shall actively participate in a Project-level Safety and Health Leadership Team
comprising senior project management and senior project safety personnel from COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR, and selected major subcontractors.
CONTRACTOR shall work together with COMPANY to develop a charter for the team. The Safety
and Health Leadership Team meetings will serve as a forum to further define, implement, and steward
many of the safety leadership processes described in this section.
Refer to Section 4.8 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001 to review specific requirements for Safety and
Health Teams.
CONTRACTOR shall plan on attending such meetings on a monthly basis.
4) Gap Analysis


COMPANY shall perform a Gap Analysis on CONTRACTOR’s (and selected major subcontractors’)
existing safety management system(s), which shall be submitted to COMPANY immediately
following CONTRACT AWARD.
The focus will be verification of the existence of written policies, procedures, processes, and work
practices deemed critical to success.
During the Safety Leadership Kickoff Workshop (described in Section 17.3.1, #6 of Section F –
COORDINATION PROCEDURES), CONTRACTOR and COMPANY shall use the results of the
Gap Analysis to identify mutually agreed upon safety improvement initiatives to be implemented.
5) Cold Eyes Review
To supplement the Gap Analysis, COMPANY may decide to perform a Cold Eyes Review (CER) of
CONTRACTOR’s (and selected major subcontractors’) existing safety management system(s) in
order to determine the effectiveness of implementation of the various policies, processes, procedures,
and work practices. A CER is a comprehensive, week-long safety assessment that utilizes personal
interviews, field observations, and documentation reviews to evaluate aspects related to culture,
management systems, and performance. COMPANY may request CONTRACTOR to nominate
personnel to participate in the CERs.
If performed immediately after CONTRACT award, the CER results will be evaluated at the Safety
Leadership Kickoff Workshop (in conjunction with the Gap Analysis) and any resulting safety
improvement initiatives shall be incorporated into the Safety Leadership Roadmap.
If performed during execution of the WORK, the CER results will be evaluated by the following
teams, and any resulting safety improvement initiatives shall be incorporated into the Safety
Leadership Roadmap:
a) Safety and Health Leadership Team
b) Project level Safety and Health Team
c) WORK SITE Safety and Health Team
6) Safety Leadership Kickoff Workshop
After CONTRACT award and performance of the Gap Analysis and CER (if performed),
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall mutually conduct a two-day Safety Leadership Kickoff
Workshop attended by COMPANY and CONTRACTOR project sponsors, senior project
management, senior safety personnel, and key personnel from selected major subcontractors. The
objectives of the workshop include:
a) Review leadership principles and the safety leadership processes included in the draft Safety
Leadership Roadmap
b) Define the Project safety vision, mission, and guiding principles
c) Review results of the Gap Analyses and (if performed) CERs
d) Agree upon Project safety improvement initiatives
e) Discuss success criteria for safety and how progress will be monitored
f) Discuss communication of expectations to others
g) Finalize the draft Safety Leadership Roadmap
When feasible, COMPANY and CONTRACTOR senior management shall solicit input on
improvement initiatives from COMPANY and CONTRACTOR WORK SITE management before
finalization to ensure buy-in and alignment.
7) Safety Leadership and Cultural Diagnostic Surveys


CONTRACTOR (supported by COMPANY or COMPANY-provided consultant) shall participate in

various types of surveys to assess CONTRACTOR’s safety culture and CONTRACTOR’s safety
leadership practices for various levels of CONTRACTOR line management personnel.
Safety culture assessments will be performed after CONTRACT award with a follow-up survey
approximately one year later using a subset of CONTRACTOR’s workforce. CONTRACTOR should
plan on participation from approximately 50 personnel.
CONTRACTOR shall nominate and COMPANY shall endorse the appropriate personnel (including
selected major subcontractors) to participate in safety leadership surveys. These safety leadership
surveys will be performed prior to the Safety Leadership Training described in Section 17.3.1. no. 8
of the COORDINATION PROCEDURES. The consolidated results of CONTRACTOR’s safety
leadership surveys will be reviewed during Safety Leadership Training. Individual safety leadership
coaching sessions will be performed after Safety Leadership Training.
8) Safety Leadership Training
CONTRACTOR shall participate in Safety Leadership Training facilitated by COMPANY or a
COMPANY provided consultant.
CONTRACTOR shall nominate and COMPANY shall endorse the appropriate personnel (including
selected major subcontractors) to participate in the Safety Leadership Training sessions.
At minimum, CONTRACTOR shall plan on participation from Project Sponsor, Project Manager,
Project Manager’s direct reports, WORK SITE Managers, WORK SITE Managers’ direct reports, and
senior SHE&S personnel.
The number of Safety Leadership Training sessions needed to ensure participation from nominated
participants shall be mutually agreed upon by CONTRACTOR and COMPANY.
For planning purposes, CONTRACTOR shall assume 25 hours of Safety Leadership Training for
each participating manager, supervisor, and SSHE representative.
9) Personal Safety Plans
Those personnel who participate in the Safety Leadership Surveys shall prepare annual Personal
Safety Plans, which will document proactive personal safety initiatives that each individual plans to
perform to address individual feedback obtained during the Safety Leadership Surveys.
Progress on Personal Safety Plans shall be stewarded by the appropriate Safety and Health Team on a
quarterly basis.
10) Critical Behavior Analysis
CONTRACTOR shall work with COMPANY or a COMPANY provided consultant to assist
CONTRACTOR in a review of past incidents.
The purpose of this review is to acquire an understanding of what behaviors are causing incidents and
what forces are influencing workers as they perform their daily jobs.
The top four to five critical behaviors that lead to the majority of incidents shall be documented and
shall be utilized as focus areas for an Observation & Intervention (O&I) process to be used at each
WORK SITE.
The O&I process will enable trained observers to identify and understand those behaviors which
require intervention as well as those that deserve positive reinforcement.
All WORK SITE personnel, including subcontractor personnel, will receive instruction on the O&I
process.
Refer to Section 17.3.2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
11) Safety Communications


CONTRACTOR shall describe the structured means utilized to communicate and frequently reinforce
COMPANY's and CONTRACTOR's safety expectations, including but not limited to:
a) Participating in Safety Meetings
b) Participating in Safety and Health Teams
c) Performing Safety Walkthroughs
d) Communicating expectations during Safety and Health Orientations
e) Participating in Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings
CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings in accordance with the
requirements of Section 4.9 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall participate in COMPANY facilitated Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings.
No later than 60 calendar days after CONTRACT award, CONTRACTOR shall facilitate a Project
Safety and Health Kickoff Meeting to communicate safety expectations to its entire Project level
team.
12) Safety and Health Teams
CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Teams in accordance with the requirements of
Section 4.8 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with COMPANY to develop a Safety and Health
Governance Model using Figure F17-2 as a guide that identifies the various types of multi-tier Safety
and Health Teams that will be utilized on the Project and how such teams will interface with each
other. The Safety and Health Governance Model shall consider the size, complexity, duration,
organizational structure, region, and contracting strategy of the WORK, as well as the maturity level
of CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors.
Figure F17-2: Safety and Health Governance Model


As described in Section 17.4.1.2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES, senior project

management and senior project safety and health personnel from CONTRACTOR and selected major
subcontractors shall participate in COMPANY’s Safety and Health Leadership Team for the Project.
This team shall include representatives from CONTRACTOR as well as other COMPANY
contractors.
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Project level Safety and Health Team covering all WORK SITES
managed by CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors. CONTRACTOR shall facilitate such meetings on
a monthly basis at minimum during the planning and execution phases of the WORK.


Requirements for WORK SITE Safety and Health Teams and Worker Safety and Health Teams are
included in Section 17.5.1.3 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
13) Safety Staffing
CONTRACTOR shall provide one qualified, full-time, and dedicated Project-level Safety Manager to
provide oversight for Project-level safety considerations throughout the planning and execution
phases of the WORK. In accordance with Article 4 of the Principal Document, CONTRACTOR’s
Safety Manager is a key position and shall be staffed immediately upon CONTRACT award with a
COMPANY-approved candidate.
Upon request of CONTRACTOR and with COMPANY approval, the scope of CONTRACTOR
Safety Manager’s responsibilities may be broadened to cover related disciplines (e.g. health,
environmental, security) if:
a) As a minimum, the nominated candidate shall possess a good first degree in Engineering OR the
Sciences in addition to NEBOSH International Diploma Certificate or its equivalent (Certified
Safety Professional) with not less than 15 years relevant experience.
b) The candidate has the knowledge, skills, and experience to effectively manage such disciplines
c) Iii) Specialist staff are sourced either full-time or part-time (as appropriate) to provide the
nominated candidate with technical support and the required levels of manpower to provide
adequate management of the related disciplines
d) CONTRACTOR shall provide and describe the following in its Project Safety Management Plan:
e) Project-level safety organization chart
f) Project-specific roles and responsibilities for CONTRACTOR Project-level staff (e.g. managers,
supervisors, safety advisors)
14) Safety and Health Training
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Safety and Health Training process in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall provide a Project-level Safety and Health Training Plan to COMPANY for
review and endorsement no later than 60 calendar days after CONTRACT award. This plan shall
broadly describe any Project-specific training courses that will be required or otherwise provided to
CONTRACTOR and subcontractor personnel (including expatriates, home country nationals, and
other-country nationals) to assure they have the knowledge and skills to perform their jobs safely.
CONTRACTOR's Project-level Safety and Health Training Plan shall specifically include Safety
Leadership Training for managers and supervisors as described in Section 17.4.1.7 of Section F –
COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
15) Safety and Health Orientation
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Safety and Health Orientation process in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall perform Project level Safety and Health Orientations to ensure that all
personnel supporting planning and execution of the WORK are adequately familiarized with
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR safety and health requirements and expectations when they
mobilize.
CONTRACTOR shall perform several types of Project-level Safety and Health Orientations
specifically customized for different audiences including the following:
a. Management, coordinators, and supervisors
b. Workers


c. Safety and Health Advisors

d. Visitors
CONTRACTOR management representatives are encouraged to attend Project-level Safety and
Health Orientations in order to demonstrate their leadership and commitment.
16) Subcontractor Management
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Subcontractor Management process in accordance with the
Where CONTRACTOR utilizes a subcontractor to manage a WORK SITE, CONTRACTOR shall
develop and implement a written subcontractor safety and health mitigation plans which is endorsed
by COMPANY when:
a) CONTRACTOR identifies substantial opportunities for improvement during the subcontractor
evaluation phase that could impact a proposed subcontractor’s ability to satisfy CONTRACTOR
and COMPANY requirements and expectations
b) A subcontractor is not satisfying CONTRACTOR and/or COMPANY safety and health
expectations and requirements during execution of the WORK
17) Emergency Preparedness and Response
CONTRACTOR shall implement Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan(s) in accordance with
the requirements of Section 4.4 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
Upon request of COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall develop a Project-level Emergency Preparedness
and Response Plan in order to effectively bridge its WORK SITE Emergency Preparedness and
Response Plan(s) into CONTRACTOR’s corporate or regional business unit’s Emergency
Preparedness and Response Plan. CONTRACTOR shall submit the document to COMPANY for
review and endorsement no later than 60 calendar days after CONTRACT award.
Where COMPANY or its production affiliate has a regional Emergency Preparedness and Response
Plan in place that will cover activities associated with the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall develop a
Project-level Emergency Preparedness and Response Bridging Document upon request of
COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall provide for COMPANY review and endorsement a structured program of
Project level simulations, drills, and exercises to be performed during the Project.
18) Incident Management

CONTRACTOR shall implement an Incident Management process in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all information generated by the WORK SITE Incident
Management process is effectively communicated to the appropriate CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY Project-level personnel.
CONTRACTOR Project-level personnel shall provide broad oversight of the WORK SITE Incident
Management process to ensure effectiveness.
CONTRACTOR shall make available the appropriate Project-level personnel (e.g., line managers,
safety advisors, technical specialists) to support the WORK SITE Incident Management process when
their engagement is required.


At its sole discretion COMPANY reserves the right to provide Project-level personnel (e.g., line
managers, safety advisors, technical specialists) to support the WORK SITE Incident Management
process.
CONTRACTOR shall communicate the status of corrective actions to COMPANY Project-level
personnel on a weekly basis until closure.
CONTRACTOR shall share learnings with COMPANY Project-level personnel through the use of an
SSHE Alert system.
19) SSHE Performance Measurement and Reporting
CONTRACTOR shall measure and report leading and trailing SSHE performance indicators in
accordance with the requirements of Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall utilize Safety and Health Teams as the primary forums for stewarding SSHE
performance indicators. The Project-level Safety and Health Team shall develop their own safety and
health leading performance indicators to support the leadership activities and desired behaviors
required to adequately support the WORK SITES. These leading performance indicators shall be
developed in alignment with the Project Safety and Health Team’s charter objectives.
In addition to the trailing SSHE performance indicators described in Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-
BSPDS-000001, CONTRACTOR shall work with COMPANY to develop and steward Project-level
leading SSHE performance indicators. Such indicators should supplement, but not replace, the
leading SSHE performance indicators utilized at the WORK SITES. CONTRACTOR shall measure,
consolidate, and report Project-level leading SSHE performance indicators to COMPANY not later
than three calendar days after the close of the month.
In addition to the SSHE performance indicators described in Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-
000001, CONTRACTOR shall implement the following leading and trailing SSHE performance
indicators:
a) Safety Leadership (Training and Workshops)
b) Hazard Management (Job Safety Analysis and Personal Risk Assessment)
c) O&I
d) Near Miss and Hazard Reporting
e) Additional leading indicators for consideration include:
f) Number of Management Safety Walkthroughs Performed
g) Average Housekeeping Assessment Score
h) Average Quality of Job Safety Analyses (JSAs) Performed
i) Number of Tool Box Talks Performed
j) Average turn-around time to address Reported Unsafe Conditions
Additional considerations for leading indicators are as follow:
a) Will be WORK SITE specific.
b) May focus on qualitative and/or quantitative measures.
c) Should evolve over time as cultures, Systems, and Processes mature.
d) Provide measurement on key focus areas requiring improvement.
e) Attempting to steward too many leading indicators may be ineffective.


CONTRACTOR shall set aggressive yet attainable targets for Project-level leading SSHE
performance indicators. CONTRACTOR shall evaluate Project-level leading SSHE performance
indicator trends against the established targets on a monthly basis as a minimum.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and steward structured action plans to address Project-level leading
SSHE performance indicator trends that are not meeting established targets. CONTRACTOR shall
communicate Project-level leading SSHE performance indicator trends to Project-level personnel on a
monthly basis at minimum.
20) Safety and Health Assessments and Audits
CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Assessments and Audits in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall provide a Project-level Safety and Health Assessment and Audit Plan to
COMPANY for review and endorsement no later than 90 calendar days after CONTRACT award.
CONTRACTOR shall provide a Charter for each Safety and Health Assessment and Audit to
COMPANY for review and endorsement.
21) Lessons Learned and Best Practices
CONTRACTOR shall facilitate a Project-level workshop after CONTRACT award in order to capture
and evaluate lessons learned and best practices from previous projects and apply them into the safety
planning process. COMPANY shall participate at its sole discretion.
CONTRACTOR shall capture, evaluate, and apply as appropriate those Project-level lessons learned
and best practices that are identified throughout execution of the WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall facilitate a Project-level workshop no later than sixty days after completion of
the WORK in order to capture lessons learned and best practices associated with the Project.
COMPANY shall participate at its sole discretion. CONTRACTOR shall include the lessons learned
and best practices in the Project-level Final Safety Report described in Section 17.4.13 of Section F –
22) Final Report
CONTRACTOR shall develop a Final Safety Report in accordance with the requirements of Section
4.37 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall forward a Project-level Final Safety Report to COMPANY no later than 90
calendar days after the COMPLETION of the WORK.
16.3.2 WORK SITE Safety Plans
CONTRACTOR shall plan and execute WORK performed at major WORK SITES as well as other
major work scopes and in accordance with the safety requirements described in Section 16.3.2 of
i. Safety requirements for Major WORK SITES

For each major WORK SITE, CONTRACTOR shall develop a WORK SITE Safety Plan and provide
to COMPANY for review and comment in accordance with the general requirements set forth in
Section 1 of Section F. CONTRACTOR shall update the document to address COMPANY’s
feedback before issuing for use.
If approved by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR’s WORK SITE Safety Plan may cover major work
scopes that are located outside of the boundaries of a particular WORK SITE when one
CONTRACTOR team manages all of the work scope in a particular geographic area.


Sections 16.3.2. through 16.3.5. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES describe the

minimum WORK SITE-level safety requirements that CONTRACTOR shall address during the
planning and execution phases of the WORK and CONTRACTOR shall incorporate these
requirements into its WORK SITE Safety Plan.
If CONTRACTOR subcontracts specific WORK to a subcontractor, the subcontractor shall be
responsible for meeting the requirements of this section. COMPANY fully expects CONTRACTOR
to be actively engaged in managing and providing effective and continuous oversight of the WORK
whether CONTRACTOR performs the WORK or whether CONTRACTOR subcontracts the WORK
to a subcontractor.
ii. Safety Leadership
CONTRACTOR shall describe the structured means that WORK SITE line management will utilize
in order to demonstrate its leadership and commitment to safety, including, but not limited to:
a) Participating in Safety and Health Teams
b) Participating in Safety Leadership and Cultural Diagnostic Surveys
c) Participating in Safety Leadership Training sessions
d) Developing Personal Safety Plans
e) Participating in Safety Meetings
f) Performing Safety Walkthroughs
g) Communicating expectations during Safety and Health Orientations
h) Participating in Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings
i) Participating in Observation & Intervention (O&I) process
j) Participating in incident investigations
k) Participating in Safety and Health Assessments and Audits
l) Stewarding implementation of improvement initiatives
m) Stewarding action plans to improve SSHE performance indicators
iii. Communication of Safety Expectations
CONTRACTOR shall describe the structured means utilized to communicate and frequently reinforce
COMPANY's and CONTRACTOR's safety expectations to all personnel at each WORK SITE,
including but not limited to:
a) Participating in Safety Meetings
b) Participating in Safety and Health Teams
c) Performing Safety Walkthroughs
d) Communicating expectations during Safety and Health Orientations
e) Participating in Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings
CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Kickoff Meetings in accordance with the
Upon commencement of the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall facilitate WORK SITE Safety and Health
Kickoff Meetings to communicate safety expectations to its entire workforce. Multiple meetings shall
be utilized as necessary to accommodate attendance by all personnel.
iv. Safety and Health Teams


CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Teams in accordance with the requirements of
Section 4.8 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall implement a WORK SITE Safety and Health Team comprised of WORK SITE
line management and safety and health advisors at each WORK SITE. CONTRACTOR shall
facilitate such meetings on a monthly basis as a minimum during the execution phase of the WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Worker Safety and Health Team at each WORK SITE to
maximize worker participation and gain valuable worker insight. CONTRACTOR shall facilitate
such meetings on a monthly basis as a minimum during the execution phase of the WORK. Workers
representing a cross-section of the workforce shall be selected based on being recognized as a safety
role model, having a positive attitude, being a leader, their experience level, and their dedication to
safety and health.
v. Safety Staffing
CONTRACTOR shall provide one qualified, full-time, and dedicated WORK SITE Safety Manager
for each major WORK SITE. Unless approved by COMPANY, such positions are required even if a
subcontractor provides a similar position at a WORK SITE managed by the subcontractor. Positions
will be filled no later than 60 calendar days prior to commencement of the WORK and will remain in
place until completion of the WORK.
Upon request of CONTRACTOR and with COMPANY approval, the scope of CONTRACTOR
WORK SITE Safety Manager’s responsibilities may be broadened to cover related disciplines (e.g.,
health, environmental, security) if:
a) As a minimum, the nominated candidate shall possess a good first degree in Engineering OR the
Sciences in addition to NEBOSH International Diploma Certificate or its equivalent (Certified
Safety Professional) with not less than 15 years relevant experience
b) The candidate has the knowledge, skills, and experience to effectively manage such disciplines
c) Specialist staff are sourced either full-time or part-time (as appropriate) to provide the nominated
candidate with technical support and the required levels of manpower to provide adequate
management of the related disciplines
CONTRACTOR shall provide an adequate number of qualified, full-time, and dedicated WORK
SITE Safety Advisors during execution of the WORK. Unless approved by COMPANY,
CONTRACTOR will provide at least one WORK SITE Safety Advisor for a maximum of 70
workers.
CONTRACTOR shall describe its WORK SITE Safety Management organization in its WORK SITE
Safety Plan, including the following:
a) A WORK SITE level safety organization chart
b) Project-specific roles and responsibilities for CONTRACTOR WORK SITE staff (e.g. managers,
supervisors, safety advisors).
vi. Safety and Health Training
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Safety and Health Training process in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall provide a WORK SITE Safety and Health Training Plan to COMPANY for
review and endorsement no later than 90 calendar days prior to the commencement of WORK. This
plan shall describe in detail any Project-specific training courses that will be required or otherwise
provided to CONTRACTOR and subcontractor personnel (including expatriates, home country
nationals, and other-country nationals) to assure they have the knowledge and skills to perform their
jobs safely.


CONTRACTOR's WORK SITE Safety and Health Training Plan shall specifically include Safety
Leadership Training for managers and supervisors as described in Section 17.3.1.(8) of Section F –
vii. Safety and Health Orientation
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Safety and Health Orientation process in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall perform WORK SITE Safety and Health Orientations to ensure that all
personnel supporting planning and execution of the WORK are adequately familiarized with the
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR safety and health requirements and expectations when they
mobilize.
CONTRACTOR shall perform several types of WORK SITE Safety and Health Orientations
specifically customized for different audiences including the following:
a) Management, coordinators, and supervisors
b) Workers
c) Safety and Health Advisors
d) Visitors
CONTRACTOR management is encouraged to attend WORK SITE Safety and Health Orientations in
order to demonstrate their leadership and commitment.
viii. Subcontractor Management
CONTRACTOR shall implement a Subcontractor Management process in accordance with the
Where CONTRACTOR utilizes lower tier subcontractors at the WORK SITE, CONTRACTOR shall
develop and implement a written subcontractor safety mitigation plan endorsed by COMPANY when:
a) CONTRACTOR identifies substantial opportunities for improvement during the subcontractor
evaluation phase that could impact a proposed subcontractor’s ability to satisfy CONTRACTOR
and COMPANY requirements and expectations
b) A subcontractor is not satisfying CONTRACTOR and/or COMPANY safety expectations and
requirements during execution of the WORK
ix. Emergency Preparedness and Response
As required by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall develop an Emergency Preparedness and
Response Plan for each WORK SITE for which it is responsible for managing in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall submit WORK SITE Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan(s) to
COMPANY for review and endorsement not later than 90 calendar days prior to commencement of
the WORK.
Where COMPANY or its production affiliate has a regional Emergency Preparedness and Response
Plan in place that will cover activities associated with the WORK, CONTRACTOR shall develop a
WORK SITE level Emergency Preparedness and Response Bridging Document upon request by
COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall provide for COMPANY review and endorsement a structured program of
WORK SITE level simulations, drills, and exercises to be performed for each WORK SITE.
x. Incident Management Requirements


CONTRACTOR shall implement an Incident Management process in accordance with the

CONTRACTOR line management, with the support of Safety Advisors, is responsible for
implementing the Incident Management process.
CONTRACTOR shall investigate CONTRACTOR incidents using their own internal incident
investigation procedures to the extent that it satisfies COMPANY requirements.
The organization responsible for recording the incident in its regulatory incident register (e.g. OSHA
300 Log or equivalent) is responsible for performing the incident investigation.
COMPANY reserves the right to participate in CONTRACTOR incident investigations at its sole
discretion.
COMPANY reserves the right to provide a COMPANY escort to provide assistance and/or oversight
during the CONTRACTOR case management process.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY written Fitness for Duty certificates (with no
confidential information) from the attending medical care provider prior to the injured or ill persons
returning to WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall communicate the status of corrective actions to COMPANY on a weekly basis
until closure.
CONTRACTOR shall share learnings with COMPANY through an SSHE Alert system.
xxi. Safety, Health, Environmental, & Security Performance Measurement, & Reporting
CONTRACTOR shall measure and report leading and trailing SSHE performance indicators in
accordance with the requirements of Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
CONTRACTOR shall develop and report WORK SITE-specific leading SSHE performance
indicators to indicate the effectiveness of its most critical incident prevention processes. At minimum,
CONTRACTOR shall implement safety performance indicators related to:
a) Safety Leadership (Training and Workshops)
b) Hazard Management (Job Safety Analysis and Personal Risk Assessment)
c) Observation & Intervention (O&I)
d) Near Miss and Hazard Reporting
Additional leading indicators for consideration include:
a) Number of Management Safety Walkthroughs Performed
b) Average Housekeeping Assessment Score
c) Average Quality of Job Safety Analysis (JSAs) Performed
d) Number of Tool Box Talks Performed
e) Average turn-around time to address Reported Unsafe Conditions
Additional considerations for leading indicators are as follow:
a) Will be WORK SITE specific.
b) May focus on qualitative and/or quantitative measures.
c) Should evolve over time as cultures, Systems, and Processes mature.
d) Provide measurement on key focus areas requiring improvement.
e) Attempting to steward too many leading indicators may be ineffective.


CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with COMPANY to identify any additional WORK SITE
leading SSHE performance indicators to be monitored. CONTRACTOR shall set aggressive yet
attainable targets for WORK SITE leading SSHE performance indicators. CONTRACTOR shall
measure, consolidate, and report WORK SITE level leading SSHE performance indicators to
COMPANY no later than three calendar days after the close of the month. CONTRACTOR shall
evaluate leading SSHE performance indicator trends against the established targets on a monthly basis
at minimum. CONTRACTOR shall develop and steward structured action plans to address leading
SSHE performance indicator trends that are not meeting established targets. CONTRACTOR shall
communicate leading SSHE performance indicator trends to the workforce on a monthly basis at
minimum.
xxii. Safety and Health Assessments and Audits
CONTRACTOR shall implement Safety and Health Assessments and Audits in accordance with the
CONTRACTOR shall provide a WORK SITE Safety and Health Assessment and Audit Plan to
COMPANY for review and endorsement not later than 30 calendar days prior to commencement of
the WORK at each WORK SITE.
CONTRACTOR shall perform a structured safety and health readiness review at each WORK SITE
to confirm that all WORK SITE safety and health deliverables have been developed and that all safety
and health planning activities have been completed prior to commencement of the WORK (or prior to
asset handover or transition to another project phase). CONTRACTOR shall immediately inform
COMPANY and take corrective action when deviations from established requirements and
expectations are identified. COMPANY reserves the right to refuse commencement of the WORK
until the major deviations are resolved.
xxiii. Alcohol and Drug Policy Requirements
CONTRACTOR shall comply with COMPANY’s Alcohol and Drug Policy requirements described in
xxiv. Lessons Learned and Best Practices
CONTRACTOR shall facilitate a WORK SITE-level workshop no later than 90 calendar days from
commencement of the WORK to capture and evaluate lessons learned and best practices from
previous projects and apply them into the safety planning process. COMPANY shall participate at its
sole discretion.
CONTRACTOR shall capture, evaluate, and apply as appropriate those WORK SITE lessons learned
and best practices that are identified throughout execution of the WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall facilitate a WORK SITE-level workshop no later than 30 days after completion
of the WORK in order to capture lessons learned and best practices. COMPANY shall participate at
its sole discretion. CONTRACTOR shall include the lessons learned and best practices in the WORK
SITE Final Safety Report described in Section 16.3.4 of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES.
16.3.3. Additional Requirements to be addressed in WORK SITE Safety Plans

CONTRACTOR shall incorporate the requirements referenced in Table F17-1 into its WORK SITE
Safety Plan.
Table F16-1: Additional requirements to be addressed in WORK SITE Safety Plans


Additional Requirements
Basic Requirements (see section (see Section 17.3.3 of Section
Topic
of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001) F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES
Pre-Shift Safety Meeting 4.10
Task Based Hazard Analysis 4.11
Personal Risk Assessment 4.12
Observation and Intervention 4.13
Safety Walkthrough 4.14
Safety Inspections 4.15 ---
Near Miss and Hazard 4.16
Reporting
Short Service Employee 4.17
Safety Recognition 4.18
Permit to Work 4.19
Hot Work 4.20 ---
Energy Control 4.21
Confined Space Entry 4.22 ---
Excavation 4.23 ---
Personal Protective 4.24
Equipment
Housekeeping 4.25 ---
Working at Heights 4.26 ---
Scaffolding 4.27 ---
Mechanized Lifting and 4.28 ---
Rigging Apparatus
Tools and Equipment 4.29 ---
Manual Lifting 4.30 ---
Electrical 4.31 ---
Fire Prevention 4.32 ---
Pressure 4.33 ---
Journey Management 4.34
Pre-shift Safety Meeting

CONTRACTOR WORKSITE management will actively participate in Pre-shift Safety Meetings to
monitor execution and visibly demonstrate their commitment to safety to the workforce.


Task-Based Hazard Analysis

CONTRACTOR WORK SITE line management shall actively participate in the Job Safety Analysis
(JSA) or equivalent process to monitor execution and visibly demonstrate their commitment to safety
to the workforce.
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively to identify those critical and/or non-
routine tasks that require JSAs (or equivalent) prior to the commencement of WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall review and update JSAs (or equivalent) to capture learnings identified during
execution of the WORK.
CONTRACTOR shall periodically assess the effectiveness of the JSA (or equivalent) process using
quantitative and qualitative techniques as part of a leading safety performance indicators process.
CONTRACTOR shall report JSA leading safety performance indicator metrics to COMPANY in
accordance with the Safety Performance Measurement and Reporting requirements of Section 4.6 of
NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
Personal Risk Assessment
COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall WORK collaboratively to promote the PRA process and
integrate it into the overall pre-task safety planning process.
CONTRACTOR line management shall participate and encourage participation in the PRA process
through structured motivation programs.
Observation and Intervention

CONTRACTOR WORK SITE line management will actively participate in the O&I process to
visibly demonstrate their commitment to safety to the workforce.
CONTRACTOR shall implement an O&I process, which is consistent with the safety maturity level
of CONTRACTOR and its workforce. If CONTRACTOR is developing and implementing an O&I
process to satisfy the requirements of this section, CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with
COMPANY to identify the most appropriate level of implementation of the O&I process. The level
of implementation determines who the observers will be, as follows:
a) Level 1: Observers are Managers and Safety Advisors (least mature)
b) Level 2: Observers are Supervisors
c) Level 3: Observers are workers (most mature)
CONTRACTOR shall periodically assess the effectiveness of the O&I process using quantitative and
qualitative techniques as part of a leading safety performance indicators process. CONTRACTOR
shall report O&I leading safety performance indicator metrics to COMPANY in accordance with the
Safety Performance Measurement and Reporting requirements of Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-
000001.
Safety Walkthroughs
CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with COMPANY to integrate the use of Safety
Walkthroughs into the various Safety and Health Teams utilized on the Project.
The COMPANY-sponsored Safety and Health Leadership Team shall perform at least one Safety
Walkthrough at a WORK SITE each quarter.
The Project Safety and Health Team shall perform at least two Safety Walkthroughs at a WORK
SITE each month.
The WORK SITE Safety and Health Team shall perform at least one Safety Walkthrough each week.
The Worker Safety and Health Team shall perform at least four Safety Walkthroughs each week.


Near Miss and Hazard Reporting

CONTRACTOR line management shall participate and encourage participation in the Near Miss and
Hazard Reporting process through structured motivation programs.
CONTRACTOR shall periodically assess the effectiveness of the Near Miss and Hazard Reporting
process using quantitative and qualitative techniques as part of a leading safety performance
indicators process. CONTRACTOR shall report Near Miss and Hazard Reporting leading safety
performance indicator metrics to COMPANY in accordance with the Safety Performance
Measurement and Reporting requirements of Section 4.6 of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001.
Short Service Employee

CONTRACTOR shall utilize Short Service Employee (SSE) threshold criteria of not greater than 15
percent unless otherwise approved by COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall report the average ratio of SSEs relative to the total number of personnel at the
WORK SITE to COMPANY on a monthly basis.
Safety Recognition
CONTRACTOR shall collaborate with COMPANY to define specific criteria to serve as the basis for
recognizing workers.
Permit to Work
When serving as the dominant WORK SITE organization, CONTRACTOR shall implement a Permit
to Work (PTW) system. When not serving as the dominant WORK SITE organization,
CONTRACTOR shall perform its WORK under the PTW system implemented by the dominant
WORK SITE organization.
a) For Greenfield WORK areas, CONTRACTOR shall implement CONTRACTOR’s PTW
system.
b) For Facilities Startup, CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with COMPANY to
determine the most appropriate milestone for transition from CONTRACTOR’s PTW system
to COMPANY’s PTW system prior to start-up of a facility. As a minimum, the transition
milestone shall not be later than two to three weeks prior to introduction of process
hydrocarbons into the facility. CONTRACTOR should recognize (and plan accordingly) that
WORK performed under COMPANY’s PTW system shall be performed under more stringent
administrative and technical controls relative to WORK performed under CONTRACTOR’s
PTW system utilized in a greenfield WORK area.
c) For brownfield WORK areas, CONTRACTOR shall perform its WORK under COMPANY’s
or COMPANY co-venture partner’s PTW system.
d) For active drilling locations, CONTRACTOR shall perform its WORK under drilling
contractor’s PTW system.
Energy Control
CONTRACTOR shall implement CONTRACTOR’s Energy Control procedure for WORK performed
on plant and equipment which are owned or controlled by CONTRACTOR. CONTRACTOR shall
implement COMPANY’s Energy Control procedure for WORK performed on plant and equipment
owned or controlled by COMPANY.


Personal Protective Equipment

CONTRACTOR shall provide all required personal protective equipment (PPE; basic and specialty)
to its personnel. CONTRACTORS shall also provide all required PPE to their subcontractors,
vendors, and visitors or shall ensure that all subcontractors, vendors, and visitors provide their own
PPE. CONTRACTOR shall provide access to specialty PPE to COMPANY personnel, as required.
For WORK performed on COMPANY premises, CONTRACTOR shall comply with the minimum
PPE requirements included in the COMPANY Safety Manual.
Journey Management and Fleet Management

CONTRACTOR shall develop a Journey Management Plan when motor vehicles and construction
equipment are used to support the work scope between multiple WORK SITES. CONTRACTOR
shall provide the Journey Management Plan to COMPANY for review and endorsement no later than
60 days prior to commencement of the WORK.
16.3.4 WORK SITE Final Safety Report

CONTRACTOR shall develop a WORK SITE-level Final Safety Report for each WORK SITE and
forward to COMPANY no later than 60 calendar days after the COMPLETION of the WORK.
16.3.5 Safety Requirements for Other WORK SITES

COMPANY does not require CONTRACTOR or its subcontractors to develop a WORK SITE Safety
Plan for a location not considered a major WORK SITE. CONTRACTOR performing WORK at
such WORK SITES shall:
a) Manage safety in accordance with its existing safety management system
b) Comply with applicable LAWS and regulations and apply reasonable standards where such
laws and regulations do not exist
c) Comply with the requirements of this section
For those WORK SITES where COMPANY representatives are engaged in WORK SITE activities,
CONTRACTOR shall:
a) Prior to commencement of the WORK, provide COMPANY with its existing safety
management system so that COMPANY representatives understand the potential hazards to
be encountered and the associated means of controlling such hazards
b) Provide COMPANY representatives with a comprehensive WORK SITE Safety and Health
Orientation upon arrival at the WORK SITE to ensure they are adequately familiarized with
CONTRACTOR’s existing policies, processes, procedures, and work practices to be
implemented
c) Provide COMPANY representatives with opportunities to actively participate in the
established CONTRACTOR policies, processes, procedures, and work practices
d) Work collaboratively with COMPANY representatives to ensure that they can safely perform
their WORK SITE activities to a standard acceptable to COMPANY and consistent with
COMPANY’s established policies, processes, procedures, and work practices as described in
COMPANY Safety Manual.
Identify a CONTRACTOR focal point that COMPANY representatives may contact if they encounter
a hazardous situation or a deviation from established policies, processes, procedures, or work
practices
Work collaboratively with COMPANY representatives to develop and implement ad hoc safety
improvement initiatives when opportunities for improvement are identified
Fully integrate COMPANY representatives into the local Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan


Upon request of COMPANY, report WORK SITE trailing SHE&S performance indicators to
COMPANY
Comply with the established minimum requirements of the applicable sections of NGER-ED-BSPDS-
000001 as identified in Table F17-2
Table F16-2: Sections of NGER-ED-BSPDS-000001 Applicable to WORK Performed at Other
WORK SITES
Topic Section
Safety and Health Training 4.1
Safety and Health Orientation 4.2
Emergency Preparedness and Response 4.4
Incident Management 4.5
SSHE Performance Measurement and Reporting 4.6
Safety and Health Assessments and Audits 4.7
Safety Inspection 4.15
Permit to Work 4.19
Hot Work 4.20
Energy Control 4.21
Confined Space Entry 4.22
Excavation 4.23
Personal Protective Equipment 4.24
Housekeeping 4.25
Working at Heights 4.26
Scaffolding 4.27
Mechanized Lifting and Rigging Apparatus 4.28
Tools and Equipment 4.29
Manual Lifting 4.30
Electrical 4.31
Fire Prevention 4.32
Pressure 4.33
Journey Management 4.34
Marine Transportation and Personnel Transfer 4.35
Helicopter Transportation 4.36
16.3.6. COMPANY Incident Classification Guidelines

CONTRACTOR and subcontractors shall classify incidents per the following COMPANY guidelines
for COMPANY reporting purposes. COMPANY representatives will support the incident
classification process. Given the different incident classification definitions and criteria, as well as
different national social system drivers encountered in the international WORK environment,


CONTRACTOR, subcontractors, and COMPANY will work together to classify incidents in the most
appropriate manner. In some cases, CONTRACTOR, subcontractors, and COMPANY may classify
incidents differently.
Table F16-3: COMPANY Incident Classification Guidelines
Term Definition
Injury or An injury or illness is an abnormal condition or disorder of an individual.
Illness Injuries include cases such as, but not limited to, a cut, fracture, sprain, or
amputation. Illnesses include both acute and chronic illnesses, such as, but not
limited to, a skin disease, respiratory disorder, or poisoning.
Work-Related An injury or illness is considered work-related if an event or exposure in the
work environment either caused or contributed to the resulting condition or
significantly aggravated a pre-existing injury or illness. Injuries or illnesses that
are not work-related are not recordable.
Recordability Work-related injuries or illnesses are recordable if they involve one or more of
Criteria the following:
a) Death
b) Day(s) away from work
c) Restricted work or transfer to another job
d) Medical treatment beyond First Aid
e) Loss of consciousness
f) A significant diagnosed injury or illness
Near Miss A Near Miss Incident is an unintended or unwanted event that, under slightly
Incident different conditions, would have had a negative effect on safety, health of people,
property, or the environment. Does not include Clinic Visits Without Treatment.
Clinic Visit A Clinic Visit Without Treatment is an incident which has actual consequences,
Without but the injured person does not require any type of medical treatment. Typically
Treatment considered a “soft hit”. Is not considered a Near Miss Incident.
First Aid Case First Aid Cases are generally defined as any one-time treatment, and any follow-
up visit for the purpose of observation, of minor scratches, cuts, burns, splinters,
and so forth, which do not ordinarily require medical care. Such treatment and
follow-up is considered first aid even though provided by physician or registered
professional personnel. First Aid Cases are not recordable. The First Aid Case
classification is appropriate when any of the following treatments are provided:
a) Using a non-prescription medication at nonprescription strength (for
medications available in prescription and non-prescription form, a
recommendation by a physician to use a non-prescription medication at
prescription strength warrants classification as a Medical Treatment
Incident).
b) Administering tetanus immunizations. (Other immunizations, such as
Hepatitis B vaccine or rabies vaccine, warrant classification as a Medical
Treatment Incident.)
c) Cleaning, flushing, or soaking wounds on the surface of the skin.


Term Definition
d) Using wound coverings such as bandages, Band-Aids™, gauze pads, etc.;
or using butterfly bandages or Steri-Strips™ (other wound closing devices
such as sutures, staples, tapes/glues, etc. warrant classification as a Medical
Treatment Incident).
e) Using hot or cold therapy (e.g., compresses, soaking, whirlpools).
f) Using any non-rigid means of support, such as elastic bandages, wraps,
non-rigid back belts, etc. (devices with rigid stays or other systems
designed to immobilize parts of the body warrant classification as a
Medical Treatment Incident).
g) Using temporary immobilization devices while transporting a victim (e.g.,
splints, slings, neck collars, backboards, etc.).
h) Drilling of a fingernail or toenail to relieve pressure, or draining fluid from
a blister.
i) Using eye patches.
j) Removing foreign bodies from eye using only irrigation or cotton swab.
k) Removing splinters or foreign material from areas other than the eye by
irrigation, tweezers, cotton swabs or other simple means (procedures
involving the excision of the outer layer of skin warrant classification as a
Medical Treatment Incident).
l) Using finger guards.
m) Using massages (physical therapy or chiropractic treatment warrants
classification as a Medical Treatment Incident).
n) Drinking fluids for relief of heat stress.
That the preventive use of Oxygen in absence of symptoms is not considered
medical treatment.
Medical A work-related injury or illness that requires the management and care of a
Treatment patient to combat disease or disorder. Medical Treatment Incidents are
Incident recordable. Medical treatment does not include the following: 1.) visits to a
physician solely for observation or counseling, 2.) the conducting of diagnostic
procedures, such as x-rays and blood tests, including the administration of
prescription medications used solely for diagnostic purposes (e.g., eye drops to
dilate pupils.), or 3.) application of First Aid.


Term Definition
Restricted Duty A work-related injury or illness that results in a person being unable to perform
Incident one or more of the routine functions of the person's job, or from working the full
workday that the person would otherwise have been scheduled to work on any
calendar day after the day of the illness or injury. Restricted Duty Incidents are
recordable. [Routine functions are those work activities that the person regularly
performs at least once per week. Do not record as a Restricted Duty Injury
where persons produce fewer goods or services than they would have produced
prior to the injury or illness but otherwise perform all of the routine functions of
their work. If follow-up with the persons making the restriction indicates that the
restriction does not prevent the persons from either their routine job functions or
from working all of their normally assigned work shift, then the case should not
be recorded as a Restricted Duty Incident. Work restrictions recommended by a
physician result in a Restricted Duty Incident classification even if the person
does not follow the restrictions. In cases where recommendations are received
by two (2) or more physicians, COMPANY may decide which recommendation
is the most authoritative and determine recordability based on that
recommendation.]
Lost Time Also known as a Days Away from Work Case (DAFWC). Any work-related
Incident injury or illness (including fatalities) that results in at least one (1) lost workday
after the day of the incident. If a condition resulting from an injury or illness
causes a person to be unable to return to work on the calendar day following the
day on which the incident occurred, the case is recordable and should be
classified as a Lost Time Incident. [It does not matter whether the next calendar
day is a scheduled work day or not, only whether the person was able to work on
that day. If the injury or illness occurs on the last day a person is scheduled to
work (e.g., last day of the work week) and the person reports to work on the next
scheduled work day, record the case as a Lost Time Incident only if information
is received from a physician indicating the person should not have worked. An
injury or illness in which the person is unable to work is classified as a Lost
Time Incident even if the individual takes unscheduled vacation on the day
following the day of the injury or illness. Exclude classification as a Lost Time
Incident in situations where an individual is capable of working, but unable to
return to work solely due to circumstances such as 1.) a seaman missing a ship
sailing, 2.) a person unable to return to a location due to bad weather or lack of
reasonably available transportation, 3.) a lack of local medical facilities needed
for observation or treatment provided there was no unnecessary delay in
traveling to seek such medical treatment, or 4.) the person refuses to work.]
Fatality A recordable incident which results in the death from a work-related injury or
illness, regardless of the time intervening between the incident and death.
Regional Regional illnesses are illnesses that could result in a debilitating condition or
Illness death, or a health-related situation that could disrupt ongoing operations. Vector
borne examples include Malaria, Dengue, and Yellow Fever.
Person-to-person spread examples include Meningitis, TB, and Ebola. Food or
water borne examples includes Typhoid, Cholera, and Salmonella.
16.3.7. Alcohol and Drug Policy Requirements

CONTRACTOR, subcontractors, and their representatives and subcontractors shall comply with the
drug and alcohol requirements included in this Section 16.3.7 of the COORDINATION


PROCEDURES when performing WORK at WORK SITES or on COMPANY-owned equipment or

property unless a written exception has been approved by COMPANY.
1) Purpose
To ensure a safe, healthy, and productive work environment for the employees of CONTRACTOR
and COMPANY and others on COMPANY property, to protect the public, COMPANY property and
assets, and to assure efficient operations, CONTRACTOR will have and enforce a written policy on
drugs, alcohol, and other prohibited items that, as a minimum, meet the requirements outlined below
(“CONTRACTOR's Policy").
Table F16-4: Alcohol and Drug Policy Definitions
Term Definition
CONTRACTOR Any of CONTRACTOR's employees, agents, subcontractors or
Personnel subcontractors' employees working on COMPANY property.
COMPANY Property All real or tangible personal property, including facilities, buildings,
vehicles, products, and equipment either owned or controlled by
EXXONMOBIL and AFFILIATES.
Third-Party Services Services that COMPANY has contracted to a third party which services
will be performed by CONTRACTOR.
Prohibited Substances (1) illicit or unprescribed drugs and controlled substances and mood or
mind altering substances, (2) prescribed drugs used in a manner
inconsistent with the prescription, and (3) alcoholic beverages.
Reasonable Suspicion A belief based on objective and articulable facts sufficient to lead a
supervisor to suspect.
Under the Influence (1) the presence of a Prohibited Substance or metabolites of a Prohibited
Substance in body fluids above the cut-off level established by
CONTRACTOR's Policy, or other commonly accepted cut-off level
and/or (2) the presence of a Prohibited Substance that affects an individual
in any detectable manner. The symptoms of influence may be, but are not
limited to, slurred speech or difficulty in maintaining balance.
2) Prohibitions
Unless specifically authorized in writing by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR's policy and its
implementation shall prohibit CONTRACTOR and Contractor Personnel from the following:
A. Using, possessing, selling, manufacturing, distributing, concealing, or transporting while on

or handling COMPANY Property or during performance of Third-Party Services any of the
following items:
i. Any Prohibited Substance;
ii. Contraband, including firearms, ammunition, explosives, and weapons;
iii. Illicit drug equipment or paraphernalia.
B. Using or possessing while on or handling COMPANY Property or performing Third-Party

Services prescription drugs or over-the-counter medication that may cause impairment except
when all of the following conditions have been met:
i. Prescription drugs have been prescribed by a licensed physician for the person in
possession of the drugs.


ii. The prescription was filled by a licensed pharmacist for the person possessing the drugs.
iii. The individual notifies their supervisor that they will be in possession of or using,
impairment-causing prescription drugs or over-the-counter medication and appropriate
steps are taken to accommodate the possibility of impairment, including but not limited
to, removal from work for the period of possible impairment.
C. Being Under the Influence of Prohibited Substances while performing any WORK for
COMPANY.
D. Switching or adulterating any urine, blood or other sample used for testing.
E. Performing WORK for COMPANY if that person has tested positive, or refused testing, in
any employment-related test except that Contractor Personnel seeking access to ExxonMobil
Property may be considered if the positive employment-related test in question was an initial
pre-employment test administered more than twelve months before and the employee will not
perform in a designated-like position. The prohibition in part 3(E) will not apply to
Contractor Personnel seeking access to ExxonMobil Property for low-exposure positions
whose employment-related positive test did not occur during employment on ExxonMobil
Property or WORK.
F. Upon request CONTRACTOR will certify in writing that it has enforced all provisions of
Paragraph 3.
G. Contractor Personnel are not eligible to be assigned to WORK for COMPANY, or to access
ExxonMobil Property, while they are prescribed, or are otherwise taking, any medication or
controlled substance (prescribed or over the counter) that is known to cause impairment. An
exception to this prohibition may be granted based on CONTRACTOR's written certification
to COMPANY that a fitness for duty evaluation has been conducted by a licensed health care
professional, to assess the individual's ability to work in a safety sensitive environment (i.e.
offshore platform or other operating, mechanical or construction area) while under the
influence of such medication. CONTRACTOR's certification must confirm that the health
care professional expressly cleared the individual to work in a safety sensitive environment.
The certification must also set forth any restrictions or accommodations that are necessary in
relation to the use of such medications in a safety sensitive environment.
Similarly, CONTRACTOR must determine, and report to COMPANY any individual (s) who
are prescribed a controlled substance or impairment causing medication during the course of a
COMPANY WORK assignment. Personnel so identified are not eligible to continue working
for COMPANY and will be immediately removed from COMPANY WORK and
ExxonMobil Property. When personnel are no longer prescribed any controlled substance or
impairment causing medication, they will be allowed to return to COMPANY and have
access to ExxonMobil Property provided he or she is in compliance with all current
contractual requirements as outlined in the contract. The only exception is when
CONTRACTOR certifies in writing to COMPANY that a fitness for duty evaluation has been
conducted by a licensed health care professional on any individual who is taking an
impairment causing prescription or medication, and that fitness for duty evaluation gives
clearance that allows the individual to work in a safety sensitive environment (i.e offshore
platform or other operating, mechanical or construction area) and what restrictions, if any,
must be in place, to accommodate the use of the prescription medication.
CONTRACTOR should, at a minimum, take the following steps to determine if any drug or
medication (over the counter or controlled) is potentially impairment causing:


 Refer to the product label (s), insert (s,) and any information or instructions available
from the physician or pharmacist to identify any physiological restrictions associated with
the use of the prescription drug or medication, and
 Consult with CONTRACTOR's licensed health care professional.
3) Searches and Inspections
On COMPANY property COMPANY may, at any time, have COMPANY supervisors,
CONTRACTOR supervisors and/or authorized search and inspection specialists, including scent-
trained animals, conduct unannounced searches, and inspections of CONTRACTOR and/or
CONTRACTOR Personnel and their property; that property may include, but is not limited to, the
following: wallets, purses, lockers, baggage, offices, desks, tool boxes, clothing, and vehicles.
4) Testing
a) Categories
All CONTRACTOR personnel shall be assigned to one of the following categories based on the
individual's job function or WORK SITE assignment:
i. Comparable-to-Designated
Has a high exposure to a catastrophic operational incident; has a direct role in operations
where failure could result in serious harm to public or employee well-being, company
assets, or the environment; and has no direct or very limited supervision available to
provide operational checks.
ii. Safety-Sensitive
Has a high exposure to catastrophic operational incident and has access to operations where
failure could result in serious harm to public or employee well-being, company assets, or
the environment.
iii. Low-Exposure
Has an indirect role and no access to operations where failure could result in serious harm
to public or employee well-being, company assets or the environment.
Category-2 WORK SITE, as determined by COMPANY: A CONTRACTOR WORK

SITE(s) that includes large facilities wherein COMPANY has a limited influence due to facility
size, number of personnel working at facility and/or CONTRACTOR execution of simultaneous
fabrication projects for multiple clients during time of COMPANY project work. Examples of
Category 2 WORK SITES include large fabrication yards, shipyards, FPSO Construction Sites
and large top-sides construction sites.
All positions are "safety-sensitive," unless identified as "low-exposure", "comparable-to-

designated", unless the WORK SITE is identified as a “Category-2 WORK SITE”. If during the
course of this CONTRACT, the COMPANY determines that additional positions require
treatment as "low-exposure", or "comparable-to-designated," then COMPANY may at its sole
discretion, after notifying CONTRACTOR of a change, or changes, modify accordingly.
COMPANY must confirm the modification in writing.
CONTRACTOR shall ensure that alcohol and drug tests are conducted according to the following
requirements as defined in Table F16-5. below.


Table F16-5: Alcohol and Drug Tests by Job Category

Reasonable
Job Category Post-Incident Pre-Access Random
Suspicion
Comparable-to-Designated X X X X
Safety-Sensitive X X X
Low-Exposure X X
Category-2
X X
WORK SITE
In addition, executives of CONTRACTOR are encouraged to be subject to the same random

alcohol and drug-testing program that they require of their employees to demonstrate commitment
to a substance-free workplace.
b) Requirements
Testing requirements shall be conducted as follows:
i. Pre-Access Testing:
 Each CONTRACTOR Personnel requiring pre-access testing must have received a
negative result on a comprehensive alcohol and drug test within the 12 months preceding
that CONTRACTOR Personnel's first access to COMPANY property. In addition, each
CONTRACTOR Personnel requiring pre-access testing must have received a negative
result on a comprehensive alcohol and drug test in any calendar year in which that
CONTRACTOR Personnel performs work on COMPANY property. Upon COMPANY's
request CONTRACTOR shall so certify in writing. CONTRACTOR shall not send
laboratory test results to COMPANY.
 A single letter certifying negative test results for all CONTRACTOR Personnel requiring
WORK SITE access is preferred.
 CONTRACTOR shall provide no information to COMPANY identifying individuals who
have positive pre-access tests.
ii. Random Testing:
 CONTRACTOR Personnel requiring random testing must be subject to unannounced and
continuous random selection and testing for Prohibited Substances while performing
work for COMPANY.
 The number of tests randomly conducted during each calendar year must be at least the
current United States Department of Transportation (USDOT) required percentage or,
where testing is not required by USDOT, at least 50 percent (50%) of the number of
CONTRACTOR Personnel in the random selection pool.
iii. Post-Incident Testing :
 If CONTRACTOR or COMPANY determines from the best information available
immediately after a work-related incident that performance of one or more
CONTRACTOR Personnel contributed to the incident, or cannot be completely
discounted as a contributing factor to the incident, CONTRACTOR shall remove
that/those individual(s) from COMPANY property and surrender his/her/their WORK
SITE credentials to COMPANY. For purposes of this part "incident" means an incident
that caused personal injury requiring medical treatment beyond first aid administered at


the WORK SITE, property damage of more than $1000, or an incident that carried the
potential for serious personal injury or significant property damage.
 An individual so removed shall be allowed to return to work on COMPANY property
only after CONTRACTOR conducts alcohol and drug testing on the individual as soon as
possible following the individual's removal from the WORK SITE, and CONTRACTOR
certifies in writing the test identification number, the individual's government work
identification number (i.e., U.S. Social Security, or equivalent), the test date and time, and
a negative test result. On that written certification CONTRACTOR shall include a
consent signed by the individual permitting disclosure to COMPANY of the test result.
See Table F17-7 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES.
iv. Reasonable Suspicion Testing :
 Upon Reasonable Suspicion of CONTRACTOR or COMPANY that a CONTRACTOR
Personnel is Under the Influence of a Prohibited Substance while on COMPANY
property, CONTRACTOR shall remove the individual(s) from COMPANY property and
surrender their WORK SITE credentials to COMPANY.
 An individual removed from COMPANY property for Reasonable Suspicion shall be
allowed to return to work on COMPANY property only after CONTRACTOR conducts
alcohol and drug testing on the individual as soon as possible following the individual's
removal from the WORK SITE, and CONTRACTOR certifies in writing the test
identification number, the individual's social security number, the test date and time, and
a negative test result. On that written certification CONTRACTOR shall include a
consent signed by the individual permitting disclosure to COMPANY of the test result.
See Table F17-7.
 CONTRACTOR's Policy shall specify substances and threshold levels that comply, as a
minimum, with the USDOT alcohol and drug testing regulations. CONTRACTOR shall
adopt collection, chain-of-custody, and other related procedures consistent with USDOT
testing procedures or sound industry practice. CONTRACTOR shall include alcohol in
any test panel regardless of any lesser USDOT requirement. CONTRACTORs that do
not have an existing program are strongly encouraged to adopt COMPANY's alcohol and
drug testing standards.
 CONTRACTORs in the U.S. shall use only testing laboratories that are certified by
SAMHSA. CONTRACTORs outside the US, should only use testing laboratories that are
certified by a government agency with equivalent standards to SAMHSA.
 At International (Non-US) locations CONTRACTOR may choose to use a COMPANY
approved field screen device. COMPANY has approved the Quest Diagnostics’ 10 Drug
“Express Results Integrated Multi-Drug Screen Cup”. This device was approved by
COMPANY after being scientifically validated in a significant field validation study. This
approved device may be used for any type of drug test (i.e. pre-access, post-incident,
reasonable suspicion and random). Only those field screens resulting in a non-negative
result must be forwarded immediately to a SAMHSA approved (or government agency
with equivalent standards to SAMHSA) laboratory for confirmation of the field screen
result. Prior to adoption of the COMPANY field screen device, CONTRACTOR must
certify, in writing, to COMPANY that appropriate controls are in place, and collectors
have been trained in the proper use of the field screen device. The approved field screen
device may be purchased from Quest Diagnostics at COMPANY contracted rates.
Contractors may contact the COMPANY Account Representative at Quest at 913-895-
2549 or [email protected] to purchase the approved field screen
device.
c) Non-Compliance


Any CONTRACTOR personnel found in violation of CONTRACTOR's Policy or who refuse to

cooperate with the searches and tests included in CONTRACTOR's Policy shall be permanently
removed by CONTRACTOR from COMPANY property and from performing work for
COMPANY. CONTRACTOR must immediately notify COMPANY that the individual has
become "disqualified under Section 16.3.7 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES."
CONTRACTOR shall immediately review with COMPANY the nature of the work previously
performed by the individual. At COMPANY's request CONTRACTOR shall, at its sole cost and
risk, inspect all work in which the individual may have participated, and submit a written report to
COMPANY that documents the inspection, any findings, and the actions taken to assure all
deficiencies have been corrected.
d) Drug Awareness
CONTRACTOR warrants that CONTRACTOR Personnel performing work have each been fully
informed of the requirements of this Section and CONTRACTOR's Policy, and that before
beginning work they has signed a written certification that they have been so informed and agree
to be bound by those requirements.
e) Exemptions
Local COMPANY management may, at its sole discretion, grant certain exemptions to
CONTRACTOR from the requirements of CONTRACTOR's Policy. Exemptions are valid only
if in writing. No exemption shall be construed by CONTRACTOR as a promise of any future
exemptions. Any exemption granted to CONTRACTOR may be revoked by local COMPANY
management at any time.
f) Special Provisions – COMPANY-Approved Consortium
Enrollment in, and maintenance of, "active status" in a COMPANY-approved consortium that
requires pre-enrollment testing and continuously subjects active members to random drug and
alcohol testing at an annual effective rate of at least 50 percent (50%) shall be recognized as
satisfying COMPANY's pre-access and random testing requirements. Upon request, COMPANY
shall provide CONTRACTOR with a list of all approved consortiums. CONTRACTOR may
request approval by COMPANY of other consortiums.
g) Applicable Laws
CONTRACTOR shall comply with all applicable drug and alcohol related laws and regulations.
h) Audit
j-1) For CONTRACTOR’s services provided to COMPANY through personnel designated as
Comparable-to-Designated, Safety-Sensitive, or Low-Exposure, then the following Audit
provisions of j-1 shall apply:
A. CONTRACTOR shall keep records required by this section, available for inspection
by COMPANY during the term of this CONTRACT and for a period of three (3)
years after its termination.
B. COMPANY shall have the right, at its discretion, to perform unannounced audits of
CONTRACTOR's alcohol and drug program to verify that CONTRACTOR's policy
and its enforcement comply with these guidelines.
C. At COMPANY's request CONTRACTOR will provide separate lists of Contractor
Personnel (including name and government work identification number) who were
eligible for COMPANY WORK on a date specified by COMPANY in Safety-
Sensitive CONTRACTOR positions or Comparable-to-Designated positions. Upon
further request, CONTRACTOR will provide COMPANY with the following


information on each alcohol and drug test conducted for each Contractor Personnel
identified by COMPANY from those lists:
1) Date of and type of test (e.g. random, pre-access); and
2) Laboratory chain-of-custody identification number and/or test number.
D. CONTRACTOR will obtain an agreement from any consortium, specimen collection
service, laboratory and/or Medical Review Officer providing drug/alcohol testing
services under this agreement that upon submission by COMPANY of a list, or lists,
of Government Work Identification Numbers, chain-of-custody ID numbers and test
dates:
1) The laboratory will verify that the tests were conducted as represented; and
2) The laboratory and/or Contractor Medical Review Officer will provide a
sworn statement that each of the tests identified by COMPANY was
confirmed as negative or that it/he/she cannot so swear.
j-2) For CONTRACTOR’s services provided to COMPANY at a “Category-2 WORK SITE” under
this CONTRACT, the following provisions of j-2 shall apply:
A. CONTRACTOR shall keep records required by this section, available for inspection
by COMPANY during the term of this CONTRACT, and for a period of three (3)
years after its termination.
B. CONTRACTOR will immediately notify COMPANY of all Contractor Personnel
who are suspected of being under the influence of a prohibited substance while on
duty, as well as all Contractor Personnel who are required to submit to a post-incident
alcohol and drug test as a result of an incident that occurred while performing
services for COMPANY under this CONTRACT.
C. Upon written request by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR will provide to COMPANY
the following information for every reasonable suspicion or post incident test
conducted on Contractor Personnel during the period defined COMPANY in such
request:
1) Government work identification number,
2) Date of and type of test (e.g. for cause, post-incident)
3) Laboratory chain-of-custody identification number and/or test number.
D. CONTRACTOR will obtain an agreement from any consortium, specimen collection
service, laboratory, and/or Medical Review Officer providing drug/alcohol testing
services under this agreement, that upon submission by Company of a list, or lists, of
Government work identification numbers, chain-of-custody ID numbers, and test
dates:
1) The laboratory will verify that the tests were conducted as represented;
2) The laboratory and/or Contractor Medical Review Officer will provide a
sworn statement that each of the tests identified by Company were confirmed
as negative, or that it/he/she cannot so swear.


Table F16-6: Job Categories and Exemptions

All Contractor Personnel shall be working in Safety Sensitive positions except those shown below:
The following positions and/or personnel shall be considered in jobs Comparable to COMPANY
"Designated":
a)
b)
c)
The following positions and/or personnel shall be considered in jobs that are Low Exposure:
a)
b)
c)
COMPANY management has approved the following exemptions from CONTRACTOR's Drug and Alcohol
requirements:


Table F16-7: Contractor Reasonable Suspicion / Post-Incident Disclosure Consent and

Certification
__________________________________ _________________ ______________

CONTRACTOR Personnel Printed Name Social Security Number Test ID #
Consent and Authorization for Disclosure to COMPANY of Drug Test Result and Related Information
I hereby consent to disclosure by CONTRACTOR and its agents, including, but not limited to, any
collecting and testing agencies, of the test result identified above and any related information to
COMPANY and/or COMPANY authorized agents, assigns or representatives.
______________________________ __________________________
CONTRACTOR Personnel Signature Date
Certification for Return to WORK

Section 1 - Early Return Alcohol & Drug Screen Certification ( For Post-Incident Testing Only)
___________________ certifies that the individual shown above was tested using an approved drug and alcohol
(CONTRACTOR)
screening process on _____________ at _________ and that the result of that test was negative. The individual is
(date) (time)
therefore eligible to return to WORK pending receipt of the required laboratory confirmation test result.
______________________________ _____________________________
Authorized CONTRACTOR Representative Signature
_____________________Title ____________________Date
Section 2 - Certification of Laboratory Test Result
_____________________ certifies that the individual shown above was tested on _____________ at __________
(CONTRACTOR) (date) (time)
and that the result of the required laboratory alcohol and drug test was negative.
______________________________ _____________________________
Authorized CONTRACTOR Representative Signature
_____________________Title ____________________Date
Instructions to the CONTRACTOR: Fax or send a copy of this form to COMPANY at the work site when the disclosure consent
and Section 1 of the certification have been completed. Deliver the completed original to COMPANY when Section 2 of the
certification is completed.


16.4. Cell Phone Usage

CONTRACTOR and its subcontractors shall comply with the requirements set forth in this section
and shall notify its employees, agents, and subcontractors of the requirements below:
Cell phones may not be used while driving during any of the following circumstances:
a) Travel between WORK SITES or locations at which CONTRACTOR performs services for
COMPANY ("COMPANY WORK SITES"), regardless of whether such WORK SITES are
owned or operated by COMPANY
b) Transportation of COMPANY personnel, regardless of whether non-COMPANY personnel
are concurrently transported
c) Travel to a point of departure, such as an airport, train station, or port, for a trip involving
business related to COMPANY
The above prohibitions against cell phone use do not apply to the following:
a) The daily commute between the driver's residence and the COMPANY WORK SITE
b) Commutes between a COMPANY WORK SITE and non-COMPANY businesses for which
CONTRACTOR or its or subcontractors may perform work
c) Common carriers
d) Private carriers, manufacturers, distributors, and suppliers that transport both COMPANY and
non-COMPANY items in their vehicles
e) Citizen band and/or two-way radios
f) Use while the vehicle is properly parked in a rest area, designated parking area, or other safe
location
g) Use of cell phones by passengers if the use is not a distraction to the driver of a passenger
vehicle
Although prohibitions against cell phone use do not apply to Section 17.3.7, Items a) through g) of
the COORDINATION PROCEDURES, drivers are discouraged from using cell phones in these
situations.
16.5 WORK SITE Safety Plan Implementation Strategies

CONTRACTOR shall work collaboratively with COMPANY to develop a WORK SITE Safety
Implementation Strategies, outlining a structured implementation approach for its WORK SITE
Safety Plans.
CONTRACTOR's WORK SITE Safety Plan Implementation Strategies shall incorporate the
following:
a) Utilize a risk-based approach that identifies focus areas for implementing the most critical and
high-impact safety controls on a prioritized basis in a defined implementation phase. The
priorities and the duration of the implementation phase will be agreed upon by
CONTRACTOR and COMPANY and will be influenced by the magnitude, type, duration,
and complexity of the WORK.
b) Ensure readiness to manage WORK-specific hazards during execution of the WORK.
c) Address methods to avoid and manage both major and minor incidents.
16.6 Reports
CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY weekly and monthly safety reports in accordance with
the Minimum Safety Requirements for Executing Major Projects.


17. WORK SITE Security and Emergency Response
17.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will identify threat conditions at the WORK SITES.
2) COMPANY will conduct security program reviews.
3) COMPANY will provide Project-level emergency preparedness and response information to
CONTRACTOR, if an Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan is developed by COMPANY.

a) CONTRACTOR's Security Plan
b) WORK SITE Security Plan
c) Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan
a) Provide for COMPANY’s review the preventative maintenance, inspection and test records
for critical emergency response equipment.
b) Provide adequate staffing and facilities required to implement the Security Plan (see Section
18.3.1 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES). CONTRACTOR shall clearly
define and document roles and responsibilities for site management, supervisory personnel,
and the workforce.
c) Designate a security point-of-contact to address site security issues between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR, and establish minimum security provisions that comply with Human Rights
Provisions for Private Security Contractors.
d) Require members of CONTRACTOR GROUP, and all others permitted by CONTRACTOR
to enter the WORK SITE, to comply with all applicable security regulations.
e) Notify COMPANY of WORK SITE security incidents and threats within 24 hours of
occurrence, or as directed by COMPANY representative.
f) Cooperate and assist, as required, with COMPANY's security personnel to assess and
maintain an appropriate level of WORK SITE security.
g) Provide COMPANY the ability to conduct Security Program Reviews to test and evaluate
CONTRACTOR's security systems.
h) Maintain security records, including shift records, security incident reports, visitor logs,
vehicle entry logs, key logs, and logs of identification badges issued.
i) Provide background screening of CONTRACTOR GROUP's and AFFILIATED
CONTRACTOR's personnel assigned or working in security-sensitive positions, as identified
in the Special Conditions below. Examples include but are not limited to:
a) Dedicated Motor Vehicle Transport Drivers (Drivers support for Project Personnel)
b) Unsupervised Janitorial Staff
c) Security Service providers (Guards, Supervision)
d) IT personnel with privileged access
e) Contractors with unsupervised access to private and proprietary information


f) Update the security organization charts as changes occur.
18.3.1 CONTRACTOR's Security Plan

1) CONTRACTOR's Security Plan shall be based on its existing Security Management Systems and
shall address all WORK SITES. CONTRACTOR shall review the Security Plan annually and
report any changes to COMPANY.
2) The combination of CONTRACTOR's existing Security Management System and
CONTRACTOR's Security Plan shall, as a minimum, address the following:
a) Procedures that comply with all applicable LAW and application of responsible standards
where LAW does not exist.
b) Processes, procedures, and technical security measures for the safeguard and security of
personnel, WORK, WORK SITES, business information, materials, and COMPANY assets.
c) Processes or procedures that CONTRACTOR will implement to ensure threats are identified,
assessed, communicated, and responded to.
d) Process to measure, track, and report to Project Management the security of personnel, assets,
and information.
e) Process to review and evaluate security performance to ensure compliance with
CONTRACTOR's Security Management System and Security Plan. As a minimum, the
process shall include site inspections, evaluation of security program activities by security
professionals, and reporting of security metrics as directed by COMPANY.
f) Procedures for reviewing Security Plan updates and reporting to COMPANY.
g) Description of CONTRACTOR's security organization, including the following:
i. Organization charts, including job titles, contact addresses and phone numbers, roles, and
responsibilities.
ii. Clear definition of security-related roles and responsibilities for site management,
supervisory personnel, and the workforce, and description of how roles and
responsibilities are communicated to Project personnel.
iii. Designated security point(s)-of-contact to address between COMPANY and
CONTRACTOR site security issues.
h) Plans for deployment and management of guard forces, including a description of
qualification requirements, training programs, and standard operating procedures.
i) Process to establish Security Baseline Countermeasures, and the physical layout, plans, and
general arrangement of the WORK SITES, including the following:
i. Physical protection systems
ii. Points for personnel and vehicular access
iii. Location of offices
iv. Warehouses and other permanent or temporary facilities
v. Sensitive or restricted areas for which higher levels of security are provided
vi. Residential and office safe havens
j) Procedures addressing the following specific components:
i. Security awareness and training for all personnel


ii. Emergency response and evacuation

iii. Threat escalation
iv. Drills and exercises
v. Security intelligence liaison
vi. Security incident reporting
vii. Access control
viii. Photo identification badges
ix. Vehicle entry and parking restrictions
x. Security surveillance (CCTV)
xi. Visitor processing and escorts
xii. Threat-based baggage searches
xiii. Delivery screening
xiv. Managing locks and keys
xv. Mail and package handling
xvi. Inventory controls
xvii. Information protection
xviii. Background checks
xix. Security risk assessments
xx. Voluntary principles on human rights
xxi. Security performance measurement (security program reviews/penetration tests)
k) Description of journey management plan for personnel.
18.3.2 WORK SITE Security Plans

1) CONTRACTOR shall augment, enhance, or revise the WORK SITE Security Plans as required
to comply with COMPANY's specific requirements.
2) WORK SITE Security Plans shall include applicable requirements from CONTRACTOR's
Security Plan as agreed with COMPANY.
3) As directed by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall provide Security Plans for Off Sites.
18.3.3 Emergency Preparedness and Response Plan

1) An Emergency Preparedness and Response (EP&R) Plan provides a strategy both at the Project
level and for each WORK SITE in the preparation for and response to emergencies.
CONTRACTOR shall develop an EP&R Plan that shall be reviewed, updated, endorsed, and
communicated to appropriate personnel at specified intervals and when dictated by operational
changes and/or follow-up to actual or simulated responses.
2) CONTRACTOR EP&R Plan shall include the following, as a minimum:
a) Organizational response structure including roles, responsibilities, and notification procedures
b) Response procedures for assembling, accounting for, and evacuating site personnel
c) Identification of potential emergency scenarios based on results of risk assessments


d) Interfaces with the Project, government agencies, third party emergency responders,
Subcontractors, and external agencies as appropriate
e) Identification of personnel qualified to respond to emergencies, noting their associated
training
f) Identification of critical emergency response equipment and associated maintenance,
inspection, and testing procedures
g) Plans for conducting and assessing training, exercises, drills, and simulations at prescribed
frequencies that are based on realistic emergency scenarios and involve external emergency
response organizations, local authorities and the community as appropriate
h) Procedures for reporting training and drill activity to COMPANY as required
3) CONTRACTOR shall include EP&R Interface Management in the EP&R Plan as directed by
COMPANY, addressing Project and WORK SITE interfaces as appropriate. EP&R Interface
Management shall align COMPANY's and CONTRACTOR's roles and responsibilities with
regard to EP&R. CONTRACTOR shall verify that Subcontractors have developed and
implemented effective tactical (i.e., WORK SITE) EP&R Plans. CONTRACTOR shall also
verify that Subcontractors have developed and implemented effective emergency response
interfaces as appropriate.
18.4 Reports
1) CONTRACTOR shall notify COMPANY of WORK SITE performance metrics, security
incidents, threats, and corrective actions as directed by the onsite COMPANY representative.
CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY a monthly summary of security incidents and threat
conditions including, but not limited to, the following:
a) Theft involving property greater than or equal to $200 US
b) Any security-related incident that may cause adverse media coverage of COMPANY
c) Threats and assaults against all personnel, assets, or facilities
d) Security incidents affecting property, such as arson, sabotage, trespassing, or vandalism
e) Violations of polices on alcohol, drugs, and weapons
f) Any known incidents where inappropriate physical force is used by assigned Host
Government security or private security providers at the WORK SITE
g) Unauthorized access to computer systems or computer programs
h) Action to close identified gaps
i) Events that impact the Project (labor disputes, public disturbances)
j) Other incidents as directed by COMPANY
2) CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY as required, records of drills, exercises, and
responses.


18 Medicine and Occupational Health
18.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will perform health inspections at all WORK SITES.
2) COMPANY will review with CONTRACTOR the COMPANY Health Risk Assessment, as
required.
3) COMPANY may provide training materials to CONTRACTOR for incorporation into
CONTRACTOR's training programs.
4) COMPANY reserves the right to contract directly with a medical or vector services contractor
for WORK SITES, if necessary.

a) CONTRACTOR's Health Management System
b) Site-Specific Health Plans for each WORK SITE
2) CONTRACTOR shall comply with the requirements of Minimum Health Requirements for
Project Execution.
3) CONTRACTOR shall cooperate with COMPANY-performed health inspections.
4) CONTRACTOR shall work with a medical services Subcontractor (selected in consultation with
COMPANY) to provide onsite medical and disease prevention services for all WORK SITES.
Guidelines for medical services Subcontractors are detailed in Minimum Health Requirements for
Project Execution. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with health services Subcontractors to
identify specific roles and responsibilities for providing health management services.
5) CONTRACTOR shall work with a vector control services Subcontractor (selected in consultation
with COMPANY) to provide vector control services for all WORK SITES. Guidelines for vector
control services Subcontractors are detailed in Minimum Health Requirements for Project
Execution. CONTRACTOR shall coordinate with vector control Subcontractors to identify
specific roles and responsibilities for providing vector control services.
6) CONTRACTOR shall work with COMPANY to incorporate health aspects into the Safety
Leadership Program described in Project Specific Safety Addendum.
7) COMPANY and CONTRACTOR shall meet periodically to review status and performance of
Site-Specific Health Plans and Procedures and to identify opportunities for improvement.
8) CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for the implementation of its Site-Specific Health Plans and
Procedures, and CONTRACTOR shall ensure that CONTRACTOR GROUP implements Health
Plans and Procedures that are consistent with and no less stringent than CONTRACTOR's
approved Site-Specific Health Plans and Procedures.
9) CONTRACTOR shall identify its Corporate Health Contact and designate a Health Contact
Supervisor for each major WORK SITE in accordance with Section 2. of Section F –
COORDINATION PROCEDURES. CONTRACTOR's health contacts shall be responsible for
interfacing with medical and vector services Subcontractors to ensure effective implementation
and stewardship of CONTRACTOR's Site-Specific Health Plans.
10) CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY a listing of CONTRACTOR's medical services
Subcontractor contact details.


11) CONTRACTOR and its Subcontractors shall meet all local and country regulations for health and
health-related aspects of the Project.
12) CONTRACTOR shall participate in COMPANY-sponsored lessons learned workshops as
requested by COMPANY.
13) Contractor shall include specific control measures according to COMPANY’s Malaria Control
Program if malaria is identified as a risk, minimum requirements of which are summarized in
appendix FL
182.1 Verification and Drills

1) CONTRACTOR shall inspect each WORK SITE at least monthly and report to COMPANY any
discrepancies with the expectations described in GP 71-01-02 and other GP supplements.
2) Within 30 days of mobilization to WORK SITE and every three months thereafter, unless an
alternative schedule is approved by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall conduct drills testing the
capabilities and functionality of the medical emergency response and evacuation plans, staffing,
and equipment.
183.1 CONTRACTOR Health Management System

1) CONTRACTOR's Health Management System shall address the following as a minimum:
a) Pre-travel Health Criteria for CONTRACTOR personnel (e.g., Travel Health Consultations,
Immunizations, Health Briefings, Fitness-for-Work Requirements, Chemoprophylaxis)
b) Methodology for conducting health risk assessments, exposure assessments, and developing
Site-Specific Health Plans
c) Methodology for identifying health services support needs and communicating with health
services Subcontractors any anticipated WORK SITE health service needs in sufficient time
to allow mobilization of medical resources to support WORK SITES
d) Roles and responsibilities of CONTRACTOR's corporate office health organization, Project
Health Manager, and Site Health Coordinator(s)
e) Methodology for evaluation and measurement of performance of Site-Specific Health Plans
f) Occupational health exposure assessments for WORK SITE health hazards
g) Tuberculosis Control Program applicable for the anticipated workforce associated with the
Project
h) Sexually Transmitted Infection (STI) Prevention Program, including HIV/AIDS
i) Cold and Hot Weather Stress/Exposure Program
j) Malaria
k) Respiratory Protection Program
l) Food Safety Program
m) Procedures for qualifying and sourcing food Suppliers
n) Infectious disease outbreak management (IDOM)
o) Radiation (radiography, nondestructive testing)
p) Hearing Conservation Program


183.2 CONTRACTOR Site-Specific Health Plans

1) CONTRACTOR's Site-Specific Health Plans shall address the following:
a) The requirements of Minimum Health Requirements for Project Execution, including key
topic areas as follows:
i. Hazard Identification and Risk/Exposure Assessments
ii. Fitness for Work
iii. Medical Emergency Response Plan
iv. Public Health Hazard Control Practices
v. Occupational Health Control Practices
vi. Medical Services
vii. Vector Control Services
2) CONTRACTOR's health risk analyses of planned WORK activities based on the results of
COMPANY Health Risk Assessment, as required
3) Specific control programs to minimize identified health risks
4) The roles and responsibilities for CONTRACTOR and health services Subcontractors in
managing health aspects of the WORK, and how health services Subcontractors will be integrated
into CONTRACTOR's organization
5) Health risks and mitigations for the planning phase of the WORK
6) Plans for conducting public health and occupational health inspection and audits in accordance
with GP 71-01-02 and other GP supplements.
18.4 Reports
184.1 Immediate Notification of Health Incidents

1) CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify COMPANY of any medical evacuations, medical
referrals, or reportable conditions as a result of the following:
a) Active tuberculosis
b) Meningitis
c) Varicella
d) Toxic exposures (above recommended levels), such as the following examples:
i. Chemical hazards (such as carbon monoxide, solvents, leaded paint)
ii. Physical hazards (such as radiation, noise, cold)
iii. Biological hazards (such as legionella, infectious agents, vector-borne diseases, etc.)
e) Food-borne and water-borne outbreaks
f) Anaphylaxis
184.2 Monthly Reporting Requirements

1) CONTRACTOR shall measure and report health performance indicators in accordance with the
requirements of Minimum Health Requirements for Project Execution.
2) CONTRACTOR's monthly health reporting shall also include the following:
a) Planned and completed activities to control or mitigate health hazards


b) Planned and completed health plan reviews

c) Planned and completed medical emergency response drills and results of site health
inspections including status report on the closure of health recommendations
d) Number and type of health training sessions
e) Occupational exposure monitoring results (by work group identification, but do not provide
employee names) after completion of chemical and physical hazard assessments
f) Results from public and occupational health inspections and audits
g) Progress reports on closure of gaps or deficiencies identified through health inspections and
audits
184.3 Project-Level Final Health Report

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare a Project-Level Final Health Report and forward to COMPANY no
later than 60 calendar days after the COMPLETION DATE. The report shall include the
following, as a minimum:
a) Summaries of major improvement initiatives undertaken with respect to Health Management
b) Evaluations of the effectiveness of the Site-Specific Health Plan (including summary Health
Inspection trends over the life of the project)
c) Summaries of Project-level and WORK SITE health lessons learned and best practices


19. Environment, Regulatory, and Socioeconomic

"Health" in this Section 19. of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES refers to the potential
health issues and/or impact of Project-related activities to the local community.
19.1 COMPANY Duties

1. COMPANY will in most instances be responsible for interactions with governmental authorities,
unless LAW requires otherwise.
2. COMPANY has the right to audit and approve the following:
a. All waste management facilities and Subcontractors
b. Waste transporters and haulers
3. COMPANY has the right to conduct regulatory compliance assessments during
CONTRACTOR's performance of the WORK.
4. COMPANY will conduct periodic assessments of CONTRACTOR's waste management
activities.

a) Regulatory Compliance Plan (RCP)
b) Environmental Management Plan (EMP)
i. Waste Management Plan
ii. Spill Prevention and Response Plan
c) Socioeconomic Management Plan
d) Community Health Management Plan
a) Ensure that Subcontractors implement an RCP and an Environmental, Socioeconomic, and
Community Health Management Plan(s) that are consistent with and no less stringent than
CONTRACTOR's approved corresponding Plans.
b) Submit to COMPANY for COMPANY's review implementation procedures related to
CONTRACTOR's existing Regulatory Compliance and Environmental, Socioeconomic, and
Community Health Management Programs.
c) Be aware of, comply with, and incorporate requirements into the WORK that include, but are
not limited to, the following:
i. LAW
ii. COMPANY's RCP and Environmental, Socioeconomic, and Community Health
Management Plan(s) and policies
iii. COMPANY's environmental, socioeconomic, and community health commitments
resulting from the following:
 COMPANY's Environmental, Socioeconomic, and Health Impact Assessment
(ESHIA)
 Agreements (e.g., lender requirements)


 Regulatory filings
 Formal public hearings
d) Support COMPANY's efforts to develop regulatory license, permit, and approval
applications.
e) Identify and obtain all necessary permits, notifications, authorizations, approvals, licenses,
agreements, etc. that are required by LAW to progress the WORK according to the Detail
Schedule and as agreed to in CONTRACTOR's RCP and meet all conditions of such permits,
notifications, authorizations, approvals, licenses, agreements, etc. This includes rectification
of inconsistencies between conditions of different permits, notifications, authorizations,
approvals, licenses, agreements, etc.
f) Develop and conduct regulatory, environmental, socioeconomic, and health training programs
for CONTRACTOR's and Subcontractors' personnel, as agreed to in CONTRACTOR's Plans.
CONTRACTOR shall keep training records for each member of CONTRACTOR's,
Subcontractors', and Suppliers' personnel.
g) Develop and implement the following for regulatory compliance and environmental,
socioeconomic, and community health management:
i. Monitoring and inspection programs for the WORK and WORK SITES, including the
following:
 Keep required monitoring and performance records and make these records available
to COMPANY upon request
 Conduct regular inspections of the WORK SITES to ensure WORK SITES are being
maintained in an environmentally and socioeconomically sound and healthful manner
and that environmental, socioeconomic, and community health risks are being
identified and appropriately managed
ii. Compliance assessments program including the following:
 Assessment of compliance with LAWS and regulations and other requirements listed
in Item c) (above)
 Identification of compliance metrics
 Frequency of assessment
 Action tracking system and reporting to CONTRACTOR's management
h) Promptly resolve, to COMPANY's satisfaction, assessment findings from regulatory agencies
or COMPANY.
i) Facilitate interfaces with governmental contacts in the COUNTRY OF OPERATION only as
directed by COMPANY. CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
i. Develop and agree upon general procedures for CONTRACTOR interfaces with
governmental authorities and ensure that any persons in CONTRACTOR's organization
who may need to meet with governmental authorities are fully aware of the agreed
procedures.
ii. Provide COMPANY's Representative reasonable advance notice of all known and/or
scheduled meetings between CONTRACTOR and governmental authorities or agencies
concerning the WORK.
iii. Maintain records and files relating to governmental agency permits, notifications,
authorizations, approvals, licenses, agreements, etc., required for the WORK, including
original copies of all pertinent correspondence.


j) Report spills related to the WORK at Off Sites to governmental authorities pursuant to LAW
and other agreements. Within 48 hours of spill report submission, CONTRACTOR shall
provide to COMPANY documentation of the report.
k) Related to waste management practices, provide the following:
i. As a minimum, provide secondary containment for liquid restricted (i.e., hazardous or
toxic) wastes that are stored
ii. At CONTRACTOR's operating waste management sites, maintain a computer database
with records of all wastes received at the WORK SITE and final destinations within the
waste management site (e.g., which landfill cell)
l) Ensure CONTRACT Changes and revisions to LAW are appropriately addressed to maintain
compliance.
m) Promptly resolve, to COMPANY'S satisfaction, any deficiencies identified by COMPANY in
CONTRACTOR's waste management activities.
n) CONTRACTOR shall promptly report major spills to COMPANY and keep a log of all spills
and the response actions taken.
19.2.1 ESHIA, EMP and Associated Plans Review

Prior to submittal of CONTRACTOR's EMP, Socioeconomic Management Plan and Community
Health Management Plan, CONTRACTOR and COMPANY shall undertake a joint review to identify
any gaps between the JOB SPECIFICATION and the provisions made in COMPANY’s ESHIA, EMP
and associated Socioeconomic Management and Community Health Management Plans. These gaps
must be addressed or exceptions approved by COMPANY prior to CONTRACTOR commencing
WORK at the WORK SITE.
19.3.1 Regulatory Compliance Plan

1) CONTRACTOR's overall RCP shall address how CONTRACTOR will manage compliance with
the following:
a) All applicable regulatory requirements
b) Other requirements as specified in Section 19.2, Item 2) c) of Section F – COORDINATION
PROCEDURES
2) CONTRACTOR's RCP shall address all aspects of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall emphasize
and provide sufficient detail for COMPANY-provided WORK SITES.
19.3.1.1 RCP Contents

The contents of CONTRACTOR's RCP shall include the following:
1) Introduction/Overview
a) Describe CONTRACTOR's processes for identifying and ensuring compliance with all LAW,
regulations, and other regulatory documents (including permits, notifications, authorizations,
approvals, licenses, agreements, etc.) applicable to the WORK
2) Scope and Objectives
a) Describe CONTRACTOR's methods, processes, and actions to maintain compliance, mitigate
impacts of noncompliance and prevent reoccurrence
b) Identify the key regulatory issues and the potential impacts of these issues on the WORK


c) Describe how CONTRACTOR's RCP is bridged to COMPANY's RCP and to other relevant
CONTRACTOR Plans and documents (e.g., CONTRACTOR's EMP and its associated plans)
3) Organization
a) Describe CONTRACTOR's regulatory compliance organization and demonstrate that this
organization will include adequate staffing for planning and implementing the RCP
b) Identify CONTRACTOR's personnel with appropriate skills, expertise, and training who are
responsible for ensuring that CONTRACTOR's activities related to the WORK are in
compliance with all applicable LAW, regulations and other regulatory documents
c) Define and document roles and responsibilities for WORK SITE management, supervisory
personnel, and the workforce involved in regulatory compliance activities
d) Describe how these roles and responsibilities will be communicated to CONTRACTOR's and
Subcontractors' personnel involved in the WORK
4) Processes and Procedures
a) Identification Process
Describe CONTRACTOR's process to ensure that LAW, regulations, and other regulatory
documents (including treaties, permits, notifications, authorizations, approvals, licenses,
agreements, etc.) that are applicable to the WORK are identified.
5) List
List all the LAW, regulations, and other regulatory documents including permits, notifications,
authorizations, approvals, licenses, agreements, etc., that are applicable to or required for all aspects
of the WORK. This list will include the Project phase and the lead agencies that will provide the
required permits, notifications, authorizations, approvals, licenses, agreements, etc. The list of LAW,
regulations, and other regulatory documents will include, but not be limited to, the following:
a) Communication
b) Engineering and Construction
c) Customs
d) Environment
e) General business
f) Health and safety
g) Labor/visas
h) Land/real property tax
i) Damages compensation
j) United States Export Controls and similar export controls of other countries
k) Transportation (where applicable)
l) Security
6) Approvals Management
Define CONTRACTOR's process to support timely receipt of required permits, licenses, and
approvals. For each required permit, license, or approval listed in the Plan, the following information
is required:
a) CONTRACTOR's Plan for obtaining any required permit, authorizations, approvals, licenses,
etc., along with owner (i.e., CONTRACTOR or COMPANY) and forecasted/actual
submission and approval dates


b) Based on the time line, a demonstration that CONTRACTOR's Plan for fulfilling the
requirements of the LAW, regulation, or other regulatory document is consistent with the
Detail Schedule
7) Regulatory Compliance Instruction
For each applicable regulatory requirement that has been identified for the WORK, include a
description of the processes that CONTRACTOR will use to accomplish the following:
a) Identify the end user
b) Develop end-user compliance instructions and communicate these instructions to appropriate
CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor personnel
c) Develop, document, and implement a procedure to perform a final check, prior to beginning a
task associated with the WORK, to ensure regulatory compliance
8) Communication Process
Define CONTRACTOR's Processes to identify and communicate new LAW, regulations, and other
regulatory documents that are deemed to be applicable to the WORK. The RCP shall describe how
CONTRACTOR shall perform the following:
a) Monitor, on an ongoing basis, legislation or potential legislation associated with all WORK
SITES so that CONTRACTOR is able to obtain timely knowledge of new and/or emerging
LAW, regulations, and other regulatory documents that could affect the WORK.
b) Communicate new and emerging LAW, regulations, and other regulatory documents to
CONTRACTOR's organization and to COMPANY.
c) Follow up with appropriate CONTRACTOR and Subcontractor personnel to ensure that new
LAW, regulations, and other regulatory documents have been added to the processes that are
in place to confirm compliance.
9) Assessment and Evaluation
Describe the processes that CONTRACTOR will use, in accordance with Item 2)g) of Section
19.2 of Section F – COORDINATION PROCEDURES, to perform the following:
a) Monitor and assess the various aspects of the WORK for regulatory compliance
b) Assess and evaluate CONTRACTOR's activities to ensure compliance with all LAW
10) Lessons Learned
Describe CONTRACTOR's process for capturing and implementing lessons learned from
assessments and evaluations to improve overall compliance performance
11) Training Requirements
Describe the qualifications and training required for CONTRACTOR personnel who are
responsible for ensuring regulatory compliance
19.3.2 Environmental Management Plan

1) CONTRACTOR's EMP shall comply with the following:
a) Address all environmental, socioeconomic, and community health aspects of the WORK
b) Emphasize and provide sufficient detail for COMPANY-provided WORK SITES
c) Incorporate measures identified in COMPANY's Upstream/EMDC Environmental
Standards, ESHIA, and EMP, as well as approved regulatory documents (e.g., regulatory
filings, permits, licenses, approvals, etc.)


d) Document how environmental, socioeconomic, and health aspects of the Project will be
managed by CONTRACTOR
e) Communicate the implementation and execution of the issues/impacts avoidance and
mitigation measures identified in COMPANY's ESHIA and/or EMP
2) CONTRACTOR's EMP shall also include the Waste Management Plan and the Spill Prevention
and Response Plan.
19.3.2.1 EMP Contents

CONTRACTOR's EMP shall include, as a minimum, the following contents:
1) Introduction/Overview
An Executive Summary of the contents of the EMP
2) Scope and Objectives
Methods, processes, and actions for the following:
a) Complying with the following:
i. Applicable environmental, socioeconomic, and health LAW, regulations, and other
regulatory documents
ii. Standards specified by COMPANY (including the Upstream/EMDC Environmental
Standards) in the absence of applicable LAW, regulations, and other regulatory
documents
b) Avoiding or mitigating the environmental, socioeconomic, and health impacts identified in
COMPANY's ESHIA and/or EMP
c) Preventing, controlling, and otherwise mitigating risks and impacts identified by
CONTRACTOR
3) Reference Documents and Control
Definition of the following:
a) How the EMP is linked to the following documentation:
i. RCP
ii. COMPANY's ESHIA and EMP
iii. Socioeconomic Plan
iv. Community Health Plan
b) How the EMP is to be administered, distributed, and controlled
4) Organization
a) CONTRACTOR's environmental, socioeconomic, and community health organization
(Environmental Management Group or Groups), including identification of staffing
(managerial, technical, administrative), facilities, and equipment required for planning and
implementing CONTRACTOR's EMP
b) Procedures for managing change of CONTRACTOR personnel and/or organizations
responsible for overseeing or implementing an EMP-related task
c) CONTRACTOR's processes for ensuring that environmental, socioeconomic, and community
health roles and responsibilities are clearly defined, documented, and communicated to site
management, supervisory personnel, and CONTRACTOR's workforce


d) The process for resolving conflicts between the objectives of CONTRACTOR Environmental
Management Group and other CONTRACTOR personnel
5) CONTRACTOR's processes for performing the following:
a) Evaluating the effectiveness of CONTRACTOR's environmental, socioeconomic, and
community health mitigation measures
b) Monitoring (inspections) and enforcing compliance with the EMP
c) Using results of assessments and evaluations to implement remedial actions and improve
CONTRACTOR's environmental, socioeconomic, and community health performance
d) Documenting, reporting, and investigating incidents of noncompliance
e) Capturing lessons learned from such incidents
CONTRACTOR shall include a list of environmental, socioeconomic, and community health
compliance indicators (e.g., quality of treated effluent before discharge, local hiring, local
business utilization statistics, key health and disease statistics) to be measured and the frequency
of measurement
6) Training
A description of CONTRACTOR's environmental, socioeconomic, and community health
awareness training and training schedule
7) Expectations
a) Define CONTRACTOR's specific environmental, socioeconomic, and community health
expectations related to policies, performance indicators, and targets and other desired results
b) Identify how these expectations are communicated to personnel
c) Define the elements that are essential to the success of the environmental, socioeconomic, and
community health effort
d) Define performance indicators, which will include tracking COMPANY-stipulated
environmental, socioeconomic, and community health performance indicators
8) Procedures
a) Site-specific data gathering that CONTRACTOR may undertake, as directed by COMPANY,
at WORK SITES associated with COMPANY's ESHIA and/or EMP
b) Mechanism for obtaining endorsement from COMPANY for changes or deviations from the
Project environmental and/or socioeconomic and/or community health specifications
c) Provisions for incorporating improvements to the environmental, socioeconomic and
community health management program
d) WORK SITE specific programs or actions to control and/or mitigate the identified
environmental, socioeconomic, and community health impacts, taking into consideration
COMPANY's ESHIA
e) CONTRACTOR's endorsement process and environmental, socioeconomic, and community
health milestones for deliverables during each phase of the Project (detailed design and
engineering, construction, operations, etc.) as applicable
19.3.2.2 CONTRACTOR's Waste Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's Waste Management Plan (WMP) shall be incorporated into CONTRACTOR’s
EMP and shall meet or exceed the applicable standards for waste management, treatment, and
disposal at WORK SITES, including the COMPANY Waste Management Standard. The WMP shall
address all aspects of the WORK. CONTRACTOR shall emphasize and provide sufficient detail for


COMPANY-provided WORK SITES. CONTRACTOR's WMP shall be consistent with

COMPANY's Waste Management Philosophy.
CONTRACTOR's WMP shall include, as a minimum, the following contents:
1) Reporting Procedure
2) Summary of Wastes
A table, supported by waste classification definitions and the definition of other terms as
required, detailing the following:
a) The various types of wastes to be generated
b) Projected frequencies of generation and quantities
c) Period(s) when they will be generated
d) The preferred and alternative waste generation avoidance, reuse/recycle, treatment, and/or
disposal method(s) for each waste
3) Management of Specific Wastes
a) Specific information (examples include waste stream definition, listing of typical wastes in
this category, typical waste sources) for each anticipated waste stream
b) Guidelines (examples include safety and health considerations, waste minimization options,
preferred management options, storage requirements or limitations) for each anticipated waste
stream
4) Personnel Roles and Responsibilities
5) List of Waste Management Sites to be Used
a) A description of the location, applicable regulatory approvals, and general engineering
standards for all waste management facilities intended to be used by CONTRACTOR
b) A description of all third-party waste management facilities and terms and conditions of
agreement with third parties used by CONTRACTOR to manage wastes generated on
COMPANY-provided WORK SITES
6) Waste Reduction/Minimization Strategies and Program
a) Process to minimize the amount of waste generated
b) Recycling options to be pursued to reduce the amount of waste requiring disposal
c) Process to minimize the need for, and the use of, hazardous substances and substances that
can have harmful effects on the environment
d) Process to ensure that prohibited substances are not used during the WORK
7) Waste Storage
Description of the following for all waste storage facilities CONTRACTOR intends to use:
a) Locations
b) Applicable regulatory approvals
c) General engineering standards
d) Environmental safeguards


8) Packaging, Testing, Labeling, Transporting (including waste treatment/stabilization and methods

of transport)
a) Methods to be used to safely handle specific wastes as applicable. Where required by LAW,
regulations, or other regulatory documents, CONTRACTOR shall have available at the
WORK SITE eco-toxicological datasheets for all chemicals (e.g., material safety data sheets
[MSDSs]).
b) Methods to be used to transport wastes generated by CONTRACTOR during the performance
of the WORK.
c) Methods of stabilizing wastes and preparing them for transport and shipment from generation
sites to disposal sites.
9) Manifesting and Record Keeping
a) A description of the following:
i. System CONTRACTOR will use to track the amount of each waste type generated,
how it was managed, and its final destination
ii. The computer database CONTRACTOR will maintain at operating waste disposal
sites to record all wastes received at the WORK SITE and final destinations within the
waste disposal site (e.g., which landfill cell)
b) Information regarding CONTRACTOR's proposed waste tracking software package and data
acquisition/input forms. COMPANY will provide a sample waste tracking form upon
request.
10) Monitoring of Waste Management Activities
A description of the monitoring systems CONTRACTOR will use to record, as minimum, the
following:
a) Oily, hazardous, and high volume waste compositions
b) Landfill leachate quality (if applicable)
c) Landfill monitoring well water quality (if applicable)
d) Water treatment effluent quality
e) Types and quantities of wastes recycled
11) Site-Specific Modifications
If CONTRACTOR will be operating in multiple locations, then include any site-specific
modifications to the overall Plan necessary for each location.
19.3.2.3 CONTRACTOR's Spill Prevention and Response Plan

1) CONTRACTOR's Spill Prevention and Response Plan (SPRP) shall be incorporated into
CONTRACTOR'S EMP and shall address all aspects of the WORK. Emphasis shall be placed on
and sufficient detail provided for COMPANY-provided WORK SITES.
2) Contents of CONTRACTOR's SPRP shall be as follows:
a) Reporting
b) Description of methods, processes, and actions that CONTRACTOR intends to use to
prevent, respond to, and limit the environmental impacts of spills of all substances that are to
be used, stored, or transported by CONTRACTOR in the execution of the WORK (e.g.,
having designated areas for refueling and waste oil/chemical storage)


c) Emergency response actions that CONTRACTOR intends to undertake in the event of a

minor and/or major spill related to the WORK
d) Notification procedures to be used in the event of a spill
e) A listing of spill response equipment that CONTRACTOR intends to have available at the
WORK SITES
19.3.3 CONTRACTOR's Socioeconomic Management Plan

1) CONTRACTOR Socioeconomic Plan shall include but not be limited to the following topics:
a) Description of how the Plan is linked to COMPANY's Socioeconomic Management Plan
b) Description of CONTRACTOR's socioeconomic organization, including qualifications and
expertise of Key Personnel as well as the interfaces with COMPANY's organization
c) Labor and worker conditions management plan, including but not limited to the following:
i. Employment and training principles, especially those designed to maximize the hiring
of qualified local, regional, national, and aboriginal or indigenous peoples workers
ii. Recruitment and hiring process, especially as it relates to local, regional, or national and
aboriginal or indigenous peoples workers
iii. Housing, feeding, and transportation
iv. Other items including but not limited to human rights, labor relations, labor
representation organizations, and grievance procedures
2) Cultural Heritage Management Plan:
Description of how CONTRACTOR will manage known and discovered cultural and heritage
properties including sacred sites, tombs and graves, and archaeological and paleontological sites
3) Community Engagement Plan:
Description of how CONTRACTOR will manage the following:
a) Establishment and maintenance of positive community relations in coordination and
alignment with COMPANY practices described in COMPANY Stakeholder Engagement Plan
b) Management of community grievances in a transparent manner and in compliance with
COMPANY Grievance Procedures
4) Socioeconomic Monitoring and Reporting Plan:
Description of how CONTRACTOR will monitor implementation and mitigation measures
associated with CONTRACTOR's socioeconomic plans, including its stewardship and reporting
to COMPANY
19.3.4 CONTRACTOR's Community Health Management Plan

CONTRACTOR's Community Health Management Plan shall define how the Plan is linked to the
Project's health plan. CONTRACTOR Community Health Management Plan shall include but not be
limited to the following topics:
1) Description of CONTRACTOR's health organization, including qualifications and expertise of
Key Personnel
2) Health program implementation strategy and monitoring program, including stewardship and
reporting to COMPANY
3) Nature of the Project's medical facilities, including CONTRACTOR-provided and public facilities


4) Nature of medical situations that will be handled by the Project versus those requiring medical
evacuation
5) Disease prevention programs including awareness and training programs
19.4 Reports
19.4.1 Spills at Off Sites

CONTRACTOR shall report weekly and monthly all spills related to the WORK at Off Sites to
governmental authorities pursuant to regulatory requirements that are applicable at the WORK SITE.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY all spill report documentation.
19.4.2 Spills at WORK SITES

1) CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify COMPANY and shall report all spills occurring at
COMPANY-provided WORK SITES as defined in CONTRACTOR's EMP and the SPRP.
CONTRACTOR shall provide to COMPANY, within 24 hours of the occurrence or discovery of
a spill, a spill report (which may be on a COMPANY-stipulated form) including the following:
a) Date
b) Time
c) Location
d) Volume
e) Material(s) involved
f) Specific gravity or gravities
g) Cleanup actions taken
h) Root cause analysis
i) Corrective actions to prevent future occurrence
2) The spill reports shall also categorize the spill using the criteria presented in Table F19-.
CONTRACTOR shall submit to COMPANY monthly summaries of the spills listed in Table F19-
(including spills by any member of CONTRACTOR GROUP).

Table F19-1: Spill Reporting Criteria

Reporting Criteria
Spill Type
Reportable Non-Reportable
Oil spills to  Spills directly to water or reaching surface water (e.g., creeks,  Off-premise, non-marine transportation spills where the product
water(1) streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, or ocean). is in the custody of a third-party carrier.
 Spills from loading/unloading operations reported consistent
with the cargo custody or responsibility.
Oil spills to land  Spills must contact the soil to be reportable.  Spills inside lined containment or collection areas where there is
 Spills or leaks from tank bottoms and underground storage tanks. no contact with soil.
 The total volume, in barrels or liters, of oil spilled to the land,  Off-property transportation spills where the product is in the
regardless of the amount contained or recovered. custody of a third-party carrier.
Chemical spills to  Chemical spills directly to water or reaching surface water (e.g.,  Spills of insoluble solids to water that have no environmental
water creeks, streams, rivers, lakes, ponds, or ocean). impact (e.g., plastic pellets).
 Spills of all non-petroleum derived chemicals (e.g., methanol,  Off-property, non-marine transportation spills where the product
sulfuric acid, caustic, stimulation acid, etc.). is in the custody of a third party carrier.
Chemical spills to  Spills must contact the soil to be reportable.  Spills inside lined containment or collection areas where there is
land  Spills of all non-petroleum derived chemicals (e.g., methanol, no contact with soil.
sulfuric acid, caustic, stimulation acid, etc.).  Spills of insoluble solids to land that have no environmental
 Spills or leaks from tank bottoms and underground storage tanks. impact (e.g., plastic pellets).
 Total mass, in kilograms, of chemical spilled to the land,  Off-premise transportation spills where the product is in the
regardless of the mass contained or recovered. custody of a third party carrier.
Notes
1) Oil includes all petroleum-derived liquids, such as crude oil, condensate, gasoline, diesel fuel, petroleum derived solvents (toluene, xylene, etc.),
lubricating or hydraulic oil, asphalt, or any material defined as oil by a regulatory agency.


19.4.3 Environmental, Socioeconomic, Community Health, and Regulatory

Compliance Reporting
1) CONTRACTOR shall immediately notify COMPANY of any verbal/written communication with
governmental agencies regarding CONTRACTOR violations of regulatory requirements and
provide COMPANY with copies of all written communications from governmental agencies
related to the WORK.
2) CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY all regulatory, environmental, socioeconomic, and
community health excursions and incidents related to the WORK at COMPANY-provided
WORK SITES within 24 hours of their occurrence or discovery and shall supply summary data to
COMPANY on a monthly basis. CONTRACTOR shall include Subcontractor data with
CONTRACTOR's summary data. The number of excursions or incidents must be separated into
the following categories: air, water, waste, and other.
3) CONTRACTOR shall report regulatory, environmental, socioeconomic, and community health
excursions and incidents related to the WORK at CONTRACTOR-provided WORK SITES to
governmental authorities pursuant to applicable LAW and regulations in effect. Documentation
of such reports shall be provided to COMPANY upon request.
4) CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY the following data occurring at COMPANY-
provided WORK SITES:
5) Permit and Regulatory Reporting
a) All permit and regulatory excursions and incidents, even if only administrative in nature.
Permit and regulatory excursions and incidents include the following:
i. Excursions related to permits, notifications, authorizations, approvals, licenses,
agreements, etc. issued by a regulating authority or any controlling body. For an event
that involves multiple excursions, CONTRACTOR shall report each excursion
independently (e.g., on a time basis or on a permit parameter basis).
ii. Violations of any applicable local, state, national, or international law or rule,
regardless of whether or not it is cited in a permit.
iii. Violations of legally binding variances, lender institution requirement, compliance or
exemption orders, ESHIA, or consent decrees.
iv. All fines.
b) Regulatory compliance monitoring, inspection, and assessment results, including corrective
actions, on a monthly basis or as directed by COMPANY.
6) Freshwater Usage Reporting
CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY all freshwater usage related to the WORK at
COMPANY-provided WORK SITES during performance of the WORK and will supply such
data on a monthly basis; Subcontractor data must be included in CONTRACTOR data.
Freshwater usage includes purchased raw or potable water as well as water taken from surface or
ground sources. Estimates for freshwater usage based on defensible technical data may be
sufficient in some instances for reporting purposes.


7) Waste Reporting
a) CONTRACTOR shall report to COMPANY all waste quantities generated on COMPANY-
provided WORK SITES during performance of the WORK and transferred to COMPANY.
The waste quantity measurement and/or calculation methodologies utilized shall be specified
and data for generated waste quantities shall be submitted to COMPANY on a monthly basis.
Subcontractor data must be included in CONTRACTOR's submitted data. Restricted or other
regulation-defined waste quantities and construction waste quantities must be reported
separately.
b) CONTRACTOR-reported waste quantities must include all COMPANY-specified wastes
leaving the WORK SITE as well as those sent to storage.
8) Socioeconomic Reporting
On a periodic basis, but no less frequent than monthly, CONTRACTOR shall report
socioeconomic metrics, including but not limited to the following:
a) Grievances
b) Work stoppage
c) Land use
d) Community engagement
e) Evaluation of human rights and transparency initiatives
f) Other information as required by the EMP
9) Other Reporting
Any other reporting and notification requirements as defined in COMPANY's EMP


20. Nigerian Content
20.1 Responsibilities of COMPANY and CONTRACTOR

1) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all Nigerian content activities in relation to the WORK carried
out or to be carried out for COMPANY are conducted in accordance with Nigerian Oil and Gas
Industry Content Development Act 2010 and CONTRACT provisions pertaining to Nigerian
Content.
2) CONTRACTOR shall appoint a Nigerian Content Coordinator who will be solely responsible for
providing all information/data pertaining to Nigeria Content in relation to the WORK.
3) Under this CONTRACT, COMPANY can at any time verify, confirm and audit any claims and/or
submissions made by CONTRACTOR regarding CONTRACTOR's implementation of Nigerian
Content activities
201.1 Measurement and Reporting

COMPANY’s Project Manager shall liaise with CONTRACTOR to ensure that the required
information for good Nigerian Content tracking and reporting and is provided using the Report
template provided in Appendix FK. This information shall be provided on a monthly reporting basis
and shall be delivered by CONTRACTOR to COMPANY by the 10th day of the month following the
month being reported, in time to meet monthly cut-off dates prescribed by the Nigerian Content
Development Monitoring Board (NCDMB) as specified in the Nigerian Oil and Gas Industry Content
Act 2010.
201.2 Vendor /Subcontractor Lists

As part of the Nigerian Content development drive, COMPANY will regularly conduct surveys of the
Nigerian contracting community to identify capable and competent Nigerian suppliers and contractors
and advise CONTRACTOR of such in a list. Such list will serve as an addendum to Section J of the
JOB SPECIFICATIONS and it is COMPANY's expectation that CONTRACTOR will make
maximum use of it in choosing its subcontractors or suppliers to perform the WORK.
201.3 Project Management Activities Performed In Nigeria

1) NOGICD Act 2010 clearly states that all Management Teams for all Projects shall be domiciled
in Nigeria. In the case where team activities are performed outside Nigeria as agreed in the
WORK:
2) CONTRACTOR shall:
a) Maintain any management system(s) and any incentive programs for operation in Nigeria;
b) Demonstrate the current line of reporting between the Nigerian partner or agent and
CONTRACTOR Project office (include names and positions of contact liaisons in both the
Nigerian office and CONTRACTOR's Project or home office);
c) Define and maintain on a continuous basis the roles and responsibilities of Nigerian nationals
to be assigned to the WORK including Engineers / Managers / Specialists (referred to as
"Professionals" in this Agreement) and their respective job allocations, responsibilities and
positions that will be performed by the different categories of Nigerians.
201.4 Logistical Support and Use of Qualified Subcontractors in Nigeria

CONTRACTOR shall:
1) Provide to COMPANY periodic updates with information on the number of Nigerian
subcontractors and suppliers CONTRACTOR will utilize for the WORK;


2) Keep a check list of all export and permit requirements pertaining to the WORK and maintain up-
to-date records and documentation of all Nigerian Export/Import Permits for the WORK.
3) List and describe all equipment and materials purchased or imported into Nigeria that will become
a permanent part of the WORK and/or FACILITIES.
201.5 Training Plans for SUBCONTRACTOR's Nigerian Professionals and

Workers
As part of the requirements of the NOGICD Act 2010, CONTRACTOR shall maintain up-to-date
documentation of all planned professional development training and assignments for Nigerian
Professionals and workers in any location including CONTRACTOR's home, branch, or Nigerian
office.
201.6 Human Capacity Development Training

In line with NCDMB’s Human Capacity Development guidelines, COMPANY shall request from the
CONTRACTOR a training plan containing a list of discipline based training, training scope man-
hours and cost to be submitted to NCDMB for review and endorsement. COMPANY shall request for
a list of Nigerian professionals from NCDMB to be tested, shortlisted and trained by CONTRACTOR
as part of the ten percent (10%) of project man-hours set aside for HCD training, CONTRACTOR
shall maintain up-to-date documentation of all training.
20.2 Ownership Structure

CONTRACTOR shall:
1) Provide and maintain on continuous basis documentation on the ownership of its Nigerian
AFFILIATE or company. This documentation should, at the least, include the owners' names,
functional titles, country of citizenship, and percentage ownership or shares of each of the owner.
2) Describe and update regularly the organizational structure charts of the company. In the case of a
partnership between companies, the organizational charts of the partnership will be provided and
the ownership percentages/size will be clearly stated;
3) Maintain on a continuous basis up-to-date information and documentation indicating Nigerian
positions and number of Nigerian(s) employed (i.e., Records of employment) within the
organizational structure of the Nigerian AFFILIATE or company including those of its partners
and/or agent and provide all such information to COMPANY on a periodic basis to be agreed
with COMPANY
21. Community Relations and Development

The CONTRACTOR should develop a good relationship with the host communities, by maintaining
effective communication with both the host communities and relevant authorities, with a view to
reducing or eliminating disruptions during contract execution.
CONTRACTOR shall utilize existing Community and Labour Relations Principles and Guidelines to
ensure compliance by CONTRACTOR.
21.1 Overall Strategy

The issues to be considered by CONTRACTOR shall include all, but not necessarily limited to the
following:
1) Pre-mobilization meeting and review of project’s community action plan with COMPANY Public
and Government Affairs group.


2) Communication with host community, Authorities/Homage

3) Community Liaison Officers
4) Proactive resolution of disputes/misunderstanding.
5) Compensation/Wages
6) Summary of Project Scope/Duration
7) Environment issues
8) Contact Office in the community.
9) Use of Local Labor/Other Employment matters.
10) Community Assistance Projects.
Pre-Mobilization Meeting and Review of Project’s Community Action Plan With

COMPANY Public Affairs Group
After the award of the contract and prior to actual mobilization to project site, the CONTRACTOR is
expected to review the project’s Community Action Plan with COMPANY's Public and Government
Affairs Group. Approval of Project’s Community Action/Relation Plan by the Public and Government
Affairs Manager is a prerequisite to project mobilization.
Before commencement of project, COMPANY (NPO) community relations advisor, Project engineer,
Public and Government Affairs and CONTRACTOR will meet and the CONTRACTOR shall give a
briefing on the type, nature and scope of project. COMPANY’s Security and community relations
procedure is made known to the CONTRACTOR. Other issues such as Safety, Quality are also
discussed at this meeting. Aproval of Project’s Community Action/Relations Plan by the Public and
Government Affairs Manager is a major prerequisite to project start-up.
Communication with Host Community, Authorities / Homage

1) A proper communication channel shall be established between the CONTRACTOR, host
communities and relevant COMPANY departments. Interfacing meetings, consulting and
communicating with the host communities shall be channelled through the Public Affairs.
Responses relating to communities concerns and complaints shall be prompt and logged.
2) CONTRACTOR/Sub Contractors shall be primarily responsible for their community relations,
labour and security activities to ensure enabling environment for timely and incident-free
completion of job. To this effect, CONTRACTOR/Sub Contractors shall engage staff, competent
in community relations, labour and security practices and conversant with the operational areas, to
handle these activities.
3) The CONTRACTOR'S focus should be on utilizing local content where project cost, schedule,
and quality needs are compatible with what is available in the local market.
4) CONTRACTOR shall provide COMPANY Project Team/Public and Government Affairs on a
quarterly basis, the status of its community relations and labour activities/issues as well as plans.
CONTRACTORS overall project’s success shall incorporate the success of its community
relations and labour activities as endorsed by COMPANY.
Community Liaison Officer/Community Interface Coordinator

1) If the project size and scope dictate, CONTRACTOR may appoint 4 Community Liaison Officers
(CLOs) from among the already recruited staff that has other assigned duties. The Liaison Officer
shall in consultation with the Government Joint Industrial labour Relations Committee (GJILRC)
be responsible for early identification of community related issues, and facilitate communication
to resolve any misunderstanding. The officer would combine other work on site with that of the


liaison to the host communities as may be determined by the project manager. The Liaison
Officer shall also liaise with COMPANY Public Affairs department in the facilitation of the
resolution of all labour disputes.
2) The Community Interface Coordinator should preferably come from any of the host communities
but must be experienced in handling community issues. The liaison officer shall not be involved
or be responsible for any local/community labour hiring.
3) The resume of Community Interface Coordinator to be considered for this job, shall be as
recommended by the Government Joint Industrial Labour Relations and Development Committee
(GJILRDC) and approved by the Public & Government Affairs.
Pro-Active Resolution of Disputes/Misunderstanding

1) Historically, CONTRACTORS encounter some community problems in the course of the
projects' execution. Some of these problems include, but are not limited to the following:
a) Non-violent occupation of work sites by communities, resulting in shut down.
b) Forced shut down of work operation by communities
c) Local employment from host communities
d) Local demands for labour and supply contracts
e) Claims of environment degradation or damage
f) Claims of disturbance of local deities
g) Seizure of equipment and hijack of personnel by community youths
h) Claims of inaccurate or inadequate payments and/or right-of-way acquisition.
2) CONTRACTOR shall seek to resolve community issues arising during project execution with
minimum or no disruption to project schedule. COMPANY Public Affairs and Security shall be
promptly notified of such issues to facilitate their intervention in the resolution, as may be
necessary.
3) The CONTRACTOR with a clear understanding of the environment in which the project is
located can identify and analyse a particular type of problem which may affect the project and
suggest ways of solving them. These should be proactively discussed with Project Team and
Public Affairs representatives.
4) COMPANY expects that the CONTRACTOR shall establish mutually acceptable conditions of
service with its workers and enforce compliance to these procedures.
5) In case of grievances or industrial dispute resulting in violence, COMPANY expects the
CONTRACTOR to take the following actions:
a) Stop the job immediately.
b) Clear the site of all personnel and reopen site when issues are resolved.
c) Do not rehire the participants of the violence and permanently bar them from the work site.
There will be no exception and this will not be negotiable.
d) Effect forfeiture of future redundancy payments, bonuses, and allowances for workers
involved in violence.
e) Deduct pro-rata from wages of workers, cost of and damage to property or value of articles
stolen.


Compensation and Wages

1) CONTRACTOR’S labour rates for skilled, unskilled & other workers shall be very competitive,
realistic and equitable, and in line with standard labour practices in Nigerian Oil & Gas Industry.
It shall be inclusive of offshore bonus, overtime, Christmas bonus, end of contract bonus, medical
allowances & other allowances & benefits agreed upon.
2) CONTRACTOR’S labour contract price shall be inclusive of rates for escalation that might arise
from workers seeking higher rates in the course of the project’s execution.
3) COMPANY shall NOT honour any change order arising from CONTRACTOR’S workers
demand for improved condition of service.
Summary of Project Scope / Duration

CONTRACTOR is expected to highlight in summary, his scope of work and duration of the project as
well as proposed project work schedule and mobilization plan for the locally recruited staff
Environmental Issues
Relevant SHE and Waste disposal guidelines shall be issued to CONTRACTOR to ensure that the
CONTRACTOR makes effort to protect the environment where the project is located. The
CONTRACTOR shall conduct all its activities in a manner by which the health and safety of its
employees, its sub-contractors and communities is enhanced. The CONTRACTOR is expected to
adhere strictly to COMPANY SHE guidelines and meet all relevant government requirements. Effort
shall be made to avoid destruction of aquatic life and/or jeopardize fishing activities of the local
fishing folks. Cases of non-compliance to COMPANY SHE standard by CONTRACTOR will not be
tolerated.
Contact Office in the Community

COMPANY requires that for the purpose of contacts with the external publics, to facilitate human
resources activities and ensure that CONTRACTORS presence is felt in the community, the
CONTRACTOR is expected to open a liaison office within the community. The office shall be
manned by competent personnel.
Use of Local Labour / Other Employment Matters

1) Before commencing work, the CONTRACTOR shall develop and provide to COMPANY Public
Affairs a labour relations plan which shall detail all CONTRACTORS’ intentions for local hiring
and conditions of service.
2) CONTRACTOR shall endeavour to employ local labour in the following categories to execute the
project:
a) Employment of non-skilled labour
b) Employment of skilled labour
c) Employment of Professionals
d) Sub-contractors of non-skilled labour
Definition of Non-Skilled, Skilled Labour and Professionals:

1) Non-skilled labour is defined as all such labour that does not require direct supervision or high
degree of technical skill. These shall include the following trades such as roustabouts (A/B),
stewards, cooks, security personnel, light vehicle drivers, canteen workers, labourers, helpers and
others in like category.


2) Skilled labour is defined as all those trades that require a lot of skill as a result of long practice to
perform. These include trades such as welders, electricians, mechanics, pipe fitters, scaffolders,
sandblasters, riggers, divers, carpenters, safety officers and others in like category.
3) Professionals are defined as those groups of workers that require formal training and university
education. These include engineers, Administrator, secretaries, etc.
The CONTRACTOR will engage those that are suitable for recruitment after passing the various
selection and medical tests, as determined.
Any Sub-Contractor(s) to be employed shall similarly be directed to use local labour as specified
above.
Employment of Non Skilled, Skilled labour and Professionals

1) This shall be done in the proportion as spelt out in the Community and Labour Relations
Principles and Guidelines where the CONTRACTOR is required to have 35% of the required
labour and the community will produce 65% of the work force, or as otherwise would be justified
by business needs.
2) However, where the community is unable to produce enough competent hands for the required
positions, the CONTRACTOR shall provide the short fall.
3) COMPANY guidelines on benefit sharing formula shall be used in considering the various areas
that constitute COMPANY host communities in the proportion as follows:
Table F21-1: Allocations by Workforce Group
The ratio for immediate communities shall be in accordance with existing practice of Ibeno (30%),
Eket (26%), Esit Eket (24%) and Onna (20%), out of the share of 30 percent.
Use of Subcontractors
1) Efforts shall be made to identify non-skilled work that will be sub-contracted to competent
CONTRACTORS from the host communities. COMPANY shall be notified prior to the award.
The work may include the following:
a) Manual digging and excavation
b) Supply of sand/food items/stationeries
c) Cleaning and clearing of site wastes
d) Fumigation offsite/site office etc.
e) Supply of sundry items


2) Host communities’ sub-contractors with proficiency and track records in technical areas will also
be considered in provision of skilled and technical services.
3) All Sub-Contractors and their personnel shall be required to maintain stipulated COMPANY
standard and guidelines, same as expected of CONTRACTOR.
Community Assistance Projects (CAP)

1) COMPANY makes significant contributions to the local communities on behalf of the
NNPC/COMPANY Joint Venture. As part of its contracting services, CONTRACTOR's/Sub
Contractors should also plan to carry out some community assistance projects to support
designated communities. COMPANY's approved Community and Labour Relations Principles
and Guidelines provides funding formula for these activities, which are based on value of the
contract.
2) As part of executing its contracted services, the CONTRACTOR shall liaise with COMPANY
Public Affairs to carry out some community assistance programs to support designated
communities.
3) The specific community assistance projects (CAP) by the CONTRACTOR shall be endorsed by
COMPANY Public and Government Affairs Department in conjunction with the appropriate
community leadership.
4) While tendering for the service, CONTRACTOR should make provision that is commensurate
with the value of the project for handling such activities.
Gift
1) The CONTRACTOR shall recognize and respect local customs and tradition but shall not give
donation to any individual beyond nominal value of $50 or N6, 000.
2) Customary items presented to Paramount Rulers in-council during courtesy calls as well as any
gift to groups/persons shall not exceed a nominal value of $200 or N26,000 per sizeable group of
not less than 5 persons or $50 per individual.
Local Taxes and Levies

The CONTRACTOR / Subcontractors are required to pay relevant local taxes and levies which are
within bounds of the law.
Monitoring and Reporting

1) The CONTRACTOR is required to submit quarterly status report of compliance with the above
items to the Project Team and Public Affairs designated personnel.
2) Designated CONTRACTORS personnel shall participate in quarterly review meetings with
representatives of the Project Team, Public and Government Affairs, Security and the authorized
Community groups, to review the reports as well as issues/concerns.
Liability
CONTRACTOR shall be liable for disruptions by the communities if established that such resulted
from their failure to comply with above guidelines. The COMPANY will continue to liaise with the
community to promote enabling environment for CONTRACTOR / Subcontractor to operate.




22 Funding, Banking, and Accounting
22.1 COMPANY Duties

1) Review for approval CONTRACTOR's Invoicing and Payment Plan
2) Provide COMPANY invoicing, accounting, and reporting requirements to CONTRACTOR
3) Provide to CONTRACTOR COMPANY's asset accounting breakdown
4) Notify CONTRACTOR of reasons that any invoice or portion thereof is disputed or not
substantiated

CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval an Invoicing and Payment
Plan.
a) Submit accurate, complete, and explicit invoices that reflect the WORK performed by
CONTRACTOR for billing period.
b) Maintain accurate records of all invoices received and payments made on behalf of
COMPANY, if applicable.
c) Follow appropriate practices for the systems, processes, and procedures used in funding,
banking, and accounting in accordance with the CONTRACT and industry standards.
d) Prepare and submit cash forecasts by currency at frequencies specified by the company.
e) Make available to COMPANY upon request all vouchers, papers, and supporting
documentation as related to the CONTRACT.
f) Implement and maintain a tracking and reporting process (in a format and frequency as
specified by COMPANY) to ensure that WORK complies with the reporting requirements of
the following, as a minimum:
i. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA)
ii. Sarbanes-Oxley 404 Compliance
iii. Any other jurisdictional requirements
g) Provide transaction data, in Microsoft compatible files, as defined by COMPANY and
captured by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, and Suppliers.
h) Submit one invoice per currency and separate invoices for services and supplies/materials
i) Comply with any COMPANY request for clarification, certification, or substantiation in
relation to an invoice.
j) Hold invoice preview meetings or pre-payment meetings as requested by COMPANY
k) Implement and maintain a tracking and reporting process (in a format and frequency as
specified by COMPANY) to ensure that WORK complies with the reporting requirements of
the following, as a minimum:
i. Foreign Corrupt Practices Act (FCPA)
ii. Sarbanes-Oxley 404 Compliance


iii. Any other jurisdictional requirements
222.1 Invoice Content

1) See Invoice Submission Procedure – Exhibit B of Principal Document (ii)
2) CONTRACTOR's invoices shall conform to the requirements of the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT
and include the following information:
a) CONTRACTOR's name, phone number, contact name, address, and Tax ID Number
b) Invoice date and unique reference number
c) CONTRACT number, name, or title
d) Cumulative value of all previous invoices in the applicable currency, giving total value in
equivalent U.S. Dollars converted at the CONTRACT exchange rate
e) Adjustments, if any, from previous invoices
f) Net amount payable and currency of invoice
g) CHANGE ORDER, signed by COMPANY Representative or person with delegated
authority, including the following:
i. CHANGE ORDER amounts, which may in some cases be shown separately, as well as
the related payment milestone
ii. Itemized values per CHANGE ORDER number with a detailed description of each
item being billed
h) Separate identification of TAXES, if any, shall be identified by individual line items on the
invoice (e.g., provincial, territorial, or sales and use TAXES, withholding TAXES, and value
added tax [VAT])
i) Code of accounts breakdown for the invoice
j) Payment terms and discounts, if applicable
k) Complete and accurate supporting documentation and backup information
3) CONTRACTOR shall also comply with the following invoicing requirements for COSTS:
a) Complete and accurate supporting documentation and backup information shall include but
not be limited to the following:
i. Copies of Subcontractors and Suppliers contracts and/or purchase orders, invoices,
and documented evidence of CONTRACTOR's receipt of goods or services shall be
provided.
ii. Vouchers, expense account statements, equipment (including those for the use of
computers and reproduction machines), and other documents that show evidence of
COSTS incurred shall be provided.
iii. Personnel time records and summary time reports shall be in a format acceptable to
COMPANY and shall show, as a minimum, the name, job classification, billing or
wage rate, and hours worked for each individual being billed.
iv. CHANGE ORDER amounts may in some cases be shown separately, and the invoice
shall itemize values per CHANGE ORDER with a detailed description of each item
being billed. The approved CHANGE ORDER and approved documentation that the
WORK is complete shall accompany the invoice. The basis for compensation of
changes is to be in accordance with the change rates provided in the CONTRACT or
as otherwise instructed by COMPANY.


v. Invoices shall include the following, as applicable:

vi. Amounts associated with WORK performed previously by CONTRACTOR, but not
presented in any previous invoices.
vii. Unit Rates and actual quantities installed during the billing period, and actual
quantities installed to date.
4) CONTRACTOR shall organize the monthly invoice so that it is easily understood and any
charges can be quickly reviewed against the CONTRACT.
5) The invoice shall detail the part of the CONTRACT PRICE payable to CONTRACTOR with
respect to the WORK performed up to the cutoff date (to be established by CONTRACTOR and
agreed to by COMPANY), less the accumulated amount of all previous invoices, supported by
appropriate backup documentation.
6) Before paying any invoice, COMPANY may request clarification, certification or substantiation
in relation to any invoice, and CONTRACTOR shall promptly comply with any such request.
Invoice preview meetings (or pre-payment meetings) may be held to agree on charges to be
included on an invoice, and when possible, sign off support information.
7) After the final ACCEPTANCE NOTICE is issued pursuant to the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT,
CONTRACTOR shall invoice COMPANY for all remaining sums due to CONTRACTOR.
223.1 Invoicing and Payment Plan

1) The key objectives and requirements of the Invoicing and Payment Plan are to establish and
maintain the following:
a) Description of CONTRACTOR's systems, procedures, and controls to manage the financial
aspects of WORK performed by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors, and Suppliers
b) The roles and responsibilities of the financial organization that will maintain
CONTRACTOR's funding, banking, and accounting procedures for WORK performed.
c) Accurate and complete funding procedures that include request for funds from COMPANY,
invoice verification, and expenditure reconciliation activities accompanied by appropriate
detailed documentation that explicitly describes the allowable costs for WORK performed
during the billing period.
d) A description of CONTRACTOR's invoice verification process to receive, verify, correct, and
pay invoices submitted by Subcontractors and Suppliers that are valid CONTRACT charges,
as well as CONTRACTOR's process for settling billing disputes.
e) A methodology to secure discounts and credit notes available to CONTRACTOR or
COMPANY for early payment of invoices, or volumes of materials or services purchased.
f) Account code classifications to provide for appropriate COST control, tax, asset accounting,
and reporting of WORK.
g) CONTRACTOR's methodology for preparing and submitting invoices to COMPANY.
h) Methodology for allocating COSTS for the WORK into COMPANY's code of accounts.
2) CONTRACTOR shall keep the Invoicing and Payment Plan current and follow an agreed
management of change process to ensure that all procedures meet CONTRACTOR and
COMPANY needs.


223.2 Invoicing Procedures

1) CONTRACTOR shall prepare detailed invoicing procedures that shall include, but not be limited
to the following:
a) A description of CONTRACTOR's WORK breakdown structure (aligned to COMPANY's
WBS) and expenditure coding as it translates to COMPANY requirements.
b) An example showing the format of the invoice and a description of supporting documentation
and backup information to be provided to COMPANY in advance of finalization.
c) A procedure to maintain a calendar of exact dates to prepare and submit the invoice as agreed
with COMPANY.
223.3 E-Commerce and Process Enhancements

1) COMPANY and CONTRACTOR will work together to enhance invoicing processes, including
the use of e-commerce and computer file exchanges, as may be appropriate.
2) If requested by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall provide its invoice detail and supporting data
in electronic format (spreadsheet or database file) as may be generated from CONTRACTOR's
existing systems, to aid COMPANY in performing verification and analysis of CONTRACTOR's
invoices and submittals. Such invoice detail and supporting data shall include, but not be limited
to, the following:
a) Project cost data
b) Labor distribution data
c) Telephone and computer charges
d) Travel expense reports
e) Purchases and Subcontractor tracking
f) Payments and material tracking data
223.4 Payment and Banking Information

Payments of invoices will be made by electronic funds transfer direct to CONTRACTOR's bank
account specified in the Special Conditions below.
1) Special Condition or, subject to COMPANY's written approval, such other bank account as
CONTRACTOR may specify from time to time.
2) Any changes in CONTRACTOR's banking information or payment instructions shall be
submitted (prior to approval of invoices) in writing to COMPANY's Representative with a copy
to the Project Controller.


3) CONTRACTOR shall be solely responsible for any and all bank charges, fees, and overdrafts
relating to CONTRACTOR's bank account due from authorized banking activity or due to fault of
CONTRACTOR or COMPANY.
4) COMPANY shall be deemed discharged of payment obligations upon issuance of electronic
orders to CONTRACTOR bank. CONTRACTOR assumes all risks of transfer of funds from that
point forward.
22.4 Reports
224.1 Monthly Reports

1) On a monthly basis, CONTRACTOR shall report the following as a minimum:
a) Summary and details of invoices submitted
b) Payments made and dates of such payments
c) A forecast of amounts expected to be invoiced during the remaining duration of the
CONTRACT
224.2 Other Reports

1) As directed by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall report the provide the following:
a) Detailed reports related to funding, banking, invoicing, and accounting.
b) Capital and expense expenditure reports
224.3 Closeout Report

CONTRACTOR's Closeout Report shall include the following:
1) Capital and expense expenditures. CONTRACTOR's accounting system shall recognize that,
while the majority of the WORK is a capital expenditure, part of the WORK may be classified as
expense. As such, separate identification and reporting by CONTRACTOR shall be required.
2) Fixed asset record in an electronic spreadsheet and paper copy in accordance with COMPANY's
requirements. This detailed Project breakdown may be in a different format and require different
categories than the Project work breakdown structure. CONTRACTOR therefore shall be
required to provide the necessary personnel at the conclusion of the Project to allocate COSTS by
systems (and equipment within each system) or other categories as required by COMPANY.


23 Readiness for Operations
23.1 COMPANY Duties

1) COMPANY will work collaboratively with CONTRACTOR on all aspects of the development of
readiness for operations documentation.
2) COMPANY will work with CONTRACTOR to develop an interface management process
specifically for this activity.
3) COMPANY will conduct the following reviews:
a) Pre-Start-up Independent Project Review (IPR)
b) Operational Readiness Review (ORR)
c) Pre-Start-up Safety Review (PSSR)

CONTRACTOR shall submit for COMPANY review and approval a Readiness for Operations
Plan.
2) CONTRACTOR shall propose to COMPANY, for its approval, a single point of contact to
oversee the development of its Readiness for Operations Plan. This proposal will include a CV
(résumé) and proposed job description.
3) Upon the issuance of partial or final TURNOVER NOTICE, the Systems Completion Team shall,
with the assistance of CONTRACTOR, prepare the system or FACILITY for operations. Prior to
issuance of a partial or final TURNOVER NOTICE, CONTRACTOR shall assist COMPANY in
the preparation of the system or FACILITY for commercial operations.
4) CONTRACTOR shall provide technical expertise to support COMPANY in development of the
following readiness for operations documents in accordance with the following Global Practices:
a) Operations and Maintenance (O&M) Procedures – GP 21-02-02 and other GP supplements.
b) Maintenance and Reliability (M&R) Programs – GP 21-02-02 and other GP supplements
c) Competency Assurance (CAS) Programs – GP 21-02-07 and other GP supplements
d) Process Surveillance Plans – GP 21-02-08 and other GP supplements
e) Computerized Maintenance Management System (CMMS) – GP 21-02-05 and other GP
supplements
f) Spare Parts Inventory Development (SPID)
g) Operational Spare Parts Management – GP 21-02-03 and other GP supplements
5) CONTRACTOR shall ensure that all required spare parts data are provided by Suppliers and
Subcontractors for the development of the CMMS as prescribed in GP 21-02-05, GP 21-02-03,
other GP supplements and the SPID process.
6) CONTRACTOR shall develop for COMPANY's review and approval, a complete training
program for all personnel involved in O&M of the FACILITY
7) CONTRACTOR shall support COMPANY during the following reviews:
a) Pre-Start-up IPR
b) ORR


c) PSSR
233.1 Readiness for Operations Plan

The Readiness for Operations Plan shall include, as a minimum, the following components:
1) General Requirements
a) Describe how readiness for operations activities and resources are integrated with detailed
engineering activities and resources.
b) Describe existing systems/procedures that CONTRACTOR intends to use to develop
readiness for operations documentation.
c) Describe how CONTRACTOR will ensure that all required spare parts data are provided by
Suppliers and Subcontractors for the development of the CMMS as prescribed in GP 21-02-
05, GP 21-02-03, other GP supplements and the SPID process.
d) Describe CONTRACTOR's processes for integrating FACILITY design information with
design information from the Main Instrument and Control Contractor (MICC).
e) Describe CONTRACTOR's process for working with COMPANY to acquire necessary
documentation from, and managing interfaces with, the MICC and all COMPANY-assigned
Subcontractors.
2) CONTRACTOR's plans to support the development of O&M Procedures, including the
following:
a) CONTRACTOR's plans for providing technical expertise to support COMPANY-led task
analysis and Criticality Rating development.
b) CONTRACTOR's list of supporting technical documentation, system descriptions, and
operational and control narratives for O&M procedure development.
3) CONTRACTOR's plans to support the development of M&R Programs
a) CONTRACTOR's plans for providing technical expertise to support COMPANY-led
Equipment Criticality Ratings and Equipment Strategies development.
b) CONTRACTOR's plans for the support of CMMS development, based on the work process
described in GP 21-02-05 and other GP supplements.
4) Describe CONTRACTOR's plans to provide technical expertise for the development of CAS
Programs for Operations, including the following:
a) CONTRACTOR's plans for developing training materials, assessment packages, and training
plans and schedules.
b) CONTRACTOR's plans for the implementation of training programs at the WORK SITE.
c) CONTRACTOR's plans for Supplier training and specialty tools.
5) Describe CONTRACTOR's plans for providing technical expertise to support COMPANY in the
development of data surveillance programs and surveillance tools for monitoring of production,
machinery, and equipment degradation.
6) Describe CONTRACTOR's plans for providing technical expertise, commissioning procedures,
and Supplier training for the transition of machinery to Production Operations.


7) CONTRACTOR's plans to support COMPANY's activities to prepare the FACILITY for Start-up.
CONTRACTOR's plans shall provide details on CONTRACTOR's pre-Start-up support of the
following minimum elements:
a) Supporting COMPANY during COMPANY development of Operational Safety Procedures,
in place prior to the introduction of hydrocarbons
b) Development of and approval by COMPANY of all Start-up procedures
c) Full function testing of the FACILITY safety systems
d) Supporting COMPANY during Pre-Start-up IPR
e) Supporting COMPANY during ORR
f) Supporting COMPANY during PSSR
g) Development and generation of punch-list and stewardship to closure plan
h) Issuance of Ready for Start-up Certificates (RFSU) and approval by COMPANY
23.4 Reports
1) As directed by COMPANY, CONTRACTOR shall provide readiness for operations progress
reports for the following:
a) Program development
b) Plan development
c) Procedure development


Appendices
Section F
COORDINATION PROCEDURES

Appendix FA (Page 1) – Supplier Data Requirements List (SDRL)

Doc. No.
SUPPLIER DATA REQUIREMENTS LIST (SDRL) Facility
Location
Proj. No. Package Name
SOW Spec. No. Supplier
Package RFQ No. P/O No.
Rev. Date: Issue Description Originator Checked by Approved by
Equipment Tag Numbers:
Notes: 1. The following list is provided for guidance. The SDRL Originator should complete column 3 and...
2. The SDRL Originator should select & verify suitability of Document / Data sumission requirements against component items of the Technical Requisition.
SUBMISSION REQUIREMENTS
LEGEND SUBMISSION TIMING: EXAMPLE
Requirements
= Purchase Order
Requisition / Purchase Order Line Item Nos.

P
Manuals
Document Format: Hard Copy (HC) ...or
T = Inspection / Testing +2P / +4P / +6p / +8P = document to be submitted
D = Dispatch 2 / 4 / 6 / 8weeks after receipt of Purchase Order
W = Periodic Issue
2W = document to be submitted every 2 weeks
( I ) Information ( R ) Review
- = Before
Reviewed at Supplier Site

+ = After Required with Quotation
WI = When Issued
electronic (pdf / NFF)

# = Number of Weeks
to which applicable
Submit "Certified"
X = With Quotation Submission Timing
PTS = Prior to issue of Purchasers Inspection
HC = Hard Copy Release Note and Prior to Release of items for
M = MRB
V = VMC
pdf = Portable Document Format Shipment
Submit
NFF = Native File Format

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
DOCUMENT / DATA DESCRIPTION
SDRL
Calculations
CODE
C01 FOUNDATION SUPPORT CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M

C02 PIPING STRESS ANALYSIS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C03 STRUCTURAL STEEL CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C04 ROTOR/SHAFT SYSTEM UNBALANCED RESPONSE ANALYSIS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C05 SYSTEM HEAD LOSS CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C06 THRUST BEARING SIZING CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C07 LATERAL CRITICAL SPEED CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C08 TORSIONAL CRITICAL SPEED CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C09 FLOW ELEMENT CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C10 WIND LOAD CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C13 PROCESS/UTILITY CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C14 HYDRAULIC CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C15 BEARING LIFE CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C16 ACOUSTIC ENCLOSURE VENTILATION SYSTEM CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C17 COMBUSTION AIR SYSTEM PRESSURE DROP CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C18 EXHAUST SYSTEM PRESSURE DROP CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C19 EXHAUST DUST CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C20 HEAT EMISSION CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C21 GENERATOR DESIGN CALCUALTION - +4P R - - pdf - M
C22 HVAC CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C23 ACCOUSTIC VIBRATION CALCUALTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C30 PRESSURE VESSEL / S&T / BRAZED AL. HEAT EXCHANGER MECH CALCS - +4P R - - pdf - M


Manuals Requirements
P = Purchase Order
Requisition / Purchase Order Line Item Nos. to which

T = Inspection / Testing
D = Dispatch +2P / +4P / +6p / +8P = document to be submitted
Submit for ( I ) Information or ( R ) Review

2 / 4 / 6 / 8weeks after receipt of Purchase Order
W = Periodic Issue

- = Before 2W = document to be submitted every 2 weeks
+ = After
WI = When Issued

Required with Quotation
# = Number of Weeks

X = With Quotation
Submit "Certified"
Submission Timing
Release Note and Prior to Release of items for
HC = Hard Copy Shipment
applicable
M = MRB
pdf = Portable Document Format
V = VMC
C31 EXCHANGER THERMAL RATING CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M

C32 LUBE AND SEAL OIL SYSTEM SIZING CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C33 PULSATION SUPPRESSION DEVICE CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C34 BATTERY CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C36 SHORT CIRCUIT CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C37 SEISMIC CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C38 STORAGE TANK DESIGN CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C44 INSTRUMENT CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C45 RELIEF VALVE AND BURSTING DISC CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C53 ARC FLASH CALCULATIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M
C00 CALCULATIONS - Others (Not Listed Above) - +4P R - - pdf - M
D Drawings
D01 OUTLINE DRAWINGS, LAYOUT DRAWINGS, PIPELINE ALIGNMENT SHEETS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D02 SHOP DETAIL DRAWINGS - +4P - R - pdf - M
D03 GENERAL ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D04 ASSEMBLY AND DISASSEMBLY DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D05 CROSS-SECTION DRAWINGS / EXPLODED VIEW DIAGRAM WITH PARTS LIST - +4P R - C pdf V -
D06 SUPPORT LOADING DIAGRAM - +4P R - C pdf V -
D07 ANCHOR BOLT LOCATION DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D08 INSTRUMENT SCHEMATICS AND CONTROL DIAGRAMS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D09 FLOOR PLAN DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D10 PIPING AND INSTRUMENT DIAGRAM (P&IDs) - +4P R - C NFF V -
D11 CAUSE AND EFFECT (C&E) CHARTS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D12 ELECTRICAL / ELECTRONIC SCHEMATICS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D13 SINGLE LINE ELECTRICAL DIAGRAMS / DRAWINGS - +4P R - C NFF V -
D14 ELECTRICAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM - +4P R - C pdf V -
D15 ELECTRICAL INTERNAL CONNECTION DIAGRAM - +4P R - C pdf V -
D16 ELECTRICAL SCHEMATIC AND WIRING DIAGRAMS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D17 PIPING SCHEMATICS AND ARRANGEMENT DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D18 LEGENDS AND SYMBOLS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D20 DETAILED FABRICATION DRAWINGS - +4P - R - pdf - M
D21 MECHANICAL SEAL DRAWINGS (including dry gas seals) - +4P R - C pdf V -
D22 PIPING ISOMETRICS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D23 COUPLING DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D24 SUPPLIER INTERFACE AND CONNECTION REQUIREMENTS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D25 SYSTEM NETWORK ARRANGEMENT DIAGRAM - +4P R - C pdf V -
D26 ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT OUTLINE DRAWING - +4P R - C pdf V -
D27 ELECTRONIC CABLE DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -


P = Purchase Order

W = Periodic Issue 2 / 4 / 6 / 8weeks after receipt of Purchase Order

+ = After
WI = When Issued
# = Number of Weeks


X = With Quotation
Submit "Certified"
Submission Timing
applicable
M = MRB
V = VMC
D28 SYSTEM INTERCONNECTION DIAGRAMS - +4P R - C pdf V -

D29 INSTRUMENT INSTALLATION DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D30 HVAC SYSTEM DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D38 STRUCTURAL DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D41 FOUNDATION DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D50 BUILDING FINISH DETAILS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D52 INSTRUMENT LOOP DIAGRAMS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D57 INSTRUMENT TERMINATION AND HOOK UP DETAIL - +4P R - C pdf V -
D62 BLOCK WIRING DIAGRAMS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D65 SCHEDULE OF HAZARDOUS AREA CERTIFIED ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - +4P R - C pdf V -
D67 SHAFT ALIGNMENT DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D71 VESSEL INTERNAL DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D73 PROCESS FLOW DIAGRAMS (PFD) AND HEAT AND MASS BALANCE - +4P R - C pdf V -
D85 SCREEEN DISPLAY GRAPHICS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D86 INSTRUMENT/ELECTRICAL PANEL DRAWINGS - +4P R - C pdf V -
D87 NAMEPLATE DRAWING - +4P R - C pdf V -
D00 DRAWINGS - Others (Not Listed Above) - +4P R - C pdf V -
E Equipment Performance Data
E01 ELECTRICAL RELAY CHARACTERISTICS, RATINGS AND INSTRUCTIONS - +4P R - - pdf - M

E02 CURRENT AND POTENTIAL (CT/PT) TRANSFORMER CURVES AND DATA - +4P R - - pdf - M
E03 ELECTRICAL FUSE/CIRCUIT BREAKER CHARACTERISTIC CURVES - +4P R - - pdf - M
E04 MOTOR HEATING AND SAFE LOCKED ROTOR TIME CURVES - +4P R - - pdf - M
E05 PERFORMANCE CURVES - +4P R - - pdf - M
E06 EQUIPMENT EMISIONS DATA - +4P R - - pdf - M

E07 METER RUN REQUIRED, FLOW TUBES AND VENTURI - +4P R - - pdf - M
E08 ALLOWABLE NOZZLE LOADS - +4P R - - pdf - M
E09 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT/MOTOR COOLING REQUIREMENTS - +4P R - - pdf - M
E10 VENTILATION REQUIREMENTS - +4P R - - pdf - M
E11 UTILITIES SCHEDULE - +4P R - C NFF V -
E00 EQUIPMENT PERFORMANCE DATA - Others (Not Listed Above)
L Lists
L01 SUPPLIER DOCUMENTS REGISTER (SDR) X +2P R - C NFF V -

L02 MANUFACTURING / FABRICATION/ SCHEDULE - +4P i - - pdf - -
L03 BILL OF INSTALLATION / ASSEMBLY MATERIALS - +4P R - - pdf - M
L04 BOLT/FASTENER AND GASKET SCHEDULE - +4P R - - pdf - M
L06 NOT USED
L09 INSTRUMENT INDEX - +4P R - C NFF V -


P = Purchase Order

W = Periodic Issue

+ = After
WI = When Issued
# = Number of Weeks


X = With Quotation
Submit "Certified"
Submission Timing
applicable
M = MRB
V = VMC
L11 CABLE SCHEDULES - +4P R - C NFF V -

L13 LINE LIST (PIPING) - +4P R - C NFF V -
L14 VALVE INDEX - +4P R - C NFF V -
L21 REGISTER OF SAFETY RELATED DEVICES (SRD) - +4P R - C NFF V -
L40 PARTS LIST - +4P R - C pdf V -
L41 ALARM AND TRIP SUMMARY - +4P R - C pdf V -
L42 SUBSUPPLIER ITEMS LIST X +4P R - C pdf V -
L43 DATA/SERIAL LINK INDEX - +4P R - C pdf V -
L43 DATA/SERIAL LINK INDEX - +4P R - C pdf V -
L44 INPUT/OUTPUT (IO) SCHEDULE - +4P R - C NFF V -
L45 SOFTWARE LIST - +4P R - C pdf V -
L50 LABEL SCHEDULE - +4P R - C pdf V -
L00 LISTS - Others (Not Listed Above)
M Maintenance, Operation
M01 VENDOR MECHANICAL CATALOG - PTS R - C HC+pdf V -

M02 MAINTENANCE AND LUBRICATION RECOMMENDATION - +8P R - - pdf V -
M03 RECOMMENDED START-UP AND COMMISSIONING SPARES LIST - +8P R - - pdf V -
M04 LIST OF RECOMMENDED SPARES FOR TWO YEARS OPERATION - +8P R - - pdf V -
M05 MINIMUM OPERATING SPARES RECOMMENDATION - +8P R - - pdf V -
M06 LIST OF RECOMMENDED CAPITAL SPARES - +8P R - - pdf V -
M07 RECOMMENDED CONSUMABLES FOR TWO YEARS - +8P R - - pdf V -
M08 SPECIAL MAINTENANCE AND INSTALLATION TOOL REQUIREMENTS - +8P R - - pdf V -
M09 OPERATING FLUIDS AND MATERIALS SCHEDULE - +8P R - - pdf V -
M10 VENDOR MECHANICAL CATALOG - TABLE OF CONTENTS - +8P R - - pdf V -
M12 RECOMMENDED MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE - +8P R - - pdf V -
M13 CATALOGUE DATA - +8P R - - pdf V -
M15 MAINTENANCE (PROCEDURES) MANUAL - +8P R - - pdf V -
M17 OPERATING MANUAL - +8P R - - pdf V -
M23 LIFE CYCLE COST - +8P R - - pdf V -
M24 CMMS DATABASE DEVELOPMENT - +8P R - - pdf V -
M00 MAINTENANCE, OPERATIONS - Others (Not Listed Above)
P Procedures
P01 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN - INCLUDING COMPANY ORG CHART & INDEX OF QUALITY PROCEDURES X +2P R - - pdf - M
P02 HYDROSTATIC/PNEUMATIC TEST PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M
P03 NON-DESTRUCTIVE EXAMINATION (NDE) PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M
P04 WELD PROCEDURE SPECIFICATION (WPS) - +6P R - - pdf - M
P05 PERFORMANCE TESTING & FACTORY/FIELD ACCEPTANCE TEST PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M
P06 ENVIRONMETAL TEST PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M


P = Purchase Order

W = Periodic Issue

= Before 2W = document to be submitted every 2 weeks

-
+ = After
WI = When Issued
# = Number of Weeks

X = With Quotation

Submit "Certified"
Submission Timing
= Portable Document Format
applicable
pdf
M = MRB
V = VMC
P07 SURFACE PREPARATION AND PAINTING / COATING PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M

P08 FIELD SUPPORT RECOMMENDATIONS - +6P R - - pdf - M
P09 SHIPPING, HANDLING AND STORAGE PROCEDURES - +8P R - - pdf - M
P10 ERECTION AND INSTALLATION PROCEDURE - +8P R - - pdf V -
P11 CLEANING/PICKLING OF EXTERNAL PIPING SYSTEMS - +8P R - - pdf - M
P12 HEAT TREATMENT PROCEDURES - +4P R - - pdf - M
P13 FIREPROOF INSULATION AND LAGGING APPLICATION PROCEDURE - +4P R - - pdf - M
P16 INSPECTION AND TEST PLAN - +2P R - - pdf - M
P17 NOISE MEASUREMENT AND TEST PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M
P18 LUBRICATION OIL SYSTEM FLUSHING PROCEDURE - +6P R - - pdf - M
P19 DIMENSIONAL CHECK PROCEDURES - +6P R - - pdf - M
P21 MANUFACTURING PROCEDURE - +4P R - - pdf - M
P22 WEIGHING PROCEDURE - +6P R - - pdf - M
P24 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HS&E) PLAN - +6P R - - pdf - M
P29 START-UP AND COMMISSIONING PLAN(S)/PROCEDURES(S) - +6P R - - pdf V -
P37 CONTROL SYSTEM INSTALATION PROCEDURE - +6P R - - pdf V -
P38 POSITIVE MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION (PMI) PROCEDURES - +4P R - - pdf - M
P39 RISK MANAGEMENT PLAN X - R - - pdf V -
P00 PROCEDURES - Others (Not Listed Above)
Q Certification and Warranties
Q01 WEIGHT REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q02 CODE COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATES - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q03 OVERSPEED TEST RECORDS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q04 CORROSION TEST RECORDS - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q05 ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT HEAT RUN TEST RECORDS - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q06 IMPULSE VOLTAGE TEST RECORD - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q07 ELECTRICAL SHORT CIRCUIT TEST RECORD - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q08 NAMEPLATE RUBBINGS / PHOTOS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q09 HYDROSTATIC / PNEUMATIC TEST CERTIFICATES - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q10 SEISMIC DESIGN CERTIFICATE X PTS R - - pdf V -
Q11 PERFORMANCE / ACCEPTANCE TEST REPORT(S) - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q12 NOISE REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q13 INSTRUMENTED MECHANICAL RUN OR DYNAMIC TEST RECORDS - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q14 CODE DATA REPORTS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q15 SUPPLIER METAL ALLOY AND TEMPER CERTIFICATE - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q16 MATERIAL SAFETY DATA SHEETS (MSDS) - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q17 RELIABILITY / AVAILABILITY DATA AND CALCUALTIONS X +4P R - - pdf V -
Q18 CALIBRATION RESULT REPORTS (SPECIFY) - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q19 WELDING ROD CHEMICAL ANALYSIS CERTIFICATE - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q20 WELDER CODE QUALIFICATION CERTIFICATE - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q21 WELDER PERFORMANCE QUALIFICATION CERTIFICATES - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q22 NDE OPERATOR QUALIFICATIONS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q23 NDE RECORDS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q24 HEAT TREATMENT RECORDS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q25 DIMENSIONAL REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q26 NOT USED


P = Purchase Order
Requirements
+2P / +4P / +6p / +8P = document to be submitted
Manuals
D = Dispatch
Document Format: Hard Copy (HC)

Requisition / Purchase Order Line
W = Periodic Issue
2W = document to be submitted every 2 weeks
ItemNos. to which applicable

- = Before

+ = After
WI = When Issued

# = Number of Weeks
Submit "Certified"
Submission Timing
X = With Quotation PTS = Prior to issue of Purchasers Inspection
HC = Hard Copy
M= MRB
V = VMC
Shipment
...or
Q27 MATERIAL TEST CERTIFICATE - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q28 VIBRATION REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q29 LIFTING EQUIPMENT TEST CERTIFICATES - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q30 POSITIVE MATERIAL IDENTIFICATION (PMI) REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q31 VALVE FIRE TEST REPORTS / CERTIFICATES X PTS R R - pdf V -
Q32 WELD PROCEDURE QUALIFICATION RECORDS (PQRs) - +4P R - - pdf - M
Q33 FIREPROOF INSULATION AND LAGGING APPLICATION RECORDS - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q34 EQUIPMENT HAZARDOUS AREA CERTIFICATES - +4P R - - pdf - M
Q35 PRODUCTION TEST RESULTS - PTS R - - pdf V -
Q38 EMISSIONS CERTIFICATES - PTS R - - pdf V -
Q45 ROUTINE TEST CERTIFICATES - ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q46 SURFACE PREPARATION / PAINTING / COATINGS INSPECTION REPORT - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q47 INSTALLATION DOSSIER - PTS R - - pdf V -
Q48 MANUFACTURING RECORDS BOOK - PTS R - C pdf - M
Q49 MATERIAL TRACEABILITY MAPS / RECORDS - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q50 WELD MAP - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q51 MOTOR TEST REPORTS - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q52 MANUFACTURING RECORDS BOOK - TABLE OF CONTENTS - +8P R - - pdf - M
Q53 CERTIFICATES OF COMPLIANCE - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q54 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE CERTIFICATES / REPORTS - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q55 HARDNESS TEST RESULTS AND NACE CERTIFICATION - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q56 PROOF LOAD TEST RESULTS - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q57 REDUCED SECTION TENSILE RESULTS - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q58 IN-PROCESS MATERIAL TEST RESULTS - PTS R R - pdf - M
Q59 INSPECTION RELEASE NOTICES - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q60 SUPPLIER CLARIFICATIONS / TQ / DEVIATION REQUESTS AND RECORDS X WI / PTS R - - pdf - M
Q61 RADIOGRAPHIC INSPECTOR'S QUALIFICATION CERTIFICATE - PTS - R - pdf - M
Q62 RADIOGRAPHIC TEST RECORDS PTS - R - pdf - M
Q63 NOT USED
Q64 DESTRUCTIVE TEST RESUTLS/CERTIFICATES (SPECIFY - 0THER THAN Q27 ABOVE) - PTS R - - pdf - M
Q00 CERTIFICATION AND WARRANTIES - Others (Not Listed Above)
R Technical Reports and Studies
R01 HAZOP REPORTS - PTS R - - pdf V -
R22 PROGRESS REPORTS - 2W R - - pdf - -
R23 POWER SYSTEM ANALYSIS DATA - +4P R - - pdf V -
R38 NOISE CALCUALTIONS AND REPORT - +4P R - - pdf V -
R39 WEIGHT REPORT - PTS R - - pdf V -
R39 WEIGHT REPORT - PTS R - - pdf V -
R00 TECHNICAL REPORTS AND STUDIES - Others (Not Listed Above)
T Technical Data Sheets
T01 TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS - +4P R - C pdf V -
T00 TECHNICAL DATA SHEETS - Others (Not Listed Above)
X Procurement
X09 EXPERIENCE LIST (Supplier) X - R - - pdf - -
X10 ACKNOWLEDGEMENT OF PURCHASE ORDER - +2P I - - pdf - -
X11 UNPRICED COPIES OF SUB-PURCHASE ORDERS (MAJOR-ITEMS) - WI R - - pdf - M
X18 RATE SCHEDULE X - I - - pdf - M
X19 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE X +4P I - - pdf - -
X20 EXPORT LICENSES OR CLASSIFICATION DETERMINATIONS
X21 LICENSE APPLICATIONS – BIS-748P, BIS-711
X22 LICENSE APPLICATION SUPPORT DOCUMENTS – EAR REQMTS INCL. EUS.
X23 ECCNs - (included in Mechanical Catalog)
X24 SHIPPER EXPORT CONTROL DOCUMENTS (USPPI – EXXONMOBIL)
X25 SPARE PARTS LIST including ECCNs - +8P R - - pdf V -
X00 PROCUREMENT - Others (Not Listed Above)

Appendix FB – Information Requirements: Instruction to Suppliers (IRIS)
Technical Requisition - Components
MTO (Engineering Requirements) Project Requirements
Quality Requirements + Inspection Guide

Information Requirements; Instruction to Suppliers (IRIS)
The following are standard MPN/NPO Information Management Requirements for inclusion into Technical Requisitions for NPO placed
Purchase Orders. Requirements are unique to each Technical Requisition.
Owner of this Document Format is the NPO Business Services IMG Supervisor.
Notes for Use:
1. Project Requisitioning Engineers are to complete information required where shown as (ADD)
2. Amendments to these requirements during Bid Evaluation stage require written endorsement by NPO Project Quality
3. This Cover Page is required to be completed Endorsed and Approved prior to issue of the IRIS and its inclusion into the Technical
Requisition.
INFORMATION REQUIREMENTS:
INSTRUCTION TO SUPPLIERS
(IRIS)
Document Number: Tech Req’n. No / IRIS Rev: XX Date: XX / XX / XXXX
Engineering: Prepared By: ………………………………………………………… (ADD)

(Design Eng. Name / Signature /Date)
NPO Project Quality: Endorsed By: ………………………………………………. (ADD)

(Project PQC; Name / Signature /Date)
Approved By:………………………………………………………………………….. (ADD)

(Lead Eng.: Name / Signature /Date)
Note to Procurement:
 Do not include this Cover Page into the RFQ Packages
Appendix B – Information Requirements: Instruction to Suppliers (IRIS)

Appendix B – Information Requirements: Instruction to Suppliers (IRIS)
Appendix FB – Information Requirements: Instruction to Suppliers

(IRIS)
Document Number: Tech Req’n. No / IRIS Rev: XX…. (ADD)
1.0 NPO Project Details:

Program Name:………………….……..………….(ADD)
Project Name:……………………………………… (ADD)
Project Technical Representative (Name)............................................................................ (ADD)
Project DCC Representative (Name).................................................................................. (ADD)
2.0 Contents:
This Information Requirements; Instructions to Suppliers document contains the following:
- 3.0 Supplier Information - Definition
- 4.0 General Instructions
- 5.0 Purchasers SDRL Requirements
- 6.0 Supplier Data Requirements (SDRL) – Notes for Use
- 7.0 SDRL Codes
- 8.0 Supplier Document Register (SDR)
- 9.0 Manufacturing Record Book (MRB) & Vendor Mechanical Catalogues (VMC)
- 10.0 Supplier Certified Documents
- 11.0 Numbering of Supplier Documents
- 12.0 Document Transmittal Notes
- 13.0 Purchaser’s process for review of Supplier Documents
- 14.0 Quantities and Document Format Requirements
- 15.0 VMC Dossier Hard Copy Binding Details
Appendices of Appendix D of the Coordination Procedures (Exhibit C):
- Appendix A: Transmittal Note
- Appendix B: Company SDR Form
- Appendix C: Supplier Review Sheet
- Appendix D: Supplier Review Sheet – PDF Decal
- Appendix E: Company Response Sheet
3.0 Supplier Information - Definition

“Supplier Information” is defined as being both documents and data:
4.0 General Instructions

1) All Supplier Documents shall show Supplier's document number with latest Suppliers document
revision and shall include; document title; equipment tag number(s) equipment description(s),
Purchase Order number, Project SDRL Code.
2) All Supplier documentation submitted to Company for review and approval shall be submitted in
electronic format unless otherwise identified within the Purchase Order.
3) On re-submittal of multipage documents, Supplier shall re-submit all pages of the document. The
Supplier is required to revise the title block and/or the revision history table of the document to
indicate which page(s) have been revised and provide a description of the revision.
4) Transmittal Notes and Supplier documentation shall be transmitted between Supplier and
Company/Purchaser by means of email or, where document files are large or where additional
security is required for the documents being transmitted, Company’s approved secure “MOVEit
DMZ” ftp site shall be used.
In the case where a Supplier wishes to utilize their own secure ftp site, prior approval must be
obtained from Company. The secure ftp site to be used shall be agreed at the post award kick-off
meeting.
In all cases when the agreed secure ftp site is used for document transmittals, the transmittal shall
be notified by email from the specified sender to the specified recipient.
5) Purchaser’s review and approval of Supplier's documents shall not relieve Supplier from
responsibility for compliance with specified requirements of the Purchase Order.
Purchaser’s review and approval of Supplier's documents shall not relieve Supplier from
responsibility for correctness, safe working and quality of engineering design, materials,
workmanship standards, testing and inspection and all other matters pertaining to the supply of the
purchased items.
6) Information Requirements specified in this document as being applicable to the SUPPLIER are equally applicable to
all sub-Suppliers.
5.0 Purchaser’s SDRL Requirements:

ADD…….. <The following is an example of the SDRL format to be completed by the Requisitioning
Discipline Engineer while making reference to GP 12-01-14 and other GP supplements - as modified
for NPO Use.>
( Note: <….Delete….> when completing the IRIS)
pdf
NFF
1

6.0 Supplier Data Requirements List (SDRL) – Notes for Use

The SDRL is a list of Supplier information deliverables required by the Purchaser to be submitted by the
Supplier for Purchaser’s information / Review and Purchaser’s Records. The SDRL is unique to each
Request for Quotation (RFQ) and Purchase Order and is used to identify to Bidders and Suppliers the
Purchaser’s minimum requirements for document submissions at Bid stage and for Purchase Order
execution. The SDRL consists of:
- List of documents required to be submitted to Purchasers
- Timing of submissions
- Documents required to be included into Manufacturing Record Books and Vendor Mechanical
Catalogues
- Document File Formats to be provided
Notes to Bidders
Any deviations from submittal schedule and scope of Purchasers requirements, as identified in the SDRL,
shall be shown in the comments and exception section of Bidder’s Quotation.
Bidders shall use the Purchasers SDRL issued with the Bid Package to identify Bidder’s information to be
submitted with Bids. The SDRL shall be finalized and agreed during pre-award discussions for
information to be supplied during execution of the PO. The agreed SDRL will be issued with the PO.
(See Section 5.0 – for Purchaser’s SDRL for this RFQ package / Purchase Order)
7.0 SDRL Codes

Purchaser’s SDRL codes shall be used when submitting Supplier documentation to COMPANY. This is a
mandatory requirement. The SDRL codes will be added by the Purchaser to the SDRL form when the
SDRL is produced and this same SDRL code shall be used by Suppliers when issuing their SDRs. (See
section 8.0)
Note: In cases where a document may satisfy multiple Project SDRL codes, the first alphanumeric code
of the SDRL that applies to a document shall be listed on the document. Other Project SDRL item code(s)
that apply to this document shall be listed in alpha numeric order of occurrence.
8.0 Supplier Document Register (SDR)

After Purchase Order award and within the timeframe required by the SDRL, the Supplier shall submit its
Supplier Document Register (SDR). The SDR shall correspond and align to the Purchaser’s SDRL and
will show actual dates proposed for submission of Supplier’s information.
Supplier shall use a SDR format acceptable to Purchaser. Purchaser’s own SDR format (Appendix B) is
preferred however; Supplier’s own SDR format may be used provided essential elements of Purchasers
SDR format are included:
Instruction for use of the SDR is given in Appendix B. This instruction will apply irrespective of
Purchaser or Supplier’s SDR format being used.
(See Appendix B – for Purchaser’s typical SDR format)
9.0 Manufacturing Record Book (MRB) & Vendor Mechanical Catalogues (VMC)
Dossiers
1) Supplier shall prepare and submit for Purchaser’s review and acceptance a MRB (SDRL Code Q48) and
VMC (SDRL Code M01) Dossiers as required by the PO SDRL. Each MRB & VMC Dossier shall be
structured, organized and indexed for ease of document retrieval.
2) MRB and VMC Dossiers shall be delivered to Purchaser in electronic and Hard Copy format as
required within Section 14.0 of these Instructions to Suppliers.

3) As required by the SDRL, Supplier shall submit for Purchaser’s review a proposed and detailed Index
for each MRB and VMC Dossiers.
4) “Certified” Documents (see section 10.0 below) shall be compiled into the VMC Dossiers.
5) For complex equipment packages the Supplier will be required to comply with Purchasers Global
Practice GP 21-01-02 Upstream Project Technical Documentation Requirements and Deliverables. This
will be specified in the Purchase Order.
6) Contractor shall prepare the documentation progressively and consistently in parallel with the
progress of actual work. Purchaser shall at all times be given access to Supplier’s documentation, as
related to the PO., for review and verification of status.
10.0 Supplier “CERTIFIED” Documents

Supplier Documents, when reviewed by Purchaser and given Company Response Comment Code
(CRC) 1 shall be stamped “CERTIFIED”.
e.g.
CERTIFIED
The “CERTIFIED” requirements shall apply for the following Supplier Documents
- All documents requiring to be included into the VMC Dossier
- MRB and VMC Dossiers.
Purchaser shall review the MRB and VMC Dossiers and when given CRC code 1 the Supplier shall stamp
“Certified”, sign and date the inside front sheet of the Dossier and resubmit to Purchaser.
Notes:
1) A document that requires review and approval shall not bear the words "Certified," in the title
block, revision record, or anywhere on the document, until that document is returned to Supplier
marked "no comments" (CRC Code 1) or until Supplier has complied with Purchaser’s comments
when that document has been indicated "approved as noted" by the Purchaser (CRC Code 2)
2) Application of term "Certified" means Supplier is declaring that the documents presented
accurately describe the goods and services supplied. Purchased equipment shall match exactly
with the information on the "Certified" document,
11.0 Numbering of Supplier Documents

11.1 Supplier's Own Numbering System
All Supplier documents shall be numbered in accordance with Supplier’s own numbering system. The
Supplier document number and revision number shall be stated on all pages of the document.
11.2 Project Numbering of Supplier Documents
In addition to the Supplier’s own number, the Purchaser’s Project Document Number is required for
each Supplier document.
Purchaser is responsible for allocating Project document number to Supplier documents. This will be
done on receipt of Supplier’s first submission of each Supplier’s documents. Purchaser will append the
Project document number to the Supplier Review Sheet {SRS} (see Section 13.0) and will return the
SRS to the Supplier together with Purchasers’ review comments and CRC Code. Thereafter, the
Supplier will be responsible to continue to use the Purchasers document number for all subsequent
revisions and submissions of the document.
12.0 Document Transmittal Note

Supplier shall submit Supplier documentation for review to Purchaser via the Transmittal Note system.
The method for document file transfer will be agreed during pre-award discussions and finalized during
the post-award Kick-off meeting. Supplier is required to acknowledge receipt of documents transmitted by
Purchaser by return of a signed copy of the Transmittal Note.

Supplier may have their own EDMS Electronic Transmittal which is only acceptable if approved by
Purchaser. The Supplier’s EDMS Transmittal must include all contact details and addressees. Supplier
document submissions should always be addressed to the respective Project Managers or designee and
addressed also to the respective Project DCC’s.
Method for transfer of large files shall be agreed between Purchaser and Supplier at the pre-award stage.
Transmittal numbering shall be agreed at pre-Purchase Order award.
Typically the format will be: T-MPN-XXX-ZZZZ to Supplier (ZZZZ).
Transmittal Codes, FTP transfer and overall process are to be agreed prior to Contract Award.
(See Appendix A –Purchaser’s Transmittal Note)
13.0 Purchaser’s process for Review and Comment of Supplier Documents

13.1 Supplier Review Sheet (SRS) and PDF Decal
Supplier is required to use Company/Purchaser’s “Supplier Review Sheet” (SRS) or “PDF Decal” for
each Supplier document submitted. Use of the SRS or PDF Decal enables the Purchaser, without
changing the integrity of a Supplier’s document, to implement the Purchaser’s document review and
comment process.
The SRS is provided in two formats:

1. SRS - A4 size (see Appendix C)
2. SRS - PDF Decal (see Appendix D)
The SRS – A4 size shall be used for;
 all major compiled documents such as the Manufacturing Record Book and Vendor Mechanical
Catalogue
 sub-vendor “off-the shelf” catalogues
 single page drawings where there is no place to add additional notation (i.e. PDF Decal)
 multiple page and single page documents (e.g. material certificates)
The SRS PDF Decal shall be used;
 Where appropriate on pdf drawings and documents
 Where sufficient space is available.
Notes:
i. The SRS process and responsibilities must be agreed pre-Award and formalized at post- Award
Kick-off meetings.
ii. Project Document ‘Submittal Number’ is required for each document submission The ‘Submittal
Number’ shall be added to the Supplier Review Sheet (see Section 12) in a numerical sequence
i.e. 01 shall be first submission, 02 for the second etc. and shall be incremented with every
submission of the document, after technical changes, cosmetic changes and status code changes
have been made.
iii. Company shall review documents and return to Contractor via the agreed Transmittal Note
system.
13.2 Company Response Sheet (CRS)

The CRS shall be used to return comments back to the Supplier where the CRC is 1, 2, 3 or 4.
(See Appendix E – Company Response Sheet (CRS)
13.3 Company Response Codes (CRC)

Notes: 1) The following codes are applied to the CRS, by Purchaser, on completion of document
reviews.
2) Revision numbers referred to in the table below refer to Company document numbers.
Cod
Status Basis for Code Application Document Status and Required Action
e
Document is Acceptable. Work associated with document

REVIEWED WITH may proceed. Re-issue as “CERTIFIED” (where required
1 Document is acceptable
NO COMMENTS by Company SDRL) & reissue without change as next
numeric revision number (e.g., 0, 1, 2)
Document has minor errors or comments of an
Work associated with document may proceed.
REVIEWED WITH editorial or non-technical nature that need
Comments must be addressed and incorporated prior to
2 MINOR correction, but would have no negative impact
re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev.
COMMENTS on work performed based on its content (e.g.,
number.
spelling errors, format).
Document contains errors and / or comments of Work associated with document may NOT proceed.
REVIEWED WITH
a technical nature that, although not significant, Comments must be addressed and incorporated prior to
3 MAJOR
could negatively impact work performed to the re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev.
COMMENTS
document. number.
Work associated with document may NOT proceed.

Alignment meeting between Company and Supplier is
Significant deficiencies and errors to the extent
4 NOT ACCEPTED required to re-focus effort. Comments must be addressed
that a complete re-work is required.
and incorporated prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit
at next applicable rev. number.
INFORMATION Document does not require review or was not Receipt acknowledgment only. Work associated with the
5
ONLY reviewed. document may proceed.
14.0 Quantities and Document Type Requirements

1. Supplier shall submit 1 (one) electronic copy of all data submitted for review and approval.
2. Supplier shall submit 1 (one) electronic copy of all “Certified” documents (refer to Section10 of these
Instructions to Suppliers) i.e.
- All documents requiring to be included into the VMC Dossier
- MRB and VMC Dossiers.
3. Supplier shall (in addition to the above) submit 2 (two) Hard Copies of the VMC Dossier
4. Supplier shall submit the above electronic documentation in file formats as identified in Purchaser’s
SDRL (see Section 5.0 of these Instructions to Suppliers). Electronic file formats shall be either
Original (Native) file format or pdf file format as specified in the Purchaser’s SDRL.
15. VMC Dossier Hard Copy Binding Details

VMC Dossiers shall be furnished to Company assembled and bound in accordance with the details
that follow (international paper size is indicated in parentheses):
Standard paper size is standard letter size (or A4) format. If larger sizes are required for drawings, such
drawings shall be reduced to standard tabloid size (or A3) for binding.
Standard binder is a three-ring hard-backed binder with a backbone hinge and with a maximum spine
width of 4 in. (100 mm) Binders shall not be filled to the point of impeding easy page turning.
Hard copy compiled documents shall include hard index tabbed dividers between sections at the main
heading level. Colored sheets are acceptable for separation between documents within the sections.
Larger document pages shall be reduced to standard tabloid size (or A3) for binding. Plot plans, process
flow diagrams, piping and instrument diagrams, and electrical one-line diagrams shall be reduced to a
size no smaller than standard tabloid size (or A3) and shall be clearly legible at their reduced size.
All tabloid (or A3) size drawings shall be tri-folded or shall be included in a tabloid (A3) size binder.
Drawings that cannot be reduced to standard tabloid (or A3) size without loss of clarity shall be
handed over individually folded and in plastic sleeves, with the title block facing outwards.
Where two or more sets of binders are required, they shall be of consistent binding.
All binders shall have outside front cover and spine transparent plastic pockets with inserts. Inserts shall
be pre-printed and shall Contain; Company’s Project Name + Suppliers Name + Company’s Purchase

Order Number + Suppliers Works Reference Number + Company’s Document Number and Revision
Number + Suppliers Document Number and Revision Number.

A.F.A.1 Appendix FB-A - Transmittal Note

Mobil Produc ing Nige ria Ultd
Document Transmittal Note
Project Name: Date:
Contract No. : Transmittal No:
Sheet xx of yy
TO: FROM:
SUBJECT:
Item Issue SDRL Review

Document Number Rev Document Title
No. Status Code Code
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Transmitted by: Please return acknowledgment of receipt to the originator

Name: Received by:
Signature: Signature:
Date: Date:
Distribution:
Distribution Code:
T = Transmittal Only E = Electronic Copy
O = Original File Format
MPN Review Code:

[1] = Accepted ( Re-Submit “Certified” where required by SDRL) [4] = Not Accepted (Rework to address comments)
[2] = Minor comments (Revise & Re-Submit to next revision) [5] = Information Only (Doc does not require review
[3] = Major comments (Revise & Re-Submit to next revision)
Issue Status:
[IFI] = Issued For Information [IFR] = Issued for Review [CERTIFIED] = Final
Comments:

Appendix FB-B: Company SDR Form

Instructions for Supplier for the use of the SDR:
1. The SDR shall be submitted to Purchaser in Microsoft® Excel format 4. Purchaser’s SDRL Codes shall be used when completing the SDR and when submitting
documents
2. The SDR is the first document to be prepared and submitted and shall list all documents to be submitted to Purchaser. 5. The SDR shall be updated on an ongoing basis by the Supplier who shall
submit updated SDR
3. First submission of the SDR is required for Purchasers endorsement prior to Suppliers submission of other revisions at timings requested by Purchaser.
Documents & Drawings. 6. The SDR is a "stand-alone" document. It is NOT a cover sheet for submittal of other
documents.
SUPPLIER DOCUMENT REGISTER (SDR) Doc. No.
Proj. No. Package Name

Purchase Order No. Supplier
SDR Rev Date Issue Description Originator: Checked By: Approved By:
Equipment Tag Number Equipment Name:
Status Certified
SDRL Endorse Final
Supplier Document Number Project Document Number Document Title Rev. Code Planned Date Forecast Date Actual Date
Code Y/N Required
(CRC) Y/N

Appendix BC - Supplier Review Sheet (SRS) (A4 Sheet) Appendix BD - Supplier Review Sheet (SRS)
(PDF Decal)
MOBIL PRODUCING NIGERIA
SUPPLIERS REVIEW SHEET (FOR A4/A3 DOCUMENTS)
DOCUMENT
TITLE
SUPPLIERS
REV NO.
DOCUMENT No
SUPPLIERS
REFERENCE ORDER No. SUPPLIER TO COMPLETE
SUPPLIER NAME:
TOTAL No. OF PAGES
SUBMITTED FOR : Review Information Purchase Order No.:
(INCLUDING FRONT SHEET)
SDR Number:
SUPPLIER TO COMPLETE 1st Issue: Yes/No Submittal No:
SUPPLIER NAME: SDRL Code:

Issued “CERTIFIED” Yes/No:
Purchase Order No.:
MPN TO COMPLETE
SDR Number:
MPN Document Number Rev:
1st Issue: Yes/No Submittal No.

PROJECT NAME:
SDRL Code: Name:
Originating Engin’r Sign:
Issued “CERTIFIED” Yes/No:
Date Returned:
MPN TO COMPLETE MPN Comment Response Code:
Document is Acceptable. Work associated with document may proceed. Re-issue without
MPN Document Number Rev No: 1
No
change & Re-submit at next applicable rev. number. Re-issue as “CERTIFIED” if a VCM
Comments document or MRB/VCM Dossier.
PROJECT NAME: Minor Work associated with document may proceed. Comments must be addressed and
2 incorporated prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Comments
Name: Major Work associated with document may NOT proceed. Comments must be addressed and
Originating Engineer 3 incorporated prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Sign:
Comments
Work associated with document may NOT proceed. Alignment meeting between Company
4 Not Accepted and Supplier is required to re-focus effort. Comments must be addressed and incorporated
Date Returned: prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Information
MPN Comment Response Code: 5 Receipt acknowledgment only. Work associated with the document may proceed.
Only
Document is Acceptable. Work associated with document may proceed. Re-issue without
No
1 change & Re-submit at next applicable rev. number. Re-issue as “CERTIFIED” if a VCM
Comments document or MRB/VCM Dossier.
Minor Work associated with document may proceed. Comments must be addressed and
2
Comments incorporated prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Major Work associated with document may NOT proceed. Comments must be addressed and
3
Comments incorporated prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Work associated with document may NOT proceed. Alignment meeting between Company
4 Not Accepted and Supplier is required to re-focus effort. Comments must be addressed and incorporated
prior to re-issue. Revise and Re-submit at next applicable rev. number.
Information
5 Receipt acknowledgment only. Work associated with the document may proceed.
Only

Appendix FB-E – Company Response Sheet


Appendix FC Documents for COMPANY - Formats and Quantities
Electronic Files
Hard
Document Category Original;
pdf Copy
File Format
REPORTS
Progress Reports 1 - -
Planning Schedules 1 - -
Cost Estimates 1 - -
ENGINEERING & TECHNICAL
i) Documents: Specifications, Calculations, , Data Sheets, and Bills of Material, Plans, Philosophies,
Studies etc.
a) For Review 1 - -
b) Final 1 - -
c) Technical Querys & Deviations Requests to JOB SPECIFICATION 1 - -
ii) Indexes, Registers, Schedules, Lists & Matrices
a) Engineering & Technical - 1 -
b) Document Lists (MDRs, SMDRs, DDMs, SDDMs etc.) - 1 -
iii) Drawings
a) CAD Drawings - For Review 1 - -
b) CAD Drawings - Final (As-Built)) 1 1 -
c) Other Drawings 1 - -
MANUFACTURER’S INFORMATION
i) Documents:& Drawings - For Review & Final (Certified) 1 - -
ii) Indexes, Registers, Schedules, Lists & Matrices
a) Engineering & Technical - 1 -
b) Document Lists - (SDRs etc.) - 1 -
iii) Manufacturer’s Dossiers
a) Manufacturer’s Records Books (MRBs) 1 - -
b) Vendor Mechanical Catalogues (VMCs) 1 - 2
c) Operations, Installation & Maintenance Manuals 1 - -
iv) Spare Parts
a) Recommended Parts Lists - 1 -
b) Spare Parts Control Log - 1 -
MATERIALS
i) Materials Status Reports 1 - -
ii) Expediting Reports 1 - -
CONSTRUCTION & INSTALLATION
i) Documents & Drawings - For Review 1 - -
ii) Red-line As Builts 1 - -
iii) Construction Records Dossiers 1 - -
MECHANICAL COMPLETION &SYSTEMS COMPLETION
i) Documents & Drawings 1 - -
ii) Red-line As Builts 1 - -
iii) Mechanical Completion & Systems Completion Dossiers 1 - -
iv) Mechanical Completion & Systems Completion Data Base - 1 -
PROCUREMENT
a) CONTRACTOR's Proposed Source List 1 - -
b) Revisions 1 - -


c) Inquiry Requisition with Specs 1 - -

d) Release of Inquiry for Bids – Bid 1 - -
e) Summary & Purchase Recommendation 1 - -
f) Purchase Order with Attachments 1 - -
g) Subcontracts 1 - -
h) Record of Orders 1 - -
i) Ocean & Air Bills of Lading 1 - -
j) Follow-up Correspondence with Suppliers, incl. Drawing & Procedure Approvals 1 - -
k) Minutes of Meetings With Suppliers & Subcontractors 1 - -
Notes:
1. Information shall be supplied in formats and quantities described in the table above unless otherwise
specified by COMPANY
2. For Document Types and Formats not listed in the above table, CONTRACTOR shall request
clarification from COMPANY with respect to format & quantities required by COMPANY.
3. Where Native File formats are specified Documents, Drawings and Databases shall be supplied in
formats as listed in Table 1 of GP 21-01-02
4. All final documentation (DFO) packages shall be supplied in CD/DVD format


Appendix FD: INTERFACE MANAGEMENT

FD-1: Interface Management Process


FD-2: Interface Agreement Form


Appendix FE: CHANGE ORDER Form
[Insert Project Name] CHANGE ORDER Form Date:
CONTRACT Name: CONTRACT No.:

COMPANY: [Insert Here]
CONTRACTOR: [Insert Here]
CHANGE ORDER Number:
CHANGE ORDER Title:
Description of Proposed Change :
Reason for Change:
Safety/Health/Environment Estimate Adjustment ROI
Security Schedule Acceleration Pre-investment
Operability/Reliability/Maintainability COMPANY Preference Constructability
Regulatory Transfer Other
Portion of WORK affected (reference JOB SPECIFICATION / System / etc.):

Deliverables :
Special Conditions :
Effect on CONTRACT PRICE:

Current CONTRACT PRICE: + Change Value = Adjusted CONTRACT PRICE
US $ <<or state applicable currency>> + US $ = US $
Cost build up and justification : (Reference to Change Request/Proposal Number)
Effect on SCHEDULED COMPLETION DATE :
Effect on CONTRACT SCHEDULE:
Effect on Project interfaces, other Contractors, third parties etc.:
Weight Impact :
CHANGE ORDER: CONTRACTOR shall be authorized to proceed with the Change as described above when this CHANGE
ORDER is signed by COMPANY. When the CHANGE ORDER is signed by both COMPANY and CONTRACTOR, then the
Parties shall be obligated to fulfill the terms and conditions of the CONTRACT as may be modified above in respect of this
CHANGE ORDER. The price adjustment and impact to schedule, if any, reflected in this CHANGE ORDER represents the full
and complete adjustment to the CONTRACT for the scope of work presented in the Change Request. NO FURTHER CHANGE
ORDER SHALL BE REQUESTED BY CONTRACTOR OR AUTHORIZED BY COMPANY TO REFLECT A SCHEDULE IMPACT
OR PRICE ADJUSTMENT ARISING FROM THIS CHANGE ORDER OR ANY PREVIOUSLY AUTHORIZED CHANGE
ORDER(S), EITHER SINGULARLY, COLLECTIVELY, AND/OR CUMULATIVELY. Nothing in this CHANGE ORDER shall be
construed as a precedent for future CHANGE ORDERS. This CHANGE ORDER is executed in duplicate originals on the date
shown below.
For CONTRACTOR: For COMPANY :
Signed by : Authorized by :
Print Name : Print Name :
Date : Date :


Appendix FF: SPECIFICATION DEVIATION REQUESTS

a) CONTRACTOR is to submit Specification Deviation requests using the Specification Deviation
Request (SDR) form shown in Figure FF-3. Subcontractor and Supplier-initiated requests are
submitted and screened via the CONTRACTOR. The requester completes SDR Section 1,
including an indication as to whether the change affects a Project Specification either as a one-
time deviation or a permanent change. Sufficient details should be provided, including GP
number and, if applicable, pertinent attachments such as drawings, calculations, test reports, and
Supplier requests.
b) Work processes used by CONTRACTOR, Subcontractors and Suppliers must not circumvent the
Specification Deviation Process. These processes include Technical Queries, Requests for
Information or suggested changes during kick off meetings or drawing reviews. Any
recommended changes to specifications must be captured through the Specification Deviation
process.
c) The requester submits the SDR to the Project Team Engineer Lead (EL), who assigns a number to
the request, records it in the COMPANY SDR log and starts processing the SDR.
d) Upon completion of the technical review and Functional approval, if required, the SDR is
forwarded to the EL for final disposition (SDR Section 2). The need for a Change Proposal is
also evaluated at this time and noted in this section. If a Change Proposal is required, it must be
completed before the SDR is fully approved.
e) The EL returns the SDR to CONTRACTOR with COMPANY's response. If an approved SDR
recommends a change to a Project Specification, CONTRACTOR shall initiate a revision or
addendum to the Specification to incorporate the change. CONTRACTOR shall distribute the
revised specification to all applicable Subcontractors and Suppliers. Until the Specification is
revised, the approved SDR provides approval of the Specification Deviation. The SDR log is
used to track revision status of the affected Specification.
f) Both COMPANY and CONTRACTOR verify in SDR Section 3 that the Specification Deviation
was executed in accordance with the SDR.


Figure FF-3: Specification Deviation Request Form

Specification Deviation Request Form Version 2
Project CONTRACT Number Contractor/Supplier
SDR Number SDR Title Revision: Page [x] of [y]
(To modify check boxes within Word, right click on the check box, select Properties, and then change "Default Value" to
checked)
Part I
(Request, Response, and Verification)
Section 1: CONTRACTOR Request for Specification Deviation
Specification Number: Section: Paragraph:
Specification or Document Title:
Global Practice Number (Cross reference of specification number to GP)
Description of Requested Specification Deviation (attach additional sheets if necessary):
Discipline Equipment Type

Reason for Requested Specification Deviation (attach additional sheets if necessary):
Attach documents with all information required to evaluate the Specification Deviation (e.g., P&IDs, ISOs, Material Selection
Worksheets, calculations).
Attachments provided? Yes (If yes, provide list here) No
Reference any associated NCR, TQ, RFI Concession Request, CAR, etc., or enter N/A if none
One-time Specification Deviation to Project Spec Requirement

Permanent Change to Project Spec, Applicable to All of Current Project Work (If Specification Deviation is approved,
CONTRACTOR is required to update Project Spec and reissue)
If this is a one-time Specification Deviation, describe affected equipment/component (including tag number, if applicable) and
location:
Requester's Name: Requester's Organization:

Date:
Requesting Organization Approver Position: Approval Signature and Date:
Section 2: COMPANY Response to Specification Deviation Request
(To Be Completed after Part II is Completed)
Specification Deviation is technically acceptable Specification Deviation request rejected
Specification Deviation is technically acceptable only if implemented Implement alternative (see comments)
with exceptions or conditions described below (see comments)



checked)
Note: One of these boxes must be selected for COMPANY Response to be valid:
Change Proposal required. CONTRACTOR shall prepare and obtain COMPANY approval of a Change Proposal prior to
implementation of any Specification Deviation associated with this request.
Change Proposal not required. Proceed with implementation.
Comments (Attach additional sheets if necessary):
Is CONTRACTOR verification of implementation required? Yes No

Project Team endorsements as required by Engineering Manager (initials and dates):
Process Operations
I&C ____________ Structural ____________
_____________ __________
Mech.
Electrical ____________ Materials ____________
_____________ Construction:__________
Mach.
Sub/PL
_____________ Risk/LP ____________ Sys. Compl ____________
______________
Other
_____________
Responsible Engineer who prepared response: Signature and Date:
PT Engineering Manager or higher if required: Signature and Date (only after completion of Sect 4-8 as
required):
Section 3: CONTRACTOR Verification of Implementation

Implementation Actions Completed by CONTRACTOR:
Have the Project Specifications been changed to reflect the Specification Deviation? Yes Not
Required
CONTRACTOR Site Lead Signature: Date:
PT Responsible Engineer Signature: Date:
Part II
(COMPANY Evaluation and Approvals)
Section 4: Impact of Change To Project
Check all that apply: None Positive Negative N/A
 Safety/Health
 Environmental
 Regulatory
 Cost (1)



checked)
 Schedule (1)
 Engineering/Construction
 Corrosion Protection
 Maintainability, Operability,
Reliability
 Weight Change
 Other
Positive impact is a reduction in cost or schedule. Negative impact is an increase in cost or schedule.
(1) MOC may be necessary
Section 5: Risk and SSH&E Screening
Mark boxes before change with 'X' and after change with 'O' or enter information here: ________________ _______________
Risk Before Change Risk After Change
Comments:
Risk/SHE Impact from this Change:
The PT may approve the Specification Deviation if the cost is within the PT
DOAG and if :
 The change reduces risks from high to medium or medium to low, or
 The Specification Deviation remains within the Low or Medium risk areas
Functional SME/Functional Manager and Project Loss Prevention Engineer

review/approvals are required if:
The change increases the risk from Lower to Moderate or Moderate to Higher,
or
 The Specification Deviation remains within the Higher Risk area, or
 The change is related to an [S] Safety or [E] Environment paragraph
DOAG 4 approval is required if:

 The change increases the risk from Moderate to Higher, or
 The Specification Deviation remains within the Higher Risk area
Discipline Engineer Signature: Date:
Loss Prevention Engineer Signature: Date:

Section 6: Engineering Lead Recommendation for Further Action/Reviews
Endorsement by Function Required? Yes No
MOC Required (consultation w/ Project Manager may be required)? Yes No
Recommend change to EMEPS Global Practice (consider changes to Yes No

requirements and/or Rationales)?
Proceed directly with returning response if (1) Functional endorsement is not required and (2) MOC is not required.
Comments:
Engineering Lead Signature: Date:

PT Engineering Manager Signature: Date:
Project Manager (only if functional endorsement, MOC, or DOAG 4 required) Date:
Section 7: COMPANY Functional Evaluation of the Specification Deviation Request
Specification Deviation endorsed Specification Deviation endorsed with exceptions



checked)
Specification Deviation not endorsed Proposed alternative
Discussion (propose alternatives or describe exceptions and record any input from COMPANY SME here):
Attach additional sheets, if necessary.
COMPANY Functional SME Signature: Date:
COMPANY Functional Manager Signature: Date:
Section 8: Distribution
Project Files: Originator (Name/Organization:
Evaluating Function (designate recipient): EMDC Facilities Operations Interface Group - EMEPS
Coordinator (all Specification Deviations)
Project Distribution (designate recipients):
Operations
Procurement _______________________________
___________________________________________
Construction
Doc Control________________________________
__________________________________________
Risk/Loss Prevention
Engr. _____________________________________
___________________________________
SSH&E_______________________________________________
Commissioning _____________________________
QA/QC
_______________________________________________
MOC Coordinator:
Other _____________________________________
______________________________________

Appendix FG: RISK REGISTER TEMPLATES
G1 - Scenario Based Risk Assessment Action Items Tracking Register

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
Findings Initial Recommendations Action Item Final Approval of Action Plan Closeout
Planned Date
Scenario/ Risk Resolution Responsible Action Plans Risk Status Latest Status/ Comments
# Causes Consequences Safeguards # Action Item of Completion Project Instl. Ops. Project
Description Rank/ Type Rank/
STATUS Action Resolution Types

Open 0 H Hardware / Design
AP Approved 0 I Installation
Ready for closure 0 P Procedures
Closed 0 S Study / Verification
Total 0 O Other
E Execution
Initial Risk Tier Action Plan Approval

Zone 1 1 or 2 VP
Zone 2 1 Senior PM
Zone 2 2 PM
Zone 1, 2 & 3 1 or 2 Ops / Constr. (as applies)
FG2 - HAZOP Action Item Tracking Template

Recommendations Action Item Planned Date Approval of Action Plan Closeout
Responsible Action Plans Status Latest Status/ Comments
# Guideword Causes Consequences Safeguards # Action Item Resolution of Completion Project Instl. Ops. Project
STATUS Action Resolution Types

Open 0 H Hardware / Design
AP Approved 0 I Installation
Ready for closure 0 P Procedures
Closed 0 S Study / Verification
Total 0 O Other
E Execution

FG3 - Loss Prevention and Other Review Recommendation / Action item Tracking Template
Action Item Planned Date Approval of Action Plan Closeout

Responsible Action Plans Status Latest Status/ Comments
# Study Name Action Item Resolution of Completion Project Instl. Ops. Project
Action Resolution Types

H Hardware / Design
I Installation
P Procedures
S Study / Verification
O Other
E Execution
FG4 - Monthly Summary Data Template

Hardware or Design Open
Installation AP Approved
Procedures Implemented
Study or Verification RFC
Execution Closed
Other
0 0
Sno AI Study Study Type Spnsr Tier Responsible Risk Rank Initiation Date Due Due Date Resolution Type Status Closeout Date

Appendix FH - ACTION ITEM CLOSEOUT TEMPLATE

g) An equivalent form can be used.
[Insert Project Name Here]
Action Item Close Out Sheet
Risk Assessment Title: Doc Number:
Hazard/Scenario
Causes
Consequences
Consequence / Probability Factors
Safeguards
Risk Before
Action Action Item
Item No.
Risk After
Action Owner Due Date
Action Plan
Action Plan Endorsement CONTRACTOR COMPANY

Discipline Engineer Name Name
Name signature Date Date
Operations/Constructions Name Name
Name Signature Date Date
Management Approval Name Name
(according to Risk Process) Date Date
Closeout Status / Resolution
Action Item Closeout Endorsement

Action Plan Endorsement CONTRACTOR COMPANY
Discipline Engineer Name Name
Name signature Date Date
Operations/Constructions Name Name
Name Signature Date Date
Management Approval Name Name
(according to Risk Process) Date Date
Discipline Engineer
Name signature
Operations/Constructions
Name Signature
Project Team Manager
Name/Signature
Supporting Documentation:
Comments:

Appendix FI - SYSTEMS COMPLETION CERTIFICATES

Issued Transfer of Responsibility
Certificate / Notice Description
From / To Care, Custody, Control
Discipline Mechanical Issued at a discipline level when installation of equipment, piping, electrical
Completion Certificate services, instrumentation/controls, and utilities are physically complete, but not
energized, and that designated inspections, tests, and checks are documented.
Subsystem Mechanical Construction Construction Issued when the subsystem is physically complete, tight, inspected, tested and
Completion Certificate to to documented, safe, and clean.
Static Static Commissioning
Commissioning
System Mechanical Construction Construction Issued when the system is physically complete, tight, inspected, tested and
Completion Certificate to to documented, safe, and clean. All Category "A" punchlists have been completed.
Static Static Commissioning
Commissioning
Partial Static Static Static Commissioning Required if part of a system needs to be dynamically commissioned.
Commissioning Commissioning to
Completion Certificate to Dynamic Commissioning
Dynamic
Commissioning
System Static Static Static Commissioning Issued after all system Static Commissioning Checksheets and activities have been
Commissioning Commissioning to completed.
Completion Certificate to Dynamic Commissioning
Dynamic
Commissioning
Partial System Ready CONTRACTOR Issued by CONTRACTOR notifying COMPANY that a partial system, is ready for
for COMPLETION to COMPLETION. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify COMPANY when
(RFC) COMPANY CONTRACTOR considers it has substantially met the criteria set forth in the JOB
SPECIFICATION for COMPLETION of the FACILITY, or any part thereof.
Partial System COMPANY CONTRACTOR Required if part of a system needs to be turned over to COMPANY. Signifies
TURNOVER NOTICE to To transfer of care, custody, and control of a Partial system from EPC CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR COMPANY to COMPANY. Issued after all activities and deliverables set forth in TCPs and all
Category "B" punchlists have been completed.
System Ready for CONTRACTOR The document issued by CONTRACTOR notifying COMPANY that a system, is
COMPLETION (RFC) To ready for COMPLETION. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify COMPANY when
COMPANY CONTRACTOR considers it has substantially met the criteria set forth in the JOB
SPECIFICATION for COMPLETION of the FACILITY, or any part thereof.

Issued Transfer of Responsibility

Certificate / Notice Description
From / To Care, Custody, Control
System TURNOVER COMPANY CONTRACTOR Signifies COMPLETION of a system and specifies the date upon which of care,
NOTICE To To custody, and control of the system will transfer from EPC CONTRACTOR to
CONTRACTOR COMPANY COMPANY. Issued after all activities and deliverables set forth in TCPs and all
Category "B" punchlists have been completed.
FACILITY Ready for CONTRACTOR N/A The document issued by CONTRACTOR notifying COMPANY that the FACILITY or
COMPLETION (RFC) To part thereof, is ready for COMPLETION. CONTRACTOR shall promptly notify
COMPANY COMPANY when CONTRACTOR considers it has substantially met the criteria set
forth in the JOB SPECIFICATION for COMPLETION of the FACILITY, or any part
thereof.
FACILITY TURNOVER COMPANY CONTRACTOR Signifies COMPLETION of the FACILITY and specifies the date upon which care,
NOTICE To To custody, and control of the entire FACILITY will transfer from EPC CONTRACTOR
CONTRACTOR COMPANY to COMPANY. Issued when all systems have been completed and documented
with System TURNOVER NOTICES.
Partial Ready for Start- Inter-Company N/A Signifies concurrence between the Project Management Team and Operating
Up Certificate Organization that part of the FACILITY is Ready for Start-Up.
Ready For Start-Up Inter-Company N/A Signifies concurrence between the Project Management Team and Operating
Certificate Organization that the FACILITY is Ready for Start-Up.
Ready for CONTRACTOR N/A CONTRACTOR's notification to COMPANY that the FACILITY has been completed
ACCEPTANCE to as per JOB SPECIFICATION defined in the CONTRACT, the Performance Test
COMPANY result has demonstrated capability to satisfy the design basis capacities and
product quality, and CONTRACTOR has furnished to COMPANY all equipment,
materials, and documents required under the CONTRACT.
ACCEPTANCE NOTICE COMPANY N/A COMPANY's agreement that: (i) FACILITY's capability to operate successfully at
to the conditions specified in Job Specification has been demonstrated, (ii)
CONTRACTOR CONTRACTOR has corrected known deficiencies and (iii) CONTRACTOR has
furnished to COMPANY, equipment, materials and documents required under the
CONTRACT.

Appendix FJ - TURNOVER AND COMPLETION PACKAGES
Turnover and Completion Package Table of Contents
1. Original Signed Certificates and Punch Lists

2. System Description, System limits, and Associated Temporary Systems
2.1. System Description
2.2. System Boundary and Limits
2.3. Pre-requisite Systems
2.4. Temporary System and Material
3. SHE Assessment
3.1. General Safety Precautions
3.2. Specific Safety Precautions
3.3. Environmental Precautions
4. Mechanical Completion and Static Commissioning Checksheet Status
4.1. MC Checksheet Status
4.2. Static Commissioning Checksheet Status
5. Supplier Support
5.1. Supplier Support Requirement
5.2. Supplier Spares Listing
6. Preservation and De-preservation
6.1. Preservation
6.2. De-Preservation
7. Commissioning Materials, Spares, Lube Oils, First Fills, and Test Equipment
7.1. Commissioning Materials
7.2. Commissioning Spares
7.3. Lubrication Oil Schedule
7.4. Initial Fill Specification
7.5. Special Tool and Test Equipment
8. Dynamic Commissioning Scope and Procedure
8.1. Dynamic Commissioning Scope
8.2. Leak Test and Service Test Requirements
8.3. Dynamic Commissioning Procedure
9. MC and Static Commissioning Checksheets and Test Reports
9.1. Mechanical Completion Checksheets

9.2. Static Commissioning Checksheets

9.3. Test Reports
10. Drawings and Supplier Information
10.1. As Built Drawings
10.2. Supplier Drawings
10.3. Supplier Data Sheets
10.4. FAT Results / Records
11. Performance Test Criteria
12. Base Line Survey Results
13. Turnover Documentation
14. Notes and Correspondence
14.1. Engineering / Site queries
14.2. General Information and Notes

Appendix FK - NIGERIAN CONTENT
CONTRACTOR’S NIGERIAN CONTENT COMMITMENTS
*Bidder must also provide a complete Nigerian Content Compliance Certificate (NCCC)
template (fill applicable portion)
NIGERIAN CONTENT DEVELOPMENT AND MONITORING BOARD
NIGERIAN CONTENT COMPLIANCE CERTIFICATE
NCCC/OP/UP/Ol/IO
OPERATOR/PROJECT PROMOTER:
CONTRACT/PROJECT TITLE:
CONTRACT/PROJECT NO.:
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF BID:
DATE OF COMMENCEMENT OF CONTRACT:
DATE OF CONTRACT COMPLETION:
TOTAL CONTRACT VALUE:
MAIN CONTRACTOR:
SUBCONTRACTORS:
This is to certify that this Contract/Project having met all applicable provisions of the Nigerian Oil and Gas Industry Content
Development Act, 2010 as evidenced in the Agreed Nigerian Content Scope below, is hereby certified compliant for
recommendation for award.

AGREED NIGERIAN CONTENT SCOPE
NC
S/N DESCRIPTION VALUE NC % Comments/ Details on NC Value
($)
 State total engineering man hours

ENGINEERING/PROJECT
1.  State the total management man hours
MANAGEMENT
 State Nigerian positions, their number in those
positions and associated man hours.
 Names of items to be procured

PROCUREMENTS
2.  Foreign / Nigerian manufacturers involved and
addresses
 Names of project specific materials &

MATERIALS consumables needed,
3.
 Name of the Foreign / Nigerian manufacturers
involved and addresses
 Name of pipe mills
OCTG/PIPES  Location of the pipe mills

4.
 Name of pipe threading facility
 Location of pipe threading facility
FABRICATED ITEMS  Names of items to be fabricated, their Tonnages

5.
 Names of the Fab. Yards and Locations
 Names of Major Equipment/Tools

 % of Nigerian ownership
EQUIPMENTS /
6. TOOLS/VESSELS  Indicate if leased to Nigerian supplier
 Name of their manufacturers & addresses
 Maintenance & repair yards & locations
 Number of Nigerians
CONSTRUCTION/
7. INSTALLATION  Their positions
 Associated man hours
 10% of the total man-hours/project cost,

 number of Nigerians trainees
TRAINING
8.  duration, training venue and Certification
 Expatriate positions
 Number of Nigerians to understudy each positions

NC
S/N DESCRIPTION VALUE NC % Comments/ Details on NC Value
($)
 Nigerian personnel positions

PERSONNEL
9.  Number personnel in each positions
 Associated man hours for the positions
 List of designated sub-contractors or third parties
SUB-CONTRACTS/THIRD  Level of Nigerian ownership of the facilities

10. PARTIES involved
 percentage of the contract value earned by
Nigerians
NIGERIAN
BANKS/INSURANCE  Provide Names Nigerian Banks/Insurance
11.
COMPANIES/LEAGL FIRMS companies/Legal Firms to be engaged
TOTAL CONTRACT VALUE

12.
TOTAL NC VALUE
13.
TOTAL NC %
14.
1% NIGERIAN CONTENT
BEING 1% OF THE CONTRACT SUM DEDUCTED
DEVELOPMENT
15. ENBLOC UPON CONTRACT AWARD AND PAID
FUND(NCDF) DEDUCTION
INTO NCDF
This Certificate is Dated …………………………….of ………………………., 20….
Certified by: ………………………………….. and .................................................................................
MD, MOBIL PRODUCING NIGERIA UNLIMITED
______________________________ ______________________________
For: Director of Legal Services For: Executive Secretary

A.F.A.2 APPENDIX FK – (b): NIGERIAN CONTENT PERFORMANCE TEMPLATE

(See attached Excel File) (Use as Applicable)

Appendix FL: MALARIA CONTROL

Company has implemented and/or requires a Malaria Control Program in Nigeria. Contractor shall
develop and implement a site-specific program for the control of malaria for its employees and
Subcontractors working in or traveling to Nigeria while providing Services to Company which should at
least be as stringent as the Company's Malaria Control Program. Such program shall, at a minimum,
include educating Contractor's employees and Subcontractors as to the following: enhanced awareness of
the disease and the seriousness of infection; steps to take to prevent bites; appropriate use of malaria
chemoprophylaxis scientifically shown to be at least as effective in preventing development of the type(s)
of malaria found in Nigeria as those medications approved by Company for its employees; and the critical
importance of early diagnosis and treatment in the event of suspected infection. In providing Services,
Contractor shall not assign, and shall ensure that its Subcontractors do not assign, any non-immune person
to work in or travel to Nigeria, if such person is unable or unwilling to agree in writing, or legally
prohibited from agreeing in writing, to comply with Contractor's malaria control program including, but
not limited to, taking appropriate malaria chemoprophylaxis and submitting to periodic, unannounced, and
random testing for the presence of chemo prophylactic medication in his/her system and Contractor shall
immediately remove from the assignment any person who after having executed such an agreement later
decides to revoke that agreement. Contractor shall also provide an emergency medical contact for its
employees who may experience possible malaria symptoms while not in a malarial area. This contact must
be familiar with the type of malaria in Nigeria, its symptoms and treatment and available 24 hours per day,
7 days per week to help facilitate the person's ability to get appropriate treatment in a timely manner.
Company shall provide a copy of its Malaria Control Program upon request for Contractor's use as a
reference in developing its program.
Company may require Contractor to verify, and ensure that its Subcontractors verify, the use of
chemoprophylaxis by their respective non-immune employees through laboratory testing or other means
acceptable to Company on a cost reimbursable basis. Upon written request from Contractor, Company will
help facilitate Contractor's use of the same personnel and laboratories for Contractor's employee testing as
Company is using for its employees. Should Contractor choose to use these personnel, Company will pay
all fees for the services provided and test results will be provided to Contractor's designated medical
review officer (not to Company or to any non-medical personnel in Contractor's organization). Should
Contractor choose to use other means for collecting, storing, testing and reporting, Company reserves the
right to audit the processes and facilities and to determine acceptability to Company of those alternative
providers. Company further reserves the right to refuse to reimburse any amount charged by the
alternative providers which is in excess of that which would have been charged had Contractor chosen to
use the same providers as Company. Company may review Contractor's program and actual
implementation measures for acceptability to Company.
Contractor agrees to provide written notice to Company within 24 hours of learning of any stewardable
case of malaria experienced by any Contractor or Subcontractor personnel providing Services to
Company. For purposes of this notification requirement, a "stewardable case of malaria" shall include any
death as a result of malaria whether previously diagnosed or not; a diagnosed case of malaria in a semi-
immune person (i.e., a person born and raised to the age of at least 5 years in a location that has similar
intensity of transmission as the location of the current malaria exposure who has not been away from such
exposure for more than 12 months preceding the current period of exposure), which also includes any one
of the following: 1) hospitalization, 2) 5% or higher level of parasitemia, or 3) meeting the World Health
Organization (WHO) criteria for severe malaria; and any diagnosis of malaria in a non-immune person
[anyone other than a "semi-immune person"].

A.F.A.3 APPENDIX FL1 - Malaria Control Program

ExxonMobil Malaria Control Program
Summary of CONTRACTOR Requirements
This document provides a summary of COMPANY Malaria Control Program (MCP) requirements, but in
no way changes contractual requirements. As a minimum, CONTRACTOR shall comply with these
requirements when working under CONTRACT to COMPANY in a malarial area (1). Refer to
COMPANY MCP document for additional details.
Requirement Scope Comment
1) Written program or All contract companies or May utilize COMPANY MCP document as a
document describing individuals that enter into a model/guide. The CONTRACTOR's program may
how MCP requirements contract with COMPANY for vary in format, length and assignment of
are satisfied (supply with work in a malarial area (1). responsibilities, but must describe how all
bid). program requirements are met. COMPANY has


the right to audit CONTRACTOR's Malaria
Control Program.
2) Ensure that personnel Applies to semi-immune (2) MCP requirements apply to the following:
are aware of the risk of and non-immune (3)
a) Contract/Subcontract personnel working at or
malaria prior to travel employees of
traveling to COMPANY owned / operated /
into / work in a malarial CONTRACTOR/
controlled premises in a malarial area (1) (see
area (1). Subcontractor living/working
definition of CONTRACTOR in COMPANY
in or traveling to a malarial
MCP document).
area (1) on COMPANY
contractual scope of work. b) Those Contract/Subcontract personnel
Includes expatriates, rotators working on COMPANY scope of work on
and business travelers for CONTRACTOR controlled premises in a
any trip duration malarial area (1).
3) Ensure that personnel Applies to semi-immune (2) CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor may develop

receive initial and annual and non-immune (3) training material or utilize that available from the
refresher training employees of COMPANY (e.g., brochure, videotape, CD-ROM,
covering Malaria CONTRACTOR/ etc.).
Awareness, Bite Subcontractor living/working
Prevention, in or traveling to a malarial
Chemoprophylaxis and area (1) on COMPANY
the importance of early contractual scope of work.
Diagnosis (ABCD). Includes expatriates, rotators
and business travelers for
any trip duration.
4) Ensure that non-immune Applies to non-immune (3) Chemoprophylaxis medication, attestation and
(3)
personnel understand employees of testing requirements apply only to non-immune (3)
that taking malaria CONTRACTOR/ CONTRACTOR/ Subcontractor personnel
chemoprophylaxis is an Subcontractor living/working working on COMPANY scope of work.
express condition of in or traveling to a malarial Semi-immune (2) personnel do not typically take
working at or traveling to area (1) (where chemoprophylaxis medication (consult your
malarial area (1)s (where chemoprophylaxis is required company's medical department/health care
chemoprophylaxis is by COMPANY) on provider for advice).
required by COMPANY). COMPANY contractual
scope of work. Includes
expatriates, rotators and
business travelers for any trip
duration.
5) Ensure that non-immune Applies to non-immune (3) Chemoprophylaxis attestation need only be
(3)
personnel have employees of completed /signed on one occasion provided that
completed and signed a CONTRACTOR/ Contract/Subcontract companies keep on file as
Malaria subcontractor living/working required.
Chemoprophylaxis in or traveling to a malarial
Attestation Form (where area (1) (where
chemoprophylaxis is chemoprophylaxis is required
required by COMPANY). by COMPANY) on
COMPANY contractual
duration.
6) File signed attestations. Applies to non-immune (3) Each employer to maintain signed attestations on
employees of file for covered personnel.
CONTRACTOR/ COMPANY has the right to audit
Subcontractor living/working CONTRACTOR's Malaria Control Program.
area (1) (where
chemoprophylaxis is required
by COMPANY) on
COMPANY contractual
duration.
7) Ensure that non-immune Applies to non-immune (3) COMPANY approved chemoprophylaxis includes


(3)
personnel are employees of Malarone, Mefloquine (Larium), and Doxycycline.
provided with CONTRACTOR/ Chloroquine may be approved for selected areas
COMPANY approved subcontractor living/working where still considered effective (i.e., Chloroquine
malaria in or traveling to a malarial sensitive areas). Consult your company's medical
chemoprophylaxis (and area (1) (where provider for advice regarding most effective
medical instructions for chemoprophylaxis is required medication for location.
use). by COMPANY) on
COMPANY contractual
duration.
8) Ensure that personnel Applies to semi-immune (2) The most effective insect repellents contain
are provided with and and non-immune (3) DEET. Follow manufacturers' application
use insect repellent employees of instructions.
containing at least 20% CONTRACTOR/
DEET when outside Subcontractor living/working
from dusk to dawn. in or traveling to a malarial
area (1) on COMPANY
contractual scope of work.
Includes expatriates, rotators
any trip duration.
9) Ensure that personnel Applies to semi-immune (2) Arrival questionnaire (see COMPANY MCP
arriving for the first time and non-immune (3) document) or other method.
in malarial area (1)s are employees of
in compliance with MCP CONTRACTOR/
requirements prior to Subcontractor living/working
work. in or traveling to a malarial
area (1) on COMPANY
any trip duration.
10 For personnel that are Applies to semi-immune (2) Permethrin can be applied to the following items:
) outside from dusk to and non-immune (3) a) Field utility uniform blouses and trousers
dawn, treat clothing with employees of b) Other working clothing such as coveralls
insecticide suited for CONTRACTOR/
c) Insect repellent ("Deet") jackets (when liquid
purpose (permethrin). Subcontractor living/working
Deet is not available)
d) Canvas GP and CP tents
area (1) on COMPANY
contractual scope of work. e) Bed nets
Includes expatriates, rotators Permethrin should not be applied to the following:
and business travelers for a) Underwear
any trip duration.
b) Hats
c) Waterproof materials including vinyl coated
tents and waterproof tent flies
d) Extreme cold weather gear ("Gore-Tex"
material)
e) MOPP gear
11 Ensure that personnel Applies to semi-immune (2) Personnel should avoid unnecessary exposure
) wear long sleeve shirts and non-immune (3) (outside) to mosquitoes during dawn to dusk
and pants when working employees of hours.
outside from dusk to CONTRACTOR/
dawn; strongly Subcontractor living/working
encourage at other in or traveling to a malarial
times. area (1) on COMPANY


any trip duration.
12 Establish and maintain Applies to semi-immune (2) Effective vector control includes but may not be
) effective vector and non-immune (3) limited to the following:
(mosquito) control at employees of
CONTRACTOR/Sub- CONTRACTOR/ a) Regularly inspect work locations and
contractor work locations Subcontractor living/working CONTRACTOR/Subcontractor provided
and provided quarters. in or traveling to a malarial accommodations.
area (1) on COMPANY b) Provide/repair window and door screens.
Includes expatriates, rotators c) Eliminate standing water where possible.
d) Fog for mosquitoes.
any trip duration.
e) Provide insecticide treated bednets where
mosquito proofing not possible or is
ineffective.
13 Ensure that non-immune Applies to non-immune (3) Each employer to administer the
) (3)
personnel submit to employees of chemoprophylaxis testing program and test
chemoprophylaxis CONTRACTOR/ percentage of personnel required by COMPANY.
verification testing where Subcontractor living/working Supply testing information to COMPANY as
required and administer in or traveling to a malarial requested.
testing program. area (1) (where
chemoprophylaxis is required Personnel that are found not to be in compliance
by COMPANY) on with COMPANY chemoprophylaxis requirements
COMPANY contractual are considered unfit for work on the COMPANY
scope of work. Includes scope of work and shall be removed from that
expatriates, rotators & scope.
duration.
14 Prior to departure from Applies to semi-immune (2) Continuing chemoprophylaxis requirements
) malarial area (1), ensure and non-immune (3) (period specified by drug manufacturer/physician).
that personnel employees of Awareness of malaria symptoms and importance
understand post- CONTRACTOR/ of early diagnosis and treatment.
exposure malaria Subcontractor living/working
precautions and in or traveling to a malarial Instructions, telephone number, etc. for contacting
information. area (1) on COMPANY physician (CONTRACTORs/ Subcontractors are
contractual scope of work. strongly encouraged to establish a program
Includes expatriates, rotators similar to COMPANY EMERS program.
any trip duration.
15 Immediately notify Applies to semi-immune (2) The definition of stewardable case is:
) COMPANY of any and non-immune (3)
Stewardable cases of employees of a) All malaria fatalities
malaria and supply CONTRACTOR/
monthly Stewardable Subcontractor living/working b) All confirmed malaria cases in non-
malaria case information in or traveling to a malarial immunes
and workhours worked area (1) on COMPANY c) Confirmed malaria cases in semi-immunes
for semi-immune (2) and contractual scope of work. with any one of the following complications:
non-immune (3) Includes expatriates, rotators
personnel. and business travelers for i) Coma
any trip duration.
ii) Generalized seizure
iii) Organ system failure (kidney failure,

liver failure, cardiovascular collapse,
respiratory failure).
16 Ensure that an Applies to semi-immune (2) Purpose of investigation is to fact find and
) investigation is and non-immune (3) strengthen MCP. Medically sensitive information
conducted for any employees of (e.g., name of patient) should not be included.
Stewardable malaria CONTRACTOR/
case to identify root Subcontractor living/working
cause and correct any in or traveling to a malarial
CONTRACTOR/ area (1) on COMPANY
Subcontractor MCP contractual scope of work.
gaps. Includes expatriates, rotators


any trip duration.
Notes:
1) A malarial area (1) is any area of the world where the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) has
recognized a risk of malaria and/or any location worldwide where COMPANY has implemented its own
Malaria Control Program.
2) Persons that have been repeatedly exposed over their lifetime and have acquired some partial immunity to the
malaria parasite are considered to be semi-immune (2).Typically nationals that have not spent any significant
amount of time out of the malarial area (1). If in any doubt, consult physician.
3) Persons that are not native to a particular malarial area (1) are considered to be non-immune (3) .Typically these
are considered to be any expatriate even if such persons have spent a significant amount of time in a
particular malarial area (1).
4 CONTRACTOR shall procure and ensure that adequate stock of COMPANY approved Malaria Survival
Kits(MSK) are available to concerned employees at all times.
As per EMDC guidelines Contractor shall complete the relevant MCCP enrollment with INTERNATIONAL
SOS (ISOS) of all non-immune and maintain records.

[DRAFT FOR CONSIDERATION BY CONTRACTOR IN DEVELOPING

APPROPRIATE FORM FOR ITS EMPLOYEES]
A.F.A.4 APPENDIX FL2 - Malaria Control Program

Attestation
Malaria Chemoprophylaxis Compliance Requirements
Employee Statement of Understanding and Compliance
I understand that both ExxonMobil and my employer are committed to a safe, healthy, and productive
workplace for all employees. My employer takes very seriously the threat of illness or death presented by
malaria and has implemented a malaria control program with the stated goal of no cases of malaria among
its non-immune populations. I also understand that this program applies to me because I am considered
"non-immune" with respect to malaria at the site(s)/in the location(s) where I am going. I have been
provided with information about the malaria control program as it applies where I am going and if I have
any questions about this program I understand that I should seek guidance from a qualified medical
professional.
I further understand and agree that:
It is a condition of my assignment in/travel to a malarious location that I take an approved malaria
chemoprophylaxis (medication designed to help prevent me from contracting malaria if bitten by a
mosquito carrying the parasite that causes the disease). My employer has advised me that the malaria
chemoprophylaxis currently acceptable include Malarone, Doxycycline, Mefloquine (Lariam), or other
medication at least as effective as one of these three, taken according to a prescribed treatment regimen.
Saverin (combination of chloroquin and proguanil) is not as effective in preventing malaria infection as
other available alternatives and not an acceptable malaria chemoprophylaxis for COMPANY work
locations in malarial areas.
I have been advised to consult a travel medicine professional with questions I may have about the side
effects that may be inherent in taking malaria chemoprophylaxis.
I am subject to unannounced, random, and periodic testing to determine my compliance with the
requirement that I take approved malaria chemoprophylaxis as described above and that I am required, as
a part of this testing, to provide, when/where instructed, a urine sample for laboratory verification of my
use of an approved malaria chemoprophylaxis according to the prescribed treatment regimen.
If I refuse to submit to a test or if a medical review of the laboratory analysis of my urine specimen does
not indicate that I am taking an approved malaria chemoprophylaxis, I may be declared unfit for work in a
malarious location and may be removed from my assignment.
Printed Name: Signature: Date:

SSN or Government ID No.:
Type of Chemoprophylaxis Used:

Appendix FM: CELL PHONE REQUIREMENTS
Contractor, its employees, agents, and subcontractors shall comply with the requirements set forth in this Exhibit.
Contractor shall notify its employees, agents, and subcontractors of the requirements of this Exhibit.
A. Cell-phones, whether hands-free or hand-held, may not be used during the time Contractor is driving while
performing services exclusively for Company, regardless of whether the vehicle is owned by Company.
Without limiting the generality of the foregoing, cell phones may not be used while driving during:
(i) Travel between sites or locations at which Contractor performs services for Company ("Company
Sites"), regardless of whether such sites are owned or operated by Company,
(ii) Transportation of Company personnel, regardless of whether non-Company personnel are
concurrently transported, or
(iii) Travel to a point of departure, such as an airport, train station, or port, for a trip involving business
related to Company.
B. The foregoing prohibition against cell phone use does not apply to:
(i) The daily commute between the driver's residence and Company Site,
(ii) Commutes between Company Site and non-Company businesses for which Contractor, its
employees, agents, or subcontractors may perform work,
(iii) Common carriers,
(iv) Private carriers, manufacturers, distributors, and suppliers that transport both Company and non-
Company items in their vehicles,
(v) Citizen band and/or two-way radios,
(vi) Use while the vehicle is properly parked in a rest area, designated parking area, or other safe
location, and
(vii) Use of cell phones by passengers if the use is not a distraction to the driver of a passenger vehicle.
Appendix FN: SECURITY BACKGROUND CHECKS
Page 330 of 407

Security-Sensitive Services Positions include but not limited to the following:
 Security Services: Guards and other contract Security Management positions
 Drivers or other transportation providers
 Workers with privileged access to MPN computing facilities or telecommunication networks
 Maintenance Workers: Both office and field maintenance personnel working under little or no
supervision and having access to sensitive or critical information, areas and personnel
 Product vehicle drivers that enter Company facilities
 Contractors who supervise Company employees or control facilities
 Other positions identified by local Production Management in consultation with Security

Management that could pose a significant security risk. Examples are production operators and
E&I
 Specialists who do not receive Company supervision.
NOTE: The Spreadsheet below provides additional clarity and guidance for EM Contractors’ compliance
on SBC requirements. Security Background checks for personnel occupying security sensitive position
working on EM projects will be conducted by MPN HR approved SBC Consultants.
EPC/EPCM Contractors and PT shall consult NPO Security Supervisor or Alternate for further
clarification/information.
Page 331 of 407

Page 332 of 407

Appendix FO: MEDICAL & HEALTH SERVICES REQUIREMENTS
Unless otherwise specified by Buyer, Contractor shall provide and maintain field medical care services acceptable to
Buyer, including personnel, equipment, supplies and facilities suitable to the geographical area of operations in
accordance with the standards set forth in Attachment 1 of this Exhibit. This includes a qualified Emergency
Medical Technician, Paramedic, Nurse, or Medical Doctor onsite that is appropriate for the operation. In addition,
adequate back-up medical support (24-hour coverage) with a Consultant Physician holding a current certification in
emergency medicine from USA, Canada, Western Europe, Australia, New Zealand or South Africa.
All medical service providers shall be licensed in the area they are providing services and shall provide medical
liability insurance providing coverage in the area where the personnel are licensed and in the areas where they are
practicing.
The Medical Service Provider(s) will have a minimum of one year of field care experience in a remote location
Contractor and Buyer shall mutually agree on the number and type of qualified medical personnel, equipment,
supplies, and facilities that will be available for the project.
The following items shall also be provided for review on site:
 C.V.'s and license for Field Medical Care Providers and Consultant Physician
 List of medical equipment to be provided for project
 List of medicines and supplies to be provided for project
ExxonMobil shall have the right, at its discretion, to perform unannounced audits/inspections of Contractor's on site
medical services, including medical personnel, equipment and supplies, to verify that Contractor understand and
comply with ExxonMobil's contract requirements regarding medical services.
Page 333 of 407

ExxonMobil Master Agreement
Attachment 1
Medical and Health Services Requirements
1. Contractor shall deliver field medical care services, in accordance with internationally recognized standards and
protocols and provide field medical providers with current certifications in BLS,ACLS, BTLS or the equivalent
from the USA, Canada, Western Europe, Australia, New Zealand or South Africa. Medical service field providers
shall have 24 hour access to a consultant physician, with a current certification in emergency medicine trained in the
USA, Canada, Western Europe, Australia, New Zealand or South Africa. Field medical services shall include:
 General medical care, including diagnosis and therapy of common, acute medical conditions
 First aid and minor trauma management, including control of bleeding, treatment of shock, treatment of hypothermia
and heat stroke/exhaustion, treatment of burns, scalds, inhalation of hot gases and fumes, suturing of lacerations,
immobilization of sprains and simple fractures, and removal of non-embedded foreign bodies
 In-field stabilization of medical and surgical emergencies, including cardiovascular and trauma
 Rescue, extrication and medical transportation of ill or injured parties by suitable air, water or ground transport
2. Contractor shall provide occupational health (OH) services in accordance with Buyer’s OH procedures and
protocols and consult with Buyer OH advisers, as required. OH services shall include:
 Return to work examination
 Health inspection of the field facilities including vector control program, drinking water sanitation and food
sanitation
 Monitoring of the catering staff
 Exposure monitoring (e.g. noise, as required)
 Health awareness and training (e.g. first aid training)
3. Contractor shall provide appropriate and adequate quantities of equipment, medication and consumable supplies,
befitting internationally recognized protocols for the delivery of medical care, and commensurate with the training
and experience of the medical personnel. Contractor shall maintain medical equipment in good operating order at
all times. Contractor shall maintain a complete and up-to-date inventory and ensure that appropriate minimum
quantities of critical medications and consumables are available at all times. A list of critical equipment is provided
in this Attachment. Contractor will review proposed inventory with Buyer health advisors and will advise Buyer in
writing of subsequent changes.
4. Contractor shall provide qualified personnel experienced in delivery of medical and OH care in remote locations and
possess evidence of the requirements described in this Attachment. Contractor shall submit the certifications and
resume of the proposed candidates before mobilization.
5. Contractor shall provide Buyer with evidence of operating procedures, protocols and reference materials regularly
used by the field medical care providers.
6. Buyer will provide Contractor with Buyer health reporting forms, software and instructional materials where
compliance with Buyer’s Health Reporting System procedures is required.
MEDICAL EQUIPMENT AND SUPPLIES
Medical Equipment
Where appropriately trained and licensed medical personnel are required and in place to maintain and operate the
equipment listed, Contractor shall provide the field facility with the following equipment:
Page 334 of 407

 Cardiac monitor defibrillator (including manual operation mode and 12 lead EKG capability)
 Intubation kit with Lynch scope
 Suction pump
 Oxygen resuscitator and manual resuscitator
 Pulse oxymeter
 Sterilizer/autoclave
 Kendrick extrication device
 Body splint (vacuum mattress) and spinal board
 Splinting kit
 Stretchers
 Scoop stretcher
 Stiff cervical collar/neck splints
 Cardiac Kit with medications
 IV sets
Medications and Consumable Supplies
Contractor shall prepare a list of critical medications and consumables commensurate with the training and
experience of the medical personnel and in quantities appropriate for the numbers of covered staff and re-supply
intervals. The list shall be reviewed and approved by the Buyer health advisor and any subsequent changes shall be
requested in writing.
REQUIREMENTS FOR MEDICAL PERSONNEL
Medical Service Providers

 At a minimum, the Medical Service Provider(s) will possess a current certification in BLS, ACLS, BTLS or
equivalent from the USA, Canada, Western Europe, Australia, New Zealand or South Africa.
 Medical Service Provider shall be able to meet ExxonMobil specifications as a minimum or all regulatory
requirements including local license requirements, whichever is more stringent.
 Medical Service Provider shall provide medical liability insurance to cover medical personnel where they are
licensed or where they will work.
 The Medical Service Provider(s) will have a minimum of one year of field care experience in a remote location.
 The following items shall also be provided for review on site:

 C.V.'s and license for Field Medical Care Providers and Consultant Physician
 List of medical equipment to be provided for project
 List of medicines and supplies to be provided for project
Consultant Physician
Consultant physician shall possess current certification in emergency medicine or equivalent from the USA, Canada,
Western Europe, Australia, New Zealand or South Africa. Consultant physician shall be actively involved in daily
management of emergencies and be accessible by telephone 24 hours through similarly qualified backup, as
necessary.
Page 335 of 407

Appendix FQ: COMMUNITY RELATIONS
COMMUNITY AND LABOR RELATIONS - PRINCIPLES AND GUIDELINES
I. APPLICATION
These guidelines are applicable to primary contractors/sub-contractors (Nigerian and non-Nigerian)

executing projects/works/services within Nigeria for Mobil Producing Nigeria (MPN) and Esso
Exploration and Production Nigeria Limited (EEPNL), the upstream subsidiary companies of
ExxonMobil in Nigeria.
Projects/works/services include engineering, fabrication, marine, aviation, land transport, and drilling
activities as well as provision of specialist national and expatriate personnel within Nigeria to MPN and
EEPNL.
Page 336 of 407

The application is in particular mandatory for primary contractors/subcontractors executing

projects/works/services with value exceeding $500,000 for both Joint Venture (JV) and Project Sharing
Contracts (PSC) and/or duration of over 12 months.
The Guidelines are not applicable to contractors supplying only materials and or consumables e.g. fuel
products to any of our upstream subsidiaries.
Community groups would be required to meet the expectations listed on Attachment B, to further
facilitate the application of these Guidelines by primary contractors/sub-contractors working for the
upstream subsidiaries.
II. PURPOSE
These Guidelines seek to achieve the following:
• Promote an incident free workplace in consideration of industrial safety, occupational health and welfare
of Contractors/sub-contractors and their workforce.
• Provide transparent process for effective planning, implementation and monitoring of community and
labor relations activities by
Contractors /Sub-contractors working for MPN & EEPNL.
• Promote timely completion of project activities.
• Ensure realistic, competitive and equitable wages, and conditions of service of workers employed by
Contractors/Sub-contractors in order to motivate them for effective utilization of manpower and man-
hours.
• Clarify roles and responsibilities of key stakeholders in the interface chain and facilitate open
communication.
• Promote community and Nigeria content in projects handled by Contractors/Sub-contractors for MPN
and EEPNL.
III. INTRODUCTION
Mobil Producing Nigeria (MPN) and Esso Exploration and Production Nigeria Limited (EEPNL) (herein
referred to as “Company”), the Upstream subsidiaries of ExxonMobil (herein referred to as
“Corporation”) in Nigeria utilize services of many Nigerian and Foreign Contractors/Sub-contractors
(herein referred to as “Contractors/Sub-contractors”), to support the company’s business activities (herein
referred to as “Service”). Depending on the scope, these Services require continual interface with
business units, government officials and members of the communities within and outside the project
locations. It is important that the interface process is understood by all key stakeholders and that
Contractors/Sub-contractors maintain harmonious relationship with the communities to ensure non-
disruption of the Service activities. It is also essential that Contractors/Sub-contractors adhere to
ExxonMobil’s Corporate Guiding Principles.
This document therefore also includes:
• Corporate Guiding Principles on Community Relations

Page 337 of 407
• Community and Labor Relations Guidelines
IV. CORPORATE GUIDING PRINCIPLES ON COMMUNITY RELATIONS

In the relationship with our Communities, we commit to:
“Be a good corporate citizen in all the places we operate worldwide. We will maintain high ethical
standards, obey all applicable laws, rules, and regulations and respect local and national cultures. Above
all other objectives, we are dedicated to running safe and environmentally responsible operations”.
While we maintain flexibility to adapt to changing conditions, the nature of our business requires a
focused, long term approach. We will consistently strive to improve efficiency and productivity through
learning, sharing and implementing best practices.
We aspire to achieve our goals by flawlessly executing our business plans and by adhering to these
guiding principles.
V. COMMUNITY AND LABOR RELATIONS GUIDELINES

Ethical Compliance: Company expects Contractors/Sub-contractors to maintain high ethical standards at
all times while on the job, obeying all laws, behaving with integrity and honesty, treating people fairly,
respecting diversity, accepting accountability and communicating openly. These values should also be
applied in their dealings with the communities.
Contact Groups: The Contract Owner (for MPN or EEPNL) is the primary contact for coordination of
all Projects/works/services activities.
However, Company’s Public Affairs and Human Resources Departments will provide necessary
guidance, assistance and advice on community and labor relations activities. These include introducing
Contractors/Subcontractors to authorized community contact persons/groups; regular review of issues and
status of compliance with stated Community Relations, Labor and Security Guidelines.
Contractors/Sub-contractors are advised to restrict all formal interfaces on community and labor related
matter with external publics to and through the collective authorized community group. Requests received
from other individuals or groups should be communicated to the authorized community group, with
notification to MPN Public Affairs personnel and Contract owner, for information and appropriate
guidance.
Contractors/Sub-contractors will be primarily responsible for their community relations, labor and
security activities, to ensure enabling environment for timely and incident-free completion of job. To this
effect, Contractors/Sub-contractors should engage staff, competent in community relations, labor and
security practices and conversant with the operational areas, to handle these activities.
Community Employment: It is the Company’s objective to ensure that communities in the immediate area
benefit in terms of employment and related activities from the projects/works/services, while also
accommodating interests of other communities.
For non-highly specialized services/job positions (e.g. those requiring less complex/professional skills),
and as otherwise justified, the following employment sharing formula shall apply for services to be done
at the respective locations:
Page 338 of 407

The ratio for immediate communities will be in accordance with existing practice of Ibeno (30%),
Eket (26%), Esit Eket (24%) and Onna (20%), out of the share of 30 percent.
For projects located in Bonny, the ratio for Finima and Bonny will be 40% and 60% respectively, out of
the immediate community share of 30 percent respectively.
Deepwater Operations Coastal Nigerian states and Nigeria will be the focus for projects located within
EEPNL’s deepwater operations. Local workforce recruited from the communities would include skilled
professionals e.g. engineers, accountants etc (except where such are not available) as well as semi-skilled
and non-skilled personnel. Job positions in these categories include but not limited to the following:
welders, electricians, pipe fitters, scaffolders, sand blasters, carpenters, mason, stewards, cooks, drivers,
helpers, etc.
Staffing Plan Conditions of Service: Company will require Contractor/Subcontractor to provide its
Staffing Plan and Conditions of Services stating factual information on the following, prior to
mobilization:
 Complete list of its own core staff to be utilized for the Project, stating Local Government areas of
origin, states and nationalities for each job position occupied.
 Additional job positions with stated qualifications for personnel, to be recruited locally for the
project.
 Work schedule and project staffing plan
 Breakdown of pay structure and payment schedule for the locally recruited personnel
 Duration of employment
 All other conditions of employment including bonuses, special payments, and other benefits (as
applicable)
Page 339 of 407

 Procedures for conflict resolution

 Details and process for termination of employment
 Termination benefits (if any)
This information would be reviewed with Company contract owner designated personnel, Public Affairs
and Human Resources departments to ensure reasonable community participation and compliance with
Nigerian laws
Employment Distribution: Employment slots for the communities will be shared through the authorized
community groups based on an established formula, where available or as jointly agreed with the
communities. In all cases, the Contractor/Sub-contractor shall have responsibility for determining the
necessary qualifications and suitability of the potential workers. Contractor/Sub-contractor should plan to
provide standard requisite training as maybe required to enhance skill levels of local personnel for the job.
All recruited persons must be assigned specific job tasks. No standby positions/practice allowed. If the
project size and scope dictates, Community Liaison Officers (CLO5) would be appointed from among the
already recruited staff that has other assigned duties. Such person(s) may earn additional stipend as an
incentive. Solely designated CLO position will not exist. The CLOs will not be involved in recruitment
processes.
Company will require Contractors/Sub-contractors to issue employment letters to community employees

stating comprehensive conditions of service before they are engaged. For instance, community
employees:
• Must pass contractor / subcontractor work test — practical, written or oral

• Proof of good health — medical report from a qualified Doctor
• Community Employee Code of Conduct — community workers to sign this form included as
Attachment D before being employed
• Police report — clearing applicant of any criminal activities
• Reference letter from a respected, recognized community authority/leader
Wages: Contractors/sub-contractors are expected to pay realistic, competitive and equitable wages in line
with standard competitive practices in the Nigerian Oil and Gas Industry and commensurate with other
companies offering similar services within the environs. Conditions of service, specifying salary and
other benefits including contract duration and terminal benefits, should be stated and duly executed as
agreed by all parties (Company, Contractor/Sub-contractor and workers, prior to commencement of
work).
Guidelines of expected compensation rates will be issued from time to time.
Labor Contractors: Depending on the size of the workforce (e.g. above 20) and project duration,
Contractor may engage the services of a Labor Contractor to coordinate and manage its recruited
workforce. Such appointees should be reputable companies owned or managed by indigenes of the
immediate project communities, having requisite experience, strong organizational and financial
background or any other relevant criteria as determined by Contractor. The labor contractors will be
responsible for managing the labor requirement of the community workforce after their recruitment.
Contact Offices: All contractors sub-contractors, including those involved in providing services for the
deepwater operations are advised to have functional contact office/address in an accessible on-shore
location outside Company’s facilities and within/around the project vicinity/state. The contact offices
would serve to facilitate interface activities, including dissemination of relevant information to members
Page 340 of 407
of publics. This requirement is particularly mandatory for all Contractors/Sub-contractors executing

services with a value exceeding $500,000 and/or duration of over 12 months, for both the Joint Venture
(JV) and Project Sharing Contracts (PSC) operations.
In addition, the company encourages contractors handling such relevant contracts to endeavor to execute
as much of the project and fabrication activities involved locally and consistent with the Nigerian Content
Development Short Term Directives issued by the Nigerian National Petroleum Corporation (NNPC),
Local ContractinglContract Awards: Contractors/ Sub-contractors are encouraged to give priority to
companies within the communities for their supplies and support requirements. Contractors/sub-
contractors should ensure proper documentation and prompt payment for these activities.
Community Assistance Programs: As part of executing its contracted services, Contractors/Sub-

contractors should also plan to carry out some community assistance programs to support designated
communities for the JV or Nigeria for Deepwater operations. While tendering for the service,
Contractors/Sub-contractors should therefore make a provision commensurate with the value of the
project for handling such activities. Attached is the table showing expected funding for community
assistance projects based on the contract value of the Service.
Suggested assistance areas with sustainable and wide utility impact, include but not limited to training
schemes, scholarship awards, construction/equipping of educational and health facilities, sundry
donations, program sponsorship, etc. Recommended activity and execution plan would be as determined
by Contractor but endorsed by the Company Public Affairs Department in conjunction with the
communities. Contractors/sub-contractors should not give cash for this purpose to any member of the
community or its representatives.
A recommended percentage from the contractor/sub-contractors’ provision for community assistance

projects (as stated above) would be dedicated to support services and administrative secretariat of the
authorized community group. The funds contributed for this purpose would be managed and duly
accounted for by the leadership of the authorized community group under supervision of its constituting
authority.
Page 341 of 407

Gifts: Contractors/ Sub-contractors are advised to recognize and respect local customs and traditions.
However, gifts and donations to groups/persons shall not exceed a nominal value of $200 or N26000 per
sizeable group of not less than 5 persons or $50 per individual. Gifts are discouraged and should not be
given in exchange for favorable treatment or to facilitate approvals.
Local Taxes and Levies: Contractors/Sub-contractors are required to pay relevant local taxes and levies
which are within bounds of the law.
Monitoring and Reporting — Contractors/Sub-contractors are to submit quarterly status report of
compliance with the above items to the Companys contract owner and Public Affairs designated
personnel.
Designated Contractors/Sub-contractors personnel will participate in quarterly review meetings with

representatives of the Contract Owner, Public Affairs, Human Resources, Security and the authorized
Community groups, to review the reports as well as issues/concerns.
Liability — Contractor/sub-contractor will be liable for disruptions by the communities if established that
such resulted from their failure to comply with above guidelines. The Company will continue to liaise
with community to promote enabling environment for contractors/sub-contractors to operate.
Community and Labor Relations Plan - Details of the above stated items should be included in the
Contractor’s Community and Labor Relations Plan to be submitted as part of the tender documents.
Following the contract award, the overall Plan will be reviewed and endorsed by Company Public Affairs
Department, prior to their mobilizing for the Project.
Note: This document is subject to review as at when necessary.
Page 342 of 407

ATTACHMENT A: DEFINITION OF TERMS
For the purpose of these Principles and Guidelines (including the Recitals), the following words and
phrases shall have the meaning stated below:
Primary Contractor - Contractor having direct contractual agreement with either Mobil Producing
Nigeria (MPN) or Esso Exploration and Production Nigeria Limited (EEPNL) herein after ref erred to as
Sub-Contractor - Contractor to a primary contractor.

Company - Esso Exploration and Production Nigeria Limited (EEPNL) and Mobil Producing Nigeria
(MPN), upstream subsidiary companies of ExxonMobil in Nigeria
Labor Contractor - Contractor providing or managing personnel only
Communities - Geographical areas located around Company operations to the Nigerian State in general
Immediate community” - Geographical communities and or Local Government Areas within or around
Company’s operations and/or where specific Service activities are carried out. For Qua lboe Terminal
(QIT)/Offshore, Akwa Ibom State located Services these are the four (4) Local Governments of Ibeno,
Eket, Esit Eket and ONNA. For Bonny River Terminal (BRT)/Onne Shorebase, Rivers State located
Services; they are the three (3) Local Govemments of Bonny, Onne and lkpokiri.
Coastal Community - Geographical communities identified and so designated by the Akwa thom State.
These include the five (5) Local Governments of Eastern Obolo, Ikot Abasi, Mbo, Nsit Ubium and Mkpat
Enin.
Outer Community - Local Governments within Akwa Ibom and Rivers States outside the listed
immediate and coastal communities, as applicable.
Service - Contractors/Sub Contractors Company contracted activity
Contract Owner - Specific Business unit within MPN or EEPNL stewarding the contracted Service
Workforce Group - Personnel engaged by Contractor/Sub Contractor for the service
Authorized Community Group - Group having the mandate of recognized and accepted
Community/Government authority to coordinate labor related activities
Constituting Authority - Recognized Community/Government authority stewarding the authorized

community group
Page 343 of 407

Deepwater Operations - Currently EEPNL’s Erha Project
ATTACHMENT B: RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMMUNITY GROUPS
A. Authorized Community Group will:
• Collate and maintain database of employable candidates as well as professional groups, within their
respective localities.
• Ensure that information on Job Vacancies, short listed and successful candidates are duly posted at
designated locations accessible to the community publics. The group will maintain comprehensive
database of all employments/programs offered by each Contractor and provide periodic updates of these
to respective constituting authority, community leadership and its general public
• Adjudicate on labor disputes that may arise between the communities, workers, labor contractor,
contractor and/or company.
• Play active role in ensuring a conducive operating environment and non disruption of the Service
activities by the contractor community staff or members of the community.
• Provide periodic status reports of its activities including the community participation in the service by
the various Contractors/sub contractors to the respective constituting authority, the State Government,
Company and as well as members of their respective communities
• Participate in periodic (quarterly) review meetings with Contract Owners, Public Affairs, Human
Resources, Security and Contractors representatives to review status and address issues/concerns.
B. Constituting Authority having the requisite statutory / acceptable authority will:
• Constitute and/or continue to provide oversight function to the Authorized Community Group.
• Along with the Authorized Community Group steward communication of periodic status reports of
community participation in the service activities to the respective community publics.
• Assist, as necessary in adjudicating on community and labor issues that may arise between the
Authorized Community Group, Contractors Community Staff, Contractors and/or Company.
• Help facilitate a conducive operating environment to ensure non disruption of project activities
C. Community Staff engaged by Contractors, on completion of the necessary recruitment process,

shall:
• Subject themselves to their employers’ (Contractors) employment regulations.
• Comply with the terms of their employment agreements as duly executed. Any request for amendment
shall be in line with stated procedure
• Support and promote the business objective of the project for which they have been hired, to ensure safe
and timely execution of the project
Page 344 of 407

• Comply with stipulated Nigerian labor guidelines for resolution of conflicts and will utilize structured
approach in presenting their requests and resolving conflicts. The following channels are recommended:
(i) Contractors’ Community Staff initiates dialogue with designated Contractor personnel on issue of
concern/request
(ii) Where issues are not resolved, Contractor Community Staff shall formally notify the Authorized
Community Group or their labor contractor as applicable, for their intervention
(iii) Authorized Community Group or labor contractor or Contractor or Business Unit will promptly
notify Public Affairs for information and necessary action towards resolving the issues
(iv) Contractor Community Staff shall always respect agreement reached with their employer
Community Publics shall
• Defer to the Authorized Community Group on all community and labor relations issues.
• Not unduly interfere in the relationship between Contractor and Contractor Community Staff.
• Notify the Constituting Authority and Company Public Affairs of any issues of concern with respect to
the conduct of Authorized Community Group or the Contractor.
• Provide a conducive operating environment to ensure incident free, safely and timely execution of
project activities.
ATTACHMENT C:
LABOR RATES (NOT INCLUDED. REFERENCE TO EXISTING COMPETITIVE LABOR RATES)
Page 345 of 407

ATTACHMENT D:
Community Employee Code of Conduct Undertaking
I, ………………………….., a native of …………………. in ….. Local Government Area of .… State,

having voluntarily accepted to work with ______________ on the Offshore Construction Installation
Project (OCIP II), a project of Mobil Producing Nigeria (MPN), Operator of the Nigerian National
Petroleum Corporation (NNPC) / MPN Joint Venture.
In respect of the above and on this … day of ….. , 2010, I affirm to undertake and do the following:
a. Pledge to abide by the rules and regulations governing my contract with _______ (my
employer) throughout the duration of the project.
b. Pledge to be totally committed to the Safety, Health, Environment and Security values of
MPN
c. I commit to strictly adhere to all lawful instructions issued to me in the course of discharging
my duties for the success of the project.
d. I shall discharge my responsibilities to the best of my ability and in accordance with the
expectations of my assigned roles.
e. I will not in any way, consciously or unconsciously, instigate, incite, promote, partake or
encourage other workers to embark on any form of strike action or cause the breach of peace
throughout the duration of the project without following the specified Grievances Procedure
and as authorized by law.
f. I further affirm that any form of grievances shall be channeled through my employer,
following the specified grievance procedure and via the authorized workers representative for
resolution.
g. I will contribute to the overall success of the project and undertake that any disciplinary
action, legal or otherwise be taken against me, if I run foul of the aforestated.
h. I fully understand and accept the terms and conditions as stated in my contract.
This undertaking is made in good faith and without any form of coercion whatsoever.
Page 346 of 407
Attested to by me: ………………………….
Sign: ……………………………. Date:……………………………
Attestation
I confirm that the above person is known to me. For the purpose of his involvement in this project and the
intent this document serves to protect, I therefore attest to his good conduct throughout the duration of the
project.
Signed by Me: …………………………….. Name:…………………………..
Date:……………………………. Address:………………………..
Phone No:…………………… N/B: It is dangerous to guarantee a stranger.
Appendix FR: HUMAN RIGHTS PROVISION FOR GOVERNMENT SECURITY

FORCES
Page 347 of 407

1. Contractor shall act in accordance with Company’s Statement of Principles on Security and Human Rights
(refer to page 2 attached) and applicable provisions of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the
Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work of the 1998 ILO Declaration, the UN Code of Conduct for Law
Enforcement Officials and the UN Principles on the Use of Force and Firearms by Law Enforcement
Officials and communicate such expectations to Government Security Forces (“GSF”).
2 Contractor shall maintain policies regarding appropriate standards of conduct, including respect for human
rights, for its employees and contract workers (“Personnel”) assigned to provide services for Company.
3 Contractor shall provide training to its Personnel assigned to provide services for Company on applicable
laws, Company's Statement of Principles on Security and Human Rights, Contractor's policies regarding
appropriate standards of conduct, and applicable provisions of the Universal Declaration of Human Rights,
the Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work of the 1998 ILO Declaration, the UN Code of Conduct for
Law Enforcement Officials and the UN Principles on the Use of Force and Firearms by Law Enforcement
Officials.
4 Contractor shall only provide defensive security services to protect Company personnel, facilities and/or
operations. Contractor shall not engage in activities related to general maintenance of law and order which
is the exclusive responsibility of the host government.
5 Contractor shall monitor the conduct of its Personnel and GSF assigned to provide services to Company
and provide Company with notice of any allegations of human rights abuses committed by Contractor's
Personnel or GSF at Company facilities or directly related to Contractor's protection of Company
personnel, GSF, facilities and/or operations. Contractor shall also provide Company with notice of any use
of force, even if such use of force is appropriate, committed by Contractor's Personnel or GSF at Company
facilities and/or directly related to the Contractor's protection of Company personnel, facilities and/or
operations.
6 Contractor shall report in writing all credible allegation of human rights abuse (in any form) committed by
Contractor's Personnel or GSF at Company’s operational facilities or directly related to Contractor's
facilities or personnel protection to NPO Security via the Project Manager/Project SSHE Manager for
appropriate Company notification.
7 Consequent upon above #6, Contractor shall investigate any credible allegation of human rights abuses
committed by Contractor's Personnel or GSF at Company facilities or directly related to Contractor's
protection of Company personnel, facilities and/or operations and shall report the results of the
investigation to Company for appropriate notifications and guidance.
8 Contractor shall ensure that GFS under investigations for alleged involvement in human right abuses are
deployed to provide security services for Company project or business.
9 Contractor shall not assign any individual credibly alleged to have committed a human rights abuse to
provide services for Company. Contractor shall immediately remove any of its Personnel credibly alleged
to have committed a human rights abuse from providing services to Company.
10 Company shall have the right to terminate this Agreement, and Company shall have the right to terminate
an Order hereunder, if Contractor or any Personnel of Contractor is credibly alleged to have violated
applicable laws or to have committed a human rights abuse. Such right of termination is in addition to any
other termination rights under this Agreement or an Order.
11 This Agreement and any Order hereunder is between the parties thereto and shall confer no rights on nor
inure to the benefit of any third party. However, if the Agreement contains language
Page 348 of 407

Affording third party beneficiary rights to an ExxonMobil Affiliate or joint venture operated by an ExxonMobil
Affiliate, such language will prevail over the previous sentence.
Human Rights Provisions for Host Government Security Forces
EXXONMOBIL STATEMENT OF PRINCIPLES ON

SECURITY AND HUMAN RIGHTS
ExxonMobil is committed to conducting business in a way that protects the security of its personnel, facilities and
operations and respects human rights. The Company’s practices and operations reflect the spirit and intent of the
Universal Declaration of Human Rights, the Fundamental Principles and Rights at Work of the 1998 ILO
Declaration, the UN Code of Conduct for Law Enforcement Officials and the UN Principles on the Use of Force and
Firearms by Law Enforcement Officials.
While recognizing that host governments have the responsibility of maintaining law and order, security and respect
for human rights, ExxonMobil believes that:
 It has an important role to play in promoting respect for human rights;

 Its business presence can and should have a positive influence on the treatment of people in the communities in
which it operates;
 Security and respect for human rights can and should be compatible; and
 Human rights violations are not acceptable and should be condemned.
Page 349 of 407

Appendix FS: DATA AND ACCESS RIGHTS FOR AUDITS
Pursuant to Article 26 of the principal document Contractor shall maintain and preserve, and shall cause
its Subcontractors to maintain and preserve, in accordance with generally accepted accounting practices,
accurate documentation and data (including, but not limited to written and electronic records, books of
account, correspondence, Project Executive Plans, Regulatory permits, licenses, drawings, payroll
records, memoranda, receipts, and documentation of related security data systems and general access to
controls processes and procedures ) or any of the following documentation :
1) Access to original invoices billed to MPN under the Contract/or any Order
2) Copy of invoicing procedures and subcontractor payment process.
3) Evidence of insurance premium payments.
4) Personnel files for employees and embedded subcontractors.
5) Evidence of employee tax payments
6) Copies of work permit for Contractor/subcontractor expatriate personnel
7) Receivables report showing payments outstanding from MPN for over 30 days
8) Copies of cheque payment registers and Bank Statements
9) Copies of Contractor Incorporation Documents
10) General ledger journal
11) Bank and Parent Company Guarantees
12) Business entertainment and expense records
13) Access to all approved work orders
14) Access to all structured performance reports/reviews
15) Access to all change orders, with supporting back-up and signatures
16) Access to pending change orders, change order requests, requests for information etc.
17) Access to all payroll/labour distribution reports, certified payroll and/or equivalent
payroll records
Page 350 of 407

18) Access to all cancelled payroll checks, or bank statements showing payroll wire
deposits
19) Access to all relevant union agreements, if any.
20) Access to all payroll tax reports
21) Access to all supplier, employee & subcontractor agreements
22) Access to all equipment rental and materials invoices and equipment time cards
23) Access to subcontractor and vendor and other billings with supporting documentation.
24) Copy of subcontract/vendor status reports showing contract balances (as applicable) at
the end of the job and total amounts paid to each subcontractor/vendor
25) Access to original bid, proposal, budgetary quotes, purchase orders and procurement
process support documentation
26) Access to all cancelled checks and check vouchers (labour, subcontractors, vendors and
others)
27) Access to progress reports.
28) Access to project correspondence, meeting minutes, notes, observation reports etc.
29) Access to project manager and project accounting personnel.
Please note that the above list is merely indicative. Additional information requests may be made
based on actual audit work.
Appendix FT: EXPORT CONTROL
Reference EXHIBIT N of PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT
Page 351 of 407

Appendix FU: TUBERCULOSIS CONTROL PROGRAM
Reference EXHIBIT N of PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT
Page 352 of 407

Appendix FV: MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM
MEDICAL SURVEILLANCE PROGRAM FOR SIGNIFICANT EXPOSURE TO HEALTH

HAZARDS
The Contractor shall provide a standard procedure for implementing a medical surveillance program for
their employees working at ExxonMobil locations.
Purpose:
This program is to ensure that Contract employees that are potentially exposed to workplace hazards
above the recommended exposure limits undergo periodic monitoring to measure and follow-up on
markers of health effects.
Triggers:
Page 353 of 407

The Medical Surveillance Program is aimed at protecting workers exposed to physical or chemical agents
above a specified threshold (frequency and intensity of exposure) for which medical screening exist.
Potential hazards include:
 Noise
 Benzene
 Hydrogen sulfide
 Lead
 Asbestos
 Man-made mineral fibers
 Program for Respirator users
These are stewarded under the guidance of specific programs. Contractors are expected to develop their
programs which should contain the same key elements as the ExxonMobil templates.
For instance, surveillance for Noise exposure requires annual audiometry for their employees thus
exposed. Contractors shall ensure that abnormal results are followed up by an appropriate medical
specialist.
Company’s Medical and Occupational Health Unit (“MOH”) should be contacted for more information
on this.
Process
Contractor
1) Completes Exposure Monitoring of work site and identify workgroups requiring medical
surveillance.
2) As in most cases, where contract employees work alongside ExxonMobil employees in the same
group, and such monitoring has been carried out by MOH (Industrial Hygiene) the contractor
makes use of this information to place their employees in that group under the surveillance
program.
3) Submits lists of employees that have undergone the relevant medical surveillance to the
ExxonMobil Supervisor or Business owner for documentation.
Site Supervisor
1) Identifies workers within the workgroups, sends the list of the affected contract employees in
the index group to the respective contractors and informs the contract employees to follow up
with their respective companies for the examination.
2) Verifies that the contractor employees have undergone the monitoring with their employers.
3) Receives lists of Contractor employees that have undergone the relevant medical surveillance
and documents them.
MOH
1) Ensures that the result of Exposure Assessments with the worker groups are available to the
facility supervisor so that those contractors whose employees require surveillance will be
informed.
2) Advises the ExxonMobil supervisor and SHE contact on matters connected with Medical
Surveillance
Verification and Measurement:

 Workgroups requiring medical surveillance are identified.
 The procedure for managing exams is implemented and documented.
Page 354 of 407

 Exam results are documented and filed correctly
Page 355 of 407

JOB SPECIFICATION Section G
QIT & BRT Crude/Pentane Plus Storage
and
Settling Tanks Revamp (SSTR)
Design Basis Document
Job Specification
SECTION G
Design Basis Documents
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 356 of 407

and

Design Basis Documents
INTRODUCTION
Scope
This section covers Engineering information and definitions required for the engineering and construction
of MPN facilities
CODES, STANDARDS AND RECOMMENDED PRACTICES

Applicability
The contractor is also to abide by the requirements of MPN construction management manual, MPN
Quality management Systems Manual and any other requirements as may be applicable during this period
on the contract.
Hierarchy
The effective editions and dates of applicable regulations, codes, standards, recommended practices and
specifications, in some cases, may not be clear or may even be in apparent conflict. Any such conflicts are
to be resolved as follows: In the case of government of Nigeria regulations, it is MPN's intent to comply
with the latest applicable regulations. This includes industry or technical society standards, which may
have acquired the force of law through legislation or regulations. For codes, standards and specifications
which do not have the force of law, the effective edition and date are to be determined in one of two
ways:
(1) If the GP Supplements cites a particular edition, that edition is the one applicable.
(2) If GP Supplements cites the "latest edition", then the edition in effect at the time design commences is
the one which is applicable. Use of subsequent editions issued after design commences shall be reviewed
by the project team on a case-by-case basis.
Company Engineering
Documents listed in this section are furnished by COMPANY for the purpose of defining the
FACILITIES. COMPANY documents have been developed to various levels of definition and therefore
changes to these documents require different levels of COMPANY approval.
The following levels are defined:
A. Level 1 - CONTRACTOR is expected to comply with the requirements of these documents.
Page 357 of 407

and
B. Level 2 - COMPANY has developed these documents to a high level of completion. They have
been through several levels of functional review. CONTRACTOR shall follow the philosophy,
general concepts and methodology. CONTRACTOR shall verify and complete development of
the design. Modifications generated during design development and/or proposed by the
CONTRACTOR must be approved by COMPANY.
C. Level 3 - Documents accurately reflect the desired concept to be carried forward in design
development. CONTRACTOR may modify the details of the documents as required without
COMPANY pre-approval. Any changes to the concept must be pre-approved by COMPANY.
D. Level 4 - Documents provided to assist the CONTRACTOR in providing a bid and provide a
starting basis for design development. CONTRACTOR may make changes to these documents
with COMPANY's approval. Change orders for such changes will not be accepted without pre-
approval by COMPANY.
E. Level 5 - Documents provided to the CONTRACTOR for reference. COMPANY makes no

representation as to the accuracy of the information provided.
G. DEFINITIONS
GP and GPS - ExxonMobil Global Practices and Global Practices Supplements
PDB – Project Design Basis
IFB - Issue for Bid
IFC - Issue for Construction
AFC - Approved for Construction
H. STANDARDS
Global Practices
All WORK performed by the CONTRACTOR shall be conducted in accordance with the COMPANY’S
Global Practices (GP) and Global Practices Supplements (GPS) as listed in Appendix [E-1] to this
Section.
Project Standards
In addition to the COMPANY’S GPs all projects shall adopt a number of additional relevant industry
standards as listed in Appendix [E-1].
Total compliance with the GP’s and the above specifications is required of the CONTRACTOR, and of
lower tier vendors. The scope of compliance with the GP’s and the above specifications, their order of
precedence among various projects and engineering documents, how this compliance is evaluated, along
Page 358 of 407

and
with an explanation for identifying the need for waivers and instructions for following waiver procedures,
is fully explained in GP 00-00-02, latest edition.
The GP GPS are generated by COMPANY to include all the phases of the project (including Design and
Construction) considering the CONTRACTOR as the services provider to COMPANY.
I. DOCUMENTATION
Numbering
All CONTRACTOR documentation shall be numbered and revision controlled in accordance with the
COMPANY’S GPs. The CONTRACTOR will be allocated numbers by the COMPANY.
As-Built Documents
CONTRACTOR shall be responsible for producing all As Built documentation for the WORK. As Built
documentation shall be updated electronically on the electronic copies provided by the COMPANY. All
such updates shall use the same standards as used by the COMPANY.
CONTRACTOR shall submit the updated native file (electronic) copies, plus the original paper mark-ups,
and a scanned (Adobe PDF) copy of the site mark-ups.
Handover Documentation
CONTRACTOR shall comply with the Handover documentation specified in the GPs and in Section F –
DESIGN BASIS
Design Parameters
The tank revamp design and repair activities shall be conducted in accordance with API
653 and API 650 (latest editions)
For purposes of calculations, crude oil shall be assumed to have the following properties:
crude oil
BS&W =0.5% maximum
Viscosity = Low
Pour Point = typically about 500F / 100C
Condensate
Page 359 of 407

and
BS&W =0.5% maximum

API Gravity = 46-53API
Viscosity = Low
Wax Appearance Temperature = 89 0F
Pour Point = typically about (60F
For purposes of calculations, the environmental conditions shall be assumed to have the
following properties:
Altitude = Sea level

Climate = Tropical, deltaic
Minimum air temperature = 180C
Maximum air temperature = 330C
Design relative air humidity = 90% - 100%
Maximum rainfall = 100 mm/hour (based on 60 minute interval)
Maximum rainfall = 175 mm/hour (based on 15 minute interval)
Normal Wind Velocity = 9 km/hr – 22 km/hr
Maximum Sustained Wind Velocity = 123 km/hr
Maximum Gusting Wind Velocity = 150 km/hr
New Mechanical components shall have a minimum 10 year design life.
J. Critical Equipment Identification

Equipment which will have a high impact on reliability, maintenance, operability or
safety of the tank and the necessary repair effort have been identified as follows
 Tank gauging system
 Floating Suction assembly
 New 30” diameter slotted pipe replacing the inlet spreader bar.
 Pressure and Safety Valves on the roof
 Pressure Vents on the roof
 LSHH and LSLL level switches
 Agar style interface control system
 Lightning Arrestor system
Design Reviews
At 60% of Detailed Engineering Design, MPN will arrange for a Design Review, Risk
Assessment and Constructability Review with Operations, Maintenance, MPN Design
Engineering Services, Loss prevention etc. And at 100% completion, a final Design review will
also be carried out. Contractor will present his design in each of the reviews to the Stakeholders,
record and incorporate comments and suggestions. After completion of these reviews Contractor
will revise the documents and resubmit to MPN as “Approved for Detailed Design” status.
Page 360 of 407

and
K. Regulatory Approvals
Apart from the fundamental regulatory requirement for petroleum facility construction work, the
key regulatory requirement impacted by this project will be the re-calibration of the tank.
Operatives of the Department of Petroleum Resources (DPR) will be involved in the calibration
QA/QC activities. DPR approval after re-calibration will be obtained prior to commissioning of
tank.
L. Environmental, Safety and Security Considerations

Tank repair within a tank storage facility is potentially a hazardous operation. Repair will include
work activities involving routine lifts; work at elevated heights, entry into and welding and
coating activities in confined spaces. The exposure to risk is further heightened in view of the
fact that adjacent tanks will remain in service through the course of repair activities.,
Considerations have been given to all aforementioned potential risks. To mitigate the risks work
will be performed in accordance with MPN Safe Work Procedures and SIMOPS manuals. Safety
Plans that adhere to the MPN Projects Department Safety Management Plan will be developed
and implemented. Pre-mobilisation training and on-site orientation and training will be conducted
and safety administration tools such as Job Safety Analysis, Pre-Work Toolbox Meetings, Work
Permitting and U-See, U- Act and LP-BBS will be deployed and applied.
No significant environmental impact as a result of the repair activities is anticipated. A waste

Management plan will be developed and deployed to manage all waste that may be generated as a
result of the tank cleaning and repairs. It is anticipated that, upon completion, potential near term
SHE risks associated with operation of Floating Roof Tanks will be eliminated and the integrity
of the tank restored.
Contractors working on MPN premises will be required to display identification. Entry will be
controlled via established security procedures approved by MPN. The construction readiness
review will include a representative from the security department, and require that approved
security procedures are in place before commencing construction. The security procedures will
address contractor security and access to the MPN work site, and the protection of MPN
personnel and property through unauthorized or uncontrolled access. Security considerations will
be documented during any other review (pre-mobilization, MOC, transportation of persons or
materials, de-mob., etc.) affecting the project execution, any change in the project, or change in
the work procedures at the work site.
Project Quality Plan

The project will prepare and adhere to a Project Quality Plan (PQP). The Floating Roof Tanks
PQP will be prepared using the generic PQP already in place for the Onshore Program.
Appendix E-1
INDUSTRY STANDARDS AND COMPANY Adopted Global Practices

(LATEST EDITION )
Table 1
Page 361 of 407
and
Applicable References
International Codes & Standards: As referenced within the Upstream Nigeria (UN) Global Practices
MPN Global Practice Version to be per current Upstream Nigeria(UN) Global

Practices index
GP 00-00-02 Explanation and Use of Upstream Global Practices
GP 00-00-02S Explanation and Use of Upstream Global Practices
GP 01-01-03 & GP 01-01-03S Upstream CAD Requirements - Drawings, Data, and System
GP 02-01-01 GP 02-01-01S Facility Noise Design Criteria
GP 03-01-01 & GP 03-01-01S Upstream piping general design
GP 03-05-01 Fill and Discharge Lines andAuxiliary Piping for Storage
Tanksand Vessels
GP-03-06-01 GP 03-06-01S Piping for Instruments
GP 03-06-04 Vents and Drains, Flushing and Cleaning Connections
GP-03-12-09 General Requirement for Valves
GP-03-19-02 Piping Fabrication Shop or Field
GP-03-20-02 Upstream Piping Classification - Line Classes Atmospheric and
125
GP-03-20-03 Upstream Piping Classification - Line Class 150
GP-03-20-10 Upstream Piping Classifications - Valve Indices and
Descriptions
GP-04-01-01 Concrete Design and Construction
GP-04-01-02 Structural Steel Design
GP-04-01-03 Design Load for Structures
GP-04-02-01 & GP-04-02-01S Auxiliary Structures for Operation and Maintenance
GP-04-02-02 Pipe Supports
GP-04-06-01 Reinforced Concrete Foundations Anchor Bolts and Grout
GP-04-08-01 Tank Foundations
GP-04-14-01 Equipment Lifts by Cranes
GP-09-04-01 & GP-09-04-01S Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-09-07-01 Accessories for Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP 09-07-03 Vents for Fixed Roofs Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-09-07-04 Internal Floating Roofs for Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP-12-01-01 & GP-12-01-01S Upstream Numbering System for Project Technical Documents
GP-12-01-02 Upstream Identification of Equipment Components and Devices
Lines and Valves
GP-15-01-03GP 15-01-03S Instruments for Storage Tanks and Vessels
GP-15-02-01 Temperature Instruments
GP-15-03-01 Pressure Instruments
GP-15-04-01 Flow Instruments
GP-15-05-01 Level Instruments
Page 362 of 407

and
GP-15-06-01 Electronic & Pneumatic Instruments

GP-15-06-03 Programmable Logic Controllers
GP-15-06-04 Instrumentation Inspection, Testing, Calibration, Pre-
commissioning
GP-15-07-07 Upstream Protective System
GP-15-09-01 Control Valves
GP-15-09-03 Actuators for on / off Valves
GP-15-11-01 Instrument Control Panels
GP-15-12-01 Instrument Wire & Cable
GP-16-02-01 GP 16-02-01S Electrical - General Requirements
GP 16-03-01 Wiring methods and material selection.
GP 16-04-01 GP 16-04-01S Grounding and Over voltage Protection
GP-16-13-01 Electrical testing and Commissioning
GP 20-01-01 Inspection of Equipment and Materials
GP-20-01-02 Administrative Procedures for Obtaining Inspection
GP 20-01-04 Upstream Project Quality Assurance - General Requirements
GP-21-01-01 System Completion
GP 21-01-02 Upstream Project Technical Documentation Requirements and
Deliverables
GP 21-01-03 Upstream Systems Completion Management Database
Requirements
GP 29-01-34 & GP 29-01-34S Upstream Material Identification and Traceability
GP 56-02-03 Painting General Requirements - Onshore
GP 29-02-15 Cathodic Protection for Vessels and Tanks
GP 29-02-18 Maintenance Coating of Structures, Plant, and Equipment
GP 29-03-06 Onshore Structural Welding and Inspection
GP 50-05-07 Technical Data Sheet (T500507C01) - Meteorological Data for
Plant Design
GP-70-01-02S -06-11-30 Fire protection - Atmospheric Storage Tanks
GP 70-01- 03 Loss Prevention for Upstream Onshore Production Facilities
GP 70-01-02 Loss Prevention - Storage Tanks
GP 70-01-12 Upstream Human Factors
GP 81-81-02 Vertical tank calibration
Page 363 of 407

JOB SPECIFICATION Section H
and
Design Development Document
Job Specification
SECTION H - Design Development Documents
Design Development Documents
Revision 1
September 2022
Section H
Page 364 of 407
and
Design Development Document
Design Development Documents
NOT APPLICABLE
Page 365 of 407

JOB SPECIFICATION Section I
and
Settling Tanks Revamp Project (SSTR II)
Company Provided Items
Job Specification
SECTION I – Company Provided Items
COMPANY-Provided Items
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 366 of 407

and
Company Provided Items
Section I
COMPANY-Provided Items
NOT APPLICABLE
Page 367 of 407

JOB SPECIFICATION Section J
and
Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors

SECTION J – Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors
Revision 1
September 2022
Page 368 of 407

and
1. General
For this document, the terms defined in Article 1 of the PRINCIPAL DOCUMENT, Exhibit A, and the
following Table J1-6 apply.
Table J1-6: Definitions
Term Description
3LP Multi-Layer Polyethylene/Polypropylene
AIWOCS Alternative Installation and Workover Control System (aka: Alternative Intervention
and Workover Control System)
AUT Automated Ultrasonic Testing
CP Cathodic Protection
CRA Corrosion Resistant Alloy
EPC Engineering, Procurement, and Construction
ESD Emergency Shutdown
FBE Fusion Bonded Epoxy
HIPPS High-Integrity Pressure Protection System
HYD Hydraulic
IWOCS Installation and Workover Control System (aka: Intervention and Workover Control
System)
MLI Multi-Layer Insulation
MODU Mobile Offshore Drilling Unit
MQC Multibore Quick Connector
PFI Polyurethane Foam Infill
PLC Programmable Logic Controller
Product Result of an Activity or Process whether Tangible or Intangible, or a Combination of
Both; Including Goods (Hardware and Processed Materials), Services, and Software
ROV Remotely Operated Vehicle
VIV Vortex-Induced Vibration
Note: Singular or plural forms of a term shall have the same definition.
2. CONTRACTOR's Responsibilities
CONTACTOR's responsibilities include the following:
Page 369 of 407

and
1) Notwithstanding Section 3 below, it is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure that any suppliers
and/or subcontractors, whether identified in , , , or subsequently approved by COMPANY, are
qualified to perform the required services or provide the required materials and equipment for the
WORK. CONTRACTOR shall contact prospective bidders to confirm that they can supply the
services, material, or equipment required in conformance with the CONTRACT and quality
requirements for the WORK, and that they have supplied proven services, materials, and equipment
in similar applications.
2) CONTRACTOR shall employ in the performance of the WORK the suppliers and subcontractors
listed by COMPANY in , , and ; and supplemented only by those additional nominations from
CONTRACTOR that have been approved in writing in advance by COMPANY in accordance with
the process defined hereto.
3) CONTRACTOR shall establish criteria, consistent with the CONTRACT, for review of a potential
bidder's financial condition and shall implement the criteria in a timely manner in order to avoid
placing orders with financially risky or unstable companies.
4) It is CONTRACTOR's responsibility to ensure the items are ordered from and provided by approved
suppliers and subcontractors in due time to meet schedule milestones and CONTRACTOR's
schedules.
5) CONTRACTOR shall provide prequalification services for suppliers and subcontractors nominated
to COMPANY for use in completion of the WORK. Prequalification services include, but are not
limited to, site visits and other activities necessary to evaluate suppliers and subcontractors prior to
their nomination by CONTRACTOR.
6) At the completion of scheduled milestones and upon delivery of equipment, materials, and/or
services, CONTRACTOR shall assist COMPANY in assessing suppliers' and subcontractors'
performance using COMPANY-provided forms.
3. Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors

Suppliers and subcontractors listed in , , and are only approved for use in the commodity or service
category designated therein.
4. Nominating Suppliers of Materials and Equipment and Subcontractors

A detailed description of the process CONTRACTOR will use to evaluate supplier adequacy prior to a
supplier's nomination for use in completion of the WORK shall be included as part of CONTRACTOR's
Overall Purchasing Plan. CONTRACTOR's process shall be designed to ensure only suppliers that meet
COMPANY's quality, safety, and commercial standards are nominated for qualification. After approval
of the Overall Purchasing Plan, CONTRACTOR deviations from the defined process may be used by
COMPANY as sole grounds for disapproval or rejection of the nomination.
A detailed description of the process CONTRACTOR will use to evaluate subcontractors adequacy prior
to their nomination for use in completion of the WORK shall be submitted for COMPANY's review and
approval as part of the CONTRACTOR's Overall Subcontracting Plan. The process must include a
method for ensuring that sufficient operations integrity qualification criteria are defined for all third
parties providing services. After approval of the Overall Subcontracting Plan, CONTRACTOR deviation
from the defined process may be used by COMPANY as sole grounds for disapproval or rejection of the
nomination.
CONTRACTOR may nominate additional material and equipment suppliers and/or subcontractors for the
commodity or service categories listed in , , or by completing and submitting pre-qualification forms
contained in . Final approval of supplier and/or subcontractors nominations is subject to the acceptability
Page 370 of 407
and
of results from COMPANY's qualification process, which could include a joint CONTRACTOR-
COMPANY site visit. COMPANY encourages and will provide a higher priority on consideration of
local suppliers and/or subcontractors in the COUNTRY OF OPERATION. If COMPANY has not
responded to such submittals, in writing, within 30 days, then COMPANY shall be deemed to have
denied said submittal. Approval of nominated suppliers and/or subcontractors is at COMPANY's sole
discretion.
If CONTRACTOR or COMPANY determines that there are Criticality I or II materials, equipment,
and/or services needed to accomplish the WORK that are not included in , , or , CONTRACTOR shall
obtain approval, in writing from COMPANY, of the materials and/or equipment supplier and/or services
subcontractor prior to their use. If CONTRACTOR or COMPANY determines that there are Criticality
III or IV materials, equipment, and/or services that have not been included in , , or , CONTRACTOR may
use any CONTRACTOR-qualified supplier and/or subcontractor that complies with the JOB
SPECIFICATION.
After CONTRACT award, nominations for additional materials and equipment suppliers and/or services
subcontractors for the commodity or service categories listed in , , and shall not be considered unless one
or both of the following criteria can be satisfied:
1) CONTRACTOR can demonstrate to COMPANY that less than three suppliers and/or subcontractors
listed in , , and are willing to submit a bid
2) CONTRACTOR can demonstrate that COMPANY safety, quality, or schedule requirements cannot
be met by suppliers and/or subcontractors listed in , , and
In such instances, CONTRACTOR may nominate up to three additional suppliers and/or subcontractors,
provided the total number of nominated suppliers does not exceed a total of three for a single equipment,
material, commodity, and/or service category. CONTRACTOR shall nominate additional suppliers
and/or subcontractors by completing and submitting pre-qualification forms contained in .
Where the total number of suppliers for a single commodity or service category listed in , , and is greater
than or equal to three suppliers and/or subcontractors, consideration will be given to a single alternative
supplier and/or subcontractor only and shall be conditional upon that supplier and/or subcontractor
representing a local and traditional source.
 Single-Source Equipment and Material Supplier and/or Service Subcontractor Nominations
COMPANY shall identify single-source suppliers and/or subcontractors in , , and . No new supplier
and/or subcontractor nominations shall be considered for equipment, materials, and/or services indicated
as single source unless CONTRACTOR can demonstrate to COMPANY that the single-source supplier
and/or subcontractor is not willing to submit a bid. For instances where a COMPANY-designated single-
source supplier and/or subcontractor is not willing to submit a bid, CONTRACTOR shall nominate
additional suppliers and/or subcontractors by completing and submitting prequalification forms contained
in or by coordinating with COMPANY to identify a previously qualified supplier and/or subcontractor.
The maximum number of suppliers and/or subcontractors CONTRACTOR may nominate will be
determined by COMPANY.
 Use of Supplier and/or Subcontractor Nomination Forms

contains COMPANY's Commercial Information and Survey of Facilities – Part I Forms, which shall be
completed for each supplier and/or subcontractor nominated by CONTRACTOR. In addition, technical
information (e.g., data regarding product qualification, product features, process capabilities, etc.) may be
required depending on the commodity or service category. Where technical information is required,
Page 371 of 407

and
COMPANY will request such technical information. CONTRACTOR shall submit the requested
technical information and the nomination packets containing all applicable forms to COMPANY for
approval when complete.
Page 372 of 407

and
Appendices
Page 373 of 407

and
APPENDIX JA - SURF Qualified Suppliers and Subcontractors
Page 374 of 407

Section K
and
CONTRACTOR’s Execution Basis
APPENDIX JB - Qualified Manufactures List—Forgings
Revision 1 Page 375 of 451 Error! No text of specified

style in document.
Section K
and
APPENDIX JC - Qualified Manufacturers List—Duplex Stainless Steels

style in document.
Section K
and
APPENDIX JD - Supplier and Subcontractor Nomination Forms

Appendix J and Appendix J shall be completed by CONTRACTOR and submitted to COMPANY, in
advance, for approval of all suppliers not listed in , , or but required by CONTRACTOR to accomplish
the WORK. Written approval of nominated suppliers shall be obtained from COMPANY prior to
employment by CONTRACTOR in performance of the WORK.

style in document.
Section K
and
Figure J0-4: Qualification of Vendors and Subcontractors Flow Chart

style in document.
Section K
and

style in document.
Section K
and
JD1 - Commercial Information

1. General
A. Company Data (Provide separate form for each company)
Company Name:
Division Name:
Street Address:
City: State/Province Zip Code Country
P.O. Box P.O. City P.O. Zip Code
Sales Contact: e-mail
Phone: Country Code Fax:
Internet Web Page ID:
2. Organization
A. Ownership
Company is established as a:
Corporation Proprietorship
Partnership Joint Venture
Affiliate National Oil Company
United States Companies Only

Is your company a certified minority or women owned business (MBE/WBE)? Yes No
State of Corporation Country Date
Company is owned or controlled by a Parent Company: Yes No
If the answer in the above is Yes provide the following information:

Full Name of Parent Company
Main Office Physical Address
City, State, Zip, Country
Telephone No./ FAX No.

style in document.
Section K
and
3. Financial Information
Financial Data:
Annual Sales volume (each of the last three years)
Year: Sales Volume ($)
Net Income (each of the last three years)

Year Net Income ($)
Present Net Worth: $

Dunn & Bradstreet Rating:
Moody's or S&P:
Primary Bank Affiliation:
Country:
Is your company operating under any type of bankruptcy protection?

Is your company in the process of any other type of reorganization,
such as change in ownership?
Has your company had any type of reorganization in the past 3
years? If YES please supply additional details.
Provide past three years of audited financial statements (or those
audited financial statements for the parent if parent guarantee will be
used)
Printed / Typed Name:

Authorized Signature: Date:
Title or Position:

style in document.
Section K
and
JD2 - Survey of Facilities – Part I

GENERAL
Supplier/Subcontractor: Principal Contact:
Location: Phone Number:
Fax Number:
E-Mail address:
Project contact: Phone number:
Location: Fax Number:
E-Mail Address:
NOTE: THIS IS A GENERIC SURVEY FORM, AND, AS SUCH, SOME OF THE QUESTIONS WILL
NOT APPLY FOR YOUR FACILITY. PLEASE ANSWER ALL QUESTIONS THAT DO APPLY. FOR
THOSE QUESTIONS THAT DO NOT APPLY, INDICATE "N/A."
1. Name and address of parent company, if different from above:

Name:
Address:
List of Affiliated Companies:
2. Plant Officials (complete list below or attach an organization chart showing same
information.)
Chairman Of The Board:
President:
Vice-President:
Sales Manager:
Purchasing Manager:
Chief Engineer:
Production Manager:
Quality Assurance Manager:
Telephone:
Quality Control Manager:
Telephone
Chief Inspector:
Telephone:

style in document.
Section K
and
Customer Contact:
Telephone:
3. Plant data
A. Size of facilities (indicate proper unit of measure - square foot or square meters)
Buildings (covered) work area
Open work area
B. Production (complete for each commodity listed).

Approximate Monthly Maximum Size/Range Maximum Size/Range
Commodity
Production Units Of Tons Now Manufacturing Capable Of Manufacturing
4. Number of employees (for this plant).

Organization Engineering Production Quality Control Quality Assurance Total
Number of
employees
5. List the national codes and standards (ASME, API, NEMA, etc.) To which you are authorized
to design, fabricate, and/or test.
Type of stamp (symbol) Serial number Expiration date
6. Engineering department
A. Engineers: Licensed/Professional:
University Graduate:
Technical School Graduates:
Draftsmen
B. Does the engineering department prepare working drawings from the customer's
specifications and outline drawings?

style in document.
Section K
and
If yes, who reviews and approves these drawings?
C. Who controls the distribution of customer supplied drawings and specifications?
D. Are computer assisted designs used in drafting?
E. Identify the design analysis (stress, flexibility, etc.). Which are performed using computer
programs?
F. Were these programs developed internally or by another company?
7. Manufacturing Department
A. Who reviews and approves manufacturing procedures?
B. Who verifies that the manufacturing procedures welding procedures and drawings being
used are the proper revision?
C. Who reviews and approves welding procedures?
D. Is fabrication completed at this plant site, or is some fabrication performed at dockside or the
customer's site due to space/shipping limitations?
8. Quality Control (QC)/Inspection Department

Attach a copy of your organization chart that shows to whom the head of quality control (QC) reports,
and what is relation is the production, engineering, and sales departments.

style in document.
Section K
and
A. Does the plant have a written QC manual?

(If yes, please provide an uncontrolled copy.)
B. Is there a typical inspection and test plan for this product?

Does it identify the minimum quality standards?
If an I&T Plan is available, please provide a copy.
Can the I&T Plan be modified to incorporate "check points" which require that the
customer's inspector be notified before production can proceed?
C. Who would be responsible for notifying the customer's inspector?

Name: Telephone:
D. Does the quality control department approve the procedures for: (yes or no)
Receiving Inspection Welding
Fabrication Heat Treatment
NDE Identify others
E. Does the QC/inspection department review and approve reports/certifications for: (yes or no)
Incoming materials Heat Treatment
NDE certification Final documentation
F. Can the QC/inspection department stop production if quality standards are not being met?
How?
G. Do production people make checks or inspections of materials?

Which areas (incoming, in-process, final test, etc.) of production?
H. Does quality control perform (1) no inspection, (2) sample inspection, (3) first piece
inspection, (4) 100% inspection, or (5) a combination of these for the areas listed below:
Receiving inspection In-process inspection Final Inspection Final Test
Are these inspection plans documented?
Are they available for review by the customer?
I. Are there written procedures for control of material that has been
rejected or is to be repaired?
How are these materials identified?

style in document.
Section K
and
Is this material stored in a controlled or segregated area prior to its disposition?
J. Does the quality control department approve repairs to non-conforming

material?
If not, who does?
K. Under what conditions would the customer be contacted regarding use of non-conforming
material or material substitutions?
L. Does final inspection include verification/inspection of: (yes or no)

Completeness
Dimensional checks
NDE
Performance tests
Painting/marking
Packaging
9. Supplier Control
A. Does this plant survey its suppliers prior to use to evaluate their ability
to supply acceptable material?
B. Does this plant perform inspections of its Suppliers?

How frequently?
C. If these surveys and inspections are performed, are the results

available for customer review?
10. Laboratory Department

A. Does this facility have a chemical laboratory?
If yes, what analysis can be performed in-house?
B. Are any chemical analyses performed by an outside laboratory?

If yes, identify the laboratory and the elements analyzed.
Elements analyzed Laboratory name and location

style in document.
Section K
and
C. Does this facility have a metallurgical laboratory?

If yes, what tests can be performed in-house?
D. Are any physical tests performed by an outside laboratory?

If yes, identify the laboratory and the test performed.
Type of test Laboratory name and location
E. Are chemical and physical test results included as a part of the final documentation to the
customer?
11. Welding
A. Does this plant employ a welding engineer?
Name (s):
B. Are welder qualifications performed in accordance with ASME Code

Section IX?
If not, what code is used?
C. How many welders and welding operators are employed?
D. Does this facility maintain records on welder's performance?

If yes, are these records available for customer review?
If no, how is the welder's performance evaluated?
E. Weld procedures:

style in document.
Section K
and
Number of
Material welded (Yes/no) Number of welders qualified
procedures
Carbon steel
Low alloy steel
High chrome alloy steel
Austenitic stainless
Alloy clad steel
Aluminum
Others
F. Welding equipment Number available

Automatic Submerged Arc
Semi - Automatic Submerged Arc
Cored Wire Welding Machine
Pulsed Arc
Electroslag
Electrogas
Other
G. Welding positioners:
Number available Size capacity Other information
H. What type of equipment is available for preheating?
I. Does this facility have post weld heat treatment equipment?

If no, where is post weld heat treatment subcontracted?
J. Furnace characteristics (yours and your suppliers)

Length
Width
Height
Maximum temperature

style in document.
Section K
and
Controls (manual or automatic)

Method of heating
Temperature recorder type
Max number of thermocouples
Locations of thermocouples
K. Does this facility have portable equipment for localized

heat treatment?
12. Material Control

A. Is material identified and controlled to a specific
job/order number?
How?
B. Is in-coming material placed in a hold area until

released for production?
C. How is unidentified material handled?
D. Does the quality control/inspection department verify

the transfer of material markings?
13. Non-destructive testing equipment and personnel

A. Radiographic
Does this facility do its own radiography?
If no, to whom is it subcontracted?
If the radiography is subcontracted, who reviews the
radiography to determine if the results are acceptable?
Is the reviewer certified? to what?
If the facility does its own radiography, list the energy level of
all the sources available.
Is it possible for radiographic personnel to work after normal
working hours (night shift)?
Is this a normal practice?
How many years are radiographic films kept?
What types of penetrameters are used?
B. Ultrasonics
Does this facility do its own ultrasonic testing?

style in document.
Section K
and

If this facility does its own ultrasonic testing, list the number
and types of equipment available.
What types of calibration periphials are available?
C. Liquid Penetrants
Does this facility do its own liquid penetrant inspection?
If liquid penetrant inspection is subcontracted, who determines
if the results are acceptable?
D. Magnetic Particle
Does this facility do its own magnetic particle inspection?
If magnetic particle inspection is subcontracted, who
determines if the results are acceptable?
If this facility does its own magnetic particle inspection, list the
number and types of equipment used for each method
including amperage/voltage ranges.
Is dry powder or wet fluorescent used?
E. Other
List the hardness testing equipment used.
List the types and number of eddy current equipment used.
List the types of halogen leak testing equipment used.
List other non-destructive testing equipment used including
electrical test equipment.
F. Please indicate the numbers of NDE technicians for each range of years experience shown
below (note that an individual may be included in more than one NDE discipline):
Number of technicians per years of experience
NDE Discipline Qualification Per
0-2 2-10 10 or more
Radiography
Ultrasonics
Liquid Penetrant
Magnetic Particle
Others

style in document.
Section K
and
14. Cleaning and Coatings

A. List the cleaning processes used by this facility (sand
or grit blast, pickling, etc.)
B. Is all the painting or coating done by this facility?

If no, what percentage of it is subcontracted?
For this facility, is painting done under cover or in the open?
C. What types of paints and coating are you familiar with?
D. Does this facility have hot dip galvanizing equipment?

If yes, list the number and sizes of the tanks.
If not, provide the name and location of your Subcontractor.
15. Machine Tools

Complete the following information.
Number Maximum Size Capacity Approx. Age, (Years)
Boring Mills
Lathes
Drill Presses
Punches
Gear Cutters
Lapping Machines
Power Saws
Milling Machines
Others (relative to this product)
16. Shipping Facilities - maximum size:

A. Method Width Height Length Weight
Truck
Railroad
Water Shipment
B. If truck shipment, what are size limitations to nearest dock, i.e.

bridge weight, underpass height?

style in document.
Section K
and
17. Major Customers: List some of the major customers and types of equipment supplied to
them:
18. Previous ExxonMobil Experience:

Have you had any previous experience with ExxonMobil or their affiliates?
If yes, please complete the following for the three most recent deliveries:
Affiliate Name Equipment Delivery Date
Prepared By Data Reviewed And Appraised By

Name: Name:
Date: Date:

style in document.
Section K
and

SECTION K – Contractor’s Execution Basis
JOB SPECIFICATION Section K
Revision 1
September 2022

style in document.
Section K
and
Section K
TO BE PROVIDED BY BIDDERS

style in document.

Storage and Settling Tanks (SSTR) Revamp: ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Storage and Settling Tanks (SSTR) Revamp: ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Storage and Settling Tanks (SSTR) Revamp: ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

ES/NCDMB/MPN-TITT/07032023/UPD

STORAGE AND JOB

(SSTR) REVAMP PROCEDURE

Tender Number – 00000144

STORAGE AND SETTLING TANKS REVAMP {SSTR} ...........................................................0

SECTION A: INTRODUCTION TO JOB SPECIFICATION......................................................0

SECTION C: PROJECT DESCRIPTION.....................................................................................8

3. DESCRIPTION OF PROCESS AND FACILITIES (CRUDE & CONDENSATE

D. WORK BREAKDOWN STRUCTURE................................................................................17

SECTION D: SCOPE OF WORK..........................................................................................................18

SECTION D1: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK CLEANING...........................................................................21

C. QIT/ BRT STORAGE AND SETTLING TANKS SCOPE AND DATA..................................................24

4.1 PROJECT CONTACT DETAILS..............................................................................................25

5 GENERAL RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR...........................................................29

6 SPECIFIC RESPONSIBILITY OF CONTRACTOR............................................................30

Revision 1 Page 1 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

8 COMPLETION AND ACCEPTANCE OF THE WORK.......................................................41

9 PROCEDURES/DRAWINGS TO BE PROVIDED BY CONTRACTOR.............................42

A.4 ROOF DECK CLEANING......................................................................................................44

A.8 DECONTAMINATION & DEMOBILIZATION OF TOOLS & EQUIPMENT ..............46

SECTION D2: SCOPE OF WORK – TANK REVAMP.............................................................................49

A.1 GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK (FLOATING ROOF TANK)........................................................50

2.1 CONE ROOF DEMOLITION AND NEW ROOF INSTALLATION.................................................56

Revision 1 Page 2 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

4.1 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL WORK:..................................................................................62

5.1 DEMOLITION AND REMOVAL WORKS.................................................................................63

Revision 1 Page 3 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

6 FOAM SYSTEM UPGRADE:................................................................................................66

7.1 REMOVE MIXERS................................................................................................................67

9.1 HYDROSTATIC TEST:...........................................................................................................70

10.1 TANK CALIBRATION - OPTION I (OPTION SHALL BE DETERMINED BY COMPANY).......71

11 DESIGN ENGINEERING AND DOCUMENT & DATA SUBMISSION AND

SECTION E: SCHEDULE BASIS...........................................................................................................74

Revision 1 Page 4 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

CONTRACTOR'S CONTROL SCHEDULE...............................................................................84

SECTION F: COORDINATION PROCEDURE.......................................................................................86

Revision 1 Page 5 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

10.1 COMPANY DUTIES........................................................................................................183

Revision 1 Page 6 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

12.2.6 CONTRACT CONTROL SCHEDULE...............................................................................................194

Revision 1 Page 7 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

20.1 RESPONSIBILITIES OF COMPANY AND CONTRACTOR......................................................300

Revision 1 Page 8 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144

APPENDIX FM: CELL PHONE REQUIREMENTS.......................................................................................374

DESIGN BASIS DOCUMENTS...............................................................................................................405

SECTION H - DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTS.......................................................................413

DESIGN DEVELOPMENT DOCUMENTS...................................................................................................414

SECTION I – COMPANY PROVIDED ITEMS.....................................................................................415

SECTION J – QUALIFIED SUPPLIERS AND SUBCONTRACTORS........................................................417

Revision 1 Page 9 of 407 March 2022

Tender Number – 00000144